The revision list can be viewed directly by clicking the title page.
The revision list summarizes the locations of revisions and additions.
Details should always be checked by referring to the relevant text.
16
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Hardware Manual
Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer
H8S Family/H8S/2600 Series
Rev.8.00 2010.05
Notice
1.
All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is
subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein, please
confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to
additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website.
2.
Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights
of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document.
No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted hereby under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights
of Renesas Electronics or others.
3.
You should not alter, modify, copy, or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product, whether in whole or in part.
4.
Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of
semiconductor products and application examples. You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits, software,
and information in the design of your equipment. Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by
you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software, or information.
5.
When exporting the products or technology described in this document, you should comply with the applicable export control
laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations. You should not use Renesas
Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by
the military, including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction. Renesas Electronics products and
technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture, use, or sale is prohibited
under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations.
6.
Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document, but Renesas Electronics
does not warrant that such information is error free. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages
incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein.
7.
Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades: "Standard", "High Quality", and
"Specific". The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product's quality grade, as
indicated below. You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular
application. You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as "Specific" without the prior
written consent of Renesas Electronics. Further, you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for
which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way
liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an
application categorized as "Specific" or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written
consent of Renesas Electronics. The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is "Standard" unless otherwise
expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books, etc.
"Standard":
Computers; office equipment; communications equipment; test and measurement equipment; audio and visual
equipment; home electronic appliances; machine tools; personal electronic equipment; and industrial robots.
"High Quality": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.); traffic control systems; anti-disaster systems; anticrime systems; safety equipment; and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support.
"Specific":
Aircraft; aerospace equipment; submersible repeaters; nuclear reactor control systems; medical equipment or
systems for life support (e.g. artificial life support devices or systems), surgical implantations, or healthcare
intervention (e.g. excision, etc.), and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life.
8.
You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics,
especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation
characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or
damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges.
9.
Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, semiconductor products have
specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Further,
Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design. Please be sure to implement safety measures to
guard them against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a
Renesas Electronics product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire
control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures. Because
the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system
manufactured by you.
10.
Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental
compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product. Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances, including without limitation, the EU RoHS
Directive. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with
applicable laws and regulations.
11.
This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written consent of Renesas
Electronics.
12.
Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this
document or Renesas Electronics products, or if you have any other inquiries.
(Note 1) "Renesas Electronics" as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majorityowned subsidiaries.
(Note 2) "Renesas Electronics product(s)" means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics.
Page ii of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products
The following usage notes are applicable to all MPU/MCU products from Renesas. For detailed usage notes
on the products covered by this manual, refer to the relevant sections of the manual. If the descriptions under
General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products and in the body of the manual differ from each
other, the description in the body of the manual takes precedence.
1. Handling of Unused Pins
Handle unused pins in accord with the directions given under Handling of Unused Pins in
the manual.
⎯ The input pins of CMOS products are generally in the high-impedance state. In
operation with an unused pin in the open-circuit state, extra electromagnetic noise is
induced in the vicinity of LSI, an associated shoot-through current flows internally, and
malfunctions may occur due to the false recognition of the pin state as an input signal.
Unused pins should be handled as described under Handling of Unused Pins in the
manual.
2. Processing at Power-on
The state of the product is undefined at the moment when power is supplied.
⎯ The states of internal circuits in the LSI are indeterminate and the states of register
settings and pins are undefined at the moment when power is supplied.
In a finished product where the reset signal is applied to the external reset pin, the
states of pins are not guaranteed from the moment when power is supplied until the
reset process is completed.
In a similar way, the states of pins in a product that is reset by an on-chip power-on
reset function are not guaranteed from the moment when power is supplied until the
power reaches the level at which resetting has been specified.
3. Prohibition of Access to Reserved Addresses
Access to reserved addresses is prohibited.
⎯ The reserved addresses are provided for the possible future expansion of functions. Do
not access these addresses; the correct operation of LSI is not guaranteed if they are
accessed.
4. Clock Signals
After applying a reset, only release the reset line after the operating clock signal has
become stable. When switching the clock signal during program execution, wait until the
target clock signal has stabilized.
⎯ When the clock signal is generated with an external resonator (or from an external
oscillator) during a reset, ensure that the reset line is only released after full stabilization
of the clock signal. Moreover, when switching to a clock signal produced with an
external resonator (or by an external oscillator) while program execution is in progress,
wait until the target clock signal is stable.
5. Differences between Products
Before changing from one product to another, i.e. to one with a different type number,
confirm that the change will not lead to problems.
⎯ The characteristics of MPU/MCU in the same group but having different type numbers
may differ because of the differences in internal memory capacity and layout pattern.
When changing to products of different type numbers, implement a system-evaluation
test for each of the products.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page iii of l
Page iv of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Preface
This LSI has the internal 32-bit H8S/2600 CPU and includes a variety of peripheral functions
necessary for a system configuration. It serves as a high-performance microcomputer.
The on-chip peripheral devices include a 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU), a programmable pulse
generator (PPG), a watchdog timer unit (WDT), a serial communication interface (SCI), an A/D
converter, a motor control PWM timer (PWM), a PC brake controller and I/O ports. It also has an
internal data transfer controller (DTC), which performs high-speed data transfer without using the
CPU, thus enabling the use of the LSI as an embedded microcomputer in various advanced control
systems. Two types of internal ROM are available: flash memory (F-ZTAT™*) and mask ROM.
The LSI can be used flexibly in a wide range of applications from applied equipment with varied
specifications and early production models to full-scale mass-produced products.
Notes: The H8S/2635 and H8S/2634 are not equipped with a PPG, a PC brake controller, a DTC,
or a D/A converter.
* F-ZTAT is a trademark of Renesas Electronics Corp.
Target users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8S/2636, H8S/2638,
H8S/2639, H8S/2630, H8S/2635, and H8S/2634 in the design of application
systems. Members of this audience are expected to understand the fundamentals of
electrical circuits, logical circuits, and microcomputers.
Objective:
This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical
characteristics of the H8S/2636, H8S/2638, H8S/2639, H8S/2630, H8S/2635, and
H8S/2634 to the above audience. Refer to the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series
Software Manual for a detailed description of the instruction set.
Notes on reading this manual:
• In order to understand the overall functions of the chip
Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts
on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions and electrical characteristics.
• In order to understand the details of the CPU's functions
Read the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual.
• In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known
The addresses, bits, and initial values of the registers are summarized in Appendix B, Internal
I/O Registers.
Example: Bit order: The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page v of l
Related manuals:
The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site.
Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require.
http://www.renesas.com/
H8S/2636, H8S/2638, H8S/2639, H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group Manuals:
Document Title
Document No.
H8S/2636, H8S/2638, H8S/2639, H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Hardware Manual
This manual
H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual
REJ09B0139
User’s Manuals for Development Tools:
Document Title
Document No.
H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimized Linkage Editor
User's Manual
REJ10J2039
H8S, H8/300 Series Simulator/Debugger User's Manual
REJ10B0211
High-performance Embedded Workshop User's Manual
REJ10J2037
Application Notes:
Document Title
Document No.
H8S Family Technical Q & A
REJ05B0397
Page vi of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Main Revisions in This Edition
Item
Page
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement 10
Figure 1-3 Pin
Arrangement of
H8S/2638 Group and
H8S/2630 Group
Revision (See Manual for Details)
Figure amended
Notes: 1. Connect a 0.1 µF capacitor between VCL and VSS (close to the pins).
2. Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in the U-mask
and W-mask versions.
These functions cannot be used with the other versions.
See section 22A.7, Subclock Oscillator, for the method of fixing pins OSC1 and OSC2.
3. These pins are used for the I2C bus interface.
The I2C bus interface is available as an option. The product equipped with the I2C bus interface is
the W-mask version.
4. The FWE pin is for compatibility with the flash memory version.
The FWE pin is a NC pin in the mask ROM versions.
In the mask ROM version, the FWE pin must be left open or be connected to Vss.
(FP-128B: Top View)
(W-Mask Version)
(U-Mask Version)
64F2638F20
H8S/2638
INDEX
64F2638F20
H8S/2638
W
64F2638F20
H8S/2638
U
INDEX
INDEX
(W-Mask Version)
(U-Mask Version)
64F2630F20
H8S/2630
INDEX
1.4 Differences
between H8S/2636,
H8S/2638, H8S/2639,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635,
and H8S/2634
Table 1-4 Comparison
of Product
Specifications
64F2630F20
H8S/2630
W
64F2630F20
H8S/2630
U
INDEX
INDEX
23 to 24 Table amended
Part No.
Model
ROM
24
RAM
Note amended
Note: * For details of the H8S/2639, H8S/2635, and
H8S/2634 clock pulse generator, see section 22B,
Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2639 Group, H8S/2635
Group).
2.4.3 Control
Registers
38
Description amended
Some instructions leave some or all of the flag bits unchanged.
For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, refer to
appendix A.1, Instruction List.
(3) Condition-Code
Register (CCR)
Bit 0—Carry Flag (C):
2.5.2 Memory Data
Formats
41
Figure replaced
Figure 2-11 Memory
Data Formats
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page vii of l
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
2.6.3 Table of
Instructions Classified
by Function
50
Table amended
Table 2-3 Instructions
Classified by Function
2.8.1 Overview
63
Type
Instruction
Size*1
Function
Bitmanipulation
instructions
BOR
B
C ∨ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the
carry flag.
BIOR
B
C ∨ [ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) ] → C
ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a
general register or memory operand and stores the
result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Figure amended
Figure 2-14
Processing States
Reset state
The CPU and all on-chip supporting modules have been
initialized and are stopped.
Exception-handling
state
A transient state in which the CPU changes the normal
processing flow in response to a reset, trace, interrupt,
or trap instruction.
2.8.3 ExceptionHandling State
65
3.4 Pin Functions in
Each Operating Mode
86
The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs
when the CPU alters the normal processing flow due to a reset,
trace, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a start
address (vector) from the exception vector table and branches
to that address.
Table amended
Port
Table 3-3 Pin
Functions in Each
Mode
4.1.1 Exception
Handling Types and
Priority
Description amended
Port F
93
4.2.2 Reset Sequence 97
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
PF7
P/C*
P/C*
P/C*
P*/C
PF6 to PF4
C
C
C
P
PF3
P/C*
P*/C
P*/C
Description amended
As table 4-1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a
reset, trace, direct transition*, trap instruction, or interrupt.
Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4-1.
Figure amended
Figure 4-2 Reset
Sequence (Modes 6
and 7)
Vector
fetch
Prefetch of first program
instruction
φ
Page viii of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
4.7 Notes on Use of
the Stack
103
Figure amended
Figure 4-6 Operation
when SP Value Is Odd
SP
CCR
R1L
SP
PC
PC
SP
TRAPA instruction executed
5.4.3 Interrupt Control 127
Mode 2
H'FFFEFA
H'FFFEFB
H'FFFEFC
H'FFFEFD
H'FFFEFE
H'FFFEFF
MOV.B R1L, @−ER7
Figure amended
Figure 5-6 Flowchart
of Procedure Up to
Interrupt Acceptance in
Interrupt Control Mode
2
Save PC, CCR, and EXR
Hold pending
Clear T bit to 0
Update mask level
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
9.8.3 Pin Functions for 279
Each Mode
Figure amended
A7 (output)
Figure 9-12 Port C Pin
Functions (Modes 4
and 5)
A6 (output)
A5 (output)
Port C
A4 (output)
A3 (output)
A2 (output)
A1 (output)
A0 (output)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page ix of l
Item
Page
9.8.3 Pin Functions for 279
Each Mode
Revision (See Manual for Details)
Figure amended
Figure 9-13 Port C Pin
Functions (Mode 6)
Port C
Figure 9-14 Port C Pin 280
Functions (Mode 7)
PCDDR = 1
PCDDR = 0
A7 (output)
PC7 (input)
A6 (output)
PC6 (input)
A5 (output)
PC5 (input)
A4 (output)
PC4 (input)
A3 (output)
PC3 (input)
A2 (output)
PC2 (input)
A1 (output)
PC1 (input)
A0 (output)
PC0 (input)
Figure amended
PC7 (I/O)
PC6 (I/O)
PC5 (I/O)
Port C
PC4 (I/O)
PC3 (I/O)
PC2 (I/O)
PC1 (I/O)
PC0 (I/O)
10.6.2 Interrupt Signal 387
Timing
Note amended
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
Status Flag Clearing
Timing:
10.7 Usage Notes
397
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
Interrupts and Module
Stop Mode:
13.2.6 Serial Control
Register (SCR)
Note amended
458
Description amended
For details of clock source selection, see table 13.9 .
Bits 1 and 0
Page x of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
13.5 Usage Notes
507
Note amended
Restrictions on Use of
DTC*
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
Operation in Case of
Mode Transition
Note amended
•
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
Transmission
14.1.1 Features
513
Note amended
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
14.2.2 Serial Status
Register (SSR)
520
Table amended
Bit 2
TEND
Description
0
Transmission is in progress
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and write data to TDR
Transmission has ended
(Initial value)
[Setting conditions]
•
Upon reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode
•
When the TE bit in SCR is 0 and the ERS bit is also 0
•
When TDRE = 1 and ERS = 0 (normal transmission) 2.5 etu after transmission of a
1-byte serial character when GM = 0 and BLK = 0
•
When TDRE = 1 and ERS = 0 (normal transmission) 1.5 etu after transmission of a
1-byte serial character when GM = 0 and BLK = 1
•
When TDRE = 1 and ERS = 0 (normal transmission) 1.0 etu after transmission of a
1-byte serial character when GM = 1 and BLK = 0
•
When TDRE = 1 and ERS = 0 (normal transmission) 1.0 etu after transmission of a
1-byte serial character when GM = 1 and BLK = 1
14.3.6 Data Transfer
Operations
533
Notes amended
Notes: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
Serial Data
Transmission (Except
Block Transfer Mode):
Serial Data Reception 537
(Except Block Transfer
Mode):
Data Transfer
Operation by DTC*:
539
14.4 Usage Notes
543
Retransfer Operations
(Except Block Transfer
Mode):
Notes amended
Notes: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
Notes amended
Notes: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
Note amended
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
• Retransfer operation
when SCI is in receive
mode
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xi of l
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
14.4 Usage Notes
544
Note amended
Retransfer Operations
(Except Block Transfer
Mode):
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
• Retransfer operation
when SCI is transmit
mode
15.2.9 Module Stop
Control Register B
(MSTPCRB)
575
Description amended
MSTPCRB is initialized to H'FF by a power-on reset and in
hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software
standby mode.
15.3.6 Slave Transmit 594
Operation
Figure 15-18 Example
of Slave Transmit Mode
Operation Timing
Figure amended
ICDRS
User processing
Data 1
[3] IRIC
clearance
[3] ICDR
write
Data 2
[3] ICDR
write
[5] IRIC
clearance
[5] ICDR
write
(MLS = 0)
16.1.3 Pin
Configuration
614
Note amended
Note: * The HCAN1 is not supported by the H8S/2635 Group.
Table 16-1 HCAN Pins
16.1.4 Register
Configuration
618
Notes: 2. The HCAN1 is not supported by the H8S/2635
Group.
Table 16-2 HCAN
Registers
16.2.4 Mailbox
Configuration Register
(MBCR)
Notes amended
624
Table amended
Bit y: MBCRx
Description
0
Corresponding mailbox is set for transmission
1
Corresponding mailbox is set for reception
(Initial value)
(x = 15 to 1, y = 15 to 9 and 7 to 0)
16.2.5 Transmit Wait
Register (TXPR)
625
Table amended
Bit y: TXPRx
Description
0
Transmit message idle state in corresponding mailbox
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Page xii of l
Message transmission completion and cancellation completion
Transmit message transmit wait in corresponding mailbox (CAN bus
arbitration)
(x = 15 to 1, y = 15 to 9 and 7 to 0)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
16.2.6 Transmit Wait
Cancel Register
(TXCR)
626
Table amended
Bit y: TXCRx
Description
0
Transmit message cancellation idle state in corresponding mailbox
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Completion of TXPR clearing (when transmit message is canceled
normally)
TXPR cleared for corresponding mailbox (transmit message cancellation)
(x = 15 to 1, y = 15 to 9 and 7 to 0)
16.2.7 Transmit
Acknowledge Register
(TXACK)
627
Table amended
Bit y: TXACKx
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
16.2.8 Abort
Acknowledge Register
(ABACK)
628
Bit y: ABACKx
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
641
(Initial value)
Table amended
1
16.2.16 Unread
Message Status
Register (UMSR)
Writing 1
Completion of message transmission for corresponding mailbox
(x = 15 to 1, y = 15 to 9 and 7 to 0)
Writing 1
(Initial value)
Completion of transmit message cancellation for corresponding mailbox
(x = 15 to 1, y = 15 to 9 and 7 to 0)
Table amended
Bit x: UMSRx
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Writing 1
(Initial value)
Unread receive message is overwritten by a new message
[Setting condition]
•
When a new message is received before RXPR is cleared
(x = 15 to 0)
16.2.17 Local
Acceptance Filter
Masks (LAFML,
LAFMH)
643
Table amended
Bit x: LAFMHx
Description
0
Stored in MC0 and MD0 (receive-only mailbox) depending on bit match
between MC0 message identifier and receive message identifier
(Initial value)
Stored in MC0 and MD0 (receive-only mailbox) regardless of bit match
between MC0 message identifier and receive message identifier
LAFMH Bits 7 to 0 and
15 to 13
1
LAFMH Bits 9 and 8,
LAFML Bits 15 to 0
Table amended
(x = 15 to 5)
Bit y: LAFMHx
LAFMLy
Description
0
Stored in MC0 (receive-only mailbox) depending on bit match between MC0
message identifier and receive message identifier
(Initial value)
1
Stored in MC0 (receive-only mailbox) regardless of bit match between MC0
message identifier and receive message identifier
(x = 1 and 0, y = 15 to 0)
16.2.20 Module Stop
Control Register C
(MSTPCRC)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
650
Note amended
Note: * The MSTPC2 is not available and is reserved in the
H8S/2635 Group.
Page xiii of l
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
16.2.20 Module Stop
Control Register C
(MSTPCRC)
650
Note amended
Note: * The MSTPC2 is not available and is reserved in the
H8S/2635 Group.
Bit 2—Module Stop
(MSTPC2)*:
16.3.2 Initialization
after Hardware Reset
655
Table 16-3 BCR
Register Value Setting
Ranges
Table 16-4 Setting
Range for TSEG1 and
TSEG2 in BCR
657
Table amended
Name
Abbreviation
Min. Value
Max. Value
Time segment 1
TSEG1
B'0011
B'1111
Time segment 2
TSEG2
B'001
B'111
Baud rate prescaler
BRP
B'000000
B'111111
Sample point
SAM
B'0
B'1
Synchronization jump width
SJW
B'00
B'11
Note amended
Notes:
The time quanta value for TSEG1 and TSEG2 is the
TSEG value + 1.
* Only a value other than BRP[13:8] = B'000000 can
be set.
16.3.8 DTC Interface* 675
Note amended
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
17.6 Usage Notes
700
Figure amended
Figure 17-7 Example
of Analog Input
Protection Circuit
AVCC
Vref
Rin* 2
*1
100Ω
AN0 to AN11
*1
0.1 μF
18.3 Operation
711
AVSS
Figure amended
Figure 18-2 D/A
Conversion (Example)
DADR0
write cycle
DACR
write cycle
DADR0
write cycle
DACR
write cycle
φ
Address
DADR0
Page xiv of l
Conversion data (1)
Conversion data (2)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
21A.4.3 Mode
Transitions
749
Notes amended
Notes: 2. This LSI transits to programmer mode by using the
dedicated PROM programmer.
Figure 21A-3 Flash
Memory State
Transitions
21A.5 Pin
Configuration
755
Table 21A-5 Pin
Configuration
21A.9.2 ProgramVerify Mode
777
Table amended
Pin Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Reset
RES
Input
Reset
Flash write enable
FWE
Input
Flash program/erase protection by hardware
Mode 2
MD2
Input
Sets MCU operating mode
Mode 1
MD1
Input
Sets MCU operating mode
Mode 0
MD0
Input
Sets MCU operating mode
Port F0
PF0
Input
Sets MCU operating mode in programmer
mode
Port 16
P16
Input
Sets MCU operating mode in programmer
mode
Port 14
P14
Input
Sets MCU operating mode in programmer
mode
Transmit data
TxD1
Output
Serial transmit data output
Receive data
RxD1
Input
Serial receive data input
Figure amended
m=0?
Figure 21A-12
Program/ProgramVerify Flowchart
Wait (tcswe) μs
End of programming
21A.9.3 Erase Mode
No
n ≥ (N)?
Yes
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
778
*7
No
Yes
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
*7
Wait (tcswe) μs
*7
Programming failure
Description amended
The wait times after bits are set or cleared in the flash memory
control register 1 (FLMCR1) and the maximum number of
erase operations (N) are shown in section 24.1.7, Flash
Memory Characteristics.
…
Next, the watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing
due to program runaway, etc. Set a value of about 19.8 ms as
the WDT overflow period.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xv of l
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
21A.9.4 Erase-Verify
Mode
780
Figure amended
Start
Figure 21A-13
Erase/Erase-Verify
Flowchart
*1
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tsswe) μs
*5
n=1
Set EBR1 or EBR2
*3 *4
Enable WDT
Set ESU bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tsesu) μs
*5
Start of erase
Set E bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tse) ms
*5
Clear E bit in FLMCR1
Erase halted
Wait (tce) μs
*5
Clear ESU bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tcesu) μs
*5
Disable WDT
Set EV bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tsev) μs
n←n+1
*5
Set block start address as verify address
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Wait (tsevr) μs
Read verify data
Increment
address
Verify data = all 1s?
*5
*2
NG
OK
NG
Last address of block?
OK
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1
*5
Wait (tcev) μs
NG
21A.13
Mode
Programmer 787
21B.4.3 Mode
Transitions
801
Figure 21B-3 Flash
Memory State
Transitions
21B.7.6 Flash Memory 816
Power Control Register
(FLPWCR)
Page xvi of l
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1
*5
Wait (tcev) μs
*4
*5
NG
All erase block erased?
n ≥ (N)?
OK
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
OK
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
*5
Wait (tcswe) μs
Wait (tcswe) μs
End of erasing
Erase failure
*5
Title amended and description replaced
Notes amended
Notes: 2. This LSI transits to programmer mode by using the
dedicated PROM programmer.
Note amended
Note: * Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode,
and watch mode) are available in the U-mask
and W-mask versions only. These functions cannot be
used with the other versions.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Item
Page
21B.9.1 Program Mode 826
Revision (See Manual for Details)
Description amended
The wait times after bits are set or cleared in the flash memory
control register 1 (FLMCR1) and the maximum number of
programming operations (N) are shown in section 24.2.7,
24.3.7, and 24.4.7, Flash Memory Characteristics.
21B.9.2 ProgramVerify Mode
830
Figure amended
m=0?
Figure 21B-12
Program/ProgramVerify Flowchart
Wait (tcswe) μs
End of programming
21B.9.3 Erase Mode
No
n ≥ (N)?
Yes
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
831
*7
No
Yes
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
*7
Wait (tcswe) μs
*7
Programming failure
Description amended
The wait times after bits are set or cleared in the flash memory
control register 1 (FLMCR1) and the maximum number of
erase operations (N) are shown in section 24.2.7 and 24.3.7,
Flash Memory Characteristics.
…
Next, the watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing
due to program runaway, etc. Set a value of about 19.8 ms as
the WDT overflow period.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xvii of l
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
21B.9.4 Erase-Verify
Mode
832
Figure amended
Start
Figure 21B-13
Erase/Erase-Verify
Flowchart
*1
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tsswe) μs
*5
n=1
Set EBR1 or EBR2
*3 *4
Enable WDT
Set ESU bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tsesu) μs
*5
Start of erase
Set E bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tse) ms
*5
Clear E bit in FLMCR1
Erase halted
Wait (tce) μs
*5
Clear ESU bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tcesu) μs
*5
Disable WDT
Set EV bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tsev) μs
n←n+1
*5
Set block start address as verify address
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Wait (tsevr) μs
Read verify data
Increment
address
Verify data = all 1s?
*5
*2
NG
OK
NG
Last address of block?
OK
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1
*5
Wait (tcev) μs
NG
21B.13
Mode
Programmer 840
21B.14 Flash Memory 841
and Power-Down
States
Table 21B-14 Flash
Memory Operating
States
Page xviii of l
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1
*5
Wait (tcev) μs
*4
*5
NG
All erase block erased?
n ≥ (N)?
OK
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
OK
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
*5
Wait (tcswe) μs
Wait (tcswe) μs
End of erasing
Erase failure
*5
Title amended and description replaced
Notes amended
Note: * Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode,
and watch mode) are available in the U-mask
and W-mask versions only. These functions cannot be
used with other versions.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
21C.4.3 Mode
Transitions
855
Notes amended
Notes: 2. This LSI transits to programmer mode by using the
dedicated PROM programmer.
Figure 21C-3 Flash
Memory State
Transitions
21C.9.1 Program
Mode
880
21C.9.2 ProgramVerify Mode
884
Description amended
The wait times after bits are set or cleared in the flash memory
control register 1 (FLMCR1) and the maximum number of
programming operations (N) are shown in section 24.2.7,
24.3.7, and 24.4.7, Flash Memory Characteristics.
Figure amended
m=0?
Figure 21C-12
Program/ProgramVerify Flowchart
Wait (tcswe) μs
End of programming
21C.9.3 Erase Mode
No
n ≥ (N)?
Yes
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
885
*7
No
Yes
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
*7
Wait (tcswe) μs
*7
Programming failure
Description amended
The wait times after bits are set or cleared in the flash memory
control register 1 (FLMCR1) and the maximum number of
erase operations (N) are shown in section 24.2.7 and 24.3.7,
Flash Memory Characteristics.
…
Next, the watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing
due to program runaway, etc. Set a value of about 19.8 ms as
the WDT overflow period.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xix of l
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
21C.9.4 Erase-Verify
Mode
886
Figure amended
Start
Figure 21C-13
Erase/Erase-Verify
Flowchart
*1
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tsswe) μs
*5
n=1
Set EBR1 or EBR2
*3 *4
Enable WDT
Set ESU bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tsesu) μs
*5
Start of erase
Set E bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tse) ms
*5
Clear E bit in FLMCR1
Erase halted
Wait (tce) μs
*5
Clear ESU bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tcesu) μs
*5
Disable WDT
Set EV bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tsev) μs
n←n+1
*5
Set block start address as verify address
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Wait (tsevr) μs
Read verify data
Increment
address
Verify data = all 1s?
*5
*2
NG
OK
NG
Last address of block?
OK
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1
*5
Wait (tcev) μs
NG
21C.13
Mode
Programmer 894
23A.1 Overview
925
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1
*5
Wait (tcev) μs
*4
*5
NG
All erase block erased?
n ≥ (N)?
OK
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
OK
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
*5
Wait (tcswe) μs
Wait (tcswe) μs
End of erasing
Erase failure
*5
Title amended and description replaced
Notes amended
Notes: 1. Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep
mode, and watch mode) are available in the U-mask
and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group.
These functions cannot be used with the other
versions.
Page xx of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
Section 23B PowerDown Modes
947
Note amended
Note:
[HD64F2636UF,
HD6432636UF,
The DTC, PBC, PPB, and D/A converter are not
implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
HD64F2638UF,
HD6432638UF,
HD64F2638WF,
HD6432638WF,
HD64F2639UF,
HD6432639UF,
HD64F2639WF,
HD6432639WF,
HD64F2630UF,
HD6432630UF,
HD64F2630WF,
HD6432630WF,
HD6432635F,
HD64F2635F,
HD6432634F]
23B.1 Overview
950
Table 23B-2 LSI
Internal States in Each
Mode (H8S/2639
Group, H8S/2635
Group)
23B.6.5 Usage Notes
Notes amended
Notes: 3. The DTC, PBC, PPG, DA0, and DA1 are not
implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
970
Description amended
Write Data Buffer Function: The write data buffer function and
software standby mode cannot be used at the same time.
When the write data buffer function is used, the WDBE bit in
BCRL should be cleared to 0 to cancel the write data buffer
function before entering software standby mode. Also check
that external writes have finished, by reading external
addresses, etc., before executing a SLEEP instruction to enter
software standby mode. See section 7.7, Write Data Buffer
Function, for details of the write data buffer function.
24.1.3 DC
Characteristics
Table 24-2 DC
Characteristics
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
981
Table amended
Item
Schmitt
trigger input
voltage
Symbol
IRQ0 to IRQ5 VT–
VT+
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
1.0
—
—
V
—
—
VCC × 0.7
—
—
VT+ – VT– 0.4
Test Conditions
Page xxi of l
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
24.1.3 DC
Characteristics
982
Table amended
Item
Table 24-2 DC
Characteristics
24.1.4 AC
Characteristics
Input leakage
current
985
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Test Conditions
| Iin |
—
—
1.0
μA
STBY, NMI,
MD2 to MD0
—
—
1.0
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V
HRxD0,
HRxD1, FWE
—
—
1.0
Ports 4, 9
—
—
1.0
RES
Vin = 0.5 V to
AVCC – 0.5 V
Figure amended
5V
Figure 24-2 Output
Load Circuit
RL
LSI output pin
C
RH
C = 50 pF: Ports 10 to 13, A to F
(In case of expansion bus control signal output pin setting)
C = 30 pF: All ports except ports 10 to 13, A to F
RL = 2.4 kΩ
RH = 12 kΩ
Input/output timing measurement levels
• Low level: 0.8 V
• High level: 2.0 V
24.2.3 DC
Characteristics
996
Table amended
Item
Table 24-12 DC
Characteristics
Schmitt
trigger input
voltage
997
Symbol
IRQ0 to IRQ5 VT–
VT+
Typ.
Max.
Unit
1.0
—
—
V
—
—
VCC × 0.7
—
—
VT+ – VT– 0.4
Test Conditions
Table amended
Item
Input leakage
current
Page xxii of l
Min.
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Test Conditions
| Iin |
—
—
1.0
μA
STBY, NMI,
MD2 to MD0
—
—
1.0
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V
HRxD0,
HRxD1, FWE
—
—
1.0
Ports 4, 9
—
—
1.0
RES
Vin = 0.5 V to
AVCC – 0.5 V
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
24.2.4 AC
Characteristics
1002
Figure amended
5V
Figure 24-4 Output
Load Circuit
RL
LSI output pin
C
RH
C = 50 pF: Ports 10 to 13, A to F
(In case of expansion bus control signal output pin setting)
C = 30 pF: All ports except ports 10 to 13, A to F
RL = 2.4 kΩ
RH = 12 kΩ
Input/output timing measurement levels
• Low level: 0.8 V
• High level: 2.0 V
24.3.3 DC
Characteristics
1014
Table amended
Item
Table 24-24 DC
Characteristics
Schmitt
trigger input
voltage
1015
Symbol
IRQ0 to IRQ5 VT–
VT+
Max.
Unit
—
—
V
—
—
VCC × 0.7
—
—
Test Conditions
Table amended
Input leakage
current
May 28, 2010
Typ.
1.0
VT+ – VT– 0.4
Item
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
Min.
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Test Conditions
| Iin |
—
—
1.0
μA
STBY, NMI,
MD2 to MD0
—
—
1.0
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V
HRxD0,
HRxD1*7,
FWE
—
—
1.0
Ports 4, 9
—
—
1.0
RES
Vin = 0.5 V to
AVCC – 0.5 V
Page xxiii of l
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
24.3.4 AC
Characteristics
1020
Figure amended
5V
Figure 24-6 Output
Load Circuit
RL
LSI output pin
C
RH
C = 50 pF: Ports 10 to 13, A to F
(In case of expansion bus control signal output pin setting)
C = 30 pF: All ports except ports 10 to 13, A to F
RL = 2.4 kΩ
RH = 12 kΩ
Input/output timing measurement levels
• Low level: 0.8 V
• High level: 2.0 V
24.4.3 DC
Characteristics
1032
Table amended
Item
Table 24-36 DC
Characteristics
Schmitt
trigger input
voltage
1033
Symbol
IRQ0 to IRQ5 VT–
VT+
Typ.
Max.
Unit
1.0
—
—
V
—
—
VCC × 0.7
—
—
VT+ – VT– 0.4
Test Conditions
Table amended
Item
Input leakage
current
Page xxiv of l
Min.
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Test Conditions
| Iin |
—
—
1.0
μA
STBY, NMI,
MD2 to MD0
—
—
1.0
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V
HRxD0,
HRxD1, FWE
—
—
1.0
Ports 4, 9
—
—
1.0
RES
Vin = 0.5 V to
AVCC – 0.5 V
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
24.4.4 AC
Characteristics
1038
Figure amended
5V
Figure 24-8 Output
Load Circuit
RL
LSI output pin
C
RH
C = 50 pF: Ports 10 to 13, A to F
(In case of expansion bus control signal output pin setting)
C = 30 pF: All ports except ports 10 to 13, A to F
RL = 2.4 kΩ
RH = 12 kΩ
Input/output timing measurement levels
• Low level: 0.8 V
• High level: 2.0 V
24.5.4 On-Chip
Supporting Module
Timing
1055
Figure 24-27 HCAN
Input/Output Timing
1057
Note amended
Note: * The PPG output is not implemented in the H8S/2635
Group.
Figure amended
CK
tHTXD
HTxD0,
HTxD1
(transmit data)
tHRXS tHRXH
HRxD0,
HRxD1
(receive data)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xxv of l
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
A.1 Instruction List
1065
Table amended
Table A-1 Instruction
Set
(2) Arithmetic
Instructions
No. of States*1
Advanced
Mnemonic
MULXU
MULXS
(6) Branch Instructions 1078
MULXU.B Rs,Rd
12
MULXU.W Rs,ERd
20
MULXS.B Rs,Rd
13
MULXS.W Rs,ERd
21
Table amended
Bcc
(7) System Control
Instructions
1080
Mnemonic
Operand Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@−ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
⎯
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
BVS d:8
⎯
2
BVS d:16
⎯
4
BPL d:8
⎯
2
BPL d:16
⎯
4
Operation
Branching
Condition
if condition is true then V=1
PC←PC+d
N=0
else next;
Table amended
No. of States*1
Advanced
Mnemonic
A.4 Number of States 1109
Required for Instruction
Execution
Table A-5 Number of
Cycles in Instruction
Execution
Page xxvi of l
TRAPA
TRAPA #xx:2
8 [9]
RTE
RTE
5 [9]
Table amended
Branch
Instruction Address
Read
Fetch
I
JMP
JMP @ERn
2
JMP @aa:24
2
JMP @@aa:8
2
J
Byte
Data
Stack
Operation Access
K
L
Word
Data
Access
Internal
Operation
M
N
1
2
1
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Item
Page
A.4 Number of States 1110
Required for Instruction
Execution
Table A-5 Number of
Cycles in Instruction
Execution
Revision (See Manual for Details)
Table amended
Branch
Instruction Address
Read
Fetch
J
I
MOV
1111
Internal
Operation
M
N
4
1
MOV.B Rs,@-ERd
1
1
1
MOV.B Rs,@aa:8
1
1
MOV.B Rs,@aa:16
2
1
MOV.B Rs,@aa:32
3
1
MOV.W #xx:16,Rd
2
MOV.W Rs,Rd
1
1
MOV.W @ERs,Rd
1
1
MOV.W @(d:16,ERs),Rd
2
1
MOV.W @(d:32,ERs),Rd
4
1
MOV.W @ERs+,Rd
1
1
MOV.W @aa:16,Rd
2
1
MOV.W @aa:32,Rd
3
1
MOV.W Rs,@ERd
1
1
1
Word
Data
Access
Internal
Operation
M
N
1
Table amended
J
I
MOV
Byte
Data
Stack
Operation Access
L
K
MOV.W Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
2
1
MOV.W Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
4
1
MOV.W Rs,@-ERd
1
1
MOV.W Rs,@aa:16
2
1
MOV.W Rs,@aa:32
3
Appendix B Internal
I/O Register
1136 to
1421
Note amended
B.2 Functions
1163
Figure amended
GSR1—General Status
Register
L
K
Word
Data
Access
MOV.B Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
Branch
Instruction Address
Read
Fetch
GSR0—General Status
Register
Byte
Data
Stack
Operation Access
H8S/2635 and H8S/2634 → H8S/2635 Group
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
GSR3
GSR2
GSR1
GSR0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bus Off Flag
0 [Reset condition]
• Recovery from bus off state
1 When TEC ≥ 256 (bus off state)
Transmit/Receive Warning Flag
0 [Reset condition]
• When TEC < 96 and REC < 96 or TEC ≥ 256
1 When TEC ≥ 96 or REC ≥ 96
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xxvii of l
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
B.2 Functions
1317
Figure amended
PFCR—Pin Function
Control Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
AE3
AE2
AE1
AE0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1/0
1/0
1
1/0
Read/Write
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address Output Enable 3 to 0
0
0
0
0
A8 to A23 address output disabled (Initial value*)
1
A8 address output enabled; A9 to A23 address output disabled
DACR01— D/A Control 1414
Register 01
Note amended
Appendix C I/O Port
Block Diagrams
1422 to
1451
Note amended
C.1 Port 1 Block
Diagrams
1422
1454
Table D-1 I/O Port
States in Each
Processing State
Appendix F Product
Code Lineup
H8S/2635 and H8S/2634 → H8S/2635 Group
Notes amended
Notes: 1. Priority order: Address output > output compare
output/PWM output > pulse output > DR output
Figure C-1 (a) Port 1
Block Diagram (Pins
P10 and P11)
D.1 Port States in
Each Mode
Note: * This register is not available in the H8S/2635 Group.
Table amended
MCU
Port Name Operating
Pin Name Mode
Reset
Hardware
Standby
Mode
PF3/LWR
4
H
T
5 to 6
T
1456 to
1457
Table amended
1458
Description added
Product Type
Part No.
Software Standby Mode
[OPE = 0]
T
[OPE = 1]
H
Mark Code
Program Execution State
Sleep Mode
LWR
[16 Bit bus mode]
LWR
[Otherwise]
I/O port
Functions
Packages
Table F-1 H8S/2636,
H8S/2638, H8S/2639,
and H8S/2630 Product
Code Lineup
Appendix G Package
Dimensions
The package dimension that is shown in the Renesas
Semiconductor Package Data Book has Priority.
All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page xxviii of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Contents
Section 1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Overview........................................................................................................................... 1
Internal Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 6
Pin Description.................................................................................................................. 9
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement .................................................................................................. 9
1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ............................................................... 13
1.3.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 18
Differences between H8S/2636, H8S/2638, H8S/2639, H8S/2630, H8S/2635, and
H8S/2634 .......................................................................................................................... 23
Section 2 CPU ...................................................................................................................... 25
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Overview........................................................................................................................... 25
2.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 25
2.1.2 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU .................................. 26
2.1.3 Differences from H8/300 CPU ............................................................................ 27
2.1.4 Differences from H8/300H CPU.......................................................................... 28
CPU Operating Modes ...................................................................................................... 28
Address Space................................................................................................................... 33
Register Configuration...................................................................................................... 34
2.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 34
2.4.2 General Registers ................................................................................................. 35
2.4.3 Control Registers ................................................................................................. 36
2.4.4 Initial Register Values.......................................................................................... 38
Data Formats..................................................................................................................... 39
2.5.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................ 39
2.5.2 Memory Data Formats ......................................................................................... 41
Instruction Set ................................................................................................................... 42
2.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 42
2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes..................................................................... 43
2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function ....................................................... 45
2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats .................................................................................... 54
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation ..................................................... 56
2.7.1 Addressing Mode................................................................................................. 56
2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation ............................................................................. 59
Processing States............................................................................................................... 63
2.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 63
2.8.2 Reset State ........................................................................................................... 64
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xxix of l
2.8.3 Exception-Handling State .................................................................................... 65
2.8.4 Program Execution State ..................................................................................... 68
2.8.5 Bus-Released State .............................................................................................. 68
2.8.6 Power-Down State ............................................................................................... 68
2.9 Basic Timing..................................................................................................................... 69
2.9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 69
2.9.2 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM) ......................................................................... 69
2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing ...................................................... 71
2.9.4 On-Chip HCAN Module Access Timing............................................................. 73
2.9.5 Port H and J Register Access Timing .................................................................. 75
2.9.6 External Address Space Access Timing .............................................................. 76
2.10 Usage Note........................................................................................................................ 77
2.10.1 TAS Instruction ................................................................................................... 77
2.10.2 STM/LDM Instructions ....................................................................................... 77
2.10.3 Caution to Observe when Using Bit Manipulation Instructions .......................... 77
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes .................................................................................. 79
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Overview........................................................................................................................... 79
3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection ................................................................................... 79
3.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 80
Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 80
3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ......................................................................... 80
3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 81
3.2.3 Pin Function Control Register (PFCR) ................................................................ 83
Operating Mode Descriptions ........................................................................................... 85
3.3.1 Mode 4................................................................................................................. 85
3.3.2 Mode 5................................................................................................................. 85
3.3.3 Mode 6................................................................................................................. 85
3.3.4 Mode 7................................................................................................................. 86
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ............................................................................ 86
Address Map in Each Operating Mode............................................................................. 87
Section 4 Exception Handling ......................................................................................... 93
4.1
4.2
Overview........................................................................................................................... 93
4.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority............................................................... 93
4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation ............................................................................ 94
4.1.3 Exception Vector Table ....................................................................................... 94
Reset ................................................................................................................................. 96
4.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 96
4.2.2 Reset Sequence .................................................................................................... 96
Page xxx of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.2.3 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................ 98
4.2.4 State of On-Chip Supporting Modules after Reset Release ................................. 99
Traces................................................................................................................................ 99
Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 100
Trap Instruction................................................................................................................. 101
Stack Status after Exception Handling.............................................................................. 102
Notes on Use of the Stack ................................................................................................. 103
Section 5 Interrupt Controller .......................................................................................... 105
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Overview........................................................................................................................... 105
5.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 105
5.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 106
5.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 107
5.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 107
Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 108
5.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 108
5.2.2 Interrupt Priority Registers A to H, J to M (IPRA to IPRH, IPRJ to IPRM) ....... 109
5.2.3 IRQ Enable Register (IER) .................................................................................. 110
5.2.4 IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)..................................... 111
5.2.5 IRQ Status Register (ISR).................................................................................... 112
Interrupt Sources ............................................................................................................... 114
5.3.1 External Interrupts ............................................................................................... 114
5.3.2 Internal Interrupts ................................................................................................ 116
5.3.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table......................................................... 116
Interrupt Operation............................................................................................................ 120
5.4.1 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation ................................................ 120
5.4.2 Interrupt Control Mode 0 ..................................................................................... 124
5.4.3 Interrupt Control Mode 2 ..................................................................................... 126
5.4.4 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence .............................................................. 128
5.4.5 Interrupt Response Times .................................................................................... 129
Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 130
5.5.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling..................................... 130
5.5.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts ...................................................................... 131
5.5.3 Times when Interrupts Are Disabled ................................................................... 131
5.5.4 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction.......................................... 132
5.5.5 IRQ Interrupts ...................................................................................................... 132
5.5.6 Notes on Use of NMI Interrupt ............................................................................ 132
DTC Activation by Interrupt............................................................................................. 133
5.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 133
5.6.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 133
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xxxi of l
5.6.3
Operation ............................................................................................................. 134
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) ........................................................................... 137
6.1
6.2
6.3
Overview........................................................................................................................... 137
6.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 137
6.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 138
6.1.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 139
Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 139
6.2.1 Break Address Register A (BARA) ..................................................................... 139
6.2.2 Break Address Register B (BARB) ..................................................................... 140
6.2.3 Break Control Register A (BCRA) ...................................................................... 140
6.2.4 Break Control Register B (BCRB) ...................................................................... 142
6.2.5 Module Stop Control Register C (MSTPCRC).................................................... 142
Operation .......................................................................................................................... 143
6.3.1 PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch ....................................................... 143
6.3.2 PC Break Interrupt Due to Data Access............................................................... 144
6.3.3 Notes on PC Break Interrupt Handling ................................................................ 144
6.3.4 Operation in Transitions to Power-Down Modes ................................................ 145
6.3.5 PC Break Operation in Continuous Data Transfer............................................... 146
6.3.6 When Instruction Execution Is Delayed by One State......................................... 147
6.3.7 Additional Notes .................................................................................................. 148
Section 7 Bus Controller ................................................................................................... 149
7.1
7.2
7.3
Overview........................................................................................................................... 149
7.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 149
7.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 150
7.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 151
7.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 151
Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 152
7.2.1 Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR)............................................................... 152
7.2.2 Access State Control Register (ASTCR) ............................................................. 153
7.2.3 Wait Control Registers H and L (WCRH, WCRL).............................................. 154
7.2.4 Bus Control Register H (BCRH) ......................................................................... 158
7.2.5 Bus Control Register L (BCRL) .......................................................................... 160
7.2.6 Pin Function Control Register (PFCR) ................................................................ 161
Overview of Bus Control .................................................................................................. 163
7.3.1 Area Partitioning.................................................................................................. 163
7.3.2 Bus Specifications ............................................................................................... 164
7.3.3 Memory Interfaces............................................................................................... 165
7.3.4 Interface Specifications for Each Area ................................................................ 166
Page xxxii of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
Basic Bus Interface ........................................................................................................... 167
7.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 167
7.4.2 Data Size and Data Alignment............................................................................. 167
7.4.3 Valid Strobes........................................................................................................ 169
7.4.4 Basic Timing........................................................................................................ 170
7.4.5 Wait Control ........................................................................................................ 178
Burst ROM Interface......................................................................................................... 179
7.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 179
7.5.2 Basic Timing........................................................................................................ 179
7.5.3 Wait Control ........................................................................................................ 181
Idle Cycle .......................................................................................................................... 181
7.6.1 Operation ............................................................................................................. 181
7.6.2 Pin States During Idle Cycles .............................................................................. 185
Write Data Buffer Function .............................................................................................. 186
Bus Arbitration.................................................................................................................. 187
7.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 187
7.8.2 Operation ............................................................................................................. 187
7.8.3 Bus Transfer Timing ............................................................................................ 187
Resets and the Bus Controller ........................................................................................... 188
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) ................................................................... 189
8.1
8.2
8.3
Overview........................................................................................................................... 189
8.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 189
8.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 190
8.1.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 191
Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 192
8.2.1 DTC Mode Register A (MRA) ............................................................................ 192
8.2.2 DTC Mode Register B (MRB)............................................................................. 194
8.2.3 DTC Source Address Register (SAR).................................................................. 195
8.2.4 DTC Destination Address Register (DAR).......................................................... 195
8.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA) .............................................................. 195
8.2.6 DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)............................................................... 196
8.2.7 DTC Enable Registers (DTCER) ......................................................................... 196
8.2.8 DTC Vector Register (DTVECR)........................................................................ 197
8.2.9 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ................................................... 199
Operation .......................................................................................................................... 200
8.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 200
8.3.2 Activation Sources ............................................................................................... 202
8.3.3 DTC Vector Table ............................................................................................... 204
8.3.4 Location of Register Information in Address Space ............................................ 208
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xxxiii of l
8.4
8.5
8.3.5 Normal Mode....................................................................................................... 209
8.3.6 Repeat Mode........................................................................................................ 210
8.3.7 Block Transfer Mode ........................................................................................... 211
8.3.8 Chain Transfer ..................................................................................................... 213
8.3.9 Operation Timing................................................................................................. 214
8.3.10 Number of DTC Execution States ....................................................................... 215
8.3.11 Procedures for Using DTC .................................................................................. 217
8.3.12 Examples of Use of the DTC ............................................................................... 218
Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 221
Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 221
Section 9 I/O Ports .............................................................................................................. 223
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
Overview........................................................................................................................... 223
Port 1................................................................................................................................. 227
9.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 227
9.2.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 228
9.2.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 229
Port 3................................................................................................................................. 242
9.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 242
9.3.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 243
9.3.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 245
Port 4................................................................................................................................. 248
9.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 248
9.4.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 249
9.4.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 249
Port 9................................................................................................................................. 250
9.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 250
9.5.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 251
9.5.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 251
Port A................................................................................................................................ 252
9.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 252
9.6.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 253
9.6.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 256
9.6.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 258
9.6.5 MOS Input Pull-Up Function............................................................................... 259
Port B ................................................................................................................................ 260
9.7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 260
9.7.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 261
9.7.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 264
9.7.4 Pin Functions for Each Mode .............................................................................. 273
Page xxxiv of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
9.8
9.9
9.10
9.11
9.12
9.13
9.7.5 MOS Input Pull-Up Function............................................................................... 274
Port C ................................................................................................................................ 275
9.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 275
9.8.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 276
9.8.3 Pin Functions for Each Mode............................................................................... 279
9.8.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function............................................................................... 281
Port D................................................................................................................................ 282
9.9.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 282
9.9.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 283
9.9.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 285
9.9.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function............................................................................... 286
Port E ................................................................................................................................ 287
9.10.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 287
9.10.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 288
9.10.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 290
9.10.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function............................................................................... 292
Port F................................................................................................................................. 293
9.11.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 293
9.11.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 294
9.11.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 296
Port H................................................................................................................................ 298
9.12.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 298
9.12.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 299
9.12.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 300
Port J ................................................................................................................................. 301
9.13.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 301
9.13.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 302
9.13.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 303
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) .................................................................. 305
10.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 305
10.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 305
10.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 309
10.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 310
10.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 312
10.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 314
10.2.1 Timer Control Register (TCR)............................................................................. 314
10.2.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR) ............................................................................ 319
10.2.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR) ..................................................................... 321
10.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) .............................................................. 335
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xxxv of l
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.2.5 Timer Status Register (TSR)................................................................................ 338
10.2.6 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 342
10.2.7 Timer General Register (TGR) ............................................................................ 343
10.2.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR) ............................................................................... 344
10.2.9 Timer Synchro Register (TSYR) ......................................................................... 345
10.2.10 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ................................................... 346
Interface to Bus Master ..................................................................................................... 347
10.3.1 16-Bit Registers ................................................................................................... 347
10.3.2 8-Bit Registers ..................................................................................................... 347
Operation .......................................................................................................................... 349
10.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 349
10.4.2 Basic Functions.................................................................................................... 350
10.4.3 Synchronous Operation........................................................................................ 356
10.4.4 Buffer Operation .................................................................................................. 358
10.4.5 Cascaded Operation ............................................................................................. 362
10.4.6 PWM Modes........................................................................................................ 364
10.4.7 Phase Counting Mode.......................................................................................... 370
Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 377
10.5.1 Interrupt Sources and Priorities ........................................................................... 377
10.5.2 DTC Activation ................................................................................................... 379
10.5.3 A/D Converter Activation.................................................................................... 379
Operation Timing.............................................................................................................. 380
10.6.1 Input/Output Timing ............................................................................................ 380
10.6.2 Interrupt Signal Timing ....................................................................................... 384
Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 388
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) .................................................... 399
11.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 399
11.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 399
11.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 400
11.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 401
11.1.4 Registers .............................................................................................................. 402
11.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 403
11.2.1 Next Data Enable Registers H and L (NDERH, NDERL)................................... 403
11.2.2 Output Data Registers H and L (PODRH, PODRL)............................................ 404
11.2.3 Next Data Registers H and L (NDRH, NDRL).................................................... 405
11.2.4 Notes on NDR Access ......................................................................................... 405
11.2.5 PPG Output Control Register (PCR) ................................................................... 407
11.2.6 PPG Output Mode Register (PMR) ..................................................................... 409
11.2.7 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)............................................................. 412
Page xxxvi of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
11.2.8 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ................................................... 412
11.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 413
11.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 413
11.3.2 Output Timing...................................................................................................... 414
11.3.3 Normal Pulse Output............................................................................................ 415
11.3.4 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output............................................................................ 417
11.3.5 Inverted Pulse Output .......................................................................................... 420
11.3.6 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture ............................................................ 421
11.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 422
Section 12 Watchdog Timer ............................................................................................. 425
12.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 425
12.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 425
12.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 426
12.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 428
12.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 428
12.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 429
12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 429
12.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)................................................................ 430
12.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR) ............................................................ 436
12.2.4 Notes on Register Access..................................................................................... 437
12.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 439
12.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation ................................................................................. 439
12.3.2 Interval Timer Operation ..................................................................................... 441
12.3.3 Timing of Setting Overflow Flag (OVF) ............................................................. 441
12.3.4 Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag (WOVF) ......................... 442
12.4 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 443
12.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 443
12.5.1 Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment ..................... 443
12.5.2 Changing Value of PSS* and CKS2 to CKS0 ..................................................... 444
12.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode................ 444
12.5.4 Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode............................................................. 444
12.5.5 OVF Flag Clearing in Interval Timer Mode ........................................................ 444
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) .................................................... 445
13.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 445
13.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 445
13.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 447
13.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 448
13.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 449
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xxxvii of l
13.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 450
13.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) .............................................................................. 450
13.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) .............................................................................. 450
13.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) ............................................................................. 451
13.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)............................................................................. 451
13.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ............................................................................... 452
13.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) ............................................................................. 455
13.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................ 459
13.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ...................................................................................... 463
13.2.9 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR).................................................................... 470
13.2.10 Module Stop Control Register B (MSTPCRB).................................................... 471
13.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 473
13.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 473
13.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode ....................................................................... 475
13.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication Function ........................................................... 486
13.3.4 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode ........................................................... 494
13.4 SCI Interrupts.................................................................................................................... 503
13.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 504
Section 14 Smart Card Interface ..................................................................................... 513
14.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 513
14.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 513
14.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 514
14.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 515
14.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 516
14.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 517
14.2.1 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR).................................................................... 517
14.2.2 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................ 519
14.2.3 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ............................................................................... 521
14.2.4 Serial Control Register (SCR) ............................................................................. 523
14.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 524
14.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 524
14.3.2 Pin Connections ................................................................................................... 524
14.3.3 Data Format ......................................................................................................... 526
14.3.4 Register Settings .................................................................................................. 528
14.3.5 Clock.................................................................................................................... 530
14.3.6 Data Transfer Operations..................................................................................... 532
14.3.7 Operation in GSM Mode ..................................................................................... 539
14.3.8 Operation in Block Transfer Mode ...................................................................... 540
14.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 541
Page xxxviii of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Section 15 I2C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630) ........................... 545
15.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 545
15.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 545
15.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 546
15.1.3 Input/Output Pins ................................................................................................. 548
15.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 549
15.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 550
15.2.1 I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR) ............................................................................. 550
15.2.2 Slave Address Register (SAR) ............................................................................. 553
15.2.3 Second Slave Address Register (SARX) ............................................................. 554
15.2.4 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)........................................................................... 555
15.2.5 I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR)......................................................................... 559
15.2.6 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR) ........................................................................... 567
15.2.7 Serial Control Register X (SCRX)....................................................................... 573
15.2.8 DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR) ...................................................................... 574
15.2.9 Module Stop Control Register B (MSTPCRB).................................................... 575
15.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 576
15.3.1 I2C Bus Data Format............................................................................................ 576
15.3.2 Initial Setting........................................................................................................ 578
15.3.3 Master Transmit Operation .................................................................................. 578
15.3.4 Master Receive Operation.................................................................................... 582
15.3.5 Slave Receive Operation...................................................................................... 587
15.3.6 Slave Transmit Operation .................................................................................... 592
15.3.7 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control ................................................................ 595
15.3.8 Operation Using the DTC .................................................................................... 596
15.3.9 Noise Canceler ..................................................................................................... 597
15.3.10 Initialization of Internal State .............................................................................. 597
15.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 599
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)............................................................ 611
16.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 611
16.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 611
16.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 613
16.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 614
16.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 615
16.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 619
16.2.1 Master Control Register (MCR) .......................................................................... 619
16.2.2 General Status Register (GSR) ............................................................................ 620
16.2.3 Bit Configuration Register (BCR) ....................................................................... 622
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xxxix of l
16.2.4 Mailbox Configuration Register (MBCR) ........................................................... 624
16.2.5 Transmit Wait Register (TXPR) .......................................................................... 625
16.2.6 Transmit Wait Cancel Register (TXCR).............................................................. 626
16.2.7 Transmit Acknowledge Register (TXACK) ........................................................ 627
16.2.8 Abort Acknowledge Register (ABACK) ............................................................. 628
16.2.9 Receive Complete Register (RXPR).................................................................... 629
16.2.10 Remote Request Register (RFPR) ....................................................................... 630
16.2.11 Interrupt Register (IRR)....................................................................................... 631
16.2.12 Mailbox Interrupt Mask Register (MBIMR) ....................................................... 636
16.2.13 Interrupt Mask Register (IMR) ............................................................................ 637
16.2.14 Receive Error Counter (REC) .............................................................................. 640
16.2.15 Transmit Error Counter (TEC)............................................................................. 640
16.2.16 Unread Message Status Register (UMSR)........................................................... 641
16.2.17 Local Acceptance Filter Masks (LAFML, LAFMH)........................................... 642
16.2.18 Message Control (MC0 to MC15) ....................................................................... 644
16.2.19 Message Data (MD0 to MD15) ........................................................................... 648
16.2.20 Module Stop Control Register C (MSTPCRC).................................................... 650
16.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 651
16.3.1 Hardware and Software Resets ............................................................................ 651
16.3.2 Initialization after Hardware Reset ...................................................................... 654
16.3.3 Transmit Mode..................................................................................................... 659
16.3.4 Receive Mode ...................................................................................................... 665
16.3.5 HCAN Sleep Mode.............................................................................................. 671
16.3.6 HCAN Halt Mode................................................................................................ 673
16.3.7 Interrupt Interface ................................................................................................ 673
16.3.8 DTC Interface ...................................................................................................... 675
16.4 CAN Bus Interface............................................................................................................ 676
16.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 677
Section 17 A/D Converter ................................................................................................. 681
17.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 681
17.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 681
17.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 682
17.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 683
17.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 684
17.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 685
17.2.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) ............................................. 685
17.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ............................................................... 686
17.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ............................................................................ 689
17.2.4 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ................................................... 690
Page xl of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
17.3 Interface to Bus Master ..................................................................................................... 691
17.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 692
17.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) .................................................................................... 692
17.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1)....................................................................................... 694
17.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time ......................................................... 696
17.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing............................................................................. 697
17.5 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 698
17.6 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 699
Section 18 D/A Converter ................................................................................................. 705
18.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 705
18.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 705
18.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 706
18.1.3 Input and Output Pins .......................................................................................... 707
18.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 707
18.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 708
18.2.1 D/A Data Registers 0, 1 (DADR0, DADR1) ....................................................... 708
18.2.2 D/A Control Register 01 (DACR01) ................................................................... 708
18.2.3 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ................................................... 710
18.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 711
Section 19 Motor Control PWM Timer ........................................................................ 713
19.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 713
19.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 713
19.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 714
19.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 716
19.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 717
19.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 718
19.2.1 PWM Control Registers 1 and 2 (PWCR1, PWCR2) .......................................... 718
19.2.2 PWM Output Control Registers 1 and 2 (PWOCR1, PWOCR2) ........................ 720
19.2.3 PWM Polarity Registers 1 and 2 (PWPR1, PWPR2)........................................... 721
19.2.4 PWM Counters 1 and 2 (PWCNT1, PWCNT2) .................................................. 722
19.2.5 PWM Cycle Registers 1 and 2 (PWCYR1, PWCYR2) ....................................... 723
19.2.6 PWM Duty Registers 1A, 1C, 1E, 1G (PWDTR1A, 1C, 1E, 1G) ....................... 724
19.2.7 PWM Buffer Registers 1A, 1C, 1E, 1G (PWBFR1A, 1C, 1E, 1G) ..................... 726
19.2.8 PWM Duty Registers 2A to 2H (PWDTR2A to PWDTR2H) ............................. 727
19.2.9 PWM Buffer Registers 2A to 2D (PWBFR2A to PWBFR2D)............................ 729
19.2.10 Module Stop Control Register D (MSTPCRD) ................................................... 730
19.3 Bus Master Interface ......................................................................................................... 731
19.3.1 16-Bit Data Registers........................................................................................... 731
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xli of l
19.3.2 8-Bit Data Registers............................................................................................. 731
19.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 732
19.4.1 PWM Channel 1 Operation.................................................................................. 732
19.4.2 PWM Channel 2 Operation.................................................................................. 733
19.5 Usage Note........................................................................................................................ 735
Section 20 RAM .................................................................................................................. 737
20.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 737
20.1.1 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 737
20.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 739
20.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 740
20.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 740
20.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 740
20.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 741
Section 21A ROM (H8S/2636 Group) .......................................................................... 743
21A.1
21A.2
21A.3
21A.4
21A.5
21A.6
21A.7
21A.8
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 743
21A.1.1 Block Diagram.............................................................................................. 743
21A.1.2 Register Configuration.................................................................................. 743
Register Descriptions .................................................................................................... 744
21A.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) .................................................................. 744
Operation....................................................................................................................... 744
Flash Memory Overview............................................................................................... 747
21A.4.1 Features......................................................................................................... 747
21A.4.2 Block Diagram.............................................................................................. 748
21A.4.3 Mode Transitions .......................................................................................... 749
21A.4.4 On-Board Programming Modes.................................................................... 750
21A.4.5 Flash Memory Emulation in RAM ............................................................... 752
21A.4.6 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode .......................... 753
21A.4.7 Block Configuration ..................................................................................... 754
Pin Configuration .......................................................................................................... 755
Register Configuration .................................................................................................. 756
Register Descriptions .................................................................................................... 757
21A.7.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) ............................................. 757
21A.7.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) ............................................. 760
21A.7.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) .................................................................... 761
21A.7.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) .................................................................... 761
21A.7.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER) ........................................................... 762
21A.7.6 Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR)..................................... 763
On-Board Programming Modes .................................................................................... 764
Page xlii of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
21A.9
21A.10
21A.11
21A.12
21A.13
21A.14
21A.15
21A.16
21A.8.1 Boot Mode .................................................................................................... 765
21A.8.2 User Program Mode...................................................................................... 769
Flash Memory Programming/Erasing ........................................................................... 771
21A.9.1 Program Mode .............................................................................................. 773
21A.9.2 Program-Verify Mode .................................................................................. 774
21A.9.3 Erase Mode ................................................................................................... 778
21A.9.4 Erase-Verify Mode ....................................................................................... 779
Protection ...................................................................................................................... 781
21A.10.1 Hardware Protection ..................................................................................... 781
21A.10.2 Software Protection ...................................................................................... 782
21A.10.3 Error Protection ............................................................................................ 782
Flash Memory Emulation in RAM................................................................................ 784
Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory ................................... 786
Programmer Mode......................................................................................................... 787
21A.13.1 Socket Adapter and Memory Map................................................................ 787
Flash Memory and Power-Down States ........................................................................ 788
21A.14.1 Notes on Power-Down States ....................................................................... 788
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions ................................................. 789
Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version............................... 794
Section 21B ROM (H8S/2638 Group, H8S/2639 Group, H8S/2630 Group) .... 795
21B.1
21B.2
21B.3
21B.4
21B.5
21B.6
21B.7
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 795
21B.1.1 Block Diagram.............................................................................................. 795
21B.1.2 Register Configuration.................................................................................. 796
Register Descriptions .................................................................................................... 796
21B.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) .................................................................. 796
Operation....................................................................................................................... 796
Flash Memory Overview............................................................................................... 799
21B.4.1 Features......................................................................................................... 799
21B.4.2 Block Diagram.............................................................................................. 800
21B.4.3 Mode Transitions .......................................................................................... 801
21B.4.4 On-Board Programming Modes.................................................................... 802
21B.4.5 Flash Memory Emulation in RAM ............................................................... 804
21B.4.6 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode .......................... 805
21B.4.7 Block Configuration ..................................................................................... 806
Pin Configuration .......................................................................................................... 807
Register Configuration .................................................................................................. 808
Register Descriptions .................................................................................................... 809
21B.7.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) ............................................. 809
21B.7.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) ............................................. 812
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xliii of l
21B.8
21B.9
21B.10
21B.11
21B.12
21B.13
21B.14
21B.15
21B.16
21B.7.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) .................................................................... 813
21B.7.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) .................................................................... 813
21B.7.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER) ........................................................... 814
21B.7.6 Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR)..................................... 815
On-Board Programming Modes .................................................................................... 817
21B.8.1 Boot Mode .................................................................................................... 818
21B.8.2 User Program Mode...................................................................................... 822
Programming/Erasing Flash Memory ........................................................................... 824
21B.9.1 Program Mode .............................................................................................. 826
21B.9.2 Program-Verify Mode .................................................................................. 827
21B.9.3 Erase Mode................................................................................................... 831
21B.9.4 Erase-Verify Mode ....................................................................................... 831
Protection ...................................................................................................................... 833
21B.10.1 Hardware Protection ..................................................................................... 833
21B.10.2 Software Protection ...................................................................................... 834
21B.10.3 Error Protection ............................................................................................ 835
Flash Memory Emulation in RAM................................................................................ 837
Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory ................................... 839
Programmer Mode......................................................................................................... 840
21B.13.1 Socket Adapter and Memory Map................................................................ 840
Flash Memory and Power-Down States ........................................................................ 841
21B.14.1 Notes on Power-Down States ....................................................................... 842
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions ................................................. 842
Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version .............................. 848
Section 21C ROM (H8S/2635 Group) .......................................................................... 849
21C.1
21C.2
21C.3
21C.4
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 849
21C.1.1 Block Diagram.............................................................................................. 849
21C.1.2 Register Configuration.................................................................................. 850
Register Descriptions .................................................................................................... 850
21C.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) .................................................................. 850
Operation....................................................................................................................... 850
Flash Memory Overview............................................................................................... 853
21C.4.1 Features......................................................................................................... 853
21C.4.2 Block Diagram.............................................................................................. 854
21C.4.3 Mode Transitions .......................................................................................... 855
21C.4.4 On-Board Programming Modes.................................................................... 856
21C.4.5 Flash Memory Emulation in RAM ............................................................... 858
21C.4.6 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode .......................... 859
21C.4.7 Block Configuration ..................................................................................... 860
Page xliv of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
21C.5
21C.6
21C.7
21C.8
21C.9
21C.10
21C.11
21C.12
21C.13
21C.14
21C.15
21C.16
Pin Configuration .......................................................................................................... 861
Register Configuration .................................................................................................. 862
Register Descriptions .................................................................................................... 863
21C.7.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) ............................................. 863
21C.7.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) ............................................. 866
21C.7.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) .................................................................... 867
21C.7.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) .................................................................... 867
21C.7.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER)............................................................ 868
21C.7.6 Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR)..................................... 870
On-Board Programming Modes .................................................................................... 871
21C.8.1 Boot Mode .................................................................................................... 872
21C.8.2 User Program Mode...................................................................................... 876
Programming/Erasing Flash Memory ........................................................................... 878
21C.9.1 Program Mode .............................................................................................. 880
21C.9.2 Program-Verify Mode .................................................................................. 881
21C.9.3 Erase Mode ................................................................................................... 885
21C.9.4 Erase-Verify Mode ....................................................................................... 885
Protection ...................................................................................................................... 887
21C.10.1 Hardware Protection ..................................................................................... 887
21C.10.2 Software Protection ...................................................................................... 888
21C.10.3 Error Protection ............................................................................................ 889
Flash Memory Emulation in RAM................................................................................ 891
Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory ................................... 893
Programmer Mode......................................................................................................... 894
21C.13.1 Socket Adapter and Memory Map................................................................ 894
Flash Memory and Power-Down States ........................................................................ 895
21C.14.1 Notes on Power-Down States ....................................................................... 896
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions ................................................. 896
Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version............................... 902
Section 22A Clock Pulse Generator
(H8S/2636 Group, H8S/2638 Group, H8S/2630 Group) ................ 903
22A.1
22A.2
22A.3
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 903
22A.1.1 Block Diagram.............................................................................................. 903
22A.1.2 Register Configuration.................................................................................. 904
Register Descriptions .................................................................................................... 904
22A.2.1 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR) .................................................... 904
22A.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) .................................................... 905
Oscillator ....................................................................................................................... 906
22A.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator.................................................................... 906
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xlv of l
22A.4
22A.5
22A.6
22A.7
22A.8
22A.9
22A.3.2 External Clock Input..................................................................................... 909
PLL Circuit.................................................................................................................... 911
Medium-Speed Clock Divider....................................................................................... 912
Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit .............................................................................. 912
Subclock Oscillator ....................................................................................................... 912
Subclock Waveform Generation Circuit ....................................................................... 913
Note on Crystal Resonator ............................................................................................ 913
Section 22B Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2639 Group, H8S/2635 Group) ....... 915
22B.1
22B.2
22B.3
22B.4
22B.5
22B.6
22B.7
22B.8
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 915
22B.1.1 Block Diagram.............................................................................................. 915
22B.1.2 Register Configuration.................................................................................. 916
Register Descriptions .................................................................................................... 916
22B.2.1 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR).................................................... 916
22B.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) .................................................... 917
Oscillator ....................................................................................................................... 918
22B.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator ................................................................... 918
22B.3.2 External Clock Input..................................................................................... 921
PLL Circuit.................................................................................................................... 923
Medium-Speed Clock Divider....................................................................................... 923
Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit .............................................................................. 923
Subclock Divider........................................................................................................... 924
Note on Resonator ......................................................................................................... 924
Section 23A Power-Down Modes
[HD64F2636F, HD64F2638F, HD6432636F, HD6432638F,
HD64F2630F, HD6432630F, HD64F2635F, HD6432635F,
HD6432634F] .............................................................................................. 925
23A.1
23A.2
23A.3
23A.4
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 925
23A.1.1 Register Configuration.................................................................................. 929
Register Descriptions .................................................................................................... 930
23A.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) ............................................................. 930
23A.2.2 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR).................................................... 931
23A.2.3 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) .................................................... 933
23A.2.4 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)......................................................... 933
23A.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)................................................... 934
Medium-Speed Mode.................................................................................................... 936
Sleep Mode.................................................................................................................... 937
23A.4.1 Sleep Mode................................................................................................... 937
23A.4.2 Exiting Sleep Mode ...................................................................................... 937
Page xlvi of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
23A.5
23A.6
23A.7
23A.8
Module Stop Mode........................................................................................................ 938
23A.5.1 Module Stop Mode ....................................................................................... 938
23A.5.2 Usage Notes .................................................................................................. 939
Software Standby Mode ................................................................................................ 940
23A.6.1 Software Standby Mode................................................................................ 940
23A.6.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode................................................................. 940
23A.6.3 Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software
Standby Mode............................................................................................... 941
23A.6.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example............................................. 942
23A.6.5 Usage Notes .................................................................................................. 943
Hardware Standby Mode............................................................................................... 943
23A.7.1 Hardware Standby Mode .............................................................................. 943
23A.7.2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing.................................................................. 944
φ Clock Output Disabling Function............................................................................... 945
Section 23B Power-Down Modes
[HD64F2636UF, HD6432636UF, HD64F2638UF,
HD6432638UF, HD64F2638WF, HD6432638WF,
HD64F2639UF, HD6432639UF, HD64F2639WF,
HD6432639WF, HD64F2630UF, HD6432630UF,
HD64F2630WF, HD6432630WF, HD6432635F,
HD64F2635F, HD6432634F] ................................................................. 947
23B.1
23B.2
23B.3
23B.4
23B.5
23B.6
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 947
23B.1.1 Register Configuration.................................................................................. 953
Register Descriptions .................................................................................................... 953
23B.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) ............................................................. 953
23B.2.2 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR) .................................................... 955
23B.2.3 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) .................................................... 957
23B.2.4 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)......................................................... 959
23B.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)................................................... 961
Medium-Speed Mode .................................................................................................... 962
Sleep Mode.................................................................................................................... 963
23B.4.1 Sleep Mode ................................................................................................... 963
23B.4.2 Exiting Sleep Mode ...................................................................................... 963
Module Stop Mode........................................................................................................ 964
23B.5.1 Module Stop Mode ....................................................................................... 964
23B.5.2 Usage Notes .................................................................................................. 966
Software Standby Mode ................................................................................................ 966
23B.6.1 Software Standby Mode................................................................................ 966
23B.6.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode................................................................. 967
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xlvii of l
23B.6.3
23B.7
23B.8
23B.9
23B.10
23B.11
23B.12
23B.13
Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software
Standby Mode............................................................................................... 967
23B.6.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example............................................. 969
23B.6.5 Usage Notes.................................................................................................. 970
Hardware Standby Mode............................................................................................... 970
23B.7.1 Hardware Standby Mode .............................................................................. 970
23B.7.2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing ................................................................. 971
Watch Mode (U-Mask, W-Mask Version, H8S/2635 Group Only) .............................. 971
23B.8.1 Watch Mode ................................................................................................. 971
23B.8.2 Exiting Watch Mode..................................................................................... 972
23B.8.3 Notes............................................................................................................. 972
Subsleep Mode (U-Mask, W-Mask Version, H8S/2635 Group Only) .......................... 973
23B.9.1 Subsleep Mode ............................................................................................. 973
23B.9.2 Exiting Subsleep Mode................................................................................. 973
Subactive Mode (U-Mask, W-Mask Version, H8S/2635 Group Only)......................... 974
23B.10.1 Subactive Mode ............................................................................................ 974
23B.10.2 Exiting Subactive Mode ............................................................................... 974
Direct Transitions (U-Mask, W-Mask Version, H8S/2635 Group Only)...................... 975
23B.11.1 Overview of Direct Transitions .................................................................... 975
φ Clock Output Disabling Function............................................................................... 976
Usage Notes .................................................................................................................. 977
Section 24 Electrical Characteristics ............................................................................. 979
24.1
24.2
24.3
H8S/2636 Group Electrical Characteristics................................................................... 979
24.1.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings ......................................................................... 979
24.1.2
Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range.............................. 980
24.1.3
DC Characteristics ........................................................................................ 981
24.1.4
AC Characteristics ........................................................................................ 985
24.1.5
A/D Conversion Characteristics ................................................................... 990
24.1.6
D/A Conversion Characteristics ................................................................... 991
24.1.7
Flash Memory Characteristics ...................................................................... 992
H8S/2638 Group Electrical Characteristics................................................................... 994
24.2.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings ......................................................................... 994
24.2.2
Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range.............................. 995
24.2.3
DC Characteristics ........................................................................................ 996
24.2.4
AC Characteristics ......................................................................................1002
24.2.5
A/D Conversion Characteristics .................................................................1008
24.2.6
D/A Conversion Characteristics .................................................................1009
24.2.7
Flash Memory Characteristics ....................................................................1010
H8S/2639 Group, H8S/2635 Group Electrical Characteristics ...................................1012
Page xlviii of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
24.4
24.5
24.6
24.3.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings .......................................................................1012
24.3.2
Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range............................1013
24.3.3
DC Characteristics ......................................................................................1014
24.3.4
AC Characteristics ......................................................................................1020
24.3.5
A/D Conversion Characteristics .................................................................1026
24.3.6
D/A Conversion Characteristics* ...............................................................1027
24.3.7
Flash Memory Characteristics ....................................................................1028
H8S/2630 Group Electrical Characteristics.................................................................1030
24.4.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings .......................................................................1030
24.4.2
Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range............................1031
24.4.3
DC Characteristics ......................................................................................1032
24.4.4
AC Characteristics ......................................................................................1038
24.4.5
A/D Conversion Characteristics .................................................................1044
24.4.6
D/A Conversion Characteristics .................................................................1045
24.4.7
Flash Memory Characteristics ....................................................................1046
Operation Timing ........................................................................................................1048
24.5.1
Clock Timing ..............................................................................................1048
24.5.2
Control Signal Timing ................................................................................1049
24.5.3
Bus Timing .................................................................................................1050
24.5.4
On-Chip Supporting Module Timing..........................................................1054
Usage Note ..................................................................................................................1058
Appendix A Instruction Set ............................................................................................1059
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
A.5
A.6
Instruction List ................................................................................................................1059
Instruction Codes ............................................................................................................1083
Operation Code Map.......................................................................................................1098
Number of States Required for Instruction Execution ....................................................1102
Bus States during Instruction Execution .........................................................................1116
Condition Code Modification .........................................................................................1130
Appendix B Internal I/O Register .................................................................................1136
B.1
B.2
Address ...........................................................................................................................1136
Functions.........................................................................................................................1158
Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams.........................................................................1422
C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.5
Port 1 Block Diagrams....................................................................................................1422
Port 3 Block Diagrams....................................................................................................1428
Port 4 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................1434
Port 9 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................1435
Port A Block Diagram.....................................................................................................1436
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page xlix of l
C.6
C.7
C.8
C.9
C.10
C.11
C.12
Port B Block Diagram.....................................................................................................1440
Port C Block Diagram.....................................................................................................1441
Port D Block Diagram ....................................................................................................1442
Port E Block Diagram.....................................................................................................1443
Port F Block Diagrams....................................................................................................1444
Port H Block Diagram ....................................................................................................1450
Port J Block Diagram......................................................................................................1451
Appendix D Pin States .....................................................................................................1452
D.1
Port States in Each Mode................................................................................................1452
Appendix E Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware
Standby Mode ............................................................................................1455
Appendix F Product Code Lineup ...............................................................................1456
Appendix G Package Dimensions ................................................................................1458
Page l of l
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Section 1 Overview
1.1
Overview
The H8S/2636, H8S/2638, H8S/2639, H8S/2630, H8S/2635, and H8S/2634 are microcomputers
(MCUs: microcomputer units), built around the H8S/2600 CPU, employing Renesas Electronics's
proprietary architecture, and equipped with peripheral functions on-chip.
The H8S/2600 CPU has an internal 32-bit architecture, is provided with sixteen 16-bit general
registers and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for high-speed operation, and can
address a 16-Mbyte linear address space. The instruction set is upward-compatible with H8/300
and H8/300H CPU instructions at the object-code level, facilitating migration from the H8/300,
H8/300L, or H8/300H Series.
On-chip peripheral functions required for system configuration include data transfer controller
(DTC) bus masters, ROM and RAM memory, a16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU), programmable
pulse generator (PPG), motor control PWM timer (PWM) watchdog timer (WDT), serial
communication interface (SCI), A/D converter, D/A converter, controller area network (HCAN)
and I/O ports. An I2C bus interface (IIC) is available as an option in the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and
H8S/2630.
On-chip ROM is available as 128-kbyte, 192-kbyte, 256-kbyte, and 384-kbyte flash memory (FZTAT™* version), and as 128-kbyte, 192-kbyte, 256-kbyte, and 384-kbyte mask ROM. ROM is
connected to the CPU via a 16-bit data bus, enabling both byte and word data to be accessed in
one state. Instruction fetching has been speeded up, and processing speed increased.
Four operating modes, modes 4 to 7, are provided, and there is a choice of single-chip mode or
external expansion mode.
Subclock (32 kHz oscillation) functions are available in the U-mask and W-mask versions only.
These functions cannot be used with the other versions.
The features of the H8S/2636, H8S/2638, H8S/2639, H8S/2630, H8S/2635, and H8S/2634 are
shown in table 1-1.
Notes: The H8S/2635 and H8S/2634 are not equipped with a DTC, a PPG, a PC brake controller,
or a D/A converter.
* F-ZTAT is a trademark of Renesas Electronics Corp.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 1 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Table 1-1
Overview
Item
Specification
CPU
•
General-register machine
⎯ Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers
or eight 32-bit registers)
•
High-speed operation suitable for realtime control
⎯ Maximum clock rate: 20 MHz
⎯ High-speed arithmetic operations
8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract
16 × 16-bit register-register multiply
16 × 16 + 42-bit multiply and accumulate
32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide
•
: 50 ns
: 200 ns
: 200 ns
: 1000 ns
Instruction set suitable for high-speed operation
⎯ Sixty-nine basic instructions
⎯ 8/16/32-bit move/arithmetic and logic instructions
⎯ Unsigned/signed multiply and divide instructions
⎯ Multiply-and accumulate instruction
⎯ Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
•
CPU operating modes
⎯ Advanced mode: 16-Mbyte address space
Bus controller
•
Address space divided into 8 areas, with bus specifications settable
independently for each area
•
Choice of 8-bit or 16-bit access space for each area
•
2-state or 3-state access space can be designated for each area
•
Number of program wait states can be set for each area
•
Direct connection to burst ROM supported
PC break controller •
(This function is not
•
implemented in the
H8S/2635 Group)
Supports debugging functions by means of PC break interrupts
Data transfer
•
controller (DTC)
•
(This function is not
implemented in the
•
H8S/2635 Group)
Can be activated by internal interrupt or software
•
Page 2 of 1458
Two break channels
Multiple transfers or multiple types of transfer possible for one activation
source
Transfer possible in repeat mode, block transfer mode, etc.
Request can be sent to CPU for interrupt that activated DTC
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Item
Specification
16-bit timer-pulse
unit (TPU)
•
6-channel 16-bit timer on-chip
•
Pulse I/O processing capability for up to 16 pins'
•
Automatic 2-phase encoder count capability
Programmable
pulse generator
(PPG)
(This function is not
implemented in the
H8S/2635 Group)
•
Maximum 8-bit pulse output possible with TPU as time base
•
Output trigger selectable in 4-bit groups
•
Non-overlap margin can be set
•
Direct output or inverse output setting possible
Watchdog timer
(WDT) 2 channels
•
Watchdog timer or interval timer selectable
•
Operation using sub-clock supported (WDT1 only)*
Motor control
PWM timer
(PWM)
•
Maximum of 16 10-bit PWM outputs
•
Eight outputs with two channels each built in
•
Duty settable between 0% and 100%
•
Automatic transfer of buffer register data supported
•
Settable to any one of 5 operating speeds
Serial communication interface (SCI)
3 channels
(SCI0 to SCI2)
•
Asynchronous mode or synchronous mode selectable
•
Multiprocessor communication function
•
Smart card interface function
Controller area
network (HCAN) 2
channels
(The H8S/2635
Group has one
HCAN channel)
•
CAN: Ver. 2.0B compliant
A/D converter
•
Buffer size: 15 transmit/receive messages, transmit only one message
•
Filtering of receive messages
•
Resolution: 10 bits
•
Input: 12 channels
•
High-speed conversion: 13.3 µs minimum conversion time
(at 20-MHz operation)
•
Single or scan mode selectable
•
Sample and hold circuit
•
A/D conversion can be activated by external trigger or timer trigger
D/A converter
•
(This function is not
•
implemented in the
H8S/2635 Group)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Resolution: 8 bits
Output: 2 channels
Page 3 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Item
Specification
I/O ports
•
72 I/O pins, 12 input-only pins
Memory
•
Flash memory or mask ROM
•
High-speed static RAM
Product Name
ROM
RAM
H8S/2636
128 kbytes
4 kbytes
H8S/2638
256 kbytes
16 kbytes
H8S/2639
H8S/2630
384 kbytes
H8S/2635
H8S/2634*
192 kbytes
6 kbytes
128 kbytes
Note: * The H8S/2634 is available in a mask ROM version only.
Interrupt controller
•
Seven external interrupt pins (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ5)
•
49 internal interrupt sources (45 sources in H8S/2635)
•
Eight priority levels settable
Power-down states •
•
Sleep mode
•
Module-stop mode
•
Software standby mode
•
Hardware standby mode
Sub-clock operation* (subactive mode, subsleep mode, watch mode)
•
Operating modes
Medium-speed mode
Four MCU operating modes
External Data Bus
Page 4 of 1458
Mode
CPU Operating
Mode
On-Chip
ROM
Initial
Value
Maximum
Value
4
Advanced
On-chip ROM disabled
expansion mode
Disabled
16 bits
16 bits
5
On-chip ROM disabled
expansion mode
Disabled
8 bits
16 bits
6
On-chip ROM enabled
expansion mode
Enabled
8 bits
16 bits
7
Single-chip mode
Enabled
—
—
Description
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Item
Specification
Clock pulse
generator
•
On-chip PLL circuit (×1, ×2, ×4)
•
Input clock frequency
H8S/2636, H8S/2638, H8S/2630: 4 to 20 MHz
H8S/2639, H8S/2635, H8S/2634: 4 to 5 MHz
•
Conforms to the I C bus interface type advocated by Philips
•
Single master mode/slave mode
•
Possible to determine arbitration lost conditions
•
Supports two slave addresses
•
128-pin plastic QFP (FP-128B)
2
I C bus interface
(IIC) ×2 channel
(Option)
(Only for the
H8S/2638,
H8S/2639, and
H8S/2630)
Packages
2
Product lineup
Model Name
ROM/
RAM
(Bytes) Packages
F-ZTAT Version
Subclock
Functions
I2C bus
interface
HD6432636F
HD64F2636F
No
⎯
HD6432636UF
(U-Mask Version)
HD64F2636UF
(U-Mask Version)
Yes
⎯
HD6432638F
HD64F2638F
No
No
HD6432638UF
(U-Mask Version)
HD64F2638UF
(U-Mask Version)
Yes
No
HD6432638WF
(W-Mask Version)
HD64F2638WF
(W-Mask Version)
Yes
Yes
HD6432639UF
(U-Mask Version)
HD64F2639UF
(U-Mask Version)
Yes
No
HD6432639WF
(W-Mask Version)
HD64F2639WF
(W-Mask Version)
Yes
Yes
HD6432630F
HD64F2630F
No
No
HD6432630UF
(U-Mask Version)
HD64F2630UF
(U-Mask Version)
Yes
No
HD6432630WF
(W-Mask Version)
HD64F2630WF
(W-Mask Version)
Yes
Yes
HD6432635F
HD64F2635F
Yes
No
192 k/
6k
HD6432634F
—
Yes
No
128 k/
6k
Mask ROM
Version
128 k/
4k
FP-128B
256 k/
16 k
384 k/
16 k
Note: * Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available only in
the U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group, but are not available in the other
versions.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 5 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
1.2
Internal Block Diagram
Port A
Port B
Port C
WDT × 2 channels
PC7 / A7
PC6 / A6
PC5 / A5
PC4 / A4
PC3 / A3
PC2 / A2
PC1 / A1
PC0 / A0
Port 3
ROM
(mask ROM,
flash memory)
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB3 / A11/TIOCD3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
P35/SCK1/IRQ5
P34/RxD1
P33/TxD1
P32/SCK0/IRQ4
P31/RxD0
P30/TxD0
Port 9
Peripheral data bus
Port F
PC break controller
Peripheral address bus
PE7/D7
PE6/D6
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
Bus controller
PD7 / D15
PD6 / D14
PD5 / D13
PD4 / D12
PD3 / D11
PD2 / D10
PD1 / D9
PD0 / D8
DTC
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA0/A16
P93/AN11
P92/AN10
P91/AN9
P90/AN8
RAM
SCI × 3 channels
Motor control PWM timer
TPU
D/A converter
A/D converter
PPG
Port 4
PWMVCC
PWMVCC
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
P10 / PO8/ TIOCA0 /A20
P11 / PO9/ TIOCB0 /A21
P12 / PO10/ TIOCC0 / TCLKA/A22
P13 / PO11/ TIOCD0 / TCLKB/A23
P14 / PO12/ TIOCA1/IRQ0
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P16 / PO14/ TIOCA2/IRQ1
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
Port 1
HCAN × 2 channels
HRxD0
HTxD0
HRxD1
HTxD1
Vref
AVCC
AVSS
P47 / AN7/ DA1
P46 / AN6/ DA0
P45 / AN5
P44 / AN4
P43 / AN3
P42 / AN2
P41 / AN1
P40 / AN0
PJ0/PWM2A
PJ1/PWM2B
PJ2/PWM2C
PJ3/PWM2D
PJ4/PWM2E
PJ5/PWM2F
PJ6/PWM2G
PJ7/PWM2H
H8S/2600 CPU
Port H
PH0/PWM1A
PH1/PWM1B
PH2/PWM1C
PH3/PWM1D
PH4/PWM1E
PH5/PWM1F
PH6/PWM1G
PH7/PWM1H
Port E
Interrupt controller
Port J
PF7/ φ
PF6/ AS
PF5/ RD
PF4/ HWR
PF3/ LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF0/ IRQ2
PLL
Port D
Internal data bus
Internal address bus
VCL
MD2
MD1
MD0
OSC2*1
OSC1*1
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLCAP
STBY
RES
NMI
FWE*2
Clock pulse
generator
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
Figure 1-1 (a) shows an internal block diagram of the H8S/2636.
Notes: 1. Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in the U-mask version.
These functions cannot be used with the other versions.
See section 22A.7, Subclock Oscillator, for the method of fixing pins OSC1 and OSC2.
2. The FWE pin only applies to the flash memory version.
The FWE pin is a NC pin in the mask ROM versions.
In the mask ROM version, the FWE pin must be left open or be connected to Vss.
Figure 1-1 (a) Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2636
Page 6 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
PE7 / D7
PE6 / D6
PE5 / D5
PE4 / D4
PE3 / D3
PE2 / D2
PE1 / D1
PE0 / D0
Port A
Port B
Port C
WDT × 2 channels
RAM
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB3 / A11/TIOCD3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5
PC4/A4
PC3/A3
PC2/A2
PC1/A1
PC0/A0
Port 3
Port F
ROM
(mask ROM,
flash memory)
Peripheral address bus
DTC
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA0/A16
P35 / SCK1/ SCL0*2/IRQ5
P34 / RxD1/SDA0*2
P33/TxD1/SCL1*2
P32 / SCK0/ SDA1*2/IRQ4
I2C bus interface
(option)
SCI × 3 channels
Motor control PWM timer
TPU
D/A converter
P31/RxD0
P30/TxD0
A/D converter
HCAN × 2 channels
Port 9
PPG
Port 4
PWMVCC
PWMVCC
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/A20
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/A21
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
Port 1
P93/AN11
P92/AN10
P91/AN9
P90/AN8
HRxD0
HTxD0
HRxD1
HTxD1
Vref
AVCC
AVSS
P47/AN7/DA1
P46/AN6/DA0
P45/AN5
P44/AN4
P43/AN3
P42/AN2
P41/AN1
P40/AN0
PJ0/PWM2A
PJ1/PWM2B
PJ2/PWM2C
PJ3/PWM2D
PJ4/PWM2E
PJ5/PWM2F
PJ6/PWM2G
PJ7/PWM2H
Interrupt controller
Port H
PH0/PWM1A
PH1/PWM1B
PH2/PWM1C
PH3/PWM1D
PH4/PWM1E
PH5/PWM1F
PH6/PWM1G
PH7/PWM1H
H8S/2600 CPU
PC break controller
Port J
PF7/ φ
PF6/ AS
PF5/ RD
PF4/ HWR
PF3/ LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF0/IRQ2
PLL
Peripheral data bus
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLCAP
STBY
RES
NMI
FWE*3
Port E
Internal data bus
Internal address bus
VCL
MD2
MD1
MD0
OSC2*1
OSC1*1
Clock pulse
generator
Port D
Bus controller
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
PD7 / D15
PD6 / D14
PD5 / D13
PD4 / D12
PD3 / D11
PD2 / D10
PD1 / D9
PD0 / D8
Figure 1-1 (b) shows an internal block diagram of the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630.
Notes: 1. Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in the U-mask and W-mask versions.
These functions cannot be used with the other versions.
See section 22A.7, Subclock Oscillator, for the method of fixing pins OSC1 and OSC2.
The H8S/2639 has no OSC1 and OSC2 pins.
2. These pins are used for the I2C bus interface.
The I2C bus interface is available as an option. The product equipped with the I2C bus interface is the W-mask version.
3. The FWE pin is for compatibility with the flash memory version.
The FWE pin is a NC pin in the mask ROM versions.
In the mask ROM version, the FWE pin must be left open or be connected to Vss.
Figure 1-1 (b) Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 7 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Port A
Port B
Peripheral address bus
Internal address bus
Bus controller
Peripheral data bus
Port F
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5
PC4/A4
PC3/A3
PC2/A2
PC1/A1
PC0/A0
RAM
P35 / SCK1/IRQ5
P34/RxD1
P33/TxD1
P32 / SCK0/IRQ4
P31/RxD0
P30/TxD0
P93/AN11
P92/AN10
P91/AN9
P90/AN8
WDT × 2 channels
HCAN × 1 channel
SCI × 3 channels
TPU
A/D converter
Port 4
PWMVCC
PWMVCC
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
HRxD
HTxD
Vref
AVCC
AVSS
P10/TIOCA0/A20
P11/TIOCB0/A21
P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22
P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23
P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0
P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1
P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD
Port 1
P47/AN7
P46/AN6
P45/AN5
P44/AN4
P43/AN3
P42/AN2
P41/AN1
P40/AN0
PJ0/PWM2A
PJ1/PWM2B
PJ2/PWM2C
PJ3/PWM2D
PJ4/PWM2E
PJ5/PWM2F
PJ6/PWM2G
PJ7/PWM2H
ROM
(mask ROM,
flash memory)
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB3 / A11/TIOCD3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
Motor control PWM timer
Port H
PH0/PWM1A
PH1/PWM1B
PH2/PWM1C
PH3/PWM1D
PH4/PWM1E
PH5/PWM1F
PH6/PWM1G
PH7/PWM1H
Interrupt controller
Port J
PF7/ φ
PF6/ AS
PF5/ RD
PF4/ HWR
PF3/ LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF0/IRQ2
H8S/2600 CPU
Internal data bus
STBY
RES
NMI
FWE*1
Clock pulse
generator
PLL
PLLCAP
PLLVSS
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA0/A16
Port C
Port E
Port 3
PE7 / D7
PE6 / D6
PE5 / D5
PE4 / D4
PE3 / D3
PE2 / D2
PE1 / D1
PE0 / D0
Port D
VCL
MD2
MD1
MD0
NC*2
EXTAL
XTAL
Port 9
PD7 / D15
PD6 / D14
PD5 / D13
PD4 / D12
PD3 / D11
PD2 / D10
PD1 / D9
PD0 / D8
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
Figure 1-1 (c) shows an internal block diagram of the H8S/2635 Group.
The FWE pin is for compatibility with the flash memory version.
The FWE pin is a NC pin in the mask ROM versions.
In the mask ROM version, the FWE pin must be left open or be connected to Vss.
2. The NC pin should be left open.
Notes: 1.
Figure 1-1 (c) Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2635 Group
Page 8 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
1.3
Pin Description
1.3.1
Pin Arrangement
Section 1 Overview
0.1 µF
VSS
P31/RxD0
P30/TxD0
PLLVSS
VSS
PLLCAP
NMI
RES
P35/SCK1/IRQ5
P34/RxD1
P33/TxD1
P32/SCK0/IRQ4
VSS
EXTAL
VSS
XTAL
VCL
VCC
VCC
2
OSC1*
2
OSC2*
*1
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
TOP VIEW
(FP-128B)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
PWMVSS
PJ7/ P W M 2 H
PJ6/ P W M 2 G
PJ5/ P W M 2 F
PJ4/ P W M 2 E
PWMVCC
PJ3/ P W M 2 D
PJ2/ P W M 2 C
PJ1/ P W M 2 B
PJ0/ P W M 2 A
PWMVSS
PH7/ P W M 1 H
PH6/ P W M 1 G
PH5/ P W M 1 F
PH4/ P W M 1 E
PWMVCC
PH3/ P W M 1 D
PH2/ P W M 1 C
PH1/ P W M 1 B
PH0/ P W M 1 A
PWMVSS
VSS
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF4/HWR
PF5/RD
PF6/AS
VCC
VCC
NC
NC
PA0/A16
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA3/A19/SCK2
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5
PC4/A4
PC3/A3
PC2/A2
PC1/A1
PC0/A0
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
PD5/D13
PD4/D12
PD3/D11
PD2/D10
PD1/D9
VCC
PD0/D8
VSS
PE7/D7
PE6/D6
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
VSS
VSS
HRxD1
HTxD1
P40/AN0
P41/AN1
P42/AN2
P43/AN3
P44/AN4
P45/AN5
P46/AN6/DA0
P47/AN7/DA1
P90/AN8
P91/AN9
P92/AN10
P93/AN11
AVSS
MD0
MD1
MD2
PF0/IRQ2
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
VSS
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
Vref
AVCC
NC
VSS
HRxD0
HTxD0
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/A21
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/A20
PF7/φ
STBY
3
FWE*
Figure 1-2 shows the pin arrangement of the H8S/2636, figure 1-3 shows the pin arrangement of
the H8S/2638 and H8S/2630, figure 1-4 shows the pin arrangement of the H8S/2639, and figure
1-5 shows the pin arrangement of the H8S/2635 Group.
Notes: 1. Connect a 0.1 µF capacitor between VCL and VSS (close to the pins).
2. Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch
mode) are available in the U-mask version.
These functions cannot be used with the other versions.
INDEX
See section 22A.7, Subclock Oscillator, for the method of fixing pins
OSC1 and OSC2.
3. The FWE pin is for compatibility with the flash memory version.
The FWE pin is a NC pin in the mask ROM versions.
In the mask ROM version, the FWE pin must be left open or be
connected to Vss.
64F2636F20
H8S/2636
(U-Mask Version)
64F2636F20
H8S/2636
U
INDEX
Figure 1-2 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2636 Group (FP-128B: Top View)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 9 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
TOP VIEW
(FP-128B)
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
PWMVSS
PJ7/PWM2 H
PJ6/PWM2G
PJ5/PWM2 F
PJ4/PWM2 E
PWMVCC
PJ3/PWM2D
PJ2/PWM2C
PJ1/PWM2B
PJ0/PWM2A
PWMVSS
PH7/PWM1H
PH6/PWM1G
PH5/PWM1F
PH4/PWM1E
PWMVCC
PH3/PWM1D
PH2/PWM1C
PH1/PWM1B
PH0/PWM1A
PWMVSS
VSS
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF4/HWR
PF5/RD
PF6/AS
VCC
VCC
NC
NC
PA0/A16
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA3/A19/SCK2
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5
PC4/A4
PC3/A3
PC2/A2
PC1/A1
PC0/A0
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
PD5/D13
PD4/D12
PD3/D11
PD2/D10
PD1/D9
VCC
PD0/D8
VSS
PE7/D7
PE6/D6
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
VSS
VSS
HRxD1
HTxD1
P40/AN0
P41/AN1
P42/AN2
P43/AN3
P44/AN4
P45/AN5
P46/AN6/DA0
P47/AN7/DA1
P90/AN8
P91/AN9
P92/AN10
P93/AN11
AVSS
MD0
MD1
MD2
PF0/IRQ2
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
VSS
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
Vref
AVCC
NC
VSS
HRxD0
HTxD0
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/A21
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/A20
PF7/φ
STBY
FWE*4
EXTAL
*1
VSS
0.1 µF
XTAL
VCL
VCC
VCC
OSC1*2
OSC2*2
PLLVSS
VSS
PLLCAP
NMI
RES
P35/SCK1/SCL0*3/IRQ5
P34/RxD1/SDA0*3
P33/TxD1/SCL1*3
P32/SCK0/SDA1*3/IRQ4
VSS
VSS
P31/RxD0
P30/TxD0
Section 1 Overview
Notes: 1. Connect a 0.1 µF capacitor between VCL and VSS (close to the pins).
2. Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in the U-mask
and W-mask versions.
These functions cannot be used with the other versions.
See section 22A.7, Subclock Oscillator, for the method of fixing pins OSC1 and OSC2.
3. These pins are used for the I2C bus interface.
The I2C bus interface is available as an option. The product equipped with the I2C bus interface is
the W-mask version.
4. The FWE pin is for compatibility with the flash memory version.
The FWE pin is a NC pin in the mask ROM versions.
In the mask ROM version, the FWE pin must be left open or be connected to Vss.
(W-Mask Version)
(U-Mask Version)
64F2638F20
H8S/2638
U
64F2638F20
H8S/2638
INDEX
INDEX
64F2638F20
H8S/2638
W
INDEX
(W-Mask Version)
(U-Mask Version)
64F2630F20
H8S/2630
U
64F2630F20
H8S/2630
INDEX
INDEX
64F2630F20
H8S/2630
W
INDEX
Figure 1-3 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2638 Group and H8S/2630 Group
(FP-128B: Top View)
Page 10 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
TOP VIEW
(FP-128B)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
PWMVSS
PJ7/PWM2H
PJ6/PWM2G
PJ5/PWM2F
PJ4/PWM2E
PWMVCC
PJ3/PWM2D
PJ2/PWM2C
PJ1/PWM2B
PJ0/PWM2A
PWMVSS
PH7/PWM1H
PH6/PWM1G
PH5/PWM1F
PH4/PWM1E
PWMVCC
PH3/PWM1D
PH2/PWM1C
PH1/PWM1B
PH0/PWM1A
PWMVSS
VSS
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF4/HWR
PF5/RD
PF6/AS
VCC
VCC
NC
NC
PA0/A16
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA3/A19/SCK2
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5
PC4/A4
PC3/A3
PC2/A2
PC1/A1
PC0/A0
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
PD5/D13
PD4/D12
PD3/D11
PD2/D10
PD1/D9
VCC
PD0/D8
VSS
PE7/D7
PE6/D6
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
VSS
VSS
HRxD1
HTxD1
P40/AN0
P41/AN1
P42/AN2
P43/AN3
P44/AN4
P45/AN5
P46/AN6/DA0
P47/AN7/DA1
P90/AN8
P91/AN9
P92/AN10
P93/AN11
AVSS
MD0
MD1
MD2
PF0/IRQ2
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
VSS
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
Vref
AVCC
NC
VSS
HRxD0
HTxD0
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/A21
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/A20
PF7/φ
STBY
FWE*3
EXTAL
*1
VSS
0.1 µF
XTAL
VCL
VCC
VCC
VSS
NC
PLLVSS
VSS
PLLCAP
NMI
RES
P35/SCK1/SCL0*2/IRQ5
P34/RxD1/SDA0*2
P33/TxD1/SCL1*2
P32/SCK0/SDA1*2/IRQ4
VSS
VSS
P31/RxD0
P30/TxD0
Section 1 Overview
(U-Mask Version)
Notes: 1. Connect a 0.1 µF capacitor between VCL and VSS (close to the pins).
2. These pins are used for the I2C bus interface.
The I2C bus interface is available as an option. The product equipped
with the I2C bus interface is the W-mask version.
INDEX
3. The FWE pin is for compatibility with the flash memory version.
The FWE pin is a NC pin in the mask ROM versions.
In the mask ROM version, the FWE pin must be left open or be
connected to Vss.
64F2639F20
H8S/2639
U
(W-Mask Version)
64F2639F20
H8S/2639
W
INDEX
Figure 1-4 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2639 Group (FP-128B: Top View)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 11 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
TOP VIEW
(FP-128B)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
PWMVSS
PJ7/PWM2H
PJ6/PWM2G
PJ5/PWM2F
PJ4/PWM2E
PWMVCC
PJ3/PWM2D
PJ2/PWM2C
PJ1/PWM2B
PJ0/PWM2A
PWMVSS
PH7/ P W M 1 H
PH6/ P W M 1 G
PH5/ P W M 1 F
PH4/ P W M 1 E
PWMVCC
PH3/ P W M 1 D
PH2/ P W M 1 C
PH1/ P W M 1 B
PH0/ P W M 1 A
PWMVSS
VSS
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF4/HWR
PF5/RD
PF6/AS
VCC
VCC
NC
NC
PA0/A16
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA3/A19/SCK2
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5
PC4/A4
PC3/A3
PC2/A2
PC1/A1
PC0/A0
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
PD5/D13
PD4/D12
PD3/D11
PD2/D10
PD1/D9
VCC
PD0/D8
VSS
PE7/D7
PE6/D6
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
P40/AN0
P41/AN1
P42/AN2
P43/AN3
P44/AN4
P45/AN5
P46/AN6
P47/AN7
P90/AN8
P91/AN9
P92/AN10
P93/AN11
AVSS
MD0
MD1
MD2
PF0/IRQ2
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
VSS
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
Vref
AVCC
NC
VSS
HRxD0
HTxD0
P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD
P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1
P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0
P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23
P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/A21
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/A20
PF7/φ
STBY
FWE*2
EXTAL
*1
VSS
0.1 µF
XTAL
VCL
VCC
VCC
VSS
NC
PLLVSS
VSS
PLLCAP
NMI
RES
P35/SCK1/IRQ5
P34/RxD1
P33/TxD1
P32/SCK0/IRQ4
VSS
VSS
P31/RxD0
P30/TxD0
Section 1 Overview
Notes: The PPG and D/A converter pin functions not implemented.
1. Connect a 0.1 µF capacitor between VCL and VSS (close to the pins).
2. The FWE pin is for compatibility with the flash memory version.
The FWE pin is a NC pin in the mask ROM versions.
In the mask ROM version, the FWE pin must be left open or be connected to Vss.
Figure 1-5 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2635 Group (FP-128B: Top View)
Page 12 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
1.3.2
Section 1 Overview
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode
Table 1-2 shows the pin functions for each operating mode.
Table 1-2
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode
Pin No.
Pin Name
FP-128B
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
1
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
2
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
3
NC
NC
NC
NC
4
NC
NC
NC
NC
5
PA0/A16
PA0/A16
PA0/A16
PA0
6
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA1/TxD2
7
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA2/RxD2
8
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA3/SCK2
9
A7
A7
PC7/A7
PC7
10
A6
A6
PC6/A6
PC6
11
A5
A5
PC5/A5
PC5
12
A4
A4
PC4/A4
PC4
13
A3
A3
PC3/A3
PC3
14
A2
A2
PC2/A2
PC2
15
A1
A1
PC1/A1
PC1
16
A0
A0
PC0/A0
PC0
17
D15
D15
D15
PD7
18
D14
D14
D14
PD6
19
D13
D13
D13
PD5
20
D12
D12
D12
PD4
21
D11
D11
D11
PD3
22
D10
D10
D10
PD2
23
D9
D9
D9
PD1
24
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
25
D8
D8
D8
PD0
26
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 13 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Pin No.
Pin Name
FP-128B
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
27
PE7/D7
PE7/D7
PE7/D7
PE7
28
PE6/D6
PE6/D6
PE6/D6
PE6
29
PE5/D5
PE5/D5
PE5/D5
PE5
30
PE4/D4
PE4/D4
PE4/D4
PE4
31
PE3/D3
PE3/D3
PE3/D3
PE3
32
PE2/D2
PE2/D2
PE2/D2
PE2
33
PE1/D1
PE1/D1
PE1/D1
PE1
34
PE0/D0
PE0/D0
PE0/D0
PE0
35
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
36
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
37
HRxD1
HRxD1
HRxD1
HRxD1
38
HTxD1
HTxD1
HTxD1
HTxD1
39
AS
AS
AS
PF6
40
RD
RD
RD
PF5
41
HWR
HWR
HWR
PF4
42
LWR/ADTRG/
IRQ3
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/
IRQ3
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/
IRQ3
PF3/ADTRG/
IRQ3
43
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
44
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
45
PH0/PWM1A
PH0/PWM1A
PH0/PWM1A
PH0/PWM1A
46
PH1/PWM1B
PH1/PWM1B
PH1/PWM1B
PH1/PWM1B
47
PH2/PWM1C
PH2/PWM1C
PH2/PWM1C
PH2/PWM1C
48
PH3/PWM1D
PH3/PWM1D
PH3/PWM1D
PH3/PWM1D
49
PWMVCC
PWMVCC
PWMVCC
PWMVCC
50
PH4/PWM1E
PH4/PWM1E
PH4/PWM1E
PH4/PWM1E
51
PH5/PWM1F
PH5/PWM1F
PH5/PWM1F
PH5/PWM1F
52
PH6/PWM1G
PH6/PWM1G
PH6/PWM1G
PH6/PWM1G
53
PH7/PWM1H
PH7/PWM1H
PH7/PWM1H
PH7/PWM1H
54
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
55
PJ0/PWM2A
PJ0/PWM2A
PJ0/PWM2A
PJ0/PWM2A
56
PJ1/PWM2B
PJ1/PWM2B
PJ1/PWM2B
PJ1/PWM2B
Page 14 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Pin No.
Pin Name
FP-128B
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
57
PJ2/PWM2C
PJ2/PWM2C
PJ2/PWM2C
PJ2/PWM2C
58
PJ3/PWM2D
PJ3/PWM2D
PJ3/PWM2D
PJ3/PWM2D
59
PWMVCC
PWMVCC
PWMVCC
PWMVCC
60
PJ4/PWM2E
PJ4/PWM2E
PJ4/PWM2E
PJ4/PWM2E
61
PJ5/PWM2F
PJ5/PWM2F
PJ5/PWM2F
PJ5/PWM2F
62
PJ6/PWM2G
PJ6/PWM2G
PJ6/PWM2G
PJ6/PWM2G
63
PJ7/PWM2H
PJ7/PWM2H
PJ7/PWM2H
PJ7/PWM2H
64
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
PWMVSS
65
P30/TxD0
P30/TxD0
P30/TxD0
P30/TxD0
66
P31/RxD0
P31/RxD0
P31/RxD0
P31/RxD0
67
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
68
VSS
VSS
*2
VSS
*2
VSS
*2
69
P32/SCK0/SDA1 /
IRQ4
P32/SCK0/SDA1 /
IRQ4
P32/SCK0/SDA1 /
IRQ4
P32/SCK0/SDA1*2/
IRQ4
70
P33/TxD1/SCL1*2
P33/TxD1/SCL1*2
P33/TxD1/SCL1*2
P33/TxD1/SCL1*2
71
*2
P34/RxD1/SDA0
*2
P34/RxD1/SDA0
*2
P34/RxD1/SDA0
P34/RxD1/SDA0*2
72
P35/SCK1/SCL0*2/
IRQ5
P35/SCK1/SCL0*2/
IRQ5
P35/SCK1/SCL0*2/
IRQ5
P35/SCK1/SCL0*2/
IRQ5
73
RES
RES
RES
RES
74
NMI
NMI
NMI
NMI
75
PLLCAP
PLLCAP
PLLCAP
PLLCAP
76
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
77
PLLVSS
PLLVSS
PLLVSS
PLLVSS
78
OSC2*1
OSC2*1
OSC2*1
OSC2*1
79
OSC1*1
OSC1*1
OSC1*1
OSC1*1
80
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
81
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
82
VCL
VCL
VCL
VCL
83
XTAL
XTAL
XTAL
XTAL
84
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
85
EXTAL
EXTAL
EXTAL
EXTAL
86
FWE*3
FWE*3
FWE*3
FWE*3
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 15 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Pin No.
Pin Name
FP-128B
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
87
STBY
STBY
STBY
STBY
88
PF7/φ
PF7/φ
PF7/φ
PF7/φ
89
P10/PO8*4/TIOCA0/A20 P10/PO8*4/TIOCA0/A20 P10/PO8*4/TIOCA0/A20 P10/PO8*4/TIOCA0
90
P11/PO9*4/TIOCB0/A21 P11/PO9*4/TIOCB0/A21 P11/PO9*4/TIOCB0/A21 P11/PO9*4/TIOCB0
91
P12/PO10*4/TIOCC0/
TCLKA/A22
P12/PO10*4/TIOCC0/
TCLKA/A22
P12/PO10*4/TIOCC0/
TCLKA/A22
P12/PO10*4/TIOCC0/
TCLKA
92
P13/PO11*4/TIOCD0/
TCLKB/A23
P13/PO11*4/TIOCD0/
TCLKB/A23
P13/PO11*4/TIOCD0/
TCLKB/A23
P13/PO11*4/TIOCD0/
TCLKB
93
P14/PO12*4/TIOCA1/
IRQ0
P14/PO12*4/TIOCA1/
IRQ0
P14/PO12*4/TIOCA1/
IRQ0
P14/PO12*4/TIOCA1/
IRQ0
94
P15/PO13*4/TIOCB1/
TCLKC
P15/PO13*4/TIOCB1/
TCLKC
P15/PO13*4/TIOCB1/
TCLKC
P15/PO13*4/TIOCB1/
TCLKC
95
P16/PO14*4/TIOCA2/
IRQ1
P16/PO14*4/TIOCA2/
IRQ1
P16/PO14*4/TIOCA2/
IRQ1
P16/PO14*4/TIOCA2/
IRQ1
96
P17/PO15*4/TIOCB2/
TCLKD
P17/PO15*4/TIOCB2/
TCLKD
P17/PO15*4/TIOCB2/
TCLKD
P17/PO15*4/TIOCB2/
TCLKD
97
HTxD0
HTxD0
HTxD0
HTxD0
98
HRxD0
HRxD0
HRxD0
HRxD0
99
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
100
NC
NC
NC
NC
101
AVCC
AVCC
AVCC
AVCC
102
Vref
Vref
Vref
Vref
103
P40/AN0
P40/AN0
P40/AN0
P40/AN0
104
P41/AN1
P41/AN1
P41/AN1
P41/AN1
105
P42/AN2
P42/AN2
P42/AN2
P42/AN2
106
P43/AN3
P43/AN3
P43/AN3
P43/AN3
107
P44/AN4
P44/AN4
P44/AN4
P44/AN4
108
P45/AN5
P45/AN5
P45/AN5
P45/AN5
109
P46/AN6/DA0*4
P46/AN6/DA0*4
P46/AN6/DA0*4
P46/AN6/DA0*4
110
P47/AN7/DA1*4
P47/AN7/DA1*4
P47/AN7/DA1*4
P47/AN7/DA1*4
111
P90/AN8
P90/AN8
P90/AN8
P90/AN8
112
P91/AN9
P91/AN9
P91/AN9
P91/AN9
Page 16 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Pin No.
Pin Name
FP-128B
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
113
P92/AN10
P92/AN10
P92/AN10
P92/AN10
114
P93/AN11
P93/AN11
P93/AN11
P93/AN11
115
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
116
MD0
MD0
MD0
MD0
117
MD1
MD1
MD1
MD1
118
MD2
MD2
MD2
MD2
119
PF0/IRQ2
PF0/IRQ2
PF0/IRQ2
PF0/IRQ2
120
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB7/TIOCB5
121
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB6/TIOCA5
122
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB5/TIOCB4
123
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB4/TIOCA4
124
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB3/TIOCD3
125
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB2/TIOCC3
126
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB1/TIOCB3
127
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
128
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
PB0/TIOCA3
Notes: NC pins should be connected to VSS or left open.
1. Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in
the U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group.
These functions cannot be used with the other versions.
See section 22A.7, Subclock Oscillator, for the method of fixing pins OSC1 and OSC2.
The H8S/2639 and H8S/2635 Groups have no OSC1 and OSC2 pins.
2
2. These pins are used for the I C bus interface.
The I2C bus interface is available as an option (H8S/2638, H8S/2639, H8S/2630 only).
The product equipped with the I2C bus interface is the W-mask version.
3. The FWE pin is for compatibility with the flash memory version.
The FWE pin is a NC pin in the mask ROM versions.
In the mask ROM version, the FWE pin must be left open or be connected to Vss.
4. The PPG output, DA0, and DA1 are not supported in H8S/2635 Group.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 17 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
1.3.3
Pin Functions
Table 1-3 outlines the pin functions of the H8S/2636.
Table 1-3
Pin Functions
Type
Symbol
I/O
Name and Function
Power
VCC
Input
Power supply: For connection to the power supply.
All VCC pins should be connected to the system power
supply.
VSS
Input
Ground: For connection to ground
(0 V). All VSS pins should be connected to the system
power supply (0 V).
VCL
Output
On-chip step-down power supply pin: The VCL pin
need not be connected to the power supply. Connect
this pin to VSS via a 0.1 µF capacitor (placed close to
the pins).
PLLVSS
Input
PLL ground: Ground for on-chip PLL oscillator.
PLLCAP
Input
PLL capacitance: External capacitance pin for on-chip
PLL oscillator.
XTAL
Input
Crystal: Connects to a crystal oscillator.
See section 22A, 22B, Clock Pulse Generator, for
typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator.
EXTAL
Input
External clock: Connects to a crystal oscillator.
See section 22A, 22B, Clock Pulse Generator, for
typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator.
1
Input
Subclock: Connects to a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator.
See section 22A, Clock Pulse Generator, for typical
connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator.
OSC2*
1
Input
Subclock: Connects to a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator.
See section 22A, Clock Pulse Generator, for typical
connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator.
φ
Output
System clock: Supplies the system clock to an external
device.
HTxD0,
3
HTxD1*
Output
HCAN transmit data: Pin for CAN bus transmission.
HRxD0,
3
HRxD1*
Input
HCAN receive data: Pin for CAN bus reception.
Clock
OSC1*
HCAN
Page 18 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
I/O
Name and Function
Operating mode
control
MD2 to MD0
Input
Mode pins: These pins set the operating mode.
The relation between the settings of pins MD2 to MD0
and the operating mode is shown below. These pins
should not be changed while the H8S/2636 is
operating.
MD2
MD1
MD0
Operating Mode
0
0
0
—
1
—
1
0
—
1
—
0
0
Mode 4
1
Mode 5
0
Mode 6
1
Mode 7
1
1
System control
Interrupts
RES
Input
Reset input: When this pin is driven low, the chip is
reset.
STBY
Input
Standby: When this pin is driven low, a transition is
made to hardware standby mode.
2
FWE*
Input
Flash write enable: Pin for flash memory use (in
planning stage).
NMI
Input
Nonmaskable interrupt: Requests a nonmaskable
interrupt. When this pin is not used, it should be fixed
high.
IRQ5 to IRQ0 Input
Interrupt request 5 to 0: These pins request a
maskable interrupt.
Address bus
A23 to A0
Output
Address bus: These pins output an address.
Data bus
D15 to D0
I/O
Data bus: These pins constitute a bidirectional data
bus.
Bus control
AS
Output
Address strobe: When this pin is low, it indicates that
address output on the address bus is enabled.
RD
Output
Read: When this pin is low, it indicates that the
external address space can be read.
HWR
Output
High write: A strobe signal that writes to external space
and indicates that the upper half (D15 to D8) of the
data bus is enabled.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 19 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
I/O
Name and Function
Bus control
LWR
Output
Low write: A strobe signal that writes to external space
and indicates that the lower half (D7 to D0) of the data
bus is enabled.
16-bit timerpulse unit (TPU)
TCLKD to
TCLKA
Input
Clock input D to A: These pins input an external clock.
TIOCA0,
TIOCB0,
TIOCC0,
TIOCD0
I/O
Input capture/output compare match A0 to D0:
The TGR0A to TGR0D input capture input or output
compare output, or PWM output pins.
TIOCA1,
TIOCB1
I/O
Input capture/output compare match A1 and B1:
The TGR1A and TGR1B input capture input or output
compare output, or PWM output pins.
TIOCA2,
TIOCB2
I/O
Input capture/output compare match A2 and B2:
The TGR2A and TGR2B input capture input or output
compare output, or PWM output pins.
TIOCA3,
TIOCB3,
TIOCC3,
TIOCD3
I/O
Input capture/output compare match A3 to D3:
The TGR3A to TGR3D input capture input or output
compare output, or PWM output pins.
TIOCA4,
TIOCB4
I/O
Input capture/output compare match A4 and B4:
The TGR4A and TGR4B input capture input or output
compare output, or PWM output pins.
TIOCA5,
TIOCB5
I/O
Input capture/output compare match A5 and B5:
The TGR5A and TGR5B input capture input or output
compare output, or PWM output pins.
Programmable
pulse generator
(PPG)
PO15 to
4
PO8*
Output
Pulse output 15 to 8: Pulse output pins.
Serial
communication
interface (SCI)/
Smart Card
interface
TxD2,
TxD1,
TxD0
Output
Transmit data (channel 0, 1, 2): Data output pins.
RxD2,
RxD1,
RxD0
Input
Receive data (channel 0, 1, 2): Data input pins.
SCK2,
SCK1,
SCK0
I/O
Serial clock (channel 0, 1, 2): Clock I/O pins.
A/D converter
Page 20 of 1458
AN11 to AN0 Input
Analog 11 to 0: Analog input pins.
ADTRG
A/D conversion external trigger input: Pin for input of
an external trigger to start A/D conversion.
Input
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
I/O
Name and Function
D/A converter
5
DA1, DA0*
Output
Analog output: Analog output pins for D/A converter.
A/D converter,
D/A converter
AVCC
Input
Analog power supply: A/D converter and D/A converter
power supply pin.
When the A/D converter and D/A converter are not
used, this pin should be connected to the system
power supply (+5 V).
AVSS
Input
Analog ground: Ground pin for A/D converter and D/A
converter.
Connect to system power supply (0 V).
Vref
Input
Analog reference power supply: A/D converter and D/A
converter reference voltage input pin.
When the A/D converter and D/A converter are not
used, this pin should be connected to the system
power supply (+5 V).
I/O ports
P17 to P10
I/O
Port 1: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be
designated for each bit by means of the port 1 data
direction register (P1DDR).
P35 to P30
I/O
Port 3: A 6-bit I/O port. Input or output can be
designated for each bit by means of the port 3 data
direction register (P3DDR).
P47 to P40
Input
Port 4: An 8-bit input port.
P93 to P90
Input
Port 9: A 4-bit input port.
PA3 to PA0
I/O
Port A: A 4-bit I/O port. Input or output can be
designated for each bit by means of the port A data
direction register (PADDR).
PB7 to PB0
I/O
Port B: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be
designated for each bit by means of the port B data
direction register (PBDDR).
PC7 to PC0
I/O
Port C: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be
designated for each bit by means of the port C data
direction register (PCDDR).
PD7 to PD0
I/O
Port D: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be
designated for each bit by means of the port D data
direction register (PDDDR).
PE7 to PE0
I/O
Port E: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be
designated for each bit by means of the port E data
direction register (PEDDR).
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 21 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
I/O
Name and Function
I/O ports
PF7 to PF3,
PF0
I/O
Port F: A 6-bit I/O port. Input or output can be
designated for each bit by means of the port F data
direction register (PFDDR).
PH7 to PH0
I/O
Port H: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be
designated for each bit by means of the port B data
direction register (PHDDR).
PJ7 to PJ0
I/O
Port J: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be
designated for each bit by means of the port J data
direction register (PJDDR).
PWM1A to
PWM1H
Output
PWM output: Motor control PWM channel 1 output
pins.
PWM2A to
PWM2H
Output
PWM output: Motor control PWM channel 2 output
pins.
PWMVCC
Input
PWM Power Supply: Power supply pin for motorcontrol PWM.
Connect to the system power supply (+5 V) when the
motor-control function is not used.
PWMVSS
Input
PWM Ground: Ground pin for motor-control PWM.
Connect to the system power supply (0 V).
Motor control
PWM
2
I C bus interface SCL0, SCL1 I/O
(IIC) (Optionk)
(Only for the Wmask version of
SDA0, SDA1 I/O
the H8S/2638,
H8S/2639, and
H8S/2630)
2
2
I C clock input/output (Channel 0/1): I C clock
input/output pins that have bus-driving capability. The
output of SCL0 is an NMOS open-drain type.
2
2
I C data input/output (Channel 0/1): I C data
input/output pins that have bus-driving capability. The
output of SDA0 is an NMOS open-drain type.
Notes: 1. Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in
the U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group.
These functions cannot be used with the other versions.
See section 22A.7, Subclock Oscillator, for the method of fixing pins OSC1 and OSC2.
The H8S/2639 and H8S/2635 Groups have no OSC1 and OSC2 pins.
2. The FWE pin is functional only in the flash memory version. The FWE pin is a NC pin in
the mask ROM versions. In the mask ROM version, the FWE pin must be left open or
be connected to Vss.
3. The HTxD1 and HRxD1 pins are not supported in H8S/2635 Group.
4. The PO15 to PO8 output are not supported in H8S/2635 Group.
5. The DA1 and DA0 output are not supported in H8S/2635 Group.
Page 22 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
1.4
Section 1 Overview
Differences between H8S/2636, H8S/2638, H8S/2639, H8S/2630,
H8S/2635, and H8S/2634
There are four versions of the H8S/2636, including ROM and U-mask options; there are six
versions of the H8S/2638, including ROM, U-mask, and W-mask options; and there are four
versions of the H8S/2639, including ROM, U-mask, and W-mask options; and there are six
versions of the H8S/2630, including ROM, U-mask, and W-mask options.
The specifications of these products are compared in table 1-4 below.
Table 1-4
Comparison of Product Specifications
Product Specifications
Part No.
Model
ROM
H8S/2636
128-kbyte
on-chip
flash
HD64F2636UF memory
HD64F2636F
HD6432636F
128-kbyte
mask ROM
HD6432636UF
H8S/2638
RAM
4-kbyte
SRAM
Subclock I2C Bus
Function Interface
No
Yes
No
256-kbyte
on-chip
flash
HD64F2638UF memory
16-kbyte No
SRAM
HD6432638UF
HD6432638WF
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
No
No
Yes
256-kbyte
mask ROM
No
See section
23A, PowerDown Modes
See section
23A, PowerDown Modes
See section
23B, PowerDown Modes
Yes
HD64F2638WF
2
Yes
channels
See section
23B, PowerDown Modes
Yes
HD64F2638F
HD6432638F
No
HCAN
DTC,
PBC, Power-Down
PPG,
Modes
DAC
No
Yes
Yes
See section
23A, PowerDown Modes
See section
23B, PowerDown Modes
See section
23A, PowerDown Modes
See section
23B, PowerDown Modes
Page 23 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 1 Overview
Product Specifications
Part No.
Model
ROM
H8S/2639*
HD64F2639UF 256-kbyte
HD64F2639WF on-chip
flash
memory
RAM
Subclock I2C Bus
Function Interface
16-kbyte Yes
SRAM
HD6432639UF 256-kbyte
HD6432639WF mask ROM
H8S/2630
HD64F2630F
384-kbyte
on-chip
flash
HD64F2630UF memory
16-kbyte No
SRAM
Note:
*
No
See section
23B, PowerDown Modes
Yes
No
384-kbyte
mask ROM
No
See section
23A, PowerDown Modes
See section
23B, PowerDown Modes
Yes
Yes
HD64F2635F
192-kbyte
on-chip
flash
memory
HD6432635F
192-kbyte
mask ROM
HD6432634F
128-kbyte
mask ROM
See section
23B, PowerDown Modes
See section
23A, PowerDown Modes
Yes
HD6432630WF
H8S/2634*
2
Yes
channels
No
HD6432630UF
H8S/2635*
Yes
Yes
HD64F2630WF
HD6432630F
No
HCAN
DTC,
PBC, Power-Down
PPG,
Modes
DAC
6-kbyte
SRAM
Yes
No
1
channel
No
For details of the H8S/2639, H8S/2635, and H8S/2634 clock pulse generator, see
section 22B, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2639 Group, H8S/2635 Group).
Page 24 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Section 2 CPU
2.1
Overview
The H8S/2600 CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that
is upward-compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. The H8S/2600 CPU has sixteen 16-bit
general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) linear address space, and is
ideal for realtime control.
2.1.1
Features
The H8S/2600 CPU has the following features.
• Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs
⎯ Can execute H8/300 and H8/300H object programs
• General-register architecture
⎯ Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit
registers)
• Sixty-nine basic instructions
⎯ 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions
⎯ Multiply and divide instructions
⎯ Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
⎯ Multiply-and-accumulate instruction
• Eight addressing modes
⎯ Register direct [Rn]
⎯ Register indirect [@ERn]
⎯ Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)]
⎯ Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @–ERn]
⎯ Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32]
⎯ Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32]
⎯ Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)]
⎯ Memory indirect [@@aa:8]
• 16-Mbyte address space
⎯ Program: 16 Mbytes
⎯ Data:
16 Mbytes (4 Gbytes architecturally)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 25 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
• High-speed operation
⎯ All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states
⎯ Maximum clock rate
: 20 MHz
⎯ 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract : 50 ns
⎯ 8 × 8-bit register-register multiply
: 150 ns
⎯ 16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide
: 600 ns
⎯ 16 × 16-bit register-register multiply
: 200 ns
⎯ 32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide
: 1000 ns
• Two CPU operating modes
⎯ Normal mode*
⎯ Advanced mode
Note: * Not available in the chip.
• Power-down state
⎯ Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction
⎯ CPU clock speed selection
2.1.2
Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU
The differences between the H8S/2600 CPU and the H8S/2000 CPU are as shown below.
• Register configuration
The MAC register is supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU.
• Basic instructions
The four instructions MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC, and STMAC are supported only by the
H8S/2600 CPU.
• Number of execution states
The number of execution states of the MULXU and MULXS instructions is different in each
CPU.
Execution States
Instruction
Mnemonic
H8S/2600
H8S/2000
MULXU
MULXU.B Rs, Rd
3
12
MULXU.W Rs, ERd
4
20
MULXS.B Rs, Rd
4
13
MULXS.W Rs, ERd
5
21
MULXS
Page 26 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
In addition, there are differences in address space, CCR and EXR register functions, power-down
modes, etc., depending on the model.
2.1.3
Differences from H8/300 CPU
In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8S/2600 CPU has the following enhancements.
• More general registers and control registers
⎯ Eight 16-bit expanded registers, and one 8-bit and two 32-bit control registers, have been
added
• Expanded address space
⎯ Normal mode* supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU
⎯ Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space
Note: * Not available in the chip.
• Enhanced addressing
⎯ The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address
space
• Enhanced instructions
⎯ Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced
⎯ Signed multiply and divide instructions have been added
⎯ A multiply-and-accumulate instruction has been added
⎯ Two-bit shift instructions have been added
⎯ Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added
⎯ A test and set instruction has been added
• Higher speed
⎯ Basic instructions execute twice as fast
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 27 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
2.1.4
Differences from H8/300H CPU
In comparison to the H8/300H CPU, the H8S/2600 CPU has the following enhancements.
• Additional control register
⎯ One 8-bit and two 32-bit control registers have been added
• Enhanced instructions
⎯ Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced
⎯ A multiply-and-accumulate instruction has been added
⎯ Two-bit shift instructions have been added
⎯ Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added
⎯ A test and set instruction has been added
• Higher speed
⎯ Basic instructions execute twice as fast
2.2
CPU Operating Modes
The H8S/2600 CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode* supports a
maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte total address
space (architecturally a maximum 16-Mbyte program area and a maximum of 4 Gbytes for
program and data areas combined). The mode is selected by the mode pins of the microcontroller.
Note: * Not available in the chip.
Normal mode*
Maximum 64 kbytes, program
and data areas combined
CPU operating modes
Advanced mode
Maximum 16-Mbytes for
program and data areas
combined
Note: * Not available in the chip.
Figure 2-1 CPU Operating Modes
Page 28 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
(1) Normal Mode (Not Available in the Chip)
The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU.
Address Space: A maximum address space of 64 kbytes can be accessed.
Extended Registers (En): The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as
the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers. When En is used as a 16-bit register it can contain
any value, even when the corresponding general register (Rn) is used as an address register. If the
general register is referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-decrement (@–Rn)
or post-increment (@Rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the value in the corresponding
extended register (En) will be affected.
Instruction Set: All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of
effective addresses (EA) are valid.
Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses: In normal mode the top area
starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. One branch address is stored per 16
bits (figure 2-2). The exception vector table differs depending on the microcontroller. For details
of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling.
H'0000
H'0001
H'0002
H'0003
H'0004
H'0005
H'0006
H'0007
H'0008
H'0009
H'000A
H'000B
Reset exception vector
(Reserved for system use)
Exception
vector table
Exception vector 1
Exception vector 2
Figure 2-2 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)
The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses
an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that
contains a branch address. In normal mode the operand is a 16-bit word operand, providing a 16REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 29 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
bit branch address. Branch addresses can be stored in the top area from H'0000 to H'00FF. Note
that this area is also used for the exception vector table.
Stack Structure: When the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call,
and the PC, condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are pushed onto
the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2-3. When EXR is invalid, it is
not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling.
SP
PC
(16 bits)
EXR*1
Reserved*1 *3
CCR
CCR*3
SP
*2
(SP
)
PC
(16 bits)
(a) Subroutine Branch
(b) Exception Handling
Notes: 1. When EXR is not used it is not stored on the stack.
2. SP when EXR is not used.
3. Ignored when returning.
Figure 2-3 Stack Structure in Normal Mode
(2) Advanced Mode
Address Space: Linear access is provided to a 16-Mbyte maximum address space (architecturally
a maximum 16-Mbyte program area and a maximum 4-Gbyte data area, with a maximum of 4
Gbytes for program and data areas combined).
Extended Registers (En): The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as
the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers or address registers.
Instruction Set: All instructions and addressing modes can be used.
Page 30 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses: In advanced mode the top
area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector table in units of 32 bits. In each 32
bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address is stored in the lower 24 bits (figure 2-4).
For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling.
H'00000000
Reserved
Reset exception vector
H'00000003
Reserved
H'00000004
H'00000007
H'00000008
Exception vector table
H'0000000B
(Reserved for system use)
H'0000000C
Reserved
H'00000010
Exception vector 1
Figure 2-4 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode)
The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses
an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that
contains a branch address. In advanced mode the operand is a 32-bit longword operand, providing
a 32-bit branch address. The upper 8 bits of these 32 bits are a reserved area that is regarded as
H'00. Branch addresses can be stored in the area from H'00000000 to H'000000FF. Note that the
first part of this range is also the exception vector table.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 31 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Stack Structure: In advanced mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a
subroutine call, and the PC, condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR)
are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2-5. When
EXR is invalid, it is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling.
EXR*1
Reserved*1 *3
CCR
SP
Reserved
SP
PC
(24 bits)
(a) Subroutine Branch
(SP
*2
)
PC
(24 bits)
(b) Exception Handling
Notes: 1. When EXR is not used it is not stored on the stack.
2. SP when EXR is not used.
3. Ignored when returning.
Figure 2-5 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode
Page 32 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2.3
Section 2 CPU
Address Space
Figure 2-6 shows a memory map of the H8S/2600 CPU. The H8S/2600 CPU provides linear
access to a maximum 64-kbyte address space in normal mode, and a maximum 16-Mbyte
(architecturally 4-Gbyte) address space in advanced mode.
H'0000
H'00000000
H'FFFF
Program area
H'00FFFFFF
Data area
Cannot be
used by the
chip
H'FFFFFFFF
(a) Normal Mode*
(b) Advanced Mode
Note: * Not available in the chip.
Figure 2-6 Memory Map
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 33 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
2.4
Register Configuration
2.4.1
Overview
The CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2-7. There are two types of registers: general
registers and control registers.
General Registers (Rn) and Extended Registers (En)
15
07
07
0
ER0
E0
R0H
R0L
ER1
E1
R1H
R1L
ER2
E2
R2H
R2L
ER3
E3
R3H
R3L
ER4
E4
R4H
R4L
ER5
E5
R5H
R5L
ER6
E6
R6H
R6L
ER7 (SP)
E7
R7H
R7L
Control Registers (CR)
23
0
PC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EXR T ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ I2 I1 I0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CCR I UI H U N Z V C
41
63
MAC
32
MACH
Sign extension
MACL
31
Legend:
SP:
PC:
EXR:
T:
I2 to I0:
CCR:
I:
UI:
0
Stack pointer
Program counter
Extended control register
Trace bit
Interrupt mask bits
Condition-code register
Interrupt mask bit
User bit or interrupt mask bit*
H:
U:
N:
Z:
V:
C:
MAC:
Half-carry flag
User bit
Negative flag
Zero flag
Overflow flag
Carry flag
Multiply-accumulate register
Note: * Cannot be used as an interrupt mask bit in the chip.
Figure 2-7 CPU Registers
Page 34 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2.4.2
Section 2 CPU
General Registers
The CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally alike and
can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is used as a data
register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. When the general registers are used
as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7).
The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R
(R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 16-bit
registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers.
The R registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and
RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 8-bit
registers.
Figure 2-8 illustrates the usage of the general registers. The usage of each register can be selected
independently.
• Address registers
• 32-bit registers
• 16-bit registers
• 8-bit registers
E registers (extended registers)
(E0 to E7)
RH registers
(R0H to R7H)
ER registers
(ER0 to ER7)
R registers
(R0 to R7)
RL registers
(R0L to R7L)
Figure 2-8 Usage of General Registers
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 35 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register
function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2-9 shows the
stack.
Free area
SP (ER7)
Stack area
Figure 2-9 Stack
2.4.3
Control Registers
The control registers are the 24-bit program counter (PC), 8-bit extended control register (EXR),
8-bit condition-code register (CCR), and 64-bit multiply-accumulate register (MAC).
(1) Program Counter (PC)
This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length
of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored (When an
instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0).
(2) Extended Control Register (EXR)
This 8-bit register contains the trace bit (T) and three interrupt mask bits (I2 to I0).
Bit 7—Trace Bit (T): Selects trace mode. When this bit is cleared to 0, instructions are executed
in sequence. When this bit is set to 1, a trace exception is generated each time an instruction is
executed.
Bits 6 to 3—Reserved: These bits are reserved. They are always read as 1.
Page 36 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Bits 2 to 0—Interrupt Mask Bits (I2 to I0): These bits designate the interrupt mask level (0 to
7). For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Operations can be performed on the EXR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC
instructions. All interrupts, including NMI, are disabled for three states after one of these
instructions is executed, except for STC.
(3) Condition-Code Register (CCR)
This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and
half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags.
Bit 7—Interrupt Mask Bit (I): Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1 (NMI is accepted
regardless of the I bit setting). The I bit is set to 1 by hardware at the start of an exceptionhandling sequence. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Bit 6—User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit (UI): Can be written and read by software using the
LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. This bit can also be used as an interrupt mask
bit. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Bit 5—Half-Carry Flag (H): When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B
instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0
otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is
set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L,
SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or
borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise.
Bit 4—User Bit (U): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and
XORC instructions.
Bit 3—Negative Flag (N): Stores the value of the most significant bit (sign bit) of data.
Bit 2—Zero Flag (Z): Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data.
Bit 1—Overflow Flag (V): Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 at other
times.
Bit 0—Carry Flag (C): Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by:
• Add instructions, to indicate a carry
• Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow
• Shift and rotate instructions, to store the value shifted out of the end bit
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 37 of 1458
Section 2 CPU
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions.
Some instructions leave some or all of the flag bits unchanged. For the action of each instruction
on the flag bits, refer to appendix A.1, Instruction List.
Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC
instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch
(Bcc) instructions.
(4) Multiply-Accumulate Register (MAC)
This 64-bit register stores the results of multiply-and-accumulate operations. It consists of two 32bit registers denoted MACH and MACL. The lower 10 bits of MACH are valid; the upper bits are
a sign extension.
2.4.4
Initial Register Values
Reset exception handling loads the CPU's program counter (PC) from the vector table, clears the
trace bit in EXR to 0, and sets the interrupt mask bits in CCR and EXR to 1. The other CCR bits
and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (ER7) is not initialized.
The stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately
after a reset.
Page 38 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2.5
Section 2 CPU
Data Formats
The CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data.
Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, …, 7) of byte
operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit
BCD data.
2.5.1
General Register Data Formats
Figure 2-10 shows the data formats in general registers.
Data Type
Register Number
Data Format
1-bit data
RnH
7
0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Don’t care
Don’t care
7
0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1-bit data
4-bit BCD data
RnL
RnH
4 3
7
Upper
4-bit BCD data
0
Lower
Don’t care
RnL
Byte data
RnH
4 3
7
Upper
Don’t care
7
0
Lower
0
Don’t care
MSB
Byte data
LSB
RnL
7
0
Don’t care
MSB
LSB
Figure 2-10 General Register Data Formats
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 39 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Data Type
Register Number
Word data
Rn
Word data
En
Data Format
15
0
MSB
15
0
MSB
Longword data
LSB
ERn
31
MSB
LSB
16 15
En
0
Rn
LSB
Legend:
ERn: General register ER
En:
General register E
Rn:
General register R
RnH: General register RH
RnL: General register RL
MSB: Most significant bit
LSB: Least significant bit
Figure 2-10 General Register Data Formats (cont)
Page 40 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2.5.2
Section 2 CPU
Memory Data Formats
Figure 2-11 shows the data formats in memory. The CPU can access word data and longword data
in memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to
access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least significant
bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. This also applies to
instruction fetches.
Data Type
Address
Data Format
7
1-bit data
Address L
7
Byte data
Address L
MSB
Word data
Address 2M
MSB
0
6
5
4
Address 2M + 1
Longword data
Address 2N
3
2
1
0
LSB
LSB
MSB
Address 2N + 1
Address 2N + 2
Address 2N + 3
LSB
Figure 2-11 Memory Data Formats
When ER7 is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word size
or longword size.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 41 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
2.6
Instruction Set
2.6.1
Overview
The H8S/2600 CPU has 69 types of instructions. The instructions are classified by function in
table 2-1.
Table 2-1
Instruction Classification
Function
Instructions
Size
Types
Data transfer
MOV
1
1
POP* , PUSH*
BWL
5
WL
5
Arithmetic
operations
5
LDM* , STM*
3
3
MOVFPE* , MOVTPE*
L
ADD, SUB, CMP, NEG
BWL
B
ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS
B
INC, DEC
BWL
23
ADDS, SUBS
L
MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS
BW
EXTU, EXTS
4
TAS*
B
MAC, LDMAC, STMAC, CLRMAC
—
Logic operations
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
BWL
4
Shift
SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR BWL
8
Bit manipulation
Branch
BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST, BAND,
BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR
2
Bcc* , JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS
System control
TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP —
Block data transfer EEPMOV
WL
B
14
—
5
—
9
1
Total: 69 types
Legend:
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Notes: 1. POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn and MOV.W Rn,
@-SP. POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn and MOV.L
ERn, @-SP.
2. Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions.
3. Not available in the chip.
4. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
5. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction.
Page 42 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
May 28, 2010
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
Arithmetic
operations
B
L
BWL
B
BW
BW
BWL
WL
⎯
⎯
⎯
L
WL
B
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
SUB
ADDX, SUBX
ADDS, SUBS
INC, DEC
DAA, DAS
MULXU,
DIVXU
MULXS,
DIVXS
NEG
EXTU, EXTS
TAS*2
MAC
CLRMAC
LDMAC,
STMAC
BWL
BWL
BWL
ADD, CMP
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
MOVFPE*1,
MOVTPE*1
BWL
⎯
#xx
BWL
Rn
POP, PUSH
LDM*3, STM*3
@ERn
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
B
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
BWL
@(d:16,ERn)
⎯
⎯
⎯
BWL
@(d:32,ERn)
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
BWL
@−ERn/@ERn+
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
BWL
@aa:8
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
B
@aa:16
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
B
⎯
⎯
BWL
@aa:24
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
@aa:32
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
BWL
⎯
@(d:8,PC)
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
@(d:16,PC)
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
@@aa:8
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
L
WL
Table 2-2
MOV
Instruction
2.6.2
Data
transfer
Function
Addressing Modes
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Instructions and Addressing Modes
Table 2-2 indicates the combinations of instructions and addressing modes that the H8S/2600 CPU
can use.
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes
Page 43 of 1458
Page 44 of 1458
W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
B
B
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
B
⎯
B
⎯
⎯
Bcc, BSR
JMP, JSR
RTS
TRAPA
RTE
SLEEP
LDC
STC
ANDC,
ORC, XORC
NOP
Block data transfer
⎯
⎯
W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
B
⎯
⎯
⎯
W
W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
@(d:32,ERn)
⎯
⎯
⎯
W
W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
@−ERn/@ERn+
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
W
W
⎯
⎯
W
W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
B
⎯
⎯
⎯
@aa:16
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
B
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
@aa:8
Notes: 1. Not available in the chip.
2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
3. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction.
Legend:
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
System
control
Branch
B
⎯
Bit manipulation
⎯
BWL
⎯
BWL
⎯
⎯
NOT
⎯
@ERn
⎯
BWL
#xx
BWL
Rn
AND, OR,
XOR
Instruction
@(d:16,ERn)
Shift
Logic
operations
Function
Addressing Modes
@aa:24
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
@aa:32
⎯
⎯
⎯
W
W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
B
⎯
⎯
⎯
@(d:8,PC)
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
@(d:16,PC)
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
@@aa:8
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
BW
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Section 2 CPU
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2.6.3
Section 2 CPU
Table of Instructions Classified by Function
Table 2-3 summarizes the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in table 2-3
is defined below.
Operation Notation
Rs
General register (destination)*
General register (source)*
Rn
General register*
ERn
General register (32-bit register)
MAC
Multiply-accumulate register (32-bit register)
Rd
(EAd)
Destination operand
(EAs)
Source operand
EXR
Extended control register
CCR
Condition-code register
N
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z
Z (zero) flag in CCR
V
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C
C (carry) flag in CCR
PC
Program counter
SP
Stack pointer
#IMM
Immediate data
disp
Displacement
+
Addition
–
Subtraction
×
Multiplication
÷
Division
∧
Logical AND
∨
Logical OR
⊕
Logical exclusive OR
→
Move
¬
NOT (logical complement)
:8/:16/:24/:32
8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length
Note: * General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to
R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7).
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 45 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Table 2-3
Instructions Classified by Function
1
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Data transfer
MOV
B/W/L
(EAs) → Rd, Rs → (EAd)
Moves data between two general registers or between a
general register and memory, or moves immediate data
to a general register.
MOVFPE
B
Cannot be used in this LSI.
MOVTPE
B
Cannot be used in this LSI.
POP
W/L
@SP+ → Rn
Pops a register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to
MOV.W @SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L
@SP+, ERn.
PUSH
W/L
Rn → @–SP
Pushes a register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is
identical to MOV.W Rn, @–SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical
to MOV.L ERn, @–SP.
2
L
@SP+ → Rn (register list)
Pops two or more general registers from the stack.
2
L
Rn (register list) → @–SP
Pushes two or more general registers onto the stack.
LDM*
STM*
Page 46 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
1
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Arithmetic
operations
ADD
SUB
B/W/L
Rd ± Rs → Rd, Rd ± #IMM → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general
registers, or on immediate data and data in a general
register (Immediate byte data cannot be subtracted from
byte data in a general register. Use the SUBX or ADD
instruction).
ADDX
SUBX
B
Rd ± Rs ± C → Rd, Rd ± #IMM ± C → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on
byte data in two general registers, or on immediate data
and data in a general register.
INC
DEC
B/W/L
Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd
Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2
(Byte operands can be incremented or decremented by
1 only).
ADDS
SUBS
L
Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd, Rd ± 4 → Rd
Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a
32-bit register.
DAA
DAS
B
Rd decimal adjust → Rd
Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a
general register by referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit
BCD data.
MULXU
B/W
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general
registers: either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits ×
16 bits → 32 bits.
MULXS
B/W
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs signed multiplication on data in two general
registers: either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits ×
16 bits → 32 bits.
DIVXU
B/W
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned division on data in two general
registers: either 16 bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit
remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit quotient and 16bit remainder.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 47 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
1
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Arithmetic
operations
DIVXS
B/W
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs signed division on data in two general
registers: either 16 bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit
remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit quotient and 16bit remainder.
CMP
B/W/L
Rd – Rs, Rd – #IMM
Compares data in a general register with data in another
general register or with immediate data, and sets CCR
bits according to the result.
NEG
B/W/L
0 – Rd → Rd
Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of
data in a general register.
EXTU
W/L
Rd (zero extension) → Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size,
or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size,
by padding with zeros on the left.
EXTS
W/L
TAS
B
Rd (sign extension) → Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size,
or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size,
by extending the sign bit.
3
@ERd – 0, 1 → (<bit 7> of @ERd)*
Tests memory contents, and sets the most significant bit
(bit 7) to 1.
MAC
—
(EAs) × (EAd) + MAC → MAC
Performs signed multiplication on memory contents and
adds the result to the multiply-accumulate register. The
following operations can be performed:
16 bits × 16 bits + 32 bits → 32 bits, saturating
16 bits × 16 bits + 42 bits → 42 bits, non-saturating
CLRMAC
—
0 → MAC
Clears the multiply-accumulate register to zero.
LDMAC
STMAC
L
Rs → MAC, MAC → Rd
Transfers data between a general register and a
multiply-accumulate register.
Page 48 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
1
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Logic
operations
AND
B/W/L
Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical AND operation on a general register
and another general register or immediate data.
OR
B/W/L
Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical OR operation on a general register
and another general register or immediate data.
XOR
B/W/L
Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general
register and another general register or immediate data.
NOT
B/W/L
¬ (Rd) → (Rd)
Takes the one's complement of general register
contents.
SHAL
SHAR
B/W/L
Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents.
1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible.
SHLL
SHLR
B/W/L
Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs a logical shift on general register contents.
1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible.
ROTL
ROTR
B/W/L
Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents.
1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible.
ROTXL
ROTXR
B/W/L
Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents through the carry flag.
1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible.
Shift
operations
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 49 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
1
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Bitmanipulation
instructions
BSET
B
1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand to 1. The bit number is specified by 3-bit
immediate data or the lower three bits of a general
register.
BCLR
B
0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand to 0. The bit number is specified by 3-bit
immediate data or the lower three bits of a general
register.
BNOT
B
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate
data or the lower three bits of a general register.
BTST
B
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and sets or clears the Z flag accordingly. The
bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the
lower three bits of a general register.
BAND
B
C ∧ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the
carry flag.
BIAND
B
C ∧ [ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) ] → C
ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in
a general register or memory operand and stores the
result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BOR
B
C ∨ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the
carry flag.
BIOR
B
C ∨ [ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) ] → C
ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a
general register or memory operand and stores the
result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Page 50 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
1
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Bitmanipulation
instructions
BXOR
B
C ⊕ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a
general register or memory operand and stores the
result in the carry flag.
BIXOR
B
C ⊕ ¬ [ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) ] → C
Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a
specified bit in a general register or memory operand
and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BLD
B
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand to the carry flag.
BILD
B
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand to the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BST
B
C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a
general register or memory operand.
BIST
B
¬ C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a
specified bit in a general register or memory operand.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 51 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
1
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Branch
instructions
Bcc
—
Branches to a specified address if a specified condition
is true. The branching conditions are listed below.
Page 52 of 1458
Mnemonic
Description
Condition
BRA(BT)
Always (true)
Always
BRN(BF)
Never (false)
Never
BHI
High
C∨Z=0
BLS
Low or same
C∨Z=1
BCC(BHS)
Carry clear
(high or same)
C=0
BCS(BLO)
Carry set (low)
C=1
BNE
Not equal
Z=0
BEQ
Equal
Z=1
BVC
Overflow clear
V=0
BVS
Overflow set
V=1
BPL
Plus
N=0
BMI
Minus
N=1
BGE
Greater or equal
N⊕V=0
BLT
Less than
N⊕V=1
BGT
Greater than
Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 0
BLE
Less or equal
Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 1
JMP
—
Branches unconditionally to a specified address.
BSR
—
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
JSR
—
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
RTS
—
Returns from a subroutine
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Type
Instruction
Section 2 CPU
1
Size*
Function
System control TRAPA
instructions
RTE
—
Starts trap-instruction exception handling.
—
Returns from an exception-handling routine.
SLEEP
—
Causes a transition to a power-down state.
LDC
B/W
(EAs) → CCR, (EAs) → EXR
Moves the source operand contents or immediate data
to CCR or EXR. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit
registers, word-size transfers are performed between
them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid.
STC
B/W
CCR → (EAd), EXR → (EAd)
Transfers CCR or EXR contents to a general register or
memory. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers,
word-size transfers are performed between them and
memory. The upper 8 bits are valid.
ANDC
B
CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∧ #IMM → EXR
Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with
immediate data.
ORC
B
CCR ∨ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∨ #IMM → EXR
Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate
data.
XORC
B
CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR, EXR ⊕ #IMM → EXR
Logically exclusive-ORs the CCR or EXR contents with
immediate data.
NOP
—
PC + 2 → PC
Only increments the program counter.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 53 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Type
Instruction
Size
Function
Block data
transfer
instruction
EEPMOV.B
—
if R4L ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+
R4L–1 → R4L
Until R4L = 0
else next;
EEPMOV.W
—
if R4 ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+
R4–1 → R4
Until R4 = 0
else next;
Transfers a data block according to parameters set in
general registers R4L or R4, ER5, and ER6.
R4L or R4: size of block (bytes)
ER5: starting source address
ER6: starting destination address
Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the
transfer is completed.
Notes: 1. Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
2. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction.
3. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
2.6.4
Basic Instruction Formats
The CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation
field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a condition
field (cc).
(1) Operation Field: Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the
operation to be carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of
the instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields.
(2) Register Field: Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, data
registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register
field.
(3) Effective Address Extension: Eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute
address, or a displacement.
Page 54 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
(4) Condition Field: Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions.
Figure 2-12 shows examples of instruction formats.
(1) Operation field only
op
NOP, RTS, etc.
(2) Operation field and register fields
op
rm
rn
ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc.
(3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension
op
rn
rm
MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm, etc.
EA (disp)
(4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field
op
cc
EA (disp)
BRA d:16, etc
Figure 2-12 Instruction Formats (Examples)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 55 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
2.7
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation
2.7.1
Addressing Mode
The CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2-4. Each instruction uses a subset of
these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and
immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter
relative and memory indirect. Bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or
absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and
BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand.
Table 2-4
Addressing Modes
No.
Addressing Mode
Symbol
1
Register direct
Rn
2
Register indirect
@ERn
3
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn)
4
Register indirect with post-increment
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@ERn+
@–ERn
5
Absolute address
@aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32
6
Immediate
#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
7
Program-counter relative
@(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC)
8
Memory indirect
@@aa:8
(1) Register Direct—Rn: The register field of the instruction specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit
general register containing the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit
registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified
as 32-bit registers.
(2) Register Indirect—@ERn: The register field of the instruction code specifies an address
register (ERn) which contains the address of the operand on memory. If the address is a program
instruction address, the lower 24 bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
(3) Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn): A 16-bit or 32-bit
displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn) specified by the
register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a memory operand. A 16-bit
displacement is sign-extended when added.
Page 56 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
(4) Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement—@ERn+ or @-ERn:
• Register indirect with post-increment—@ERn+
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the
address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address
register contents and the sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte
access, 2 for word transfer instruction, or 4 for longword transfer instruction. For word or
longword transfer instruction, the register value should be even.
• Register indirect with pre-decrement—@-ERn
The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field
in the instruction code, and the result becomes the address of a memory operand. The result is
also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word transfer
instruction, or 4 for longword transfer instruction. For word or longword transfer instruction,
the register value should be even.
(5) Absolute Address—@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32: The instruction code contains the
absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits
long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits long (@aa:32).
To access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits
(@aa:32) long. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF).
For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. A 32-bit absolute address can
access the entire address space.
A 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. The upper 8
bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
Table 2-5 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges.
Table 2-5
Absolute Address Access Ranges
Normal Mode*
Advanced Mode
8 bits (@aa:8)
H'FF00 to H'FFFF
H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF
16 bits (@aa:16)
H'0000 to H'FFFF
H'000000 to H'007FFF,
H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF
Absolute Address
Data address
32 bits (@aa:32)
Program instruction
address
H'000000 to H'FFFFFF
24 bits (@aa:24)
Note: * Not available in the chip.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 57 of 1458
Section 2 CPU
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
(6) Immediate—#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32: The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit
(#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an operand.
The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit
manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit
number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a
vector address.
(7) Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC): This mode is used in the Bcc and
BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction is sign-extended and
added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address. Only the lower 24 bits of this branch
address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). The PC value to which the
displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible
branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64 words) or –32766 to +32768 bytes (–16383 to
+16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an even number.
(8) Memory Indirect—@@aa:8: This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The
instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory
operand contains a branch address. The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0,
so the address range is 0 to 255 (H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode*, H'000000 to H'0000FF in
advanced mode). In normal mode* the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address
is 16 bits long. In advanced mode the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of
which is assumed to be all 0 (H'00).
Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area. For further details,
refer to section 4, Exception Handling.
Note: * Not available in the chip.
Page 58 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Specified
by @aa:8
Branch address
Section 2 CPU
Specified
by @aa:8
Reserved
Branch address
(a) Normal Mode*
(b) Advanced Mode
Note: * Not available in the chip.
Figure 2-13 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode
If an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address, the
least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or instruction code to be fetched
at the address preceding the specified address (For further information, see section 2.5.2, Memory
Data Formats).
2.7.2
Effective Address Calculation
Table 2-6 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. In normal
mode* the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit address.
Note: * Not available in the chip.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 59 of 1458
Page 60 of 1458
4
3
rm
rn
r
r
disp
r
op
r
• Register indirect with pre-decrement @−ERn
op
Register indirect with post-increment or
pre-decrement
• Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+
op
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn)
op
Register indirect (@ERn)
op
Register direct (Rn)
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
disp
1
2
4
0
1, 2, or 4
General register contents
Byte
Word
Longword
0
0
0
0
1, 2, or 4
General register contents
Sign extension
General register contents
General register contents
Operand Size Value added
31
31
31
31
31
Effective Address Calculation
24 23
24 23
24 23
24 23
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
Operand is general register contents.
Effective Address (EA)
0
0
0
0
Table 2.6
2
1
No.
Section 2 CPU
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Effective Address Calculation
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
May 28, 2010
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
6
op
op
abs
abs
abs
op
IMM
Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
@aa:32
op
@aa:24
@aa:16
op
abs
Absolute address
5
@aa:8
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
No.
Effective Address Calculation
24 23
16 15
24 23
Sign
H'FFFF
24 23
24 23
Operand is immediate data.
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
Don’t care extension
31
Don’t care
31
87
Effective Address (EA)
0
0
0
0
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Page 61 of 1458
Page 62 of 1458
abs
op
abs
• Advanced mode
op
• Normal mode*
Memory indirect @@aa:8
op
@(d:8, PC)/@(d:16, PC)
Program-counter relative
disp
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
Note: * Not available in the chip.
8
7
No.
31
31
31
87
abs
87
abs
Memory contents
15
Memory contents
H'000000
H'000000
disp
PC contents
Sign
extension
23
23
Effective Address Calculation
0
0
0
0
0
0
24 23
24 23
24 23
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
H'00
16 15
Effective Address (EA)
0
0
0
Section 2 CPU
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
2.8
Processing States
2.8.1
Overview
The CPU has five main processing states: the reset state, exception handling state, program
execution state, bus-released state, and power-down state. Figure 2-14 shows a diagram of the
processing states. Figure 2-15 indicates the state transitions.
Reset state
The CPU and all on-chip supporting modules have been
initialized and are stopped.
Exception-handling
state
A transient state in which the CPU changes the normal
processing flow in response to a reset, trace, interrupt,
or trap instruction.
Processing
states
Program execution
state
The CPU executes program instructions in sequence.
Bus-released state
The external bus has been released in response to a bus
request signal from a bus master other than the CPU.
Sleep mode
Power-down state
CPU operation is stopped
to conserve power.*
Software standby
mode
Hardware standby
mode
Note: * The power-down state also includes a medium-speed mode, module stop mode,
subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode.
See section 23A and 23B, Power-Down Modes, for details.
Figure 2-14 Processing States
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 63 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
End of bus request
Bus request
Program execution state
ha
nd
lin
g
SLEEP
instruction
with
SSBY = 0
pt
ion
s
bu
t
of est
es
d
u
qu
En req
e
r
s
Bu
Sleep mode
qu
t re
rup
r
Inte
est
SLEEP
instruction
with
SSBY = 1
En
d
o
ha f ex
nd ce
lin pti
g on
Re
qu
es
tf
or
ex
ce
Bus-released state
Exception handling state
External interrupt request
Software standby mode
RES = High
STBY = High, RES = Low
Reset state *1
Hardware standby mode*2
Reset state
Power-down state*3
Notes: 1. From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES
goes low. A transition can also be made to the reset state when the
watchdog timer overflows.
2. From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY goes low.
3. Apart from these states, there are also the watch mode, subactive mode, and the subsleep mode.
See section 23A, 23B, Power-Down Modes.
Figure 2-15 State Transitions
2.8.2
Reset State
When the RES goes low, all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state. In reset
state all interrupts are disenabled.
Reset exception handling starts when the RES signal changes from low to high.
The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. For details, refer to section 12,
Watchdog Timer.
Page 64 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2.8.3
Section 2 CPU
Exception-Handling State
The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal
processing flow due to a reset, trace, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a start address
(vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that address.
(1) Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority
Exception handling is performed for traces, resets, interrupts, and trap instructions. Table 2-7
indicates the types of exception handling and their priority. Trap instruction exception handling is
always accepted, in the program execution state.
Exception handling and the stack structure depend on the interrupt control mode set in SYSCR.
Table 2-7
Exception Handling Types and Priority
Priority
Type of Exception
Detection Timing
Start of Exception Handling
High
Reset
Synchronized with clock
Exception handling starts
immediately after a low-to-high
transition at the RES pin, or
when the watchdog timer
overflows.
Trace
End of instruction
execution or end of
exception-handling
1
sequence*
When the trace (T) bit is set to
1, the trace starts at the end of
the current instruction or current
exception-handling sequence
Interrupt
End of instruction
execution or end of
exception-handling
2
sequence*
When an interrupt is requested,
exception handling starts at the
end of the current instruction or
current exception-handling
sequence
Trap instruction
When TRAPA instruction
is executed
Exception handling starts when
a trap (TRAPA) instruction is
3
executed*
Low
Notes: 1. Traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. Trace exception-handling is not
executed at the end of the RTE instruction.
2. Interrupts are not detected at the end of the ANDC, ORC, XORC, and LDC instructions,
or immediately after reset exception handling.
3. Trap instruction exception handling is always accepted, in the program execution state.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 65 of 1458
Section 2 CPU
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
(2) Reset Exception Handling
After the RES pin has gone low and the reset state has been entered, when RES goes high again,
reset exception handling starts. The CPU enters the reset state when the RES is low. When reset
exception handling starts the CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table
and starts program execution from that address. All interrupts, including NMI, are disabled during
reset exception handling and after it ends.
(3) Traces
Traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. Trace mode is entered when the T bit of EXR
is set to 1. When trace mode is established, trace exception handling starts at the end of each
instruction.
At the end of a trace exception-handling sequence, the T bit of EXR is cleared to 0 and trace mode
is cleared. Interrupt masks are not affected.
The T bit saved on the stack retains its value of 1, and when the RTE instruction is executed to
return from the trace exception-handling routine, trace mode is entered again. Trace exceptionhandling is not executed at the end of the RTE instruction.
Trace mode is not entered in interrupt control mode 0, regardless of the state of the T bit.
(4) Interrupt Exception Handling and Trap Instruction Exception Handling
When interrupt or trap-instruction exception handling begins, the CPU references the stack pointer
(ER7) and pushes the program counter and other control registers onto the stack. Next, the CPU
alters the settings of the interrupt mask bits in the control registers. Then the CPU fetches a start
address (vector) from the exception vector table and program execution starts from that start
address.
Figure 2-16 shows the stack after exception handling ends.
Page 66 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Normal mode*2
SP
SP
EXR
Reserved*1
CCR
CCR*1
CCR
CCR*1
PC
(16 bits)
PC
(16 bits)
(a) Interrupt control mode 0
(b) Interrupt control mode 2
Advanced mode
SP
SP
EXR
Reserved*1
CCR
CCR
PC
(24 bits)
PC
(24 bits)
(c) Interrupt control mode 0
(d) Interrupt control mode 2
Notes: 1. Ignored when returning.
2. Not available in the chip.
Figure 2-16 Stack Structure after Exception Handling (Examples)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 67 of 1458
Section 2 CPU
2.8.4
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Program Execution State
In this state the CPU executes program instructions in sequence.
2.8.5
Bus-Released State
This is a state in which the bus has been released in response to a bus request from a bus master
other than the CPU. While the bus is released, the CPU halts operations.
Bus masters other than the CPU is data transfer controller (DTC).
For further details, refer to section 7, Bus Controller.
2.8.6
Power-Down State
The power-down state includes both modes in which the CPU stops operating and modes in which
the CPU does not stop. There are five modes in which the CPU stops operating: sleep mode,
software standby mode, hardware standby mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. There are also
three other power-down modes: medium-speed mode, module stop mode, and subactive mode. In
medium-speed mode the CPU and other bus masters operate on a medium-speed clock. Module
stop mode permits halting of the operation of individual modules, other than the CPU. Subactive
mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode are power-down states using subclock input. For details,
refer to section 23A, 23B, Power-Down Modes.
(1) Sleep Mode: A transition to sleep mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while
the software standby bit (SSBY) in the standby control register (SBYCR) is cleared to 0. In sleep
mode, CPU operations stop immediately after execution of the SLEEP instruction. The contents of
CPU registers are retained.
(2) Software Standby Mode: A transition to software standby mode is made if the SLEEP
instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the LSON bit in LPWRCR is set
to 0, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT1) is set to 0. In software standby mode, the CPU and clock
halt and all MCU operations stop. As long as a specified voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU
registers and on-chip RAM are retained. The I/O ports also remain in their existing states.
(3) Hardware Standby Mode: A transition to hardware standby mode is made when the STBY
pin goes low. In hardware standby mode, the CPU and clock halt and all MCU operations stop.
The on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied, on-chip
RAM contents are retained.
Page 68 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2.9
Basic Timing
2.9.1
Overview
Section 2 CPU
The H8S/2600 CPU is driven by a system clock, denoted by the symbol φ. The period from one
rising edge of φ to the next is referred to as a "state." The memory cycle or bus cycle consists of
one, two, or three states. Different methods are used to access on-chip memory, on-chip
supporting modules, and the external address space.
2.9.2
On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM)
On-chip memory is accessed in one state. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and
word transfer instruction. Figure 2-17 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Figure 2-18 shows
the pin states.
Bus cycle
T1
φ
Internal address bus
Read
access
Address
Internal read signal
Internal data bus
Read data
Internal write signal
Write
access
Internal data bus
Write data
Figure 2-17 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 69 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Bus cycle
T1
φ
Address bus
Unchanged
AS
High
RD
High
HWR, LWR
High
Data bus
High-impedance state
Figure 2-18 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access
Page 70 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2.9.3
Section 2 CPU
On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing
The on-chip supporting modules are accessed in two states. The data bus is either 8 bits or 16 bits
wide, depending on the particular internal I/O register being accessed. Figure 2-19 shows the
access timing for the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 2-20 shows the pin states.
Bus cycle
T2
T1
φ
Internal address bus
Address
Internal read signal
Read
access
Internal data bus
Read data
Internal write signal
Write
access
Internal data bus
Write data
Figure 2-19 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Cycle
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 71 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Bus cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address bus
Unchanged
AS
High
RD
High
HWR, LWR
High
Data bus
High-impedance state
Figure 2-20 Pin States during On-Chip Supporting Module Access
Page 72 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2.9.4
Section 2 CPU
On-Chip HCAN Module Access Timing
On-chip HCAN module access is performed in four states. The data bus width is 16 bits. Wait
states can be inserted by means of a wait request from the HCAN. On-chip HCAN module access
timing is shown in figures 2-21 and 2-22, and the pin states in figure 2-23.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
T4
φ
Internal address bus
Address
HCAN read signal
Read
Internal data bus
Read data
HCAN write signal
Write
Internal data bus
Write data
Figure 2-21 On-Chip HCAN Module Access Cycle (No Wait State)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 73 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Bus cycle
T2
T1
T3
Tw
Tw
T4
φ
Internal address bus
Address
HCAN read signal
Read
Internal data bus
Read data
HCAN write signal
Write
Internal data bus
Write data
Figure 2-22 On-Chip HCAN Module Access Cycle (Wait States Inserted)
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
T4
φ
Address bus
Held
AS
High
RD
High
HWR, LWR
High
Data bus
High-impedance state
Figure 2-23 Pin States in On-Chip HCAN Module Access
Page 74 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2.9.5
Section 2 CPU
Port H and J Register Access Timing
Accesses to port H and J registers and the on-chip motor control PWM timer module are
performed in four states. The data bus width is 8 or 16 bits depending on the internal I/O register.
Access timing for port H and J registers and the on-chip motor control PWM timer module is
shown in figure 2-24, and the pin states are shown in figure 2-25.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
T4
φ
Internal address
bus
Address
Read signal
Read
Internal data
bus
Read data
Write signal
Write
Internal data
bus
Write data
Figure 2-24 Access Cycle for Ports H and J Registers and On-Chip Motor Control
PWM Timer Module
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 75 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 2 CPU
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
T4
φ
Address bus
Held
AS
High
RD
High
HWR, LWR
High
Data bus
High impedance
Figure 2-25 Pin States in Access to Ports H and J Registers and On-Chip Motor Control
PWM Timer Module
2.9.6
External Address Space Access Timing
The external address space is accessed with an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus width in a two-state or
three-state bus cycle. In three-state access, wait states can be inserted. For further details, refer to
section 7, Bus Controller.
Page 76 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2.10
Usage Note
2.10.1
TAS Instruction
Section 2 CPU
Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. The TAS
instruction is not generated by the Renesas Electronics H8S Family and H8/300 Series C/C++
compilers. If the TAS instruction is used as a user-defined intrinsic function, ensure that only
register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 is used.
2.10.2
STM/LDM Instructions
With STM and LDM instructions, register ER7 cannot be used as a register that can be saved
(STM) or restored (LDM) since it is the stack pointer.
The number of registers that can be saved (STM) or restored (LDM) by a single instruction is two,
three, or four. The registers that can be used in these cases are as follows.
Two registers: ER0–ER1, ER2–ER3, ER4–ER5
Three registers: ER0–ER2, ER4–ER6
Four registers: ER0–ER3
The Renesas Electronics H8S Family and H8/300 Series C/C++ compilers do not generate
STM/LDM instructions that include ER7.
2.10.3
Caution to Observe when Using Bit Manipulation Instructions
The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read data in a unit of byte, then, after bit
manipulation, they write data in a unit of byte. Therefore, caution must be exercised when
executing any of these instructions for registers and ports that include write-only bits.
The BCLR instruction can be used to clear the flag of an internal I/O register to 0. In that case, if it
is clearly known that the pertinent flag is set to 1 in an interrupt processing routine or other
processing, there is no need to read the flag in advance.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 77 of 1458
Section 2 CPU
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Page 78 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.1
Overview
3.1.1
Operating Mode Selection
The chip has four operating modes (modes 4 to 7). These modes enable selection of the CPU
operating mode, enabling/disabling of on-chip ROM, and the initial bus width setting, by setting
the mode pins (MD2 to MD0).
Table 3-1 lists the MCU operating modes.
Table 3-1
MCU Operating Mode Selection
CPU
MCU
Operating
Operating
Description
MD2 MD1 MD0 Mode
Mode
0*
1*
0
2*
0
1
3*
4
—
1
—
—
On-Chip Initial
ROM
Width
Max.
Width
—
—
—
0
1
1
0
5
6
0
External Data Bus
0
1
1
7
Advanced On-chip ROM
disabled, expanded
mode
0
On-chip ROM
enabled, expanded
mode
1
Single-chip mode
Disabled 16 bits
16 bits
8 bits
16 bits
Enabled 8 bits
16 bits
—
—
Note: * Not available in the chip.
The CPU’s architecture allows for 4 Gbytes of address space, but the chip actually accesses a
maximum of 16 Mbytes.
Modes 4 to 6 are externally expanded modes that allow access to external memory and peripheral
devices.
The external expansion modes allow switching between 8-bit and 16-bit bus modes. After program
execution starts, an 8-bit or 16-bit address space can be set for each area, depending on the bus
controller setting. If 16-bit access is selected for any one area, 16-bit bus mode is set; if 8-bit
access is selected for all areas, 8-bit bus mode is set.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 79 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Note that the functions of each pin depend on the operating mode.
The chip can be used only in modes 4 to 7. This means that the mode pins must be set to select one
of these modes. Do not change the inputs at the mode pins during operation.
3.1.2
Register Configuration
The chip has a mode control register (MDCR) that indicates the inputs at the mode pins (MD2 to
MD0), and a system control register (SYSCR) that controls the operation of the chip. Table 3-2
summarizes these registers.
Table 3-2
MCU Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Mode control register
MDCR
R
Undetermined
H'FDE7
System control register
SYSCR
R/W
H'01
H'FDE5
Pin function control register
PFCR
R/W
H'0D/H'00
H'FDEB
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
3.2
Register Descriptions
3.2.1
Mode Control Register (MDCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
MDS2
MDS1
MDS0
1
0
0
0
0
⎯*
⎯*
⎯*
R/W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
R
R
R
Note: * Determined by pins MD2 to MD0.
MDCR is an 8-bit register that indicates the current operating mode of the chip.
Page 80 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Bit 7—Reserved: Only 1 should be written to these bits.
Bits 6 to 3—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bits 2 to 0—Mode Select 2 to 0 (MDS2 to MDS0): These bits indicate the input levels at pins
MD2 to MD0 (the current operating mode). Bits MDS2 to MDS0 correspond to MD2 to MD0.
MDS2 to MDS0 are read-only bits, and they cannot be written to. The mode pin (MD2 to MD0)
input levels are latched into these bits when MDCR is read. These latches are cancelled by a reset.
3.2.2
System Control Register (SYSCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MACS
⎯
INTM1
INTM0
NMIEG
⎯
⎯
RAME
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R/W
⎯
R/W
R/W
R/W
⎯
⎯
R/W
SYSCR is an 8-bit readable-writable register that selects saturating or non-saturating calculation
for the MAC instruction, selects the interrupt control mode, selects the detected edge for NMI, and
enables or disenables on-chip RAM.
SYSCR is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. SYSCR is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 7—MAC Saturation (MACS): Selects either saturating or non-saturating calculation for the
MAC instruction.
Bit 7
MACS
Description
0
Non-saturating calculation for MAC instruction
1
Saturating calculation for MAC instruction
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Reserved: This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 81 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Bits 5 and 4—Interrupt Control Mode 1 and 0 (INTM1, INTM0): These bits select the control
mode of the interrupt controller. For details of the interrupt control modes, see section 5.4.1,
Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation.
Bit 5
Bit 4
INTM1
INTM0
Interrupt Control
Mode
Description
0
0
0
Control of interrupts by I bit
1
—
Setting prohibited
0
2
Control of interrupts by I2 to I0 bits and IPR
1
—
Setting prohibited
1
(Initial value)
Bit 3—NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the valid edge of the NMI interrupt input.
Bit 3
NMIEG
Description
0
An interrupt is requested at the falling edge of NMI input
1
An interrupt is requested at the rising edge of NMI input
(Initial value)
Bit 2— Reserved: Only 0 should be written to this bit.
Bit 1—Reserved: This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 0—RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is
initialized when the reset status is released. It is not initialized in software standby mode.
Bit 0
RAME
Description
0
On-chip RAM is disabled
1
On-chip RAM is enabled
(Initial value)
Note: When the DTC is used, the RAME bit must not be cleared to 0.
Page 82 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
3.2.3
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Pin Function Control Register (PFCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
AE3
AE2
AE1
AE0
0
0
0
0
1/0
1/0
0
1/0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PFCR is an 8-bit readable-writeable register that performs address output control in on-chip ROMenabled expansion mode.
PFCR is initialized to H'0D/H'00 by a reset and in the hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4— Reserved: Only 0 should be written to these bits.
Bits 3 to 0—Address Output Enable 3 to 0 (AE3 to AE0): These bits select enabling or
disabling of address outputs A8 to A23 in on-chip ROM-disabled expansion mode and on-chip
ROM-enabled expansion mode. When a pin is enabled for address output, the address is output
regardless of the corresponding DDR setting. When a pin is disabled for address output, it
becomes an output port when the corresponding DDR bit is set to 1.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 83 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
AE3
AE2
AE1
AE0
Description
0
0
0
0
A8 to A23 address output disabled
1
A8 address output enabled; A9 to A23 address output disabled
0
A8, A9 address output enabled; A10 to A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A10 address output enabled; A11 to A23 address output
disabled
0
A8 to A11 address output enabled; A12 to A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A12 address output enabled; A13 to A23 address output
disabled
0
A8 to A13 address output enabled; A14 to A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A14 address output enabled; A15 to A23 address output
disabled
0
A8 to A15 address output enabled; A16 to A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A16 address output enabled; A17 to A23 address output
disabled
0
A8 to A17 address output enabled; A18 to A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A18 address output enabled; A19 to A23 address output
disabled
0
A8 to A19 address output enabled; A20 to A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A20 address output enabled; A21 to A23 address output
disabled
(Initial value*)
0
A8 to A21 address output enabled; A22, A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A23 address output enabled
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
(Initial value*)
Note: * In on-chip ROM-enabled expansion mode, bits AE3 to AE0 are initialized to B'0000.
In on-chip ROM-disabled expansion mode, bits AE3 to AE0 are initialized to B'1101.
Address pins A0 to A7 are made address outputs by setting the corresponding DDR bits to
1.
Page 84 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
3.3
Operating Mode Descriptions
3.3.1
Mode 4
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is disabled.
Ports 1, A, B, and C function as an address bus, ports D and E function as a data bus, and part of
port F carries bus control signals.
The initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas. However, note that if 8bit access is designated by the bus controller for all areas, the bus mode switches to 8 bits.
3.3.2
Mode 5
The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is disabled.
Ports 1, A, B, and C function as an address bus, port D function as a data bus, and part of port F
carries bus control signals.
The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. However, note that if 16bit access is designated by the bus controller for any area, the bus mode switches to 16 bits and
port E becomes a data bus.
3.3.3
Mode 6
The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled.
Ports 1, A, B, and C function as input port pins immediately after a reset. Address output can be
performed by setting the corresponding DDR (data direction register) bits to 1.
Port D functions as a data bus, and part of port F carries bus control signals.
The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. However, note that if 16bit access is designated by the bus controller for any area, the bus mode switches to 16 bits and
port E becomes a data bus.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 85 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.3.4
Mode 7
The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled,
but external addresses cannot be accessed.
All I/O ports are available for use as input-output ports.
3.4
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode
The pin functions of ports 1 and A to F vary depending on the operating mode. Table 3-3 shows
their functions in each operating mode.
Table 3-3
Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
Port A
P/A*
P/A*
P
Port B
P/A*
P/A*
P*/A
P*/A
Port C
A
A
P*/A
P
Port D
D
P
PF7
P/D*
P/C*
D
P*/D
P
Port E
D
P*/D
P/C*
P/C*
P*/C
PF6 to PF4
C
PF3
C
P*/C
C
P*/C
P
P/C*
P11 to P13
P*/A
P/A*
P*/A
P/A*
P*/A
P*/A
P
Port F
Port 1
P10
P
Legend:
P: I/O port
A: Address bus output
D: Data bus I/O
C: Control signals, clock I/O
*: After reset
Page 86 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
3.5
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Address Map in Each Operating Mode
An address map of the H8S/2636 is shown in figure 3-1.
An address map of the H8S/2638 and H8S/2639 is shown in figure 3-2.
An address map of the H8S/2630 is shown in figure 3-3.
An address map of the H8S/2635 is shown in figure 3-4.
An address map of the H8S/2634 is shown in figure 3-5.
The address space is 16 Mbytes in modes 4 to 7 (advanced modes).
The address space is divided into eight areas for modes 4 to 7. For details, see section 7, Bus
Controller.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 87 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Modes 4 and 5
(advanced expanded modes
with on-chip ROM disabled)
H'000000
Mode 6
(advanced expanded mode
with on-chip ROM enabled)
H'000000
H'000000
On-chip ROM
External address
space
H'01FFFF
H'020000
H'FFAFFF
H'FFB000
H'FFAFFF
H'FFB000
Reserved area
H'FFDFFF
H'FFE000
On-chip ROM
H'01FFFF
External address
space
Reserved area
H'FFDFFF
H'FFE000
On-chip RAM*
Mode 7
(advanced single-chip mode)
H'FFE000
On-chip RAM*
H'FFEFBF
H'FFEFC0
H'FFF7FF External address space
H'FFF800
H'FFEFBF
H'FFEFC0
H'FFF7FF External address space
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF40
H'FFFF5F External address space
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF40
H'FFFF5F External address space
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
On-chip RAM
H'FFEFBF
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM
H'FFFFFF
Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing th RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.
Figure 3-1 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2636
Page 88 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Modes 4 and 5
(advanced expanded modes
with on-chip ROM disabled)
H'000000
Mode 6
(advanced expanded mode
with on-chip ROM enabled)
H'000000
H'000000
On-chip ROM
External address
space
H'03FFFF
H'040000
H'FFAFFF
H'FFB000
H'FFAFFF
H'FFB000
On-chip RAM*
Mode 7
(advanced single-chip mode)
On-chip ROM
H'03FFFF
External address
space
H'FFB000
On-chip RAM
On-chip RAM*
H'FFEFBF
H'FFEFC0
H'FFF7FF External address space
H'FFF800
H'FFEFBF
H'FFEFC0
H'FFF7FF External address space
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF40
H'FFFF5F External address space
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF40
H'FFFF5F External address space
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFEFBF
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM
H'FFFFFF
Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing th RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.
Figure 3-2 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2638 and H8S/2639
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 89 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Modes 4 and 5
(advanced expanded modes
with on-chip ROM disabled)
H'000000
Mode 6
(advanced expanded mode
with on-chip ROM enabled)
H'000000
H'000000
On-chip ROM
External address
space
H'05FFFF
H'060000
H'FFAFFF
H'FFB000
H'FFAFFF
H'FFB000
On-chip RAM*
Mode 7
(advanced single-chip mode)
On-chip ROM
H'05FFFF
External address
space
H'FFB000
On-chip RAM
On-chip RAM*
H'FFEFBF
H'FFEFC0
H'FFF7FF External address space
H'FFF800
H'FFEFBF
H'FFEFC0
H'FFF7FF External address space
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF40
H'FFFF5F External address space
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF40
H'FFFF5F External address space
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFEFBF
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM
H'FFFFFF
Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing th RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.
Figure 3-3 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2630
Page 90 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Modes 4 and 5
(advanced expanded modes
with on-chip ROM disabled)
H'000000
Mode 6
(advanced expanded mode
with on-chip ROM enabled)
Mode 7
(advanced single-chip mode)
H'000000
H'000000
On-chip ROM
On-chip ROM
External address
space
H'02FFFF
H'02FFFF
H'030000
Reserved area
H'03FFFF
H'040000
H'FFAFFF
H'FFB000
H'FFAFFF
H'FFB000
Reserved area
H'FFD7FF
H'FFD800
External address
space
Reserved area
H'FFD7FF
H'FFD800
On-chip RAM*
H'FFD800
On-chip RAM
On-chip RAM*
H'FFEFBF
H'FFEFC0
H'FFF7FF External address space
H'FFF800
H'FFEFBF
H'FFEFC0
H'FFF7FF External address space
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF40
H'FFFF5F External address space
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF40
H'FFFF5F External address space
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFEFBF
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM
H'FFFFFF
Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing th RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.
Figure 3-4 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2635
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 91 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Modes 4 and 5
(advanced expanded modes
with on-chip ROM disabled)
H'000000
Mode 6
(advanced expanded mode
with on-chip ROM enabled)
Mode 7
(advanced single-chip mode)
H'000000
H'000000
On-chip ROM
On-chip ROM
H'01FFFF
H'01FFFF
H'020000
External address
space
Reserved area
H'03FFFF
H'040000
H'FFAFFF
H'FFB000
H'FFAFFF
H'FFB000
Reserved area
H'FFD7FF
H'FFD800
External address
space
Reserved area
H'FFD7FF
H'FFD800
On-chip RAM*
H'FFD800
On-chip RAM
On-chip RAM*
H'FFEFBF
H'FFEFC0
H'FFF7FF External address space
H'FFF800
H'FFEFBF
H'FFEFC0
H'FFF7FF External address space
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF40
H'FFFF5F External address space
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF40
H'FFFF5F External address space
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFEFBF
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF60
H'FFFFBF Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM
H'FFFFFF
Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing th RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.
Figure 3-5 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2634
Page 92 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 4 Exception Handling
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.1
Overview
4.1.1
Exception Handling Types and Priority
As table 4-1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trace, direct transition*, trap
instruction, or interrupt. Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4-1. If two or more
exceptions occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Trap
instruction exceptions are accepted at all times, in the program execution state.
Exception handling sources, the stack structure, and the operation of the CPU vary depending on
the interrupt control mode set by the INTM0 and INTM1 bits of SYSCR.
Note: * Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in the
U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group only. These functions cannot be used
with the other versions.
Table 4-1
Exception Types and Priority
Priority
Exception Type
Start of Exception Handling
High
Reset
Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES
pin, or when the watchdog overflows. The CPU enters the
reset state when the RES pin is low.
1
Trace*
Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception
handling ends, if the trace (T) bit is set to 1
4
Low
Direct transition*
Starts when a direct transition occurs due to execution of a
SLEEP instruction.
Interrupt
Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception
2
handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued*
3
Trap instruction (TRAPA)* Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA)
Notes: 1. Traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. Trace exception handling is not
executed after execution of an RTE instruction.
2. Interrupt detection is not performed on completion of ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC
instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling.
3. Trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in program
execution state.
4. Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in
the U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group only. These functions cannot
be used with the other versions.
Supported by the H8S/2635.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 93 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.1.2
Exception Handling Operation
Exceptions originate from various sources. Trap instructions and interrupts are handled as follows:
1. The program counter (PC), condition code register (CCR), and extended register (EXR) are
pushed onto the stack.
2. The interrupt mask bits are updated. The T bit is cleared to 0.
3. A vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution
starts from that address.
For a reset exception, steps 2 and 3 above are carried out.
4.1.3
Exception Vector Table
The exception sources are classified as shown in figure 4-1. Different vector addresses are
assigned to different exception sources.
Table 4-2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses.
Reset
Trace
Exception
sources
External interrupts: NMI, IRQ5 to IRQ0
Interrupts
Internal interrupts: 49 (+3: Option) interrupt sources in
on-chip supporting modules
Trap instruction
Figure 4-1 Exception Sources
Page 94 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Table 4-2
Section 4 Exception Handling
Exception Vector Table
1
Vector Address*
Exception Source
Vector Number
Advanced Mode
Reset
0
H'0000 to H'0003
Reserved for system use
1
H'0004 to H'0007
2
H'0008 to H'000B
3
H'000C to H'000F
4
H'0010 to H'0013
5
H'0014 to H'0017
6
H'0018 to H'001B
7
H'001C to H'001F
8
H'0020 to H'0023
9
H'0024 to H'0027
10
H'0028 to H'002B
11
H'002C to H'002F
12
H'0030 to H'0033
13
H'0034 to H'0037
14
H'0038 to H'003B
15
H'003C to H'003F
IRQ0
16
H'0040 to H'0043
IRQ1
17
H'0044 to H'0047
IRQ2
18
H'0048 to H'004B
IRQ3
19
H'004C to H'004F
IRQ4
20
H'0050 to H'0053
IRQ5
21
H'0054 to H'0057
22
H'0058 to H'005B
23
H'005C to H'005F
24
⎜
127
H'0060 to H'0063
⎜
H'01FC to H'01FF
Trace
3
Direct Transition*
External interrupt
NMI
Trap instruction (4 sources)
Reserved for system use
External interrupt
Reserved for system use
2
Internal interrupt*
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. For details of internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.3.3, Interrupt Exception Handling
Vector Table.
3. See section 23B.11, Direct Transition for details on direct transition.
Subclock functions are available in the U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635
Group only.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 95 of 1458
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.2
Reset
4.2.1
Overview
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
A reset has the highest exception priority.
When the RES pin goes low, all current operations are stopped, and this LSI enters reset state. A
reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of on-chip supporting modules.
Immediately after a reset, interrupt control mode 0 is set.
When the RES pin goes from low to high, reset exception handling starts.
The H8S/2636 can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details see section 12,
Watchdog Timer.
4.2.2
Reset Sequence
This LSI enters reset state when the RES pin goes low.
To ensure that this LSI is reset, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 ms at power-up. To reset
during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 states.
When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, this LSI starts reset
exception handling as follows.
1. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are
initialized, the T bit is cleared to 0 in EXR, and the I bit is set to 1 in EXR and CCR.
2. The reset exception handling vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program
execution starts from the address indicated by the PC.
Figures 4-2 and 4-3 show examples of the reset sequence.
Page 96 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 4 Exception Handling
Vector
fetch
Prefetch of first program
instruction
φ
RES
Internal
address bus
(3)
(1)
(5)
Internal read
signal
Internal write
signal
Internal data
bus
High
(2)
(4)
(6)
(1) (3) Reset exception handling vector address (when power-on reset, (1) = H'000000,
(3) = H'000002)
(2) (4) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address)
(5)
Start address ((5) = (2) (4))
(6)
First program instruction
Figure 4-2 Reset Sequence (Modes 6 and 7)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 97 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 4 Exception Handling
Vector
fetch
*
Internal
processing
*
Prefetch of first program
instruction
*
φ
RES
Address bus
(1)
(3)
(5)
RD
HWR, LWR
High
D15 to D0
(2)
(4)
(6)
(1) (3) Reset exception handling vector address (when reset, (1) = H'000000,
(3) = H'000002)
(2) (4) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address)
(5)
Start address ((5) = (2) (4))
(6)
First program instruction
Note: * 3 program wait states are inserted.
Figure 4-3 Reset Sequence (Mode 4)
4.2.3
Interrupts after Reset
If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and
CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests,
including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is
always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes
the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx: 32, SP).
Page 98 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
4.2.4
Section 4 Exception Handling
State of On-Chip Supporting Modules after Reset Release
After reset release, MSTPCRA to MSTPCRD are initialized to H'3F, H'FF, H'FF, and
B'11*******1, respectively, and all modules except the DTC, enter module stop mode.
Consequently, on-chip supporting module registers cannot be read or written to. Register reading
and writing is enabled when module stop mode is exited.
Note: 1. The value of bits 5 to 0 is undefined.
4.3
Traces
Traces are enabled in interrupt control mode 2. Trace mode is not activated in interrupt control
mode 0, irrespective of the state of the T bit. For details of interrupt control modes, see section 5,
Interrupt Controller.
If the T bit in EXR is set to 1, trace mode is activated. In trace mode, a trace exception occurs on
completion of each instruction.
Trace mode is canceled by clearing the T bit in EXR to 0. It is not affected by interrupt masking.
Table 4-3 shows the state of CCR and EXR after execution of trace exception handling.
Interrupts are accepted even within the trace exception handling routine.
The T bit saved on the stack retains its value of 1, and when control is returned from the trace
exception handling routine by the RTE instruction, trace mode resumes.
Trace exception handling is not carried out after execution of the RTE instruction.
Table 4-3
Status of CCR and EXR after Trace Exception Handling
Interrupt Control Mode
CCR
I
0
2
EXR
UI
I2 to I0
T
Trace exception handling cannot be used.
1
—
—
0
Legend:
1: Set to 1
0: Cleared to 0
—: Retains value prior to execution.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 99 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.4
Interrupts
Interrupt exception handling can be requested by seven external sources (NMI, IRQ5 to IRQ0) and
49 internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 4-4 classifies the interrupt sources
and the number of interrupts of each type.
The on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts include the watchdog timer (WDT),
16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU), serial communication interface (SCI), data transfer controller
(DTC), PC break controller (PBC), A/D converter, controller area network (HCAN), motor control
PWM timer, and I2C bus interface (IIC). Each interrupt source has a separate vector address.
NMI is the highest-priority interrupt. Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The
interrupt controller has two interrupt control modes and can assign interrupts other than NMI to
eight priority/mask levels to enable multiplexed interrupt control.
For details of interrupts, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Notes: The DTC, PBC, and IIC are not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
External
interrupts
Interrupts
Internal
interrupts
NMI (1)
IRQ5 to IRQ0 (6)
WDT*1 (2)
TPU (26)
SCI (12)
DTC (1)
PBC (1)
A/D converter (1)
Motor control PWM (2)
HCAN (4)*3
IIC*2 (3) [Option]
Notes: Numbers in parentheses are the numbers of interrupt sources.
1. When the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates
an interrupt request at each counter overflow.
2. I2C bus interface is available as an option in the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630.
3. 2 sources in the H8S/2635 Group.
Figure 4-4 Interrupt Sources and Number of Interrupts
Page 100 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
4.5
Section 4 Exception Handling
Trap Instruction
Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap instruction
exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state.
The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector
number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code.
Table 4-4 shows the status of CCR and EXR after execution of trap instruction exception
handling.
Table 4-4
Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling
Interrupt Control Mode
CCR
EXR
I
UI
I2 to I0
T
0
1
—
—
—
2
1
—
—
0
Legend:
1: Set to 1
0: Cleared to 0
—: Retains value prior to execution.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 101 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.6
Stack Status after Exception Handling
Figure 4-5 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt
exception handling.
SP
SP
CCR
CCR*
PC
(16 bits)
(a) Interrupt control mode 0
EXR
Reserved*
CCR
CCR*
PC
(16 bits)
(b) Interrupt control mode 2
Note: * Ignored on return.
Figure 4-5 (1) Stack Status after Exception Handling
(Normal Modes: Not Available in the Chip)
SP
SP
CCR
EXR
Reserved*
CCR
PC
(24 bits)
PC
(24 bits)
(a) Interrupt control mode 0
(b) Interrupt control mode 2
Note: * Ignored on return.
Figure 4-5 (2) Stack Status after Exception Handling (Advanced Modes)
Page 102 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
4.7
Section 4 Exception Handling
Notes on Use of the Stack
When accessing word data or longword data, the chip assumes that the lowest address bit is 0. The
stack should always be accessed by word transfer instruction or longword transfer instruction, and
the value of the stack pointer (SP, ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following
instructions to save registers:
PUSH.W
Rn
(or MOV.W Rn, @-SP)
PUSH.L
ERn
(or MOV.L ERn, @-SP)
Use the following instructions to restore registers:
POP.W
Rn
(or MOV.W @SP+, Rn)
POP.L
ERn
(or MOV.L @SP+, ERn)
Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 4-6 shows an example of what
happens when the SP value is odd.
CCR
SP
R1L
SP
PC
PC
SP
TRAPA instruction executed
SP set to H'FFFEFF
H'FFFEFA
H'FFFEFB
H'FFFEFC
H'FFFEFD
H'FFFEFE
H'FFFEFF
MOV.B R1L, @−ER7
Data saved above SP
Contents of CCR lost
Legend: CCR: Condition code register
PC: Program counter
R1L: General register R1L
SP: Stack pointer
Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode
is 0, in advanced mode.
Figure 4-6 Operation when SP Value Is Odd
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 103 of 1458
Section 4 Exception Handling
Page 104 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.1
Overview
5.1.1
Features
The chip controls interrupts by means of an interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has the
following features:
• Two interrupt control modes
⎯ Any of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in
the system control register (SYSCR).
• Priorities settable with IPR
⎯ An interrupt priority register (IPR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Eight priority
levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except NMI.
⎯ NMI is assigned the highest priority level of 8, and can be accepted at all times.
• Independent vector addresses
⎯ All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for
the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine.
• Seven external interrupts
⎯ NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. Rising edge or falling
edge can be selected for NMI.
⎯ Falling edge, rising edge, or both edge detection, or level sensing, can be selected for IRQ5
to IRQ0.
• DTC control*
⎯ DTC activation is performed by means of interrupts.
Note: * The H8S/2635 Group is not equipped with a DTC.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 105 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.1.2
Block Diagram
A block diagram of the interrupt controller is shown in figure 5-1.
CPU
INTM1, INTM0
SYSCR
NMIEG
NMI input
NMI input unit
IRQ input
IRQ input unit
ISR
ISCR
IER
Interrupt
request
Vector
number
Priority
determination
I
Internal interrupt
request
SWDTEND to
RM0
I2 to I0
CCR
EXR
IPR
Interrupt controller
Legend:
ISCR:
IER:
ISR:
IPR:
SYSCR:
IRQ sense control register
IRQ enable register
IRQ status register
Interrupt priority register
System control register
Figure 5-1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller
Page 106 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
5.1.3
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Pin Configuration
Table 5-1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller.
Table 5-1
Interrupt Controller Pins
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Nonmaskable interrupt
NMI
Input
Nonmaskable external interrupt; rising or
falling edge can be selected
External interrupt
requests 5 to 0
IRQ5 to IRQ0 Input
5.1.4
Maskable external interrupts; rising, falling, or
both edges, or level sensing, can be selected
Register Configuration
Table 5-2 summarizes the registers of the interrupt controller.
Table 5-2
Interrupt Controller Registers
1
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
System control register
SYSCR
R/W
H'01
H'FDE5
IRQ sense control register H
ISCRH
R/W
H'00
H'FE12
IRQ sense control register L
ISCRL
R/W
H'00
H'FE13
IRQ enable register
IER
R/W
H'00
H'FE14
IRQ status register
ISR
2
R/(W)*
H'00
H'FE15
Interrupt priority register A
IPRA
R/W
H'77
H'FEC0
Interrupt priority register B
IPRB
R/W
H'77
H'FEC1
Interrupt priority register C
IPRC
R/W
H'77
H'FEC2
Interrupt priority register D
IPRD
R/W
H'77
H'FEC3
Interrupt priority register E
IPRE
R/W
H'77
H'FEC4
Interrupt priority register F
IPRF
R/W
H'77
H'FEC5
Interrupt priority register G
IPRG
R/W
H'77
H'FEC6
Interrupt priority register H
IPRH
R/W
H'77
H'FEC7
Interrupt priority register J
IPRJ
R/W
H'77
H'FEC9
Interrupt priority register K
IPRK
R/W
H'77
H'FECA
Interrupt priority register L
IPRL
R/W
H'77
H'FECB
Interrupt priority register M
IPRM
R/W
H'77
H'FECC
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Can only be written with 0 for flag clearing.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 107 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.2
Register Descriptions
Note: The H8S/2635 Group is not equipped with a DTC, a PC brake controller, or an HCAN1.
5.2.1
System Control Register (SYSCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MACS
⎯
INTM1
INTM0
NMIEG
⎯
⎯
RAME
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R/W
⎯
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
⎯
R/W
SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the interrupt control mode, and the
detected edge for NMI.
Only bits 5 to 3 are described here; for details of the other bits, see section 3.2.2, System Control
Register (SYSCR).
SYSCR is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. SYSCR is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 5 and 4—Interrupt Control Mode 1 and 0 (INTM1, INTM0): These bits select one of two
interrupt control modes for the interrupt controller.
Bit 5
Bit 4
INTM1
INTM0
Interrupt
Control Mode
Description
0
0
0
Interrupts are controlled by I bit
1
—
Setting prohibited
0
2
Interrupts are controlled by bits I2 to I0, and IPR
1
—
Setting prohibited
1
(Initial value)
Bit 3—NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the input edge for the NMI pin.
Bit 3
NMIEG
Description
0
Interrupt request generated at falling edge of NMI input
1
Interrupt request generated at rising edge of NMI input
Page 108 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
5.2.2
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Interrupt Priority Registers A to H, J to M (IPRA to IPRH, IPRJ to IPRM)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
IPR6
IPR5
IPR4
⎯
IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
Initial value :
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
R/W
⎯
R/W
R/W
R/W
⎯
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
:
:
The IPR registers are twelve 8-bit readable/writable registers that set priorities (levels 7 to 0) for
interrupts other than NMI.
The correspondence between IPR settings and interrupt sources is shown in table 5-3.
The IPR registers set a priority (level 7 to 0) for each interrupt source other than NMI.
The IPR registers are initialized to H'77 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 and 3—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Table 5-3
Correspondence between Interrupt Sources and IPR Settings
Bits
Register
6 to 4
2 to 0
IPRA
IRQ0
IRQ1
IPRB
IRQ2
IRQ4
IRQ3
IPRC
—*
IRQ5
3
DTC*
IPRD
—*
IPRE
Watchdog timer 0
3
PC break*
IPRF
TPU channel 0
TPU channel 1
1
1
A/D converter, watchdog timer 1
IPRG
TPU channel 2
TPU channel 3
IPRH
TPU channel 4
1
—*
TPU channel 5
SCI channel 1
1
—*
SCI channel 2
2
IIC (Option)*
PWM channel 1, 2
3
HCAN channel 1*
HCAN channel 0
IPRJ
IPRK
IPRL
IPRM
SCI channel 0
Notes: 1. Reserved. These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
2
2. I C bus interface is available as an option in the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630.
The IIC bit becomes reserved bit when this optional feature is not used.
3. The PC break, DTC, and HCAN channel 1 are reserved in the H8S/2635 Group.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 109 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
As shown in table 5-3, multiple interrupts are assigned to one IPR. Setting a value in the range
from H'0 to H'7 in the 3-bit groups of bits 6 to 4 and 2 to 0 sets the priority of the corresponding
interrupt. The lowest priority level, level 0, is assigned by setting H'0, and the highest priority
level, level 7, by setting H'7.
When interrupt requests are generated, the highest-priority interrupt according to the priority
levels set in the IPR registers is selected. This interrupt level is then compared with the interrupt
mask level set by the interrupt mask bits (I2 to I0) in the extend register (EXR) in the CPU, and if
the priority level of the interrupt is higher than the set mask level, an interrupt request is issued to
the CPU.
5.2.3
IRQ Enable Register (IER)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
⎯
IRQ5E
IRQ4E
IRQ3E
IRQ2E
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
IER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls enabling and disabling of interrupt requests
IRQ5 to IRQ0.
IER is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0, and should only be written with 0.
Bits 5 to 0—IRQ5 to IRQ0 Enable (IRQ5E to IRQ0E): These bits select whether IRQ5 to
IRQ0 are enabled or disabled.
Bit n
IRQnE
Description
0
IRQn interrupts disabled
1
IRQn interrupts enabled
(Initial value)
(n = 5 to 0)
Page 110 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
5.2.4
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)
ISCRH
Bit
:
14
13
12
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
11
10
9
8
IRQ5SCB IRQ5SCA IRQ4SCB IRQ4SCA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
R/W
15
ISCRL
Bit
IRQ3SCB IRQ3SCA IRQ2SCB IRQ2SCA IRQ1SCB IRQ1SCA IRQ0SCB IRQ0SCA
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The ISCR registers are 16-bit readable/writable registers that select rising edge, falling edge, or
both edge detection, or level sensing, for the input at pins IRQ5 to IRQ0.
The ISCR registers are initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 15 to 12—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0, and should only be written with 0.
Bits 11 to 0—IRQ5 Sense Control A and B (IRQ5SCA, IRQ5SCB) to IRQ0 Sense Control A
and B (IRQ0SCA, IRQ0SCB)
Bits 11 to 0
IRQ5SCB to
IRQ0SCB
IRQ5SCA to
IRQ0SCA
0
0
Interrupt request generated at IRQ5 to IRQ0 input low level
(initial value)
1
Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ5 to IRQ0 input
0
Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ5 to IRQ0 input
1
Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of
IRQ5 to IRQ0 input
1
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Description
Page 111 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.2.5
IRQ Status Register (ISR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
⎯
IRQ5F
IRQ4F
IRQ3F
IRQ2F
IRQ1F
IRQ0F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
ISR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt
requests.
ISR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
They are not initialized in software standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0.
Bits 5 to 0—IRQ5 to IRQ0 Flags (IRQ5F to IRQ0F): These bits indicate the status of IRQ5 to
IRQ0 interrupt requests.
Page 112 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Bit n
IRQnF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
(Initial value)
•
Cleared by reading IRQnF flag when IRQnF = 1, then writing 0 to IRQnF flag
•
When interrupt exception handling is executed when low-level detection is set
(IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 0) and IRQn input is high
•
When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed when falling, rising, or bothedge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 1 or IRQnSCA = 1)
•
When the DTC is activated by an IRQn interrupt, and the DISEL bit in MRB of the
DTC is cleared to 0
[Setting conditions]
•
When IRQn input goes low when low-level detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA =
0)
•
When a falling edge occurs in IRQn input when falling edge detection is set
(IRQnSCB = 0, IRQnSCA = 1)
•
When a rising edge occurs in IRQn input when rising edge detection is set
(IRQnSCB = 1, IRQnSCA = 0)
•
When a falling or rising edge occurs in IRQn input when both-edge detection is set
(IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 1)
(n = 5 to 0)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 113 of 1458
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Interrupt Sources
Interrupt sources comprise external interrupts (NMI and IRQ5 to IRQ0) and internal interrupts (49
sources).
Note: The H8S/2635 Group is not equipped with a DTC, a PC brake controller, or an HCAN1.
The H8S/2635 Group has 45 sources of internal interrupt.
5.3.1
External Interrupts
There are seven external interrupts: NMI and IRQ5 to IRQ0. Of these, NMI and IRQ5 to IRQ0
can be used to restore the chip from software standby mode.
NMI Interrupt: NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by the CPU
regardless of the interrupt control mode or the status of the CPU interrupt mask bits. The NMIEG
bit in SYSCR can be used to select whether an interrupt is requested at a rising edge or a falling
edge on the NMI pin.
The vector number for NMI interrupt exception handling is 7.
IRQ5 to IRQ0 Interrupts: Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 are requested by an input signal at pins IRQ5
to IRQ0. Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 have the following features:
• Using ISCR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level, falling
edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pins IRQ5 to IRQ0.
• Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQ5 to IRQ0 can be selected with IER.
• The interrupt priority level can be set with IPR.
• The status of interrupt requests IRQ5 to IRQ0 is indicated in ISR. ISR flags can be cleared to 0
by software.
Page 114 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
A block diagram of interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 is shown in figure 5-2.
IRQnE
IRQnSCA, IRQnSCB
IRQnF
Edge/level
detection circuit
S
Q
IRQn interrupt
request
R
IRQn input
Clear signal
Note: n = 5 to 0
Figure 5-2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0
Figure 5-3 shows the timing of setting IRQnF.
φ
IRQn
input pin
IRQnF
Figure 5-3 Timing of Setting IRQnF
The vector numbers for IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt exception handling are 21 to 16.
Detection of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupts does not depend on whether the relevant pin has been set for
input or output. However, when a pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, do not clear the
corresponding DDR to 0 and use the pin as an I/O pin for another function.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 115 of 1458
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3.2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Internal Interrupts
There are 49 sources for internal interrupts from on-chip supporting modules.
• For each on-chip supporting module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status,
and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. If both of these are set to 1
for a particular interrupt source, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller.
• The interrupt priority level can be set by means of IPR.
• The DTC can be activated by a TPU, SCI, or other interrupt request. When the DTC is
activated by an interrupt, the interrupt control mode and interrupt mask bits are not affected.
5.3.3
Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table
Table 5-4 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities.
For default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority.
Priorities among modules can be set by means of the IPR. The situation when two or more
modules are set to the same priority, and priorities within a module, are fixed as shown in
table 5-4.
Page 116 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Table 5-4
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities
Origin of
Interrupt
Source
Vector
1
Address*
Vector
Number
Advanced
Mode
7
H'001C
16
H'0040
IPRA6 to 4
IRQ1
17
H'0044
IPRA2 to 0
IRQ2
IRQ3
18
19
H'0048
H'004C
IPRB6 to 4
IRQ4
IRQ5
20
21
H'0050
H'0054
IPRB2 to 0
22
23
H'0058
H'005C
—
Interrupt Source
NMI
IRQ0
External
pin
IPR
Priority
High
Reserved for system use
—
SWDTEND (software activation
interrupt end)
DTC*
24
H'0060
IPRC2 to 0
WOVI0 (interval timer)
Watchdog
timer 0
25
H'0064
IPRD6 to 4
Reserved for system use
—
26
H'0068
—
PC break
PC break
27
3
controller*
H'006C
IPRE6 to 4
ADI (A/D conversion end)
A/D
28
H'0070
IPRE2 to 0
WOVI1 (interval timer)
Watchdog
timer 1
29
H'0074
Reserved for system use
—
30
31
H'0078
H'007C
—
TGI0A (TGR0A input
capture/compare match)
TPU
channel 0
32
H'0080
IPRF6 to 4
TGI0B (TGR0B input
capture/compare match)
33
H'0084
TGI0C (TGR0C input
capture/compare match)
34
H'0088
TGI0D (TGR0D input
capture/compare match)
35
H'008C
36
H'0090
37
to
39
H'0094
to
H'009C
3
TCI0V (overflow 0)
Reserved for system use
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
—
—
Low
Page 117 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Interrupt Source
Origin of
Interrupt
Source
TGI1A (TGR1A input
capture/compare match)
TPU
channel 1
Vector
1
Address*
Vector
Number
Advanced
Mode
IPR
Priority
40
H'00A0
IPRF2 to 0
High
TGI1B (TGR1B input
capture/compare match)
41
H'00A4
TCI1V (overflow 1)
42
H'00A8
TCI1U (underflow 1)
43
H'00AC
44
H'00B0
TGI2B (TGR2B input
capture/compare match)
45
H'00B4
TCI2V (overflow 2)
46
H'00B8
47
H'00BC
48
H'00C0
TGI3B (TGR3B input
capture/compare match)
49
H'00C4
TGI3C (TGR3C input
capture/compare match)
50
H'00C8
TGI3D (TGR3D input
capture/compare match)
51
H'00CC
TCI3V (overflow 3)
52
H'00D0
TGI2A (TGR2A input
capture/compare match)
TPU
channel 2
TCI2U (underflow 2)
TGI3A (TGR3A input
capture/compare match)
TPU
channel 3
IPRG6 to 4
IPRG2 to 0
Reserved for system use
—
53
to
55
H'00D4
to
H'00DC
—
TGI4A (TGR4A input
capture/compare match)
TPU
channel 4
56
H'00E0
IPRH6 to 4
TGI4B (TGR4B input
capture/compare match)
57
H'00E4
TCI4V (overflow 4)
58
H'00E8
TCI4U (underflow 4)
59
H'00EC
Page 118 of 1458
Low
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Interrupt Source
Origin of
Interrupt
Source
TGI5A (TGR5A input
capture/compare match)
TPU
channel 5
Vector
1
Address*
Vector
Number
Advanced
Mode
IPR
Priority
60
H'00F0
IPRH2 to 0
High
TGI5B (TGR5B input
capture/compare match)
61
H'00F4
TCI5V (overflow 5)
62
H'00F8
TCI5U (underflow 5)
63
H'00FC
Reserved for system use
—
64
to
79
H'0100
to
H'013C
—
ERI0 (receive error 0)
SCI
channel 0
80
H'0140
IPRJ2 to 0
81
H'0144
TXI0 (transmit data empty 0)
82
H'0148
TEI0 (transmission end 0)
83
H'014C
84
H'0150
RXI0 (reception completed 0)
ERI1 (receive error 1)
RXI1 (reception completed 1)
SCI
channel 1
IPRK6 to 4
85
H'0154
TXI1 (transmit data empty 1)
86
H'0158
TEI1 (transmission end 1)
87
H'015C
88
H'0160
89
H'0164
TXI2 (transmit data empty 2)
90
H'0168
TEI2 (transmission end 2)
91
H'016C
92
to
99
H'0170
to
H'018C
—
100
H'0190
IPRL2 to 0
101
H'0194
102
103
H'0198
H'019C
ERI2 (receive error 2)
RXI2 (reception completed 2)
Reserved for system use
2
I CI0 (1-byte transmission/
reception completed)
DDCSW1 (format switch)
2
I CI1
Reserved for system use
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
SCI
channel 2
—
2
IC
channel 0
2
(option)*
2
IC
channel 1
2
(option)*
IPRK2 to 0
Low
Page 119 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Interrupt Source
Origin of
Interrupt
Source
Vector
1
Address*
Vector
Number
Advanced
Mode
IPR
Priority
IPRM6 to 4
High
PWM1
PWM
channel 1
104
H'01A0
PWM2
PWM
channel 2
3
HCAN1*
105
H'01A4
106
107
H'01A8
H'01AC
ERS0, OVR0, RM1, SLE0,
RM0
ERS0, OVR0, RM1, SLE0,
RM0
HCAN0
108
109
H'01B0
H'01B4
Reserved for system use
—
110
H'01B8
111
H'01BC
IPRM2 to 0
Low
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the start address.
2
2. I C is available as an option in the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630 only. The
2
product equipped with the I C bus interface is the W-mask version.
3. The DTC, PC break, and HCAN1 interrupts are reserved in the H8S/2635 Group.
5.4
Interrupt Operation
5.4.1
Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation
Interrupt operations in the chip differ depending on the interrupt control mode.
NMI interrupts are accepted at all times except in the reset state and the hardware standby state. In
the case of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts, an enable bit is provided for
each interrupt. Clearing an enable bit to 0 disables the corresponding interrupt request. Interrupt
sources for which the enable bits are set to 1 are controlled by the interrupt controller.
Table 5-5 shows the interrupt control modes.
The interrupt controller performs interrupt control according to the interrupt control mode set by
the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in SYSCR, the priorities set in IPR, and the masking state indicated
by the I bit in the CPU’s CCR, and bits I2 to I0 in EXR.
Page 120 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Table 5-5
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Interrupt Control Modes
SYSCR
Interrupt
Priority Setting
Control Mode INTM1 INTM0 Registers
Interrupt
Mask Bits Description
0
0
—
2
1
—
0
—
I
Interrupt mask control is
performed by the I bit.
1
—
—
Setting prohibited
0
IPR
I2 to I0
8-level interrupt mask control
is performed by bits I2 to I0.
8 priority levels can be set
with IPR.
1
—
—
Setting prohibited
Figure 5-4 shows a block diagram of the priority decision circuit.
Interrupt
control
mode 0
I
Interrupt
acceptance
control
Default priority
determination
Interrupt source
Vector number
8-level
mask control
IPR
I2 to I0
Interrupt control mode 2
Figure 5-4 Block Diagram of Interrupt Control Operation
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 121 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
(1) Interrupt Acceptance Control
In interrupt control mode 0, interrupt acceptance is controlled by the I bit in CCR.
Table 5-6 shows the interrupts selected in each interrupt control mode.
Table 5-6
Interrupts Selected in Each Interrupt Control Mode (1)
Interrupt Mask Bits
Interrupt Control Mode
I
Selected Interrupts
0
0
All interrupts
1
NMI interrupts
2
*
All interrupts
Legend:
*: Don't care
(2) 8-Level Control
In interrupt control mode 2, 8-level mask level determination is performed for the selected
interrupts in interrupt acceptance control according to the interrupt priority level (IPR).
The interrupt source selected is the interrupt with the highest priority level, and whose priority
level set in IPR is higher than the mask level.
Table 5-7
Interrupts Selected in Each Interrupt Control Mode (2)
Interrupt Control Mode
Selected Interrupts
0
All interrupts
2
Highest-priority-level (IPR) interrupt whose priority level is greater
than the mask level (IPR > I2 to I0).
Page 122 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
(3) Default Priority Determination
When an interrupt is selected by 8-level control, its priority is determined and a vector number is
generated.
If the same value is set for IPR, acceptance of multiple interrupts is enabled, and so only the
interrupt source with the highest priority according to the preset default priorities is selected and
has a vector number generated.
Interrupt sources with a lower priority than the accepted interrupt source are held pending.
Table 5-8 shows operations and control signal functions in each interrupt control mode.
Table 5-8
Operations and Control Signal Functions in Each Interrupt Control Mode
Interrupt
Control
Setting
Mode
INTM1 INTM0
0
0
0
2
1
0
Interrupt Acceptance
Control
8-Level Control
I
X
IM
1
—*
X
Default Priority
Determination
T
(Trace)
I2 to I0
IPR
—
—*
—
IM
PR
T
2
Legend:
: Interrupt operation control performed
X: No operation (All interrupts enabled).
IM: Used as interrupt mask bit
PR: Sets priority.
—: Not used.
Notes: 1. Set to 1 when interrupt is accepted.
2. Keep the initial setting.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 123 of 1458
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.4.2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Interrupt Control Mode 0
Enabling and disabling of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts can be set by
means of the I bit in the CPU’s CCR. Interrupts are enabled when the I bit is cleared to 0, and
disabled when set to 1.
Figure 5-5 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case.
[1] If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
[2] The I bit is then referenced. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the interrupt request is accepted. If the I
bit is set to 1, only an NMI interrupt is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending.
[3] Interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the highest-ranked interrupt according to
the priority system is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending.
[4] When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the
current instruction has been completed.
[5] The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on
the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the
interrupt handling routine.
[6] Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This masks all interrupts except NMI.
[7] A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt
handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address.
Page 124 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Program execution status
No
Interrupt generated?
Yes
Yes
NMI
No
No
I=0
Hold pending
Yes
No
IRQ0
Yes
IRQ1
No
Yes
HCAN
Yes
Save PC and CCR
I←1
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
Figure 5-5 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in
Interrupt Control Mode 0
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 125 of 1458
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.4.3
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Interrupt Control Mode 2
Eight-level masking is implemented for IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts
by comparing the interrupt mask level set by bits I2 to I0 of EXR in the CPU with IPR.
Figure 5-6 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case.
[1] If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
[2] When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the interrupt with the highest
priority according to the interrupt priority levels set in IPR is selected, and lower-priority
interrupt requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same priority are
generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the
priority system shown in table 5-4 is selected.
[3] Next, the priority of the selected interrupt request is compared with the interrupt mask level set
in EXR. An interrupt request with a priority no higher than the mask level set at that time is
held pending, and only an interrupt request with a priority higher than the interrupt mask level
is accepted.
[4] When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the
current instruction has been completed.
[5] The PC, CCR, and EXR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC
saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from
the interrupt handling routine.
[6] The T bit in EXR is cleared to 0. The interrupt mask level is rewritten with the priority level of
the accepted interrupt.
If the accepted interrupt is NMI, the interrupt mask level is set to H'7.
[7] A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt
handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address.
Page 126 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Program execution status
Interrupt generated?
No
Yes
Yes
NMI
No
Level 7 interrupt?
No
Yes
Mask level 6
or below?
Yes
Level 6 interrupt?
No
No
Yes
Mask level 5
or below?
Level 1 interrupt?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Mask level 0?
No
Yes
Save PC, CCR, and EXR
Hold pending
Clear T bit to 0
Update mask level
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
Figure 5-6 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in
Interrupt Control Mode 2
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 127 of 1458
Page 128 of 1458
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
Internal
operation
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.
This is the contents of the saved PC, the return address)
(2) (4) Instruction code (Not executed)
(3)
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed)
(5)
SP-2
(7)
SP-4
(1)
Internal
data us
Internal
write signal
Internal
read signal
Internal
address bus
Interrupt
request signal
φ
Instruction
prefetch
(5)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Vector fetch
(12)
(11)
Internal
operation
(14)
(13)
Interrupt service
routine instruction
prefetch
(6) (8)
Saved PC and saved CCR
(9) (11) Vector address
(10) (12) Interrupt handling routine start address (vector
address contents)
(13)
Interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10) (12))
(14)
First instruction of interrupt handling routine
(6)
Stack
5.4.4
Interrupt level determination
Wait for end of instruction
Interrupt
acceptance
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence
Figure 5-7 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example shown is for the case
where interrupt control mode 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are
in on-chip memory.
Figure 5-7 Interrupt Exception Handling
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
5.4.5
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Interrupt Response Times
The chip is capable of fast word transfer instruction to on-chip memory, and the program area is
provided in on-chip ROM and the stack area in on-chip RAM, enabling high-speed processing.
Table 5-9 shows interrupt response times - the interval between generation of an interrupt request
and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The execution status
symbols used in table 5-9 are explained in table 5-10.
Table 5-9
Interrupt Response Times
5
Normal Mode*
No.
Execution Status
*1
Advanced Mode
INTM1 = 0
INTM1 = 1
INTM1 = 0
INTM1 = 1
3
3
3
3
1
Interrupt priority determination
2
Number of wait states until executing 1 to
1 to
2
instruction ends*
(19 + 2 · SI) (19 + 2 · SI)
1 to
1 to
(19 + 2 · SI) (19 + 2 · SI)
3
PC, CCR, EXR stack save
2 · SK
3 · SK
2 · SK
3 · SK
4
Vector fetch
SI
SI
2·SI
2·SI
2 · SI
2 · SI
2 · SI
2 · SI
2
2
2
2
11 to 31
12 to 32
12 to 32
13 to 33
*3
5
Instruction fetch
6
4
Internal processing*
Total (using on-chip memory)
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Two states in case of internal interrupt.
Refers to MULXS and DIVXS instructions.
Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch.
Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch.
Not implemented in the chip.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 129 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5-10 Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Statuses
Object of Access
External Device
8 Bit Bus
Symbol
Instruction fetch
SI
Branch address read
SJ
Stack manipulation
SK
16 Bit Bus
Internal
Memory
2-State
Access
3-State
Access
2-State
Access
3-State
Access
1
4
6 + 2m
2
3+m
Legend:
m: Number of wait states in an external device access.
5.5
Usage Notes
5.5.1
Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupts, the disabling becomes effective
after execution of the instruction.
In other words, when an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or
MOV, if an interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will
still be enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that
interrupt will be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt
request of higher priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the
higher-priority interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored.
The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0.
Figure 5-8 shows an example in which the TCIEV bit in the TPU’s TIER register is cleared to 0.
Page 130 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
TIER write cycle by CPU
TCFV exception handling
φ
Internal
address bus
TIER address
Internal
write signal
TCIEV
TCFV
TCFV
interrupt signal
Figure 5-8 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
The above contention will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while
the interrupt is masked.
5.5.2
Instructions that Disable Interrupts
Instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC. After any of these
instructions is executed, all interrupts including NMI are disabled and the next instruction is
always executed. When the I bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value becomes valid
two states after execution of the instruction ends.
5.5.3
Times when Interrupts Are Disabled
There are times when interrupt acceptance is disabled by the interrupt controller.
The interrupt controller disables interrupt acceptance for a 3-state period after the CPU has
updated the mask level with an LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC instruction.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 131 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.5.4
Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction
Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction.
With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer
is not accepted until the move is completed.
With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt
exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the stack in this
case is the address of the next instruction.
Therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the
following coding should be used.
L1:
5.5.5
EEPMOV.W
MOV.W
R4,R4
BNE
L1
IRQ Interrupts
When operating by clock input, acceptance of input to an IRQ pin is synchronized with the clock.
In software standby mode, the input is accepted asynchronously. For details on the input
conditions, see section 24.5.2, Control Signal Timing.
5.5.6
Notes on Use of NMI Interrupt
When the system is operating normally under conditions conforming to the specified electrical
properties, exception processing by the on-chip interrupt controller linked to the CPU is used to
execute the NMI interrupt. When operation is not normal (runaway status) due to a software
problem or abnormal input to one of the LSI’s pins, no operations can be guaranteed, including the
NMI interrupt. In such cases it is possible to cause the LSI to return to normal program execution
by applying an external reset.
Page 132 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
5.6
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
DTC Activation by Interrupt
Note: The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
5.6.1
Overview
The DTC can be activated by an interrupt. In this case, the following options are available:
• Interrupt request to CPU
• Activation request to DTC
• Selection of a number of the above
For details of interrupt requests that can be used with to activate the DTC, see section 8, Data
Transfer Controller (DTC).
5.6.2
Block Diagram
Figure 5-9 shows a block diagram of the DTC interrupt controller.
Interrupt
request
IRQ
interrupt
On-chip
supporting
module
Interrupt source
clear signal
DTC activation
request vector
number
Selection
circuit
Select
signal
Clear signal
DTCER
Control logic
DTC
Clear signal
DTVECR
SWDTE
clear signal
Determination of
priority
CPU interrupt
request vector
number
CPU
I, I2 to I0
Interrupt controller
Figure 5-9 Interrupt Control for DTC
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 133 of 1458
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.6.3
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Operation
The interrupt controller has three main functions in DTC control.
(1) Selection of Interrupt Source: Interrupt factors are selected as DTC activation request or
CPU interrupt request by the DTCE bit of DTCERA to DTCERG of DTC.
By specifying the DISEL bit of the DTC’s MRB, it is possible to clear the DTCE bit to 0 after
DTC data transfer, and request a CPU interrupt.
If DTC carries out the designate number of data transfers and the transfer counter reads 0, after
DTC data transfer, the DTCE bit is also cleared to 0, and a CPU interrupt requested.
(2) Determination of Priority: The DTC activation source is selected in accordance with the
default priority order, and is not affected by mask or priority levels. See section 8.3.3, DTC Vector
Table for the respective priority.
(3) Operation Order: If the same interrupt is selected as a DTC activation source and a CPU
interrupt source, the DTC data transfer is performed first, followed by CPU interrupt exception
handling.
Table 5-11 shows the interrupt factor clear control and selection of interrupt factors by
specification of the DTCE bit of DTCERA to DTCERG of DTC, and the DISEL bit of DTC’s
MRB.
Page 134 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5-11 Interrupt Source Selection and Clearing Control
Settings
DTC
Interrupt Source Selection/Clearing Control
DTCE
DISEL
DTC
CPU
0
*
X
Δ
1
0
Δ
X
1
Δ
Legend:
Δ : The relevant interrupt is used. Interrupt source clearing is performed.
(The CPU should clear the source flag in the interrupt handling routine.)
: The relevant interrupt is used. The interrupt source is not cleared.
X : The relevant bit cannot be used.
* : Don’t care
(4) Notes on Use: SCI and A/D converter interrupt sources are cleared when the DTC reads or
writes to the prescribed register.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 135 of 1458
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Page 136 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Note: The H8S/2635 Group is not equipped with a PBC.
6.1
Overview
The PC break controller (PBC) provides functions that simplify program debugging. Using these
functions, it is easy to create a self-monitoring debugger, enabling programs to be debugged with
the chip alone, without using an in-circuit emulator. Four break conditions can be set in the PBC:
instruction fetch, data read, data write, and data read/write.
6.1.1
Features
The PC break controller has the following features:
• Two break channels (A and B)
• The following can be set as break compare conditions:
⎯ 24 address bits
Bit masking possible
⎯ Bus cycle
Instruction fetch
Data access: data read, data write, data read/write
⎯ Bus master
Either CPU or CPU/DTC can be selected
• The timing of PC break exception handling after the occurrence of a break condition is as
follows:
⎯ Immediately before execution of the instruction fetched at the set address (instruction
fetch)
⎯ Immediately after execution of the instruction that accesses data at the set address (data
access)
• Module stop mode can be set
⎯ The initial setting is for PBC operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing
module stop mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 137 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 6-1 shows a block diagram of the PC break controller.
Mask control
Output control
BCRA
BARA
Control
logic
Comparator
Match signal
Internal address
Control
logic
Comparator
Match signal
Mask control
BARB
Output control
Access
status
PC break
interrupt
BCRB
Figure 6-1 Block Diagram of PC Break Controller
Page 138 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
6.1.3
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Register Configuration
Table 6-1 shows the PC break controller registers.
Table 6-1
PC Break Controller Registers
Initial Value
1
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Reset
Address*
Break address register A
BARA
R/W
H'XX000000
H'FE00
Break address register B
BARB
R/W
H'XX000000
H'FE04
R/(W)
*2
H'00
H'FE08
*2
H'00
H'FE09
H'FF
H'FDEA
Break control register A
BCRA
Break control register B
BCRB
R/(W)
Module stop control register C
MSTPCRC
R/W
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only a 0 may be written to this bit to clear the flag.
6.2
Register Descriptions
6.2.1
Break Address Register A (BARA)
Bit
31
⎯
...
24
...
BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA . . . BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA
⎯
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
...
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value Unde- . . . Unde- 0
... 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
fined
fined
.
.
.
Read/Write
⎯
⎯ R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W . . . R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
BARA is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies the channel A break address.
BAA23 to BAA0 are initialized to H'000000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 31 to 24—Reserved: These bits return an undefined value if read, and cannot be modified.
Bits 23 to 0—Break Address A23 to A0 (BAA23 to BAA0): These bits hold the channel A PC
break address.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 139 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.2.2
Break Address Register B (BARB)
BARB is the channel B break address register. The bit configuration is the same as for BARA.
6.2.3
Break Control Register A (BCRA)
7
6
CMFA
CDA
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
5
4
3
2
1
BAMRA2 BAMRA1 BAMRA0 CSELA1 CSELA0
0
BIEA
Note: * Only a 0 may be written to this bit to clear the flag.
BCRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls channel A PC breaks. BCRA (1) selects
the break condition bus master, (2) specifies bits subject to address comparison masking, and (3)
specifies whether the break condition is applied to an instruction fetch or a data access. It also
contains a condition match flag.
BCRA is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—Condition Match Flag A (CMFA): Set to 1 when a break condition set for channel A is
satisfied. This flag is not cleared to 0.
Bit 7
CMFA
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
1
[Setting condition]
•
•
Page 140 of 1458
When 0 is written to CMFA after reading CMFA = 1
(Initial value)
When a condition set for channel A is satisfied
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Bit 6—CPU Cycle/DTC Cycle Select A (CDA): Selects the channel A break condition bus
master.
Bit 6
CDA
Description
0
PC break is performed when CPU is bus master
1
PC break is performed when CPU or DTC is bus master
(Initial value)
Bits 5 to 3—Break Address Mask Register A2 to A0 (BAMRA2 to BAMRA0): These bits
specify which bits of the break address (BAA23 to BAA0) set in BARA are to be masked.
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
BAMRA2 BAMRA1 BAMRA0 Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
All BARA bits are unmasked and included in break conditions
(Initial value)
1
BAA0 (lowest bit) is masked, and not included in break
conditions
0
BAA1, BAA0 (lower 2 bits) are masked, and not included in
break conditions
1
BAA2 to BAA0 (lower 3 bits) are masked, and not included in
break conditions
0
BAA3 to BAA0 (lower 4 bits) are masked, and not included in
break conditions
1
BAA7 to BAA0 (lower 8 bits) are masked, and not included in
break conditions
0
BAA11 to BAA0 (lower 12 bits) are masked, and not included in
break conditions
1
BAA15 to BAA0 (lower 16 bits) are masked, and not included in
break conditions
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 141 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Bits 2 and 1—Break Condition Select A (CSELA1, CSELA0): These bits selection an
instruction fetch, data read, data write, or data read/write cycle as the channel A break condition.
Bit 2
Bit 1
CSELA1
CSELA0
Description
0
0
Instruction fetch is used as break condition
1
Data read cycle is used as break condition
0
Data write cycle is used as break condition
1
Data read/write cycle is used as break condition
1
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Break Interrupt Enable A (BIEA): Enables or disables channel A PC break interrupts.
Bit 0
BIEA
Description
0
PC break interrupts are disabled
1
PC break interrupts are enabled
6.2.4
(Initial value)
Break Control Register B (BCRB)
BCRB is the channel B break control register. The bit configuration is the same as for BCRA.
6.2.5
Module Stop Control Register C (MSTPCRC)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPC7 MSTPC6 MSTPC5 MSTPC4 MSTPC3 MSTPC2 MSTPC1 MSTPC0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCRC is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTPC4 bit is set to 1, PC break controller operation is stopped at the end of the bus
cycle, and module stop mode is entered. Register read/write accesses are not possible in module
stop mode. For details, see section 23A.5, 23B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRC is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 4—Module Stop (MSTPC4): Specifies the PC break controller module stop mode.
Page 142 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Bit 4
MSTPC4
Description
0
PC break controller module stop mode is cleared
1
PC break controller module stop mode is set
6.3
(Initial value)
Operation
The operation flow from break condition setting to PC break interrupt exception handling is shown
in section 6.3.1, PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch, and 6.3.2, PC Break Interrupt Due to
Data Access, taking the example of channel A.
6.3.1
PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch
(1) Initial settings
⎯ Set the break address in BARA. For a PC break caused by an instruction fetch, set the
address of the first instruction byte as the break address.
⎯ Set the break conditions in BCRA.
BCRA bit 6 (CDA): With a PC break caused by an instruction fetch, the bus master must
be the CPU. Set 0 to select the CPU.
BCRA bits 5 to 3 (BAMA2 to BAMA0): Set the address bits to be masked.
BCRA bits 2, 1 (CSELA1, CSELA0): Set 00 to specify an instruction fetch as the break
condition.
BCRA bit 0 (BIEA): Set to 1 to enable break interrupts.
(2) Satisfaction of break condition
⎯ When the instruction at the set address is fetched, a PC break request is generated
immediately before execution of the fetched instruction, and the condition match flag
(CMFA) is set.
(3) Interrupt handling
⎯ After priority determination by the interrupt controller, PC break interrupt exception
handling is started.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 143 of 1458
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.3.2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
PC Break Interrupt Due to Data Access
(1) Initial settings
⎯ Set the break address in BARA. For a PC break caused by a data access, set the target
ROM, RAM, I/O, or external address space address as the break address. Stack operations
and branch address reads are included in data accesses.
⎯ Set the break conditions in BCRA.
BCRA bit 6 (CDA): Select the bus master.
BCRA bits 5 to 3 (BAMA2 to BAMA0): Set the address bits to be masked.
BCRA bits 2, 1 (CSELA1, CSELA0): Set 01, 10, or 11 to specify data access as the break
condition.
BCRA bit 0 (BIEA): Set to 1 to enable break interrupts.
(2) Satisfaction of break condition
⎯ After execution of the instruction that performs a data access on the set address, a PC break
request is generated and the condition match flag (CMFA) is set.
(3) Interrupt handling
⎯ After priority determination by the interrupt controller, PC break interrupt exception
handling is started.
6.3.3
Notes on PC Break Interrupt Handling
(1) The PC break interrupt is shared by channels A and B. The channel from which the request
was issued must be determined by the interrupt handler.
(2) The CMFA and CMFB flags are not cleared to 0, so 0 must be written to CMFA or CMFB
after first reading the flag while it is set to 1. If the flag is left set to 1, another interrupt will be
requested after interrupt handling ends.
(3) A PC break interrupt generated when the DTC is the bus master is accepted after the bus has
been transferred to the CPU by the bus controller.
Page 144 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
6.3.4
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Operation in Transitions to Power-Down Modes
The operation when a PC break interrupt is set for an instruction fetch at the address after a
SLEEP instruction is shown below.
(1) When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from high-speed (medium-speed) mode to
sleep mode, or from subactive mode* to subsleep mode*:
After execution of the SLEEP instruction, a transition is not made to sleep mode or subsleep
mode*, and PC break interrupt handling is executed. After execution of PC break interrupt
handling, the instruction at the address after the SLEEP instruction is executed (figure 6-2
(A)).
(2) When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from high-speed (medium-speed) mode to
subactive mode*:
After execution of the SLEEP instruction, a transition is made to subactive mode* via direct
transition exception handling. After the transition, PC break interrupt handling is executed,
then the instruction at the address after the SLEEP instruction is executed (figure 6-2 (B)).
(3) When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from subactive mode* to high-speed
(medium-speed) mode:
After execution of the SLEEP instruction, and following the clock oscillation settling time, a
transition is made to high-speed (medium-speed) mode via direct transition exception
handling. After the transition, PC break interrupt handling is executed, then the instruction at
the address after the SLEEP instruction is executed (figure 6-2 (C)).
(4) When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition to software standby mode or watch mode*:
After execution of the SLEEP instruction, a transition is made to the respective mode, and PC
break interrupt handling is not executed. However, the CMFA or CMFB flag is set (figure 6-2
(D)).
Note: * Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in the
U-mask and W-mask versions only.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 145 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
SLEEP instruction
execution
SLEEP instruction
execution
SLEEP instruction
execution
SLEEP instruction
execution
PC break exception
handling
System clock
→ subclock*
Subclock* →
system clock,
oscillation settling time
Transition to
respective mode
Execution of instruction
after sleep instruction
Direct transition*
exception handling
Direct transition*
exception handling
PC break exception
handling
Subactive*
mode
PC break exception
handling
(D)
(A)
Execution of instruction
after sleep instruction
Execution of instruction
after sleep instruction
(B)
(C)
High-speed
(medium-speed)
mode
Note: * Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available
in the U-mask and W-mask versions only.
Figure 6-2 Operation in Power-Down Mode Transitions
6.3.5
PC Break Operation in Continuous Data Transfer
If a PC break interrupt is generated when the following operations are being performed, exception
handling is executed on completion of the specified transfer.
(1) When a PC break interrupt is generated at the transfer address of an EEPMOV.B instruction:
PC break exception handling is executed after all data transfers have been completed and the
EEPMOV.B instruction has ended.
(2) When a PC break interrupt is generated at a DTC transfer address:31
PC break exception handling is executed after the DTC has completed the specified number of
data transfers, or after data for which the DISEL bit is set to 1 has been transferred.
Page 146 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
6.3.6
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
When Instruction Execution Is Delayed by One State
Caution is required in the following cases, as instruction execution is one state later than usual.
(1) When the PBC is enabled (i.e. when the break interrupt enable bit is set to 1), execution of a
one-word branch instruction (Bcc d:8, BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, or RTS) located in onchip ROM or RAM is always delayed by one state.
(2) When break interruption by instruction fetch is set, the set address indicates on-chip ROM or
RAM space, and that address is used for data access, the instruction that executes the data
access is one state later than in normal operation.
(3) When break interruption by instruction fetch is set and a break interrupt is generated, if the
executing instruction immediately preceding the set instruction has one of the addressing
modes shown below, and that address indicates on-chip ROM or RAM, and that address is
used for data access, the instruction will be one state later than in normal operation.
@ERn, @(d:16,ERn), @(d:32,ERn), @-ERn/ERn+, @aa:8, @aa:24, @aa:32, @(d:8,PC),
@(d:16,PC), @@aa:8
(4) When break interruption by instruction fetch is set and a break interrupt is generated, if the
executing instruction immediately preceding the set instruction is NOP or SLEEP, or has
#xx,Rn as its addressing mode, and that instruction is located in on-chip ROM or RAM, the
instruction will be one state later than in normal operation.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 147 of 1458
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.3.7
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Additional Notes
(1) When a PC break is set for an instruction fetch at the address following a BSR, JSR, JMP,
TRAPA, RTE, or RTS instruction:
Even if the instruction at the address following a BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, or RTS
instruction is fetched, it is not executed, and so a PC break interrupt is not generated by the
instruction fetch at the next address.
(2) When the I bit is set by an LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC instruction, a PC break interrupt
becomes valid two states after the end of the executing instruction. If a PC break interrupt is
set for the instruction following one of these instructions, since interrupts, including NMI, are
disabled for a 3-state period in the case of LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC, the next instruction
is always executed. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
(3) When a PC break is set for an instruction fetch at the address following a Bcc instruction:
A PC break interrupt is generated if the instruction at the next address is executed in
accordance with the branch condition, but is not generated if the instruction at the next address
is not executed.
(4) When a PC break is set for an instruction fetch at the branch destination address of a Bcc
instruction:
A PC break interrupt is generated if the instruction at the branch destination is executed in
accordance with the branch condition, but is not generated if the instruction at the branch
destination is not executed.
Page 148 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.1
Overview
The chip has an on-chip bus controller (BSC) that manages the external address space divided into
eight areas. The bus specifications, such as bus width and number of access states, can be set
independently for each area, enabling multiple memories to be connected easily.
The bus controller also has a bus arbitration function, and controls the operation of the internal bus
masters: the CPU, and data transfer controller (DTC).
Note: The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
7.1.1
Features
The features of the bus controller are listed below.
• Manages external address space in area units
⎯ Manages the external space as 8 areas of 2-Mbytes
⎯ Bus specifications can be set independently for each area
⎯ Burst ROM interface can be set
• Basic bus interface
⎯ 8-bit access or 16-bit access can be selected for each area
⎯ 2-state access or 3-state access can be selected for each area
⎯ Program wait states can be inserted for each area
• Burst ROM interface
⎯ Burst ROM interface can be set for area 0
⎯ Choice of 1- or 2-state burst access
• Idle cycle insertion
⎯ An idle cycle can be inserted in case of an external read cycle between different areas
⎯ An idle cycle can be inserted in case of an external write cycle immediately after an
external read cycle
• Write buffer functions
⎯ External write cycle and internal access can be executed in parallel
• Bus arbitration function
⎯ Includes a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus mastership among the CPU and DTC
• Other features
⎯ External bus release function
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 149 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 7-1 shows a block diagram of the bus controller.
Internal
address bus
Area decoder
ABWCR
External bus control signals
ASTCR
BCRH
Bus
controller
Wait
controller
Internal data bus
BCRL
Internal control
signals
Bus mode signal
WCRH
WCRL
CPU bus request signal
DTC bus request signal
Bus arbiter
CPU bus acknowledge signal
DTC bus acknowledge signal
Legend:
ABWCR:
ASTCR:
BCRH:
BCRL:
WCRH:
WCRL:
Bus width control register
Access state control register
Bus control register H
Bus control register L
Wait control register H
Wait control register L
Figure 7-1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller
Page 150 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
7.1.3
Section 7 Bus Controller
Pin Configuration
Table 7-1 summarizes the pins of the bus controller.
Table 7-1
Bus Controller Pins
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Address strobe
AS
Output
Strobe signal indicating that address output on address
bus is enabled.
Read
RD
Output
Strobe signal indicating that external space is being
read.
High write
HWR
Output
Strobe signal indicating that external space is to be
written, and upper half (D15 to D8) of data bus is
enabled.
Low write
LWR
Output
Strobe signal indicating that external space is to be
written, and lower half (D7 to D0) of data bus is enabled.
7.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 7-2 summarizes the registers of the bus controller.
Table 7-2
Bus Controller Registers
1
Address*
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Bus width control register
ABWCR
R/W
H'FF/H'00*
H'FED0
Access state control register
ASTCR
R/W
H'FF
H'FED1
Wait control register H
WCRH
R/W
H'FF
H'FED2
Wait control register L
WCRL
R/W
H'FF
H'FED3
Bus control register H
BCRH
R/W
H'D0
H'FED4
2
Bus control register L
BCRL
R/W
H'08
H'FED5
Pin function control register
PFCR
R/W
H'0D/H'00
H'FDEB
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Determined by the MCU operating mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 151 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.2
Register Descriptions
7.2.1
Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR)
Bit
:
Modes 5 to 7
Initial value :
RW
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ABW7
ABW6
ABW5
ABW4
ABW3
ABW2
ABW1
ABW0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Mode 4
Initial value :
RW
:
ABWCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that designates each area for either 8-bit access or
16-bit access.
ABWCR sets the data bus width for the external memory space. The bus width for on-chip
memory and internal I/O registers is fixed regardless of the settings in ABWCR.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, ABWCR is initialized to H'FF in modes 5, 6, 7, and
to H'00 in mode 4. It is not initialized in software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 0—Area 7 to 0 Bus Width Control (ABW7 to ABW0): These bits select whether the
corresponding area is to be designated for 8-bit access or 16-bit access.
Bit n
ABWn
Description
0
Area n is designated for 16-bit access
1
Area n is designated for 8-bit access
(n = 7 to 0)
Page 152 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
7.2.2
Section 7 Bus Controller
Access State Control Register (ASTCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AST7
AST6
AST5
AST4
AST3
AST2
AST1
AST0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
ASTCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that designates each area as either a 2-state access
space or a 3-state access space.
ASTCR sets the number of access states for the external memory space. The number of access
states for on-chip memory and internal I/O registers is fixed regardless of the settings in ASTCR.
ASTCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 0—Area 7 to 0 Access State Control (AST7 to AST0): These bits select whether the
corresponding area is to be designated as a 2-state access space or a 3-state access space.
Wait state insertion is enabled or disabled at the same time.
Bit n
ASTn
Description
0
Area n is designated for 2-state access
Wait state insertion in area n external space is disabled
1
Area n is designated for 3-state access
Wait state insertion in area n external space is enabled
(Initial value)
(n = 7 to 0)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 153 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.2.3
Wait Control Registers H and L (WCRH, WCRL)
WCRH and WCRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that select the number of program wait
states for each area.
Program waits are not inserted in the case of on-chip memory or internal I/O registers.
WCRH and WCRL are initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not
initialized in software standby mode.
WCRH
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
W71
W70
W61
W60
W51
W50
W41
W40
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 7 and 6—Area 7 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W71, W70): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 7 in external space is accessed while the AST7 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 7
Bit 6
W71
W70
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 7 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 7 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 7 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 7 is accessed
(Initial value)
Page 154 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
1
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bits 5 and 4—Area 6 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W61, W60): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 6 in external space is accessed while the AST6 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 5
Bit 4
W61
W60
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 6 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 6 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 6 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 6 is accessed
(Initial value)
1
Bits 3 and 2—Area 5 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W51, W50): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 5 in external space is accessed while the AST5 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 3
Bit 2
W51
W50
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 5 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 5 is accessed
1
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 5 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 5 is accessed
(Initial value)
Bits 1 and 0—Area 4 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W41, W40): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 4 in external space is accessed while the AST4 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 1
Bit 0
W41
W40
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 4 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 4 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 4 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 4 is accessed
(Initial value)
1
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 155 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
WCRL
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
W31
W30
W21
W20
W11
W10
W01
W00
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 7 and 6—Area 3 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W31, W30): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 3 in external space is accessed while the AST3 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 7
Bit 6
W31
W30
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 3 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 3 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 3 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 3 is accessed
(Initial value)
1
Bits 5 and 4—Area 2 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W21, W20): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 2 in external space is accessed while the AST2 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 5
Bit 4
W21
W20
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 2 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 2 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 2 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 2 is accessed
(Initial value)
Page 156 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
1
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bits 3 and 2—Area 1 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W11, W10): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 1 in external space is accessed while the AST1 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 3
Bit 2
W11
W10
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 1 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 1 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 1 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 1 is accessed
(Initial value)
1
Bits 1 and 0—Area 0 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W01, W00): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 0 in external space is accessed while the AST0 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 1
Bit 0
W01
W00
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 0 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 0 is accessed
1
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 0 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 0 is accessed
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 157 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.2.4
Bus Control Register H (BCRH)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
ICIS1
ICIS0
1
1
0
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
⎯
⎯
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
BRSTRM BRSTS1 BRSTS0
BCRH is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects enabling or disabling of idle cycle
insertion, and the memory interface for area 2 to 5, and 0.
BCRH is initialized to H'D0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 7—Idle Cycle Insert 1 (ICIS1): Selects whether or not one idle cycle state is to be inserted
between bus cycles when successive external read cycles are performed in different areas.
Bit 7
ICIS1
Description
0
Idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external read cycles in different areas
1
Idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read cycles in different areas
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Idle Cycle Insert 0 (ICIS0): Selects whether or not one idle cycle state is to be inserted
between bus cycles when successive external read and external write cycles are performed .
Bit 6
ICIS0
Description
0
Idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles
1
Idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles
(Initial value)
Page 158 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bit 5—Burst ROM Enable (BRSTRM): Selects whether area 0 is used as a burst ROM
interface.
Bit 5
BRSTRM
Description
0
Area 0 is basic bus interface
1
Area 0 is burst ROM interface
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Burst Cycle Select 1 (BRSTS1): Selects the number of burst cycles for the burst ROM
interface.
Bit 4
BRSTS1
Description
0
Burst cycle comprises 1 state
1
Burst cycle comprises 2 states
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Burst Cycle Select 0 (BRSTS0): Selects the number of words that can be accessed in a
burst ROM interface burst access.
Bit 3
BRSTS0
Description
0
Max. 4 words in burst access
1
Max. 8 words in burst access
(Initial value)
Bits 2 to 0—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to these bits.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 159 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.2.5
Bit
Bus Control Register L (BCRL)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
WDBE
⎯
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
⎯
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
BCRL is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs selection of the external bus-released
state protocol, enabling or disabling of the write data buffer function.
BCRL is initialized to H'08 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to these bits.
Bit 5—Reserved: It is always read as 0. Cannot be written to.
Bit 4—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to this bit.
Bit 3—Reserved: Only 1 should be written to this bit.
Bit 2—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to this bit.
Bit 1—Write Data Buffer Enable (WDBE): This bit selects whether or not to use the write
buffer function in the external write cycle.
Bit 1
WDBE
Description
0
Write data buffer function not used
1
Write data buffer function used
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to these bits.
Page 160 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
7.2.6
Section 7 Bus Controller
Pin Function Control Register (PFCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
AE3
AE2
AE1
AE0
0
0
0
0
1/0
1/0
0
1/0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PFCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the address output in on-chip ROM-enabled
expansion mode.
PFCR is initialized to H'0D/H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its previous
state in software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to these bits.
Bits 3 to 0—Address Output Enable 3 to 0 (AE3 to AE0): These bits select enabling or
disabling of address outputs A8 to A23 in on-chip ROM-disabled expansion mode and on-chip
ROM-enabled expansion mode. When a pin is enabled for address output, the address is output
regardless of the corresponding DDR setting. When a pin is disabled for address output, it
becomes an output port when the corresponding DDR bit is set to 1.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 161 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
AE3
AE2
AE1
AE0
Description
0
0
0
0
A8 to A23 address output disabled
1
A8 address output enabled; A9 to A23 address output disabled
0
A8, A9 address output enabled; A10 to A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A10 address output enabled; A11 to A23 address output
disabled
0
A8 to A11 address output enabled; A12 to A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A12 address output enabled; A13 to A23 address output
disabled
0
A8 to A13 address output enabled; A14 to A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A14 address output enabled; A15 to A23 address output
disabled
0
A8 to A15 address output enabled; A16 to A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A16 address output enabled; A17 to A23 address output
disabled
0
A8 to A17 address output enabled; A18 to A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A18 address output enabled; A19 to A23 address output
disabled
0
A8 to A19 address output enabled; A20 to A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A20 address output enabled; A21 to A23 address output
disabled
(Initial value*)
0
A8 to A21 address output enabled; A22, A23 address output
disabled
1
A8 to A23 address output enabled
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
(Initial value*)
Note: * In on-chip ROM-enabled expansion mode, bits AE3 to AE0 are initialized to B'0000.
In on-chip ROM-disabled expansion mode, bits AE3 to AE0 are initialized to B'1101.
Address pins A0 to A7 are made address outputs by setting the corresponding DDR bits to
1.
Page 162 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.3
Overview of Bus Control
7.3.1
Area Partitioning
In advanced mode, the bus controller partitions the 16 Mbytes address space into eight areas, 0 to
7, in 2-Mbyte units, and performs bus control for external space in area units. In normal mode*, it
controls a 64-kbyte address space comprising part of area 0. Figure 7-2 shows an outline of the
memory map.
Note: * Not available in the chip.
H'000000
H'0000
Area 0
(2 Mbytes)
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
Area 1
(2 Mbytes)
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
Area 2
(2 Mbytes)
H'FFFF
H'5FFFFF
H'600000
Area 3
(2 Mbytes)
H'7FFFFF
H'800000
Area 4
(2 Mbytes)
H'9FFFFF
H'A00000
Area 5
(2 Mbytes)
H'BFFFFF
H'C00000
Area 6
(2 Mbytes)
H'DFFFFF
H'E00000
Area 7
(2 Mbytes)
H'FFFFFF
(1)
Advanced mode
(2)
Normal mode*
Note: * Not available in the chip.
Figure 7-2 Overview of Area Partitioning
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 163 of 1458
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.3.2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bus Specifications
The external space bus specifications consist of three elements: bus width, number of access
states, and number of program wait states.
The bus width and number of access states for on-chip memory and internal I/O registers are
fixed, and are not affected by the bus controller.
Bus Width: A bus width of 8 or 16 bits can be selected with ADWCR. An area for which an 8-bit
bus is selected functions as an 8-bit access space, and an area for which a 16-bit bus is selected
functions as a16-bit access space.
If all areas are designated for 8-bit access, 8-bit bus mode is set; if any area is designated for 16-bit
access, 16-bit bus mode is set. When the burst ROM interface is designated, 16-bit bus mode is
always set.
Number of Access States: Two or three access states can be selected with ASTCR. An area for
which 2-state access is selected functions as a 2-state access space, and an area for which 3-state
access is selected functions as a 3-state access space.
With the burst ROM interface, the number of access states may be determined without regard to
ASTCR.
When 2-state access space is designated, wait insertion is disabled.
Number of Program Wait States: When 3-state access space is designated by ASTCR, the
number of program wait states to be inserted automatically is selected with WCRH and WCRL.
From 0 to 3 program wait states can be selected.
Table 7-3 shows the bus specifications for each basic bus interface area.
Page 164 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Table 7-3
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bus Specifications for Each Area (Basic Bus Interface)
ABWCR
ASTCR
WCRH, WCRL
ABWn
ASTn
Wn1
Wn0
Bus Width
Program Wait
Access States States
0
0
—
—
16
2
0
1
0
0
3
0
1
Bus Specifications (Basic Bus Interface)
1
1
0
2
1
1
0
—
—
1
0
0
1
7.3.3
3
8
2
0
3
0
1
1
0
2
1
3
Memory Interfaces
The chip's memory interfaces comprise a basic bus interface that allows direct connection or
ROM, SRAM, and so on, and a burst ROM interface that allows direct connection of burst ROM.
The memory interface can be selected independently for each area.
An area for which the basic bus interface is designated functions as normal space, and an area for
which the burst ROM interface is designated functions as burst ROM space.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 165 of 1458
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.3.4
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Interface Specifications for Each Area
The initial state of each area is basic bus interface, 3-state access space. The initial bus width is
selected according to the operating mode. The bus specifications described here cover basic items
only, and the sections on each memory interface (7.4, Basic Bus Interface, and 7.5, Burst ROM
Interface) should be referred to for further details.
Area 0: Area 0 includes on-chip ROM, and in ROM-disabled expansion mode, all of area 0 is
external space. In ROM-enabled expansion mode, the space excluding on-chip ROM is external
space.
Either basic bus interface or burst ROM interface can be selected for area 0.
Areas 1 to 6: In external expansion mode, all of areas 1 to 6 is external space.
Only the basic bus interface can be used for areas 1 to 6.
Area 7: Area 7 includes the on-chip RAM and internal I/O registers. In external expansion mode,
the space excluding the on-chip RAM and internal I/O registers is external space. The on-chip
RAM is enabled when the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is set to 1; when the
RAME bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM is disabled and the corresponding space becomes
external space.
Only the basic bus interface can be used for the area 7.
Page 166 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.4
Basic Bus Interface
7.4.1
Overview
The basic bus interface enables direct connection of ROM, SRAM, and so on.
The bus specifications can be selected with ABWCR, ASTCR, WCRH, and WCRL (see
table 7-3).
7.4.2
Data Size and Data Alignment
Data sizes for the CPU and other internal bus masters are byte, word, and longword. The bus
controller has a data alignment function, and when accessing external space, controls whether the
upper data bus (D15 to D8) or lower data bus (D7 to D0) is used according to the bus
specifications for the area being accessed (8-bit access space or 16-bit access space) and the data
size.
8-Bit Access Space: Figure 7-3 illustrates data alignment control for the 8-bit access space. With
the 8-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) is always used for accesses. The amount of
data that can be accessed at one time is one byte: a word transfer instruction is performed as two
byte accesses, and a longword transfer instruction, as four byte accesses.
Upper data bus
Lower data bus
D15
D8 D7
D0
Byte size
Word size
1st bus cycle
2nd bus cycle
1st bus cycle
Longword size
2nd bus cycle
3rd bus cycle
4th bus cycle
Figure 7-3 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (8-Bit Access Space)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 167 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
16-Bit Access Space: Figure 7-4 illustrates data alignment control for the 16-bit access space.
With the 16-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) and lower data bus (D7 to D0) are
used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte or one word,
and a longword transfer instruction is executed as two word transfer instructions.
In byte access, whether the upper or lower data bus is used is determined by whether the address is
even or odd. The upper data bus is used for an even address, and the lower data bus for an odd
address.
Lower data bus
Upper data bus
D15
D8 D7
D0
Byte size
• Even address
Byte size
• Odd address
Word size
Longword
size
1st bus cycle
2nd bus cycle
Figure 7-4 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (16-Bit Access Space)
Page 168 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
7.4.3
Section 7 Bus Controller
Valid Strobes
Table 7-4 shows the data buses used and valid strobes for the access spaces.
In a read, the RD signal is valid without discrimination between the upper and lower halves of the
data bus.
In a write, the HWR signal is valid for the upper half of the data bus, and the LWR signal for the
lower half.
Table 7-4
Area
8-bit access
space
Data Buses Used and Valid Strobes
Access Read/
Size
Write
Address
Valid
Strobe
Upper Data Bus
(D15 to D8)
Lower data bus
(D7 to D0)
Byte
Read
—
RD
Valid
Invalid
Write
—
HWR
Read
Even
RD
16-bit access Byte
space
Odd
Valid
Invalid
Invalid
Valid
Even
HWR
Valid
Hi-Z
Odd
LWR
Hi-Z
Valid
Read
—
RD
Valid
Valid
Write
—
HWR, LWR Valid
Valid
Write
Word
Hi-Z
Note: Hi-Z:
High impedance.
Invalid: Input state; input value is ignored.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 169 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.4.4
Basic Timing
8-Bit 2-State Access Space: Figure 7-5 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 2-state access space.
When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used.
The LWR pin is fixed high. Wait states cannot be inserted.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Invalid
HWR
LWR
High
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
Valid
High impedance
Figure 7-5 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 2-State Access Space
Page 170 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
8-Bit 3-State Access Space: Figure 7-6 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 3-state access space.
When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used.
The LWR pin is fixed high. Wait states can be inserted.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Invalid
HWR
LWR
High
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
Valid
High impedance
Figure 7-6 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 3-State Access Space
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 171 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
16-Bit 2-State Access Space: Figures 7-7 to 7-9 show bus timings for a 16-bit 2-state access
space. When a 16-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used
for the even address, and the lower half (D7 to D0) for the odd address.
Wait states cannot be inserted.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Invalid
HWR
LWR
High
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
Valid
High impedance
Figure 7-7 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (1) (Even Address Byte Access)
Page 172 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bus cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Invalid
D7 to D0
Valid
HWR
High
LWR
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
High impedance
Valid
Figure 7-8 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (2) (Odd Address Byte Access)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 173 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bus cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
HWR
LWR
Write
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
Figure 7-9 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (3) (Word Access)
Page 174 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
16-Bit 3-State Access Space: Figures 7-10 to 7-12 show bus timings for a 16-bit 3-state access
space. When a 16-bit access space is accessed , the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used
for the even address, and the lower half (D7 to D0) for the odd address.
Wait states can be inserted.
Bus cycle
T2
T1
T3
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Invalid
HWR
LWR
High
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
Valid
High impedance
Figure 7-10 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (1) (Even Address Byte Access)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 175 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Invalid
D7 to D0
Valid
HWR
High
LWR
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
High impedance
Valid
Figure 7-11 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (2) (Odd Address Byte Access)
Page 176 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
HWR
LWR
Write
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
Note: n = 0 to 7
Figure 7-12 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (3) (Word Access)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 177 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.4.5
Wait Control
When accessing external space, the chip can extend the bus cycle by inserting one or more wait
states (Tw). There are two ways of inserting wait states: program wait insertion.
Program Wait Insertion
From 0 to 3 wait states can be inserted automatically between the T2 state and T3 state on an
individual area basis in 3-state access space, according to the settings of WCRH and WCRL.
Figure 7-13 shows an example of wait state insertion timing.
By program wait
T1
T2
Tw
Tw
Tw
T3
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
Data bus
Read data
HWR, LWR
Write
Data bus
Write data
Figure 7-13 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing
The settings after a reset are: 3-state access, 3 program wait state insertion.
Page 178 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
7.5
Burst ROM Interface
7.5.1
Overview
Section 7 Bus Controller
In this LSI, the area 0 external space can be set as burst ROM space and burst ROM interfacing
performed. Burst ROM space interfacing allows 16-bit ROM capable of burst access to be
accessed at high-speed.
The BRSTRM bit of BCRH sets area 0 as burst ROM space. CPU instruction fetches (only) can be
performed using a maximum of 4-word or 8-word continuous burst access. 1 state or 2 states can
be selected in the case of burst access.
7.5.2
Basic Timing
The AST0 bit of ASTCR sets the number of access states in the initial cycle (full access) of the
burst ROM interface. Wait states can be inserted when the AST0 bit is set to 1. The burst cycle
can be set for 1 state or 2 sttes by setting the BRSTS1 bit of BCRH. Wait states cannot be inserted.
When area 0 is set as burst ROM space, area 0 is a 16-bit access space regardless of the ABW0 bit
of ABWCR.
When the BRSTS0 bit of BCRH is cleared to 0, 4-word max. burst access is performed. When the
BRSTS0 bit is set to 1, 8-word max. burst access is performed.
Figures 7-14 (a) and (b) show the basic access timing for the burst ROM space.
Figure 7-14 (a) is an example when both the AST0 and BRSTS1 bits are set to 1.
Figure 7-14 (b) is an example when both the AST0 and BRSTS1 bits are set to 0.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 179 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
Full access
T1
T2
Burst access
T3
T1
T2
T1
T2
φ
Low address only changes
Address bus
AS
RD
Data bus
Read data
Read data
Read data
Figure 7-14 (a) Example Burst ROM Access Timing (AST0 = BRSTS1 = 1)
Full access
T1
T2
Burst access
T1
T1
φ
Low address only changes
Address bus
AS
RD
Data bus
Read data
Read data Read data
Figure 7-14 (b) Example Burst ROM Access Timing (AST0 = BRSTS1 = 0)
Page 180 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
7.5.3
Section 7 Bus Controller
Wait Control
As with the basic bus interface, program waits can be inserted in the burst ROM interface initial
cycle (full access). See section 7.4.5, Wait Control.
Wait states cannot be inserted in the burst cycle.
7.6
Idle Cycle
7.6.1
Operation
When the chip accesses external space, it can insert a 1-state idle cycle (TI) between bus cycles in
the following two cases: (1) when read accesses between different areas occur consecutively, and
(2) when a write cycle occurs immediately after a read cycle. By inserting an idle cycle it is
possible, for example, to avoid data collisions between ROM, with a long output floating time, and
high-speed memory, I/O interfaces, and so on.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 181 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
(1) Consecutive Reads between Different Areas
If consecutive reads between different areas occur while the ICIS1 bit in BCRH is set to 1, an idle
cycle is inserted at the start of the second read cycle.
Figure 7-15 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read
cycle from ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a read cycle from SRAM,
each being located in a different area. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in
cycle B between the read data from ROM and that from SRAM. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted,
and a data collision is prevented.
Bus cycle A
φ
T1
T2
Bus cycle B
T3
T1
Bus cycle A
T2
φ
Address bus
Address bus
CS* (area A)
CS* (area A)
CS* (area B)
CS* (area B)
RD
RD
Data bus
Data bus
Long output
floating time
(a) Idle cycle not inserted
(ICIS1 = 0)
T1
T2
T3
Bus cycle B
TI
T1
T2
Data
collision
(b) Idle cycle inserted
(Initial value ICIS1 = 1)
Note: * The CS signal is generated externally rather than inside the LSI device.
Figure 7-15 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (1)
Page 182 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
(2) Write after Read
If an external write occurs after an external read while the ICIS0 bit in BCRH is set to 1, an idle
cycle is inserted at the start of the write cycle.
Figure 7-16 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read
cycle from ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a CPU write cycle. In (a), an
idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in cycle B between the read data from ROM and
the CPU write data. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented.
Bus cycle A
φ
T1
T2
T3
Bus cycle B
T1
T2
Bus cycle A
φ
Address bus
Address bus
CS* (area A)
CS* (area A)
CS* (area B)
CS* (area B)
RD
RD
T1
T2
T3
Bus cycle B
TI
T1
T2
Possibility of overlap between
CS (area B) and RD
(a) Idle cycle not inserted
(ICIS1 = 0)
(b) Idle cycle inserted
(Initial value ICIS1 = 1)
Note: * The CS signal is generated externally rather than inside the LSI device.
Figure 7-16 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (2)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 183 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
(3) Relationship between Chip Select (CS*) Signal and Read (RD) Signal
Depending on the system’s load conditions, the RD signal may lag behind the CS signal*. An
example is shown in figure 7-17.
In this case, with the setting for no idle cycle insertion (a), there may be a period of overlap
between the bus cycle A RD signal and the bus cycle B CS signal.
Setting idle cycle insertion, as in (b), however, will prevent any overlap between the RD and CS
signals.
In the initial state after reset release, idle cycle insertion (b) is set.
Note: * The CS signal is generated externally rather than inside the LSI device.
Bus cycle A
T1
φ
T2
Bus cycle B
T3
T1
Bus cycle A
T2
φ
Address bus
Address bus
CS* (area A)
CS* (area A)
CS* (area B)
CS* (area B)
RD
RD
HWR
HWR
Data bus
Data bus
Long output
floating time
(a) Idle cycle not inserted
(ICIS0 = 0)
T1
T2
T3
Bus cycle B
TI
T1
T2
Data
collision
(b) Idle cycle inserted
(Initial value ICIS0 = 1)
Note: * The CS signal is generated externally rather than inside the LSI device.
Figure 7-17 Relationship between Chip Select (CS)* and Read (RD)
Page 184 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
7.6.2
Section 7 Bus Controller
Pin States During Idle Cycles
Table 7-5 shows the pin states during idle cycles.
Table 7-5 Pin States During Idle Cycles
Pins
Pin State
A23 to A0
Content identical to immediately following bus cycle
D15 to D0
High impedance
AS
High level
RD
High level
HWR
High level
LWR
High level
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 185 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.7
Write Data Buffer Function
The chip has a write data buffer function in the external data bus. Using this function enables the
write data buffer to be accessed in parallel. The write data buffer function is made available by
setting the WDBE bit in BCRL to 1.
Figure 7-18 shows an example of the timing when the write data buffer function is used. When
this function is used, if an external write continues for 2 states or longer, and there is an internal
access next, only an external write is executed in the first state, but from the next state onward an
internal access (on-chip memory or internal I/O register read/write) is executed in parallel with the
external write rather than waiting until it ends.
On-chip memory read Internal I/O register read
External write cycle
T1
T2
TW
TW
T3
φ
Internal address bus
Internal memory
Internal I/O register address
Internal read signal
A23 to A0
External
space
write
External address
HWR, LWR
D15 to D0
Figure 7-18 Example of Timing when Write Data Buffer Function Is Used
Page 186 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
7.8
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bus Arbitration
Note: The H8S/2635 Group is not equipped with a DTC.
7.8.1
Overview
The chip has a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus master operations.
There are two bus masters, the CPU and DTC which perform read/write operations when they
have possession of the bus. Each bus master requests the bus by means of a bus request signal. The
bus arbiter determines priorities at the prescribed timing, and permits use of the bus by means of a
bus request acknowledge signal. The selected bus master then takes possession of the bus and
begins its operation.
7.8.2
Operation
The bus arbiter detects the bus masters’ bus request signals, and if the bus is requested, sends a bus
request acknowledge signal to the bus master making the request. If there are bus requests from
more than one bus master, the bus request acknowledge signal is sent to the one with the highest
priority. When a bus master receives the bus request acknowledge signal, it takes possession of the
bus until that signal is canceled.
The order of priority of the bus masters is as follows:
(High)
7.8.3
DTC
>
CPU
(Low)
Bus Transfer Timing
Even if a bus request is received from a bus master with a higher priority than that of the bus
master that has acquired the bus and is currently operating, the bus is not necessarily transferred
immediately. There are specific times at which each bus master can relinquish the bus.
CPU: The CPU is the lowest-priority bus master, and if a bus request is received from the DTC,
the bus arbiter transfers the bus to the bus master that issued the request. The timing for transfer of
the bus is as follows:
• The bus is transferred at a break between bus cycles. However, if a bus cycle is executed in
discrete operations, as in the case of a longword-size access, the bus is not transferred between
the operations. See appendix A.5, Bus States during Instruction Execution, for timings at
which the bus is not transferred.
• If the CPU is in sleep mode, it transfers the bus immediately.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 187 of 1458
Section 7 Bus Controller
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
DTC: The DTC sends the bus arbiter a request for the bus when an activation request is generated.
The DTC can release the bus after a vector read, a register information read (3 states), a single data
transfer, or a register information write (3 states). It does not release the bus during a register
information read (3 states), a single data transfer, or a register information write (3 states).
7.9
Resets and the Bus Controller
In a reset, the chip, including the bus controller, enters the reset state at that point, and an
executing bus cycle is discontinued.
Page 188 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Note: The H8S/2635 Group is not equipped with a DTC.
8.1
Overview
The chip includes a data transfer controller (DTC). The DTC can be activated by an interrupt or
software, to transfer data.
8.1.1
Features
• Transfer possible over any number of channels
⎯ Transfer information is stored in memory
⎯ One activation source can trigger a number of data transfers (chain transfer)
• Wide range of transfer modes
⎯ Normal, repeat, and block transfer modes available
⎯ Incrementing, decrementing, and fixing of source and destination addresses can be selected
• Direct specification of 16-Mbyte address space possible
⎯ 24-bit transfer source and destination addresses can be specified
• Transfer can be set in byte or word units
• A CPU interrupt can be requested for the interrupt that activated the DTC
⎯ An interrupt request can be issued to the CPU after one data transfer ends
⎯ An interrupt request can be issued to the CPU after the specified data transfers have
completely ended
• Activation by software is possible
• Module stop mode can be set
⎯ The initial setting enables DTC registers to be accessed. DTC operation is halted by setting
module stop mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 189 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 8-1 shows a block diagram of the DTC.
The DTC’s register information is stored in the on-chip RAM*. A 32-bit bus connects the DTC to
the on-chip RAM (1 kbyte), enabling 32-bit/1-state reading and writing of the DTC register
information.
Note: * When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must be set to 1.
Internal address bus
CPU interrupt
request
Legend:
MRA, MRB:
CRA, CRB:
SAR:
DAR:
DTCERA to DTCERG:
DTVECR:
On-chip
RAM
Register information
MRA MRB
CRA
CRB
DAR
SAR
Control logic
DTC
DTC service
request
DTVECR
Interrupt
request
DTCERA to
DTCERG
Interrupt controller
Internal data bus
DTC mode registers A and B
DTC transfer count registers A and B
DTC source address register
DTC destination address register
DTC enable registers A to G
DTC vector register
Figure 8-1 Block Diagram of DTC
Page 190 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
8.1.3
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Register Configuration
Table 8-1 summarizes the DTC registers.
Table 8-1
DTC Registers
1
Initial Value
Address*
Undefined
MRB
—*
2
—*
—*
3
—*
DTC source address register
SAR
—
*2
Undefined
DTC destination address register
DAR
2
Undefined
DTC transfer count register A
CRA
—*
2
—*
DTC transfer count register B
CRB
—*
Undefined
—*
3
—*
DTC enable registers
DTCER
R/W
H'00
H'FE16 to H'FE1C
DTC vector register
DTVECR
R/W
H'00
H'FE1F
Module stop control register A
MSTPCRA
R/W
H'3F
H'FDE8
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
DTC mode register A
MRA
DTC mode register B
2
2
Undefined
Undefined
3
3
—*
3
—*
3
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Registers within the DTC cannot be read or written to directly.
3. Register information is located in on-chip RAM addresses H'EBC0 to H'EFBF. It cannot
be located in external memory space. When the DTC is used, do not clear the RAME
bit in SYSCR to 0.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 191 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2
Register Descriptions
8.2.1
DTC Mode Register A (MRA)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SM1
SM0
DM1
DM0
MD1
MD0
DTS
Sz
Initial value :
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Bit
:
:
*: Undefined
MRA is an 8-bit register that controls the DTC operating mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Source Address Mode 1 and 0 (SM1, SM0): These bits specify whether SAR is
to be incremented, decremented, or left fixed after a data transfer.
Bit 7
Bit 6
SM1
SM0
Description
0
—
SAR is fixed
1
0
SAR is incremented after a transfer
(by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1)
1
SAR is decremented after a transfer
(by –1 when Sz = 0; by –2 when Sz = 1)
Bits 5 and 4—Destination Address Mode 1 and 0 (DM1, DM0): These bits specify whether
DAR is to be incremented, decremented, or left fixed after a data transfer.
Bit 5
Bit 4
DM1
DM0
Description
0
—
DAR is fixed
1
0
DAR is incremented after a transfer
(by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1)
1
DAR is decremented after a transfer
(by –1 when Sz = 0; by –2 when Sz = 1)
Page 192 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Bits 3 and 2—DTC Mode (MD1, MD0): These bits specify the DTC transfer mode.
Bit 3
Bit 2
MD1
MD0
Description
0
0
Normal mode
1
Repeat mode
0
Block transfer mode
1
—
1
Bit 1—DTC Transfer Mode Select (DTS): Specifies whether the source side or the destination
side is set to be a repeat area or block area, in repeat mode or block transfer mode.
Bit 1
DTS
Description
0
Destination side is repeat area or block area
1
Source side is repeat area or block area
Bit 0—DTC Data Transfer Size (Sz): Specifies the size of data to be transferred.
Bit 0
Sz
Description
0
Byte-size transfer
1
Word-size transfer
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 193 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.2
DTC Mode Register B (MRB)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CHNE
DISEL
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Bit
:
:
*: Undefined
MRB is an 8-bit register that controls the DTC operating mode.
Bit 7—DTC Chain Transfer Enable (CHNE): Specifies chain transfer. With chain transfer, a
number of data transfers can be performed consecutively in response to a single transfer request.
In data transfer with CHNE set to 1, determination of the end of the specified number of transfers,
clearing of the interrupt source flag, and clearing of DTCER is not performed.
Bit 7
CHNE
Description
0
End of DTC data transfer (activation waiting state is entered)
1
DTC chain transfer (new register information is read, then data is transferred)
Bit 6—DTC Interrupt Select (DISEL): Specifies whether interrupt requests to the CPU are
disabled or enabled after a data transfer.
Bit 6
DISEL
Description
0
After a data transfer ends, the CPU interrupt is disabled unless the transfer counter is
0 (the DTC clears the interrupt source flag of the activating interrupt to 0)
1
After a data transfer ends, the CPU interrupt is enabled (the DTC does not clear the
interrupt source flag of the activating interrupt to 0)
Bits 5 to 0—Reserved: These bits have no effect on DTC operation in the chip, and should
always be written with 0.
Page 194 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
8.2.3
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
DTC Source Address Register (SAR)
23
22
21
20
19
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Bit
:
:
*: Undefined
SAR is a 24-bit register that designates the source address of data to be transferred by the DTC.
For word-size transfer, specify an even source address.
8.2.4
DTC Destination Address Register (DAR)
23
22
21
20
19
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Bit
:
:
*: Undefined
DAR is a 24-bit register that designates the destination address of data to be transferred by the
DTC. For word-size transfer, specify an even destination address.
8.2.5
DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Bit
:
:
CRAH
CRAL
*: Undefined
CRA is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 195 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
In normal mode, the entire CRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65536). It is
decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000.
In repeat mode or block transfer mode, the CRA is divided into two parts: the upper 8 bits
(CRAH) and the lower 8 bits (CRAL). CRAH holds the number of transfers while CRAL
functions as an 8-bit transfer counter (1 to 256). CRAL is decremented by 1 every time data is
transferred, and the contents of CRAH are sent when the count reaches H'00. This operation is
repeated.
8.2.6
DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Bit
:
:
*: Undefined
CRB is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC in
block transfer mode. It functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536) that is decremented by 1
every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000.
8.2.7
Bit
DTC Enable Registers (DTCER)
:
Initial value:
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTCE7
DTCE6
DTCE5
DTCE4
DTCE3
DTCE2
DTCE1
DTCE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The DTC enable registers comprise seven 8-bit readable/writable registers, DTCERA to DTCERG
with bits corresponding to the interrupt sources that can control enabling and disabling of DTC
activation. These bits enable or disable DTC service for the corresponding interrupt sources.
The DTC enable registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Page 196 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Bit n—DTC Activation Enable (DTCEn)
Bit n
DTCEn
Description
0
DTC activation by this interrupt is disabled
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When the DISEL bit is 1 and the data transfer has ended
•
When the specified number of transfers have ended
DTC activation by this interrupt is enabled
[Holding condition]
•
When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended
(n = 7 to 0)
A DTCE bit can be set for each interrupt source that can activate the DTC. The correspondence
between interrupt sources and DTCE bits is shown in table 8-4, together with the vector number
generated for each interrupt controller.
For DTCE bit setting, use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR for reading and
writing. If all interrupts are masked, multiple activation sources can be set at one time by writing
data after executing a dummy read on the relevant register.
8.2.8
DTC Vector Register (DTVECR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SWDTE DTVEC6 DTVEC5 DTVEC4 DTVEC3 DTVEC2 DTVEC1 DTVEC0
Initial value:
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*1
R/W*2
R/W*2
R/W*2
R/W*2
R/W*2
R/W*2
R/W*2
Notes: 1. Only 1 can be written to the SWDTE bit.
2. Bits DTVEC6 to DTVEC0 can be written to when SWDTE = 0.
DTVECR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables DTC activation by
software, and sets a vector number for the software activation interrupt.
DTVECR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 197 of 1458
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 7—DTC Software Activation Enable (SWDTE): Enables or disables DTC activation by
software.
Bit 7
SWDTE
Description
0
DTC software activation is disabled
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended
•
When 0 is written to the DISEL bit after a software-activated data transfer end
interrupt (SWDTEND) request has been sent to the CPU
DTC software activation is enabled
[Holding conditions]
•
When the DISEL bit is 1 and data transfer has ended
•
When the specified number of transfers have ended
•
During data transfer due to software activation
Bits 6 to 0—DTC Software Activation Vectors 6 to 0 (DTVEC6 to DTVEC0): These bits
specify a vector number for DTC software activation.
The vector address is expressed as H'0400 + ((vector number) << 1). <<1 indicates a one-bit leftshift. For example, when DTVEC6 to DTVEC0 = H'10, the vector address is H'0420.
Page 198 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
8.2.9
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPA7
MSTPA6
MSTPA5
MSTPA4
MSTPA3
MSTPA2
MSTPA1
MSTPA0
Initial value
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCRA is a 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTPA6 bit in MSTPCRA is set to 1, the DTC operation stops at the end of the bus
cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. However, 1 cannot be written in the MSTPA6
bit while the DTC is operating. For details, see section 23A.5, 23B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRA is initialized to H'3F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 6—Module Stop (MSTPA6): Specifies the DTC module stop mode.
Bit 6
MSTPA6
Description
0
DTC module stop mode cleared
1
DTC module stop mode set
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
(Initial value)
Page 199 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3
Operation
8.3.1
Overview
When activated, the DTC reads register information that is already stored in memory and transfers
data on the basis of that register information. After the data transfer, it writes updated register
information back to memory. Pre-storage of register information in memory makes it possible to
transfer data over any required number of channels. Setting the CHNE bit to 1 makes it possible to
perform a number of transfers with a single activation.
Figure 8-2 shows a flowchart of DTC operation.
Start
Read DTC vector
Next transfer
Read register information
Data transfer
Write register information
CHNE =1
Yes
No
Transfer Counter= 0
or DISEL = 1
Yes
No
Clear an activation flag
Clear DTCER
End
Interrupt exception
handling
Figure 8-2 Flowchart of DTC Operation
Page 200 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
The DTC transfer mode can be normal mode, repeat mode, or block transfer mode.
The 24-bit SAR designates the DTC transfer source address and the 24-bit DAR designates the
transfer destination address. After each transfer, SAR and DAR are independently incremented,
decremented, or left fixed.
Table 8-2 outlines the functions of the DTC.
Table 8-2
DTC Functions
Address Registers
Transfer Mode
Activation Source
Transfer
Source
Transfer
Destination
•
Normal mode
•
IRQ
24 bits
24 bits
⎯ One transfer request transfers one
byte or one word
•
TPU TGI
•
SCI TXI or RXI
⎯ Memory addresses are incremented
or decremented by 1 or 2
•
A/D converter ADI
•
Motor control PWM
CMI
Repeat mode
•
⎯ One transfer request transfers one
byte or one word
HCAN RM0
(mail box 0)
•
Software
⎯ Up to 65,536 transfers possible
•
⎯ Memory addresses are incremented
or decremented by 1 or 2
⎯ After the specified number of
transfers (1 to 256), the initial state
resumes and operation continues
•
Block transfer mode
⎯ One transfer request transfers a block
of the specified size
⎯ Block size is from 1 to 256 bytes or
words
⎯ Up to 65,536 transfers possible
⎯ A block area can be designated at
either the source or destination
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 201 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.2
Activation Sources
The DTC operates when activated by an interrupt or by a write to DTVECR by software. An
interrupt request can be directed to the CPU or DTC, as designated by the corresponding DTCER
bit. An interrupt becomes a DTC activation source when the corresponding bit is set to 1, and a
CPU interrupt source when the bit is cleared to 0.
At the end of a data transfer (or the last consecutive transfer in the case of chain transfer), the
activation source or corresponding DTCER bit is cleared. Table 8-3 shows activation source and
DTCER clearance. The activation source flag, in the case of RXI0, for example, is the RDRF flag
of SCI0.
Table 8-3
Activation Source and DTCER Clearance
When the DISEL Bit Is 0 and
the Specified Number of
Activation Source Transfers Have not Ended
When the DISEL Bit Is 1, or when
the Specified Number of Transfers
Have Ended
Software activation The SWDTE bit is cleared to 0
The SWDTE bit remains set to 1
An interrupt is issued to the CPU
Interrupt activation
The corresponding DTCER bit
remains set to 1
The activation source flag is
cleared to 0
Page 202 of 1458
The corresponding DTCER bit is cleared
to 0
The activation source flag remains set to 1
A request is issued to the CPU for the
activation source interrupt
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Figure 8-3 shows a block diagram of activation source control. For details see section 5, Interrupt
Controller.
Source flag cleared
Clear
controller
Clear
DTCER
Clear request
On-chip
supporting
module
IRQ interrupt
DTVECR
Interrupt
request
Selection circuit
Select
DTC
Interrupt controller
CPU
Interrupt mask
Figure 8-3 Block Diagram of DTC Activation Source Control
When an interrupt has been designated a DTC activation source, existing CPU mask level and
interrupt controller priorities have no effect. If there is more than one activation source at the same
time, the DTC operates in accordance with the default priorities.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 203 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.3
DTC Vector Table
Figure 8-4 shows the correspondence between DTC vector addresses and register information.
Table 8-4 shows the correspondence between activation and vector addresses. When the DTC is
activated by software, the vector address is obtained from: H'0400 + (DTVECR[6:0] << 1) (where
<< 1 indicates a 1-bit left shift). For example, if DTVECR is H'10, the vector address is H'0420.
The DTC reads the start address of the register information from the vector address set for each
activation source, and then reads the register information from that start address. The register
information can be placed at predetermined addresses in the on-chip RAM. The start address of
the register information should be an integral multiple of four.
The configuration of the vector address is the same in both normal* and advanced modes, a 2-byte
unit being used in both cases. These two bytes specify the lower bits of the address in the on-chip
RAM.
Note: * Not available in the chip.
DTC vector
address
Register information
start address
Register information
Chain transfer
Figure 8-4 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Register Information
Page 204 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Table 8-4
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs
Interrupt Source
Origin of
Interrupt
Source
Vector
Number
Vector
Address
Write to DTVECR
Software
DTVECR
IRQ0
External pin
1
DTCE*
Priority
H'0400+
(DTVECR
[6:0]
<<1)
—
High
16
H'0420
DTCEA7
IRQ1
17
H'0422
DTCEA6
IRQ2
18
H'0424
DTCEA5
IRQ3
19
H'0426
DTCEA4
IRQ4
20
H'0428
DTCEA3
IRQ5
21
H'042A
DTCEA2
22 to 27
H'042C to
H'0436
—
Reserved
—
ADI (A/D conversion end)
A/D
28
H'0438
DTCEB6
Reserved
—
29 to 31
H'043A to
H'043E
—
TGI0A (GR0A compare match/
input capture)
TPU
channel 0
32
H'0440
DTCEB5
TGI0B (GR0B compare match/
input capture)
33
H'0442
DTCEB4
TGI0C (GR0C compare match/
input capture)
34
H'0444
DTCEB3
TGI0D (GR0D compare match/
input capture)
35
H'0446
DTCEB2
Reserved
—
36 to 39
H'0448 to
H'044E
—
TGI1A (GR1A compare match/
input capture)
TPU
channel 1
40
H'0450
DTCEB1
41
H'0452
DTCEB0
44
H'0458
DTCEC7
45
H'045A
DTCEC6
TGI1B (GR1B compare match/
input capture)
TGI2A (GR2A compare match/
input capture)
TGI2B (GR2B compare match/
input capture)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
TPU
channel 2
Low
Page 205 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Interrupt Source
Origin of
Interrupt
Source
TGI3A (GR3A compare match/
input capture)
TPU
channel 3
Vector
Number
Vector
Address
DTCE*
Priority
48
H'0460
DTCEC5
High
TGI3B (GR3B compare match/
input capture)
49
H'0462
DTCEC4
TGI3C (GR3C compare match/
input capture)
50
H'0464
DTCEC3
TGI3D (GR3D compare match/
input capture)
51
H'0466
DTCEC2
1
Reserved
—
52 to 55
H'0468 to
H'046E
—
TGI4A (GR4A compare match/
input capture)
TPU
channel 4
56
H'0470
DTCEC1
57
H'0472
DTCEC0
TGI4B (GR4B compare match/
input capture)
Reserved
—
58, 59
H'0474 to
H'0476
—
TGI5A (GR5A compare match/
input capture)
TPU
channel 5
60
H'0478
DTCED5
61
H'047A
DTCED4
TGI5B (GR5B compare match/
input capture)
Reserved
—
62 to 80
H'047C to
H'04A0
—
RXI0 (reception complete 0)
81
H'04A2
DTCEE3
TXI0 (transmit data empty 0)
SCI
channel 0
82
H'04A4
DTCEE2
Reserved
—
83, 84
H'04A6 to
H'04A8
—
RXI1 (reception complete 1)
85
H'04AA
DTCEE1
TXI1 (transmit data empty 1)
SCI
channel 1
86
H'04AC
DTCEE0
Reserved
—
87, 88
H'04AE to
H'04B0
—
RXI2 (reception complete 2)
89
H'04B2
DTCEF7
TXI2 (transmit data empty 2)
SCI
channel 2
90
H'04B4
DTCEF6
Reserved
—
91 to 97
H'04B6 to
H'04C2
—
Page 206 of 1458
Low
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Interrupt Source
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Origin of
Interrupt
Source
Vector
Number
Vector
Address
DTCE*
Priority
2
100
H'04C8
DTCEF1
High
2
1
2
I C channel 0
(option)
I CI1 (1-byte transmission/
2
reception completed)*
2
I C channel 1
(option)
102
H'04CC
DTCEF0
CMI1 (PWCYR1 compare match)
PWM
104
H'04D0
DTCEG7
105
H'04D2
DTCEG6
I CI0 (1-byte transmission/
2
reception completed)*
CMI2 (PWCYR2 compare match)
Reserved
—
106
H'04D4
—
RM0 (HCAN1 mail box 0)
HCAN1
107
H'04D6
DTCEG4
Reserved
—
108
H'04D8
—
RM0 (HCAN0 mail box 0)
HCAN0
109
H'04DA
DTCEG2
Reserved
—
110 to 124 H'04DC
to
H'04F8
—
Low
Notes: 1. DTCE bits with no corresponding interrupt are reserved, and should be written with 0.
2
2. I C bus interface is available as an option in the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630.
These bits become reserved bits when this optional feature is not used or in the
H8S/2636.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 207 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.4
Location of Register Information in Address Space
Figure 8-5 shows how the register information should be located in the address space.
Locate the MRA, SAR, MRB, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers, in that order, from the start address
of the register information (contents of the vector address). In the case of chain transfer, register
information should be located in consecutive areas.
Locate the register information in the on-chip RAM (addresses: H'FFEBC0 to H'FFEFBF).
Lower address
Register
information
start address
Chain
transfer
0
1
2
3
MRA
SAR
MRB
DAR
CRA
Register information
CRB
MRA
SAR
MRB
DAR
CRA
Register information
for 2nd transfer in
chain transfer
CRB
4 bytes
Figure 8-5 Location of Register Information in Address Space
Page 208 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
8.3.5
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Normal Mode
In normal mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data.
From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, a
CPU interrupt can be requested.
Table 8-5 lists the register information in normal mode and figure 8-6 shows memory mapping in
normal mode.
Table 8-5
Register Information in Normal Mode
Name
Abbreviation
Function
DTC source address register
SAR
Designates source address
DTC destination address register
DAR
Designates destination address
DTC transfer count register A
CRA
Designates transfer count
DTC transfer count register B
CRB
Not used
SAR
DAR
Transfer
Figure 8-6 Memory Mapping in Normal Mode
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 209 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.6
Repeat Mode
In repeat mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data.
From 1 to 256 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, the
initial state of the transfer counter and the address register specified as the repeat area is restored,
and transfer is repeated. In repeat mode the transfer counter value does not reach H'00, and
therefore CPU interrupts cannot be requested when DISEL = 0.
Table 8-6 lists the register information in repeat mode and figure 8-7 shows memory mapping in
repeat mode.
Table 8-6
Register Information in Repeat Mode
Name
Abbreviation
Function
DTC source address register
SAR
Designates source address
DTC destination address register
DAR
Designates destination address
DTC transfer count register AH
CRAH
Holds number of transfers
DTC transfer count register AL
CRAL
Designates transfer count
DTC transfer count register B
CRB
Not used
SAR or
DAR
Repeat area
Transfer
DAR or
SAR
Figure 8-7 Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode
Page 210 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
8.3.7
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Block Transfer Mode
In block transfer mode, one operation transfers one block of data. Either the transfer source or the
transfer destination is designated as a block area.
The block size is 1 to 256. When the transfer of one block ends, the initial state of the block size
counter and the address register specified as the block area is restored. The other address register
is then incremented, decremented, or left fixed.
From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, a
CPU interrupt is requested.
Table 8-7 lists the register information in block transfer mode and figure 8-8 shows memory
mapping in block transfer mode.
Table 8-7
Register Information in Block Transfer Mode
Name
Abbreviation
Function
DTC source address register
SAR
Designates source address
DTC destination address register
DAR
Designates destination address
DTC transfer count register AH
CRAH
Holds block size
DTC transfer count register AL
CRAL
Designates block size count
DTC transfer count register B
CRB
Transfer count
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 211 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
1st block
SAR or
DAR
·
·
·
DAR or
SAR
Block area
Transfer
Nth block
Figure 8-8 Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode
Page 212 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
8.3.8
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Chain Transfer
Setting the CHNE bit to 1 enables a number of data transfers to be performed consectutively in
response to a single transfer request. SAR, DAR, CRA, CRB, MRA, and MRB, which define data
transfers, can be set independently.
Figure 8-9 shows the memory map for chain transfer.
Source
Destination
Register information
CHNE = 1
DTC vector
address
Register information
start address
Register information
CHNE = 0
Source
Destination
Figure 8-9 Chain Transfer Memory Map
In the case of transfer with CHNE set to 1, an interrupt request to the CPU is not generated at the
end of the specified number of transfers or by setting of the DISEL bit to 1, and the interrupt
source flag for the activation source is not affected.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 213 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.9
Operation Timing
Figures 8-10 to 8-12 show an example of DTC operation timing.
φ
DTC activation
request
DTC
request
Data transfer
Vector read
Address
Read Write
Transfer
information read
Transfer
information write
Figure 8-10 DTC Operation Timing (Example in Normal Mode or Repeat Mode)
φ
DTC activation
request
DTC request
Data transfer
Vector read
Address
Read Write Read Write
Transfer
information read
Transfer
information write
Figure 8-11 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Block Transfer Mode,
with Block Size of 2)
Page 214 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
φ
DTC activation
request
DTC
request
Data transfer
Data transfer
Read Write
Read Write
Vector read
Address
Transfer
information
read
Transfer
Transfer
information information
write
read
Transfer
information
write
Figure 8-12 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Chain Transfer)
8.3.10
Number of DTC Execution States
Table 8-8 lists execution statuses for a single DTC data transfer, and table 8-9 shows the number
of states required for each execution status.
Table 8-8
DTC Execution Statuses
Mode
Vector Read
I
Register Information
Read/Write
Data Read
J
K
Data Write
L
Internal
Operations
M
Normal
1
6
1
1
3
Repeat
1
6
1
1
3
Block transfer
1
6
N
N
3
N: Block size (initial setting of CRAH and CRAL)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 215 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8-9
Number of States Required for Each Execution Status
Object to be Accessed
OnChip
RAM
OnChip
ROM
On-Chip I/O
Registers
External Devices
Bus width
32
16
8
16
8
8
16
16
Access states
1
1
2
2
2
3
2
3
Execution
status
Vector read
SI
—
1
—
—
4
6 + 2m
2
3+m
Register
information
read/write
SJ
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Byte data read
SK
1
1
2
2
2
3+m
2
3+m
Word data read
SK
1
1
4
2
4
6 + 2m
2
3+m
Byte data write
SL
1
1
2
2
2
3+m
2
3+m
Word data write
SL
1
1
4
2
4
6 + 2m
2
3+m
Internal operation SM
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
The number of execution states is calculated from the formula below. Note that Σ means the sum
of all transfers activated by one activation event (the number in which the CHNE bit is set to 1,
plus 1).
Number of execution states = I · (SI + 1) + Σ (J · SJ + K · SK + L · SL) + M · SM
For example, when the DTC vector address table is located in on-chip ROM, normal mode is set,
and data is transferred from the on-chip ROM to an internal I/O register, the time required for the
DTC operation is 14 states. The time from activation to the end of the data write is 11 states.
Page 216 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
8.3.11
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Procedures for Using DTC
Activation by Interrupt: The procedure for using the DTC with interrupt activation is as follows:
[1] Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in the on-chip RAM.
[2] Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address.
[3] Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1.
[4] Set the enable bits for the interrupt sources to be used as the activation sources to 1. The DTC
is activated when an interrupt used as an activation source is generated.
[5] After the end of one data transfer, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended,
the DTCE bit is cleared to 0 and a CPU interrupt is requested. If the DTC is to continue
transferring data, set the DTCE bit to 1.
Activation by Software: The procedure for using the DTC with software activation is as follows:
[1] Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in the on-chip RAM.
[2] Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address.
[3] Check that the SWDTE bit is 0.
[4] Write 1 to SWDTE bit and the vector number to DTVECR.
[5] Check the vector number written to DTVECR.
[6] After the end of one data transfer, if the DISEL bit is 0 and a CPU interrupt is not requested,
the SWDTE bit is cleared to 0. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the SWDTE bit
to 1. When the DISEL bit is 1, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended, the
SWDTE bit is held at 1 and a CPU interrupt is requested.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 217 of 1458
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.12
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Examples of Use of the DTC
(1) Normal Mode
An example is shown in which the DTC is used to receive 128 bytes of data via the SCI.
[1] Set MRA to fixed source address (SM1 = SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1 =
1, DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz = 0). The DTS bit can have
any value. Set MRB for one data transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0, DISEL = 0). Set the
SCI RDR address in SAR, the start address of the RAM area where the data will be received in
DAR, and 128 (H'0080) in CRA. CRB can be set to any value.
[2] Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address.
[3] Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1.
[4] Set the SCI to the appropriate receive mode. Set the RIE bit in SCR to 1 to enable the reception
complete (RXI) interrupt. Since the generation of a receive error during the SCI reception
operation will disable subsequent reception, the CPU should be enabled to accept receive error
interrupts.
[5] Each time reception of one byte of data ends on the SCI, the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an
RXI interrupt is generated, and the DTC is activated. The receive data is transferred from RDR
to RAM by the DTC. DAR is incremented and CRA is decremented. The RDRF flag is
automatically cleared to 0.
[6] When CRA becomes 0 after the 128 data transfers have ended, the RDRF flag is held at 1, the
DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and an RXI interrupt request is sent to the CPU. The interrupt
handling routine should perform wrap-up processing.
Page 218 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
(2) Chain Transfer
An example of DTC chain transfer is shown in which pulse output is performed using the PPG.
Chain transfer can be used to perform pulse output data transfer and PPG output trigger cycle
updating. Repeat mode transfer to the PPG’s NDR is performed in the first half of the chain
transfer, and normal mode transfer to the TPU’s TGR in the second half. This is because clearing
of the activation source and interrupt generation at the end of the specified number of transfers are
restricted to the second half of the chain transfer (transfer when CHNE = 0).
[1] Perform settings for transfer to the PPG’s NDR. Set MRA to source address incrementing
(SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), repeat mode (MD1 = 0,
MD0 = 1), and word size (Sz = 1). Set the source side as a repeat area (DTS = 1). Set MRB to
chain mode (CHNE = 1, DISEL = 0). Set the data table start address in SAR, the NDRH
address in DAR, and the data table size in CRAH and CRAL. CRB can be set to any value.
[2] Perform settings for transfer to the TPU’s TGR. Set MRA to source address incrementing
(SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 =
MD0 = 0), and word size (Sz = 1). Set the data table start address in SAR, the TGRA address
in DAR, and the data table size in CRA. CRB can be set to any value.
[3] Locate the TPU transfer register information consecutively after the NDR transfer register
information.
[4] Set the start address of the NDR transfer register information to the DTC vector address.
[5] Set the bit corresponding to TGIA in DTCER to 1.
[6] Set TGRA as an output compare register (output disabled) with TIOR, and enable the TGIA
interrupt with TIER.
[7] Set the initial output value in PODR, and the next output value in NDR. Set bits in DDR and
NDER for which output is to be performed to 1. Using PCR, select the TPU compare match
to be used as the output trigger.
[8] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1, and start the TCNT count operation.
[9] Each time a TGRA compare match occurs, the next output value is transferred to NDR and
the set value of the next output trigger period is transferred to TGRA. The activation source
TGFA flag is cleared.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 219 of 1458
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
[10] When the specified number of transfers are completed (the TPU transfer CRA value is 0), the
TGFA flag is held at 1, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and a TGIA interrupt request is sent to
the CPU. Termination processing should be performed in the interrupt handling routine.
(3) Software Activation
An example is shown in which the DTC is used to transfer a block of 128 bytes of data by means
of software activation. The transfer source address is H'1000 and the destination address is
H'2000. The vector number is H'60, so the vector address is H'04C0.
[1] Set MRA to incrementing source address (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), incrementing destination
address (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), block transfer mode (MD1 = 1, MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz =
0). The DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one block transfer by one interrupt (CHNE =
0). Set the transfer source address (H'1000) in SAR, the destination address (H'2000) in DAR,
and 128 (H'8080) in CRA. Set 1 (H'0001) in CRB.
[2] Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address (H'04C0).
[3] Check that the SWDTE bit in DTVECR is 0. Check that there is currently no transfer activated
by software.
[4] Write 1 to the SWDTE bit and the vector number (H'60) to DTVECR. The write data is H'E0.
[5] Read DTVECR again and check that it is set to the vector number (H'60). If it is not, this
indicates that the write failed. This is presumably because an interrupt occurred between steps
3 and 4 and led to a different software activation. To activate this transfer, go back to step 3.
[6] If the write was successful, the DTC is activated and a block of 128 bytes of data is transferred.
[7] After the transfer, an SWDTEND interrupt occurs. The interrupt handling routine should clear
the SWDTE bit to 0 and perform other wrap-up processing.
Page 220 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
8.4
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Interrupts
An interrupt request is issued to the CPU when the DTC finishes the specified number of data
transfers, or a data transfer for which the DISEL bit was set to 1. In the case of interrupt activation,
the interrupt set as the activation source is generated. These interrupts to the CPU are subject to
CPU mask level and interrupt controller priority level control.
In the case of activation by software, a software activated data transfer end interrupt (SWDTEND)
is generated.
When the DISEL bit is 1 and one data transfer has ended, or the specified number of transfers
have ended, after data transfer ends, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and an SWDTEND interrupt is
generated. The interrupt handling routine should clear the SWDTE bit to 0.
When the DTC is activated by software, an SWDTEND interrupt is not generated during a data
transfer wait or during data transfer even if the SWDTE bit is set to 1.
8.5
Usage Notes
Module Stop: When the MSTPA6 bit in MSTPCRA is set to 1, the DTC clock stops, and the
DTC enters the module stop state. However, 1 cannot be written in the MSTPA6 bit while the
DTC is operating.
On-Chip RAM: The MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers are all located in on-chip
RAM. When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must not be cleared to 0.
DTCE Bit Setting: For DTCE bit setting, use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and
BCLR. If all interrupts are masked, multiple activation sources can be set at one time by writing
data after executing a dummy read on the relevant register.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 221 of 1458
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Page 222 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1
Overview
The chip has 10 I/O ports (ports 1, 3 and A to F, H, J), and two input-only port (ports 4 and 9).
Table 9-1 summarizes the port functions. The pins of each port also have other functions.
Each I/O port includes a data direction register (DDR) that controls input/output, a data register
(DR) that stores output data, and a port register (PORT) used to read the pin states. The input-only
ports do not have a DR or DDR register.
Ports A to E have an on-chip pull-up MOS function, and in addition to DR and DDR, have a MOS
input pull-up control register (PCR) to control the on/off state of MOS input pull-up.
Ports 3, and A to C include an open-drain control register (ODR) that controls the on/off state of
the output buffer PMOS.
When ports 10 to 13 and A to F are used as the output pins for expanded bus control signals, they
can drive one TTL load plus a 90pF capacitance load. Those ports in other cases and ports 14 to 17
and 3 can drive one TTL load and a 30pF capacitance load. All I/O ports can drive Darlington
transistors when set to output.
Port 1 pins (P16 and P14) and port 3 pins (P35 and P32) and port F (PF3 and PF0) are Schmitttrigger inputs.
See appendix C, I/O Port Block Diagrams, for a block diagram of each port.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 223 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9-1
Port
Port Functions
Description
Port 1 • 8-bit I/O
*2
port
• Schmitttriggered
input (P16,
P14)
Pins
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/
TCLKD
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/
IRQ1
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/
TCLKC
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/
IRQ0
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/
TCLKB/A23
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/
TCLKA/A22
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/A21
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/A20
P35/SCK1/SCL0*1/
IRQ5
1
• Open-drain P34/RxD1/SDA0*
1
output
P33/TxD1/SCL1*
capability
P32/SCK0/SDA1*1/
IRQ4
• Schmitttriggered
P31/RxD0
input (P35, P30/TxD0
P32)
Port 3 • 6-bit I/O
port
Port 4 • 8-bit input
*3
port
Page 224 of 1458
P47/AN7/DA1
P46/AN6/DA0
P45/AN5
P44/AN4
P43/AN3
P42/AN2
P41/AN1
P40/AN0
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
8 bit I/O port also functioning as TPU I/O pins
(TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, TIOCA0,
TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0, TIOCA1, TIOCB1,
TIOCA2, TIOCB2), PPG output pins (PO15 to
PO8), interrupt input pins (IRQ0, IRQ1), and
address outputs (A20 to A23)
Mode 7
8-bit I/O port
also functioning as TPU I/O
pins (TCLKA,
TCLKB,
TCLKC,
TCLKD,
TIOCA0,
TIOCB0,
TIOCC0,
TIOCD0,
TIOCA1,
TIOCB1,
TIOCA2,
TIOCB2), PPG
output pins
(PO15 to
PO8), interrupt
input pins
(IRQ0, IRQ1)
6-bit I/O port also functioning as SCI (channel 0, 1) I/O pins
(TxD0, RxD0, SCK0, TxD1, RxD1, SCK1), interrupt input pins
(IRQ4, IRQ5), IIC (channel 0, 1) I/O pins (SCL0, SDA0, SCL1,
SDA1)*1
8-bit input port also functioning as A/D converter analog inputs
(AN7 to AN0) and D/A converter analog outputs (DA1, DA0)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Port
Description
Port 9 • 4-bit input
port
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pins
P93/AN11
P92/AN10
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
4-bit input port also functioning as A/D converter analog inputs
(AN11 to AN8)
P91/AN9
P90/AN8
Port A • 4-bit I/O
port
• On-chip
MOS input
pull-up
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
4-bit I/O port also functioning as SCI (channel
2) I/O pins (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2) and address
outputs (A19 to A16)
4-bit I/O port
also functioning as SCI
(channel 2)
I/O pins (TxD2,
RxD2, SCK2)
8-bit I/O port also functioning as TPU I/O pins
(TIOCB5, TIOCA5, TIOCB4, TIOCA4, TIOCD3,
TIOCC3, TIOCB3, TIIOCA3) and address
outputs (A15 to A8)
8-bit I/O port
also
functioning as
TPU I/O pins
(TIOCB5,
TIOCA5,
TIOCB4,
TIOCA4,
TIOCD3,
TIOCC3,
TIOCB3,
TIIOCA3)
8-bit I/O port also functioning as address
outputs (A7 to A0)
I/O port
Data bus input/output
I/O port
PA0/A16
• Open-drain
output
capability
Port B • 8-bit I/O
port
• On-chip
MOS input
pull-up
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
• Open-drain
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
output
capability
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
Port C • 8-bit I/O
port
• On-chip
MOS input
pull-up
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5
PC4/A4
• Open-drain PC3/A3
PC2/A2
output
capability
PC1/A1
PC0/A0
Port D • 8-bit I/O
port
• On-chip
MOS input
pull-up
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
PD5/D13
PD4/D12
PD3/D11
PD2/D10
PD1/D9
PD0/D8
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 225 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port
Description
Port E • 8-bit I/O
port
• On-chip
MOS input
pull-up
Pins
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
PE7/D7
In 8-bit-bus mode: I/O port
PE6/D6
In 16-bit-bus mode: data bus input/output
Mode 7
I/O port
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
Port F • 6-bit I/O
port
PF7/φ
When DDR = 0: input port
When DDR = 1 (after reset): φ output
• Schmitttriggered
input (PF3,
PF0)
When
DDR = 0 (after
reset): input
port
When
DDR = 1: φ
output
PF6/AS
RD, HWR, LWR outputs
I/O port
PF5/RD
ADTRG, IRQ3 input
ADTRG, IRQ3
input
PF4/HWR
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/
IRQ3
PF0/IRQ2
IRQ2 input, I/O port
Port H • 8-bit I/O
port
PH7/PWM1H
PH6/PWM1G
PH5/PWM1F
PH4/PWM1E
PH3/PWM1D
PH2/PWM1C
PH1/PWM1B
PH0/PWM1A
Function as both Motor Control PWM Timer output pins and 8bit I/O port.
Port J • 8-bit I/O
port
PJ7/PWM2H
PJ6/PWM2G
PJ5/PWM2F
PJ4/PWM2E
PJ3/PWM2D
PJ2/PWM2C
PJ1/PWM2B
PJ0/PWM2A
Function as both Motor Control PWM Timer output pins and 8bit I/O port.
2
Notes: 1. Pins for I C bus interface.
2
I C bus interface is available as an option in the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630.
2. The PPG output is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
3. The DA output is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
Page 226 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.2
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port 1
Note: The PPG output is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
9.2.1
Overview
Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 1 pins also function as PPG output pins (PO15 to PO8), TPU I/O
pins (TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0, TIOCA1,
TIOCB1, TIOCA2, and TIOCB2), external interrupt pins (IRQ0 and IRQ1), and address bus
output pins (A23 to A20). Port 1 pin functions change according to the operating mode.
Figure 9-1 shows the port 1 pin configuration.
Port 1 pins
Pin functions in modes 4 to 6
P17 (I/O) / PO15 (output) / TIOCB2 (I/O) / TCLKD (input)
P16 (I/O) / PO14 (output) / TIOCA2 (I/O) / IRQ1 (input)
P15 (I/O) / PO13 (output) / TIOCB1 (I/O) / TCLKC (input)
Port 1
P14 (I/O) / PO12 (output) / TIOCA1 (I/O) / IRQ0 (input)
P13 (I/O) / PO11 (output) / TIOCD0 (I/O) / TCLKB (input) / A23 (output)
P12 (I/O) / PO10 (output) / TIOCC0 (I/O) / TCLKA (input) / A22 (output)
P11 (I/O) / PO9 (output) / TIOCB0 (I/O) / A21 (output)
P10 (I/O) / PO8 (output) / TIOCA0 (I/O) / A20 (output)
Pin functions in mode 7
P17 (I/O) / PO15 (output) / TIOCB2 (I/O) / TCLKD (input)
P16 (I/O) / PO14 (output) / TIOCA2 (I/O) / IRQ1 (input)
P15 (I/O) / PO13 (output) / TIOCB1 (I/O) / TCLKC (input)
P14 (I/O) / PO12 (output) / TIOCA1 (I/O) / IRQ0 (input)
P13 (I/O) / PO11 (output) / TIOCD0 (I/O) / TCLKB (input)
P12 (I/O) / PO10 (output) / TIOCC0 (I/O) / TCLKA (input)
P11 (I/O) / PO9 (output) / TIOCB0 (I/O)
P10 (I/O) / PO8 (output) / TIOCA0 (I/O)
Figure 9-1 Port 1 Pin Functions
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 227 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.2
Register Configuration
Table 9-2 shows the port 1 register configuration.
Table 9-2
Port 1 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port 1 data direction register
P1DDR
W
H'00
H'FE30
Port 1 data register
P1DR
R/W
H'00
H'FF00
Port 1 register
PORT1
R
Undefined
H'FFB0
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port 1. P1DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
Setting a P1DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin, while clearing the bit
to 0 makes the pin an input pin.
P1DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17DR
P16DR
P15DR
P14DR
P13DR
P12DR
P11DR
P10DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P1DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 1 pins (P17 to P10).
P1DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Page 228 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port 1 Register (PORT1)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17
—*
P16
—*
P15
—*
P14
—*
P13
—*
P12
—*
P11
—*
P10
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Determined by state of pins P17 to P10.
PORT1 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port 1 pins (P17 to P10) must always be performed on P1DR.
If a port 1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are set to 1, the P1DR values are read. If a port 1
read is performed while P1DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORT1 contents are determined by the pin states, as
P1DDR and P1DR are initialized. PORT1 retains its prior state in software standby mode.
9.2.3
Pin Functions
Port 1 pins also function as PPG output pins (PO15 to PO8), TPU I/O pins (TCLKA, TCLKB,
TCLKC, TCLKD, TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0, TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2, and
TIOCB2), external interrupt input pins (IRQ0 and IRQ1), and address bus output pins (A23 to
A20). Port 1 pin functions are shown in table 9-3.
Note: The PPG output is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 229 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9-3
Port 1 Pin Functions
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P17/PO15/
TIOCB2/
TCLKD
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the TPU channel 2 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR2, bits IOB3 to IOB0
in TIOR2, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR2), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in
TCR0 and TCR5, bit NDER15 in NDERH, and bit P17DDR.
TPU Channel
2 Setting
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P17DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER15
—
—
0
1
TIOCB2 output
P17
input
P17
output
PO15
output
Pin function
1
TIOCB2 input *
2
TCLKD input *
Notes: 1. TIOCB2 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOB3 =
1.
2. TCLKD input when the setting for either TCR0 or TCR5 is: TPSC2
to TPSC0 = B'111.
TCLKD input when channels 2 and 4 are set to phase counting
mode.
TPU Channel
2 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOB3 to IOB0
(2)
(1)
B'0000, B'01xx
B'0000
B'0100
B'0001 to
B'0011
(2)
(2)
(1)
B'0010
(2)
B'0011
—
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'1xxx
B'0101 to
B'0111
CCLR1,
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than B'10
B'10
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
—
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
Page 230 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P16/PO14/
TIOCA2/
IRQ1
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the TPU channel 2 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR2, bits IOA3 to IOA0
in TIOR2, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR2), bit NDER14 in NDERH, and
bit P16DDR.
TPU Channel
2 Setting
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P16DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER14
—
—
0
1
TIOCA2 output
P16
input
P16
output
PO14 output
Pin function
1
TIOCA2 input *
IRQ1 input
TPU Channel
2 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOA3 to IOA0
(2)
(1)
B'0000, B'01xx
B'0000
B'0100
B'0001 to
B'0011
(2)
(1)
B'001x
B'0010
B'xx00
(1)
(2)
B'0011
Other than B'xx00
B'1xxx
B'0101 to
B'0111
CCLR1,
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than B'01
B'01
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
PWM
mode 1
2
output *
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
Notes: 1. TIOCA2 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOA3 =
1.
2. TIOCB2 output is disabled.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 231 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P15/PO13/
TIOCB1/TCLKC
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the TPU channel 1 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR1, bits IOB3 to IOB0
in TIOR1, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR1), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in
TCR0, TCR2, TCR4, and TCR5, bit NDER13 in NDERH, and bit P15DDR.
TPU Channel
1 Setting
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P15DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER13
—
—
0
1
TIOCB1 output
P15
input
P15
output
Pin function
PO13
output
1
TIOCB1 input *
2
TCLKC input *
Notes: 1. TIOCB1 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOB3
to IOB0 = B'10xx.
2. TCLKC input when the setting for either TCR0 or TCR2 is: TPSC2
to TPSC0 = B'110; or when the setting for either TCR4 or TCR5 is
TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'101.
TCLKC input when channels 2 and 4 are set to phase counting
mode.
TPU Channel
1 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOB3 to IOB0
(2)
(1)
B'0000, B'01xx
B'0000
B'0100
B'0001 to
B'0011
(2)
(2)
(1)
B'0010
(2)
B'0011
—
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'1xxx
B'0101 to
B'0111
CCLR1,
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than
B'10
B'10
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
—
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
Page 232 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P14/PO12/
TIOCA1/IRQ0
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the TPU channel 1 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR1, bits IOA3 to IOA0
in TIOR1, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR1), bit NDER12 in NDERH, and
bit P14DDR.
TPU Channel
1 Setting
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P14DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER12
—
—
0
1
TIOCA1 output
P14
input
P14
output
Pin function
PO12
output
1
TIOCA1 input *
IRQ0 input
TPU Channel
1 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOA3 to IOA0
(2)
(1)
B'0000, B'01xx
B'0000
B'0100
B'0001 to
B'0011
(2)
(1)
B'001x
B'0010
B'xx00
(1)
(2)
B'0011
Other than B'xx00
B'1xxx
B'0101 to
B'0111
CCLR1,
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than B'01
B'01
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
PWM
mode 1
2
output*
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don't care
Notes: 1. TIOCA1 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOA3 to
IOA0 = B'10xx.
2. TIOCB1 output is disabled.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 233 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P13/PO11/
TIOCD0/TCLKB/
A23
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR0, bits IOD3 to IOD0 in TIOR0L, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR0),
bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR0 to TCR2, bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit
NDER11 in NDERH, and bit P13DDR.
Operating
mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
B'0000 to B'1110
Table
Below (1)
B'1111
Table Below (2)
—
P13DDR
—
0
1
1
—
NDER11
—
—
0
1
—
TIOCD0
output
P13 input
P13 output
PO11
output
A23 output
Pin function
1
TIOCD0 input *
2
TCLKB input *
Operating
mode
Mode 7
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
—
Table
Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P13DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER11
—
—
0
1
TIOCD0
output
P13 input
P13 output
PO11 output
Pin function
1
TIOCD0 input *
2
TCLKB input *
Notes: 1. TIOCD0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOD3 to IOD0 =
B'10xx.
2. TCLKB input when the setting for TCR0 to TCR2 is: TPSC2 to
TPSC0 = B'101.
TCLKB input when channels 1 and 5 are set to phase counting
mode.
Page 234 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Pin
P13/PO11/
TIOCD0/TCLKB/
A23
Section 9 I/O Ports
Selection Method and Pin Functions
TPU Channel
0 Setting
(2)
MD3 to MD0
IOD3 to IOD0
(1)
B'0000
B'0000
B'0100
(2)
(2)
B'0010
B'0001 to
B'0011
(1)
(2)
B'0011
—
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'1xxx
B'0101 to
B'0111
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than
B'110
B'110
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
—
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 235 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P12/PO10/
TIOCC0/TCLKA/
A22
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR0, bits IOC3 to IOC0 in TIOR0L, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR0),
bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR0 to TCR5, bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit
NDER10 in NDERH, and bit P12DDR.
Operating
mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
B'0000 to B'1110
Table
Below (1)
B'1111
Table Below (2)
—
P12DDR
—
0
1
1
—
NDER10
—
—
0
1
—
TIOCC0
output
P12
input
P12
output
PO10
output
A22 output
Pin function
1
TIOCC0 input *
2
TCLKA input *
Operating
mode
Mode 7
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
—
Table
Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P12DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER10
—
—
0
1
TIOCC0
output
P12 input
P12 output
PO10 output
Pin function
1
TIOCC0 input *
2
TCLKA input *
Page 236 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Pin
P12/PO10/
TIOCC0/TCLKA/
A22
Section 9 I/O Ports
Selection Method and Pin Functions
TPU Channel
0 Setting
(2)
MD3 to MD0
IOC3 to IOC0
(1)
B'0000
B'0000
B'0100
B'0001 to
B'0011
(2)
(1)
B'001x
B'0010
B'xx00
(1)
(2)
B'0011
Other than B'xx00
B'1xxx
B'0101 to
B'0111
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than
B'101
B'101
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
PWM
mode 1
3
output*
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
Notes: 1. TIOCC0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOC3 to IOC0 =
B'10xx.
2. TCLKA input when the setting for TCR0 to TCR5 is: TPSC2 to
TPSC0 = B'100.
TCLKA input when channels 1 and 5 are set to phase counting
mode.
3. TIOCD0 output is disabled.
When BFA = 1 or BFB = 1 in TMDR0, output is disabled and setting
(2) applies.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 237 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
A21
the operating mode, the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR0, and bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR0H), bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR0,
bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit NDER9 in NDERH, and bit P11DDR.
Operating
mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
B'0000 to B'1101
Table
Below (1)
B'1110 to
B'1111
Table Below (2)
—
P11DDR
—
0
1
1
—
NDER9
—
—
0
1
—
TIOCB0
output
P11
input
P11
output
PO9
output
A21 output
Pin function
TIOCB0 input *
Operating
mode
Mode 7
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
P11DDR
NDER9
Pin function
—
Table
Below (1)
—
Table Below (2)
0
1
1
—
—
0
1
TIOCB0
output
P11
input
P11
output
PO9
output
TIOCB0 input *
Note: * TIOCB0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOB3 to IOB0 = B'10xx.
Page 238 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Pin
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/
A21
Section 9 I/O Ports
Selection Method and Pin Functions
TPU Channel
0 Setting
(2)
MD3 to MD0
IOB3 to IOB0
(1)
B'0000
B'0000
B'0100
(2)
(2)
B'0010
B'0001 to
B'0011
(1)
(2)
B'0011
—
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'1xxx
B'0101 to
B'0111
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than
B'010
B'010
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
—
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 239 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
A20
the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR0, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR0H, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR0),
bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit NDER8 in NDERH, SAE0 bit in DMABCRH, and
bit P10DDR.
Operating
mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
P10DDR
NDER8
Pin function
B'0000 to B'1110
Table
Below (1)
—
B'1101 to
B'1111
Table Below (2)
0
—
1
1
—
—
—
0
1
—
TIOCA0
output
P10
input
P10
output
PO8
output
A20 output
1
TIOCA0 input *
Operating
mode
Mode 7
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
—
Table
Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P10DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER8
—
—
0
1
TIOCA0
output
P10
input
P10
output
PO8
output
Pin function
1
TIOCA0 input *
Page 240 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Pin
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/
A20
Section 9 I/O Ports
Selection Method and Pin Functions
TPU Channel
0 Setting
(2)
MD3 to MD0
IOA3 to IOA0
(1)
B'0000
B'0000
B'0100
B'0001 to
B'0011
(2)
(1)
B'001x
B'0010
B'xx00
(1)
(2)
B'0011
Other than B'xx00
B'1xxx
B'0101 to
B'0111
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than
B'001
B'001
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
PWM
mode 1
2
output*
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
Notes: 1. TIOCA0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOA3 to IOA0 =
B'10xx.
2. TIOCB0 output is disabled.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 241 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3
Port 3
9.3.1
Overview
Port 3 is an 6-bit I/O port. Port 3 is a multi-purpose port for SCI I/O pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0,
TxD1, RxD1, SCK1), external interrupt input pins (IRQ4, IRQ5), and IIC I/O pins* (SCL0,
SDA0, SCL1, SDA1). All of the port 3 pin functions have the same operating mode. The
configuration for each of the port 3 pins is shown in figure. 9-2.
Note: * Available when using I2C bus interface as an option in the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and
H8S/2630 (the product equipped with the I2C bus interface is the W-mask version).
Port 3 pins
P35 (I/O) / SCK1 (I/O) / SCL0* (I/O) / IRQ5 (input)
P34 (I/O) / RxD1 (input) / SDA0* (I/O)
P33 (I/O) / TxD1 (input) / SCL1* (I/O)
Port 3
P32 (I/O) / SCK0 (I/O) / SDA1* (I/O) / IRQ4 (input)
P31 (I/O) / RxD0 (input)
P30 (I/O) / TxD0 (output)
Note: * Available when using I2C bus interface as an option in the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630
(the product equipped with the I2C bus interface is the W-mask version).
Figure 9-2 Port 3 Pin Functions
Page 242 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.3.2
Section 9 I/O Ports
Register Configuration
Table 9-4 shows the configuration of port 3 registers.
Table 9-4
Port 3 Register Configuration
Name
Abbreviation
Port 3 data direction register
P3DDR
Port 3 data register
P3DR
Port 3 register
PORT3
Port 3 open drain control register
P3ODR
2
1
Initial Value*
Address*
W
B'**000000
H'FE32
R/W
B'**000000
H'FF02
R
Undefined
H'FFB2
R/W
B'**000000
H'FE46
R/W
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Value of bits 5 to 0.
Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
6
⎯
⎯
Undefined Undefined
⎯
⎯
5
4
3
2
1
0
P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
P3DDR is an 8-bit write-dedicated register, which specifies the I/O for each port 3 pin by bit.
Read is disenabled. If a read is carried out, undefined values are read out.
By setting P3DDR to 1, the corresponding port 3 pins become output, and be clearing to 0 they
become input.
P3DDR is initialized to B'**000000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. The previous state
is maintained in software standby mode. The pin state is determined by specifying SCI, IIC*,
P3DDR, and P3DR.
Note: * Available when using I2C bus interface as an option in the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and
H8S/2630 (the product equipped with the I2C bus interface is the W-mask version).
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 243 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port 3 Data Register (P3DR)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
⎯
P35DR
P34DR
P33DR
P32DR
P31DR
P30DR
Undefined Undefined
⎯
⎯
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P3DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register, which stores the output data of port 3 pins (P35 to
P30).
P3DR is initialized to B'**000000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. The previous state is
maintained in software standby mode.
Port 3 Register (PORT3)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
⎯
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
⎯*
⎯*
⎯*
⎯*
⎯*
⎯*
R
R
R
R
R
R
Undefined Undefined
⎯
⎯
Note: * Determined by the state of pins P35 to P30.
PORT3 is an 8-bit read-dedicated register, which reflects the state of pins. Write is disenabled.
Always carry out writing off output data of port 3 pins (P35 to P30) to P3DR without fail.
When P3DDR is set to 1, if port 3 is read, the values of P3DR are read. When P3DDR is cleared to
0, if port 3 is read, the states of pins are read out.
P3DDR and P3DR are initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode, so PORT3 is
determined by the state of the pins. The previous state is maintained in software standby mode.
Page 244 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port 3 Open Drain Control Register (P3ODR)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
6
⎯
⎯
Undefined Undefined
⎯
⎯
5
4
3
2
1
0
P35ODR P34ODR P33ODR P32ODR P31ODR P30ODR
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P3ODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register, which controls the on/off of port 3 pins (P35 to P30).
By setting P3ODR to 1, the port 3 pins become an open drain out, and when cleared to 0 they
become CMOS output.
P3ODR is initialized to B'**000000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. The previous state
is maintained in software standby mode.
9.3.3
Pin Functions
The port 3 pins double as SCI I/O input pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0, TxD1, RxD1, and SCK1)
external interrupt input pins (IRQ4 and IRQ5), and IIC I/O pins* (SCL0, SDA0, SCL1, and
SDA1). The functions of port 3 pins are shown in table 9-5.
Note: * Available when using I2C bus interface as an option in the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and
H8S/2630 (the product equipped with the I2C bus interface is the W-mask version).
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 245 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9-5
Port 3 Pin Functions
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
1
P35/SCK1/
Switches as follows according to combinations of ICCR0 ICE bit* of IIC0, bit C/A of
1
SCL0* /IRQ5 SMR1, bits CKE0 and CKE1 of SCR1, and bit P35DDR.
When used as a SCL0 I/O pin, always be sure to clear the following bits to 0: bit C/A
of SMR1, and bits CKE0 and CKE1 of SCR1. The SCL0 output format is NMOS
open drain output, enabling direct bus driving.
1
ICE*
0
1
CKE1
0
C/A
0
CKE0
P35DDR
Pin function
1
0
1
0
—
0
1
—
—
0
0
1
—
—
—
—
P35
input
P35
output*
SCK1
output*
SCK1
output*
SCK1
input
SCL0
I/O
IRQ5 input
P34/RxD1/
1
SDA0*
Note: * When P35ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output.
In W mask-ROM versions, the output format is NMOS push-pull. However, it
becomes NMOS open drain output when P35ODR = 1.
1
Switches as follows according to combinations of ICCR0 ICE bit* of IIC0, bit RE of
SCR1 and bit P34DDR. The SDA0 output format is NMOS open drain output,
enabling direct bus driving.
1
ICE*
0
1
RE
P34DDR
Pin function
0
1
—
0
1
—
—
P34 input
P34 output*
RxD1 input
SDA0 I/O
Note: * When P34ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output.
In W mask-ROM versions, the output format is NMOS push-pull. However, it
becomes NMOS open drain output when P34ODR = 1.
Page 246 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P33/TxD1/
1
SCL1*
Switches as follows according to combinations of ICCR1 ICE bit* of IIC1, bit TE of
SCR1 and bit P33DDR. The SCL1 output format is NMOS open drain output,
enabling direct bus driving.
1
ICE*
0
1
1
TE
0
P33DDR
Pin function
1
—
0
1
—
—
P33 input
P33 output*
TxD1 output*
SCL1 I/O
Note: * When P33ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output.
1
P32/SCK0/
Switches as follows according to combinations of ICCR1 ICE bit* of IIC1, bit C/A of
1
SDA1* /IRQ4 SMR0, bits CKE0 and CKE1 of SCR0, and bit P32DDR. When used as a SDA1 I/O
pin, always be sure to clear the following bits to 0: SMR0 C/A bit, SCR0 CKE0 and
CKE1 bits.
The SDA1 output format is NMOS open drain output, enabling direct bus driving.
1
ICE*
0
1
CKE1
0
C/A
0
1
—
0
1
—
—
0
0
CKE0
0
P32DDR
Pin function
1
0
1
—
—
—
—
P32
input
P32
output
SCK0
output*
SCK0
output*
SCK0
input
SDA1
I/O
IRQ4 input
Note: * When P32ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output.
P31/RxD0/
IrRxD
Switches as follows according to combinations of bit RE of SCR0 and bit P31DDR.
RE
0
P31DDR
Pin function
1
0
1
—
P31 input
P31 output*
RxD0 input
Note: * When P31ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output.
P30/TxD0/
IrTxD
Switches as follows according to combinations of bit TE of SCR0 and bit P30DDR.
TE
0
P30DDR
Pin function
1
0
1
—
P30 input
P30 output*
TxD0 output*
Note: * When P30ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output.
2
Note: 1. Available when using I C bus interface (the W-mask version of the H8S/2638, H8S/2639,
and H8S/2630 only). In W mask-ROM versions, the output format is NMOS push-pull.
However, it becomes NMOS open drain output when P34ODR = 1 and P35ODR = 1.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 247 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4
Port 4
Note: The DA output is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
9.4.1
Overview
Port 4 is an 8-bit input-only port. Port 4 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins
(AN0 to AN7) and D/A converter analog output pins (DA0, DA1). Port 4 pin functions are the
same in all operating modes. Figure 9-3 shows the port 4 pin configuration.
Port 4 pins
P47 (input) / AN7 (input) / DA1 (output)
P46 (input) / AN6 (input) / DA0 (output)
P45 (input) / AN5 (input)
Port 4
P44 (input) / AN4 (input)
P43 (input) / AN3 (input)
P42 (input) / AN2 (input)
P41 (input) / AN1 (input)
P40 (input) / AN0 (input)
Figure 9-3 Port 4 Pin Functions
Page 248 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.4.2
Section 9 I/O Ports
Register Configuration
Table 9-6 shows the port 4 register configuration. Port 4 is an input-only port, and does not have a
data direction register or data register.
Table 9-6
Port 4 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port 4 register
PORT4
R
Undefined
H'FFB3
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 4 Register (PORT4): The pin states are always read when a port 4 read is performed.
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P47
—*
P46
—*
P45
—*
P44
—*
P43
—*
P42
—*
P41
—*
P40
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Determined by state of pins P47 to P40.
9.4.3
Pin Functions
Port 4 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN0 to AN7) and D/A converter
analog output pins (DA0 and DA1).
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 249 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.5
Port 9
9.5.1
Overview
Port 9 is a 4-bit input-only port. Port 9 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN8
to AN11). Port 9 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 9-4 shows the port 9
pin configuration.
Port 9 pins
P93 (input) / AN11 (input)
P92 (input) / AN10 (input)
Port 9
P91 (input) / AN9 (input)
P90 (input) / AN8 (input)
Figure 9-4 Port 9 Pin Functions
Page 250 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.5.2
Section 9 I/O Ports
Register Configuration
Table 9-7 shows the port 9 register configuration. Port 9 is an input-only port, and does not have a
data direction register or data register.
Table 9-7
Port 9 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port 9 register
PORT9
R
Undefined
H'FFB8
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 9 Register (PORT9): The pin states are always read when a port 9 read is performed.
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
—
—*
—
—*
—
—*
—
—*
P93
—*
P92
—*
P91
—*
P90
—*
R/W
—
—
—
—
R
R
R
R
:
Note: * Determined by state of pins P93 to P90.
9.5.3
Pin Functions
Port 9 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN8 to AN11) are multipurpose pins
which function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN8 to AN11).
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 251 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6
Port A
9.6.1
Overview
Port A is a 4-bit I/O port. Port A pins also function as address bus outputs and SCI2 I/O pins
(SCK2, RxD2, and TxD2). The pin functions change according to the operating mode.
Port A has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software.
Figure 9-5 shows the port A pin configuration.
Port A
Port A pins
Pin functions in modes 4 to 6
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA3 (I/O) / A19 (output) / SCK2 (I/O)
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA2 (I/O) / A18 (output) / RxD2 (input)
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA1 (I/O) / A17 (output) / TxD2 (output)
PA0/A16
PA0 (I/O) / A16 (output)
Pin functions in mode 7
PA3 (I/O) / SCK2 (output)
PA2 (I/O) / RxD2 (input)
PA1 (I/O) / TxD2 (output)
PA0 (I/O)
Figure 9-5 Port A Pin Functions
Page 252 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.6.2
Section 9 I/O Ports
Register Configuration
Table 9-8 shows the port A register configuration.
Table 9-8
Port A Registers
2
1
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value*
Address*
Port A data direction register
PADDR
W
H'0
H'FE39
Port A data register
PADR
R/W
H'0
H'FF09
Port A register
PORTA
R
Undefined
H'FFB9
Port A MOS pull-up control register
PAPCR
R/W
H'0
H'FF40
Port A open-drain control register
PAODR
R/W
H'0
H'FF47
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Value of bits 3 to 0.
Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
—
—
—
—
3
2
1
0
PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR
Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
:
—
—
—
—
PADDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port A. PADDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
Bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read.
PADDR is initialized to H'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its
prior state in software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the address
output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to
software standby mode.
• Modes 4 to 6
The corresponding port A pins become address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits
AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, irrespective of the value of bits PA3DDR to PA0DDR. When pins are
not used as address outputs, setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an
output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 253 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
• Mode 7
Setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an output port, while clearing
the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
Port A Data Register (PADR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
PA3DR
PA2DR
PA1DR
PA0DR
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
R/W
:
—
—
—
—
PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port A pins (PA3 to
PA0).
Bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified.
PADR is initialized to H'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its
prior state in software standby mode.
Port A Register (PORTA)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
PA3
—*
PA2
—*
PA1
—*
PA0
—*
R
R
R
R
Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
R/W
:
—
—
—
—
Note: * Determined by state of pins PA3 to PA0.
PORTA is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port A pins (PA3 to PA0) must always be performed on PADR.
Bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified.
If a port A read is performed while PADDR bits are set to 1, the PADR values are read. If a port A
read is performed while PADDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTA contents are determined by the pin states, as
PADDR and PADR are initialized. PORTA retains its prior state in software standby mode.
Page 254 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port A MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PAPCR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
—
—
—
—
Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
R/W
:
—
—
—
—
3
2
1
0
PA3PCR PA2PCR PA1PCR PA0PCR
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PAPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function
incorporated into port A on an individual bit basis.
Bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. In
modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the SCI’s
SCMR, SMR, and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS
input pull-up for that pin.
In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the SCI’s SCMR, SMR,
and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up
for that pin.
PAPCR is initialized by a reset or to H'0 (bits 3 to 0), and in hardware standby mode. It retains its
prior state in software standby mode.
Port A Open Drain Control Register (PAODR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
—
—
—
—
Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
R/W
:
—
—
—
—
3
2
1
0
PA3ODR PA2ODR PA1ODR PA0ODR
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PAODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls whether PMOS is on or off for each
port A pin (PA3 to PA0).
Bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified.
When pins are not address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR,
setting a PAODR bit makes the corresponding port A pin an NMOS open-drain output, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin a CMOS output.
PAODR is initialized to H'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its
prior state in software standby mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 255 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6.3
Pin Functions
Port A pins also function as SCI input/output pins (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2) and address bus output
pins (A19 to A16). Port A pin functions are shown in table 9-9.
Table 9-9
Port A Pin Functions
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PA3/A19/SCK2
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit C/A in SMR and bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR of
SCI2, and bit PA3DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
B'0000 to B'1011
CKE1
0
C/A
0
CKE0
PA3DDR
Pin function
0
1
—
—
—
—
0
1
—
—
—
—
PA3
input
PA3
output
SCK2
output
SCK2
output
SCK2
input
A19 output
Mode 7
0
C/A
1
0
CKE0
Page 256 of 1458
—
—
CKE1
Pin function
1
1
Operating mode
PA3DDR
B'1100 to B'1111
0
1
1
—
—
—
0
1
—
—
—
PA3
input
PA3
output
SCK2
output
SCK2
output
SCK2
input
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PA2/A18/RxD2
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit RE in SCR of SCI2, and bit PA2DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
B'0000 to B'1011
RE
PA2DDR
Pin function
1
—
0
0
1
—
—
PA2 input
PA2 output
RxD2 input
A18 output
Operating mode
Mode 7
RE
0
PA2DDR
Pin function
PA1/A17/TxD2
1
0
1
—
PA2 input
PA2 output
RxD2 input
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit TE in SCR of SCI2, and bit PA1DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
B'0000 to B'1001
TE
0
PA1DDR
Pin function
Pin function
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
1
—
1
—
—
PA1 input
PA1 output
TxD2 output
A17 output
Mode 7
TE
PA1DDR
B'1010 to B'1111
0
Operating mode
May 28, 2010
B'1011 to B'1111
0
1
0
1
—
PA1 input
PA1 output
TxD2 output
Page 257 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PA0/A16
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, and bit PA0DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
B'0000 to B'1000
PA0DDR
Pin function
0
1
—
PA0 input
PA0 output
A16 output
Operating mode
Mode 7
PA0DDR
Pin function
9.6.4
B'1001 to B'1111
0
1
PA0 input
PA0 output
Pin Functions
Modes 4 to 6: In modes 4 to 6, port A pins function as address outputs according to the setting of
AE3 to AE0 in PFCR; when they do not function as address outputs, the pins function as SCI I/O
pins and I/O ports.
Port A pin functions in modes 4 to 6 are shown in figure 9-6.
PA3 (I/O) / A19 (output) / SCK2 (I/O)
Port A
PA2 (I/O) / A18 (output) / RxD2 (input)
PA1 (I/O) / A17 (output) / TxD2 (output)
PA0 (I/O) / A16 (output)
Figure 9-6 Port A Pin Functions (Modes 4 to 6)
Mode 7: In mode 7, port A pins function as I/O ports and SCI2 I/O pins (SCK2, TxD2, RxD2).
Input or output can be specified for each pin on an individual bit basis. Setting a PADDR bit to 1
makes the corresponding port A pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an
input port.
Port A pin functions are shown in figure 9-7.
Page 258 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
PA3 (I/O) / SCK2 (I/O)
PA2 (I/O) / RxD2 (input)
Port A
PA1 (I/O) / TxD2 (output)
PA0 (I/O)
Figure 9-7 Port A Pin Functions (Mode 7)
9.6.5
MOS Input Pull-Up Function
Port A has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. MOS input
pull-up can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis.
In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the SCI’s
SCMR, SMR, and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS
input pull-up for that pin.
In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the SCI’s SCMR, SMR,
and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up
for that pin.
The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
The prior state is retained in software standby mode.
Table 9-10summarizes the MOS input pull-up states.
Table 9-10 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port A)
Pin States
Reset
Hardware
Standby Mode
Software
Standby Mode
In Other
Operations
Address output or
SCI output
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Other than above
Legend:
OFF:
MOS input pull-up is always off.
ON/OFF: On when PADDR = 0 and PAPCR = 1; otherwise off.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 259 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7
Port B
9.7.1
Overview
Port B is an 8-bit I/O port. Port B pins also function as TPU I/O pins (TIOCA3, TIOCB3,
TIOCC3, TIOCD3, TIOCA4, TIOCB4, TIOCA5, TIOCB5) and as address outputs; the pin
functions change according to the operating mode.
Port B has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software.
Figure 9-8 shows the port B pin configuration.
Port B
Port B pins
Pin functions in modes 4 to 6
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB7 (input) / A15 (output) / TIOCB5 (I/O)
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB6 (input) / A14 (output) / TIOCA5 (I/O)
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB5 (input) / A13 (output) / TIOCB4 (I/O)
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB4 (input) / A12 (output) / TIOCA4 (I/O)
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB3 (input) / A11 (output) / TIOCD3 (I/O)
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB2 (input) / A10 (output) / TIOCC3 (I/O)
PB1/A9 /TIODB3
PB1 (input) / A9 (output) / TIOCB3 (I/O)
PB0/A8 /TIOCA3
PB0 (input) / A8 (output) / TIOCA3 (I/O)
Pin functions in mode 7
PB7 (I/O) / TIOCB5 (I/O)
PB6 (I/O) / TIOCA5 (I/O)
PB5 (I/O) / TIOCB4 (I/O)
PB4 (I/O) / TIOCA4 (I/O)
PB3 (I/O) / TIOCD3 (I/O)
PB2 (I/O) / TIOCC3 (I/O)
PB1 (I/O) / TIOCB3 (I/O)
PB0 (I/O) / TIOCA3 (I/O)
Figure 9-8 Port B Pin Functions
Page 260 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.7.2
Section 9 I/O Ports
Register Configuration
Table 9-11 shows the port B register configuration.
Table 9-11 Port B Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port B data direction register
PBDDR
W
H'00
H'FE3A
Port B data register
PBDR
R/W
H'00
H'FF0A
Port B register
PORTB
R
Undefined
H'FFBA
Port B MOS pull-up control register
PBPCR
R/W
H'00
H'FF41
Port B open-drain control register
PBODR
R/W
H'00
H'FE48
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
PBDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port B. PBDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
PBDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the address output pins
retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby
mode.
• Modes 4 to 6
The corresponding port B pins become address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits
AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, irrespective of the value of the PBDDR bits. When pins are not used as
address outputs, setting a PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B pin an output port,
while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
• Mode 7
Setting a PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B pin an output port, while clearing
the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 261 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port B Data Register (PBDR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7DR
PB6DR
PB5DR
PB4DR
PB3DR
PB2DR
PB1DR
PB0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PBDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port B pins (PB7 to
PB0). PBDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior
state in software standby mode.
Port B Register (PORTB)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7
—*
PB6
—*
PB5
—*
PB4
—*
PB3
—*
PB2
—*
PB1
—*
PB0
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Determined by state of pins PB7 to PB0.
PORTB is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port B pins (PB7 to PB0) must always be performed on PBDR.
If a port B read is performed while PBDDR bits are set to 1, the PBDR values are read. If a port B
read is performed while PBDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTB contents are determined by the pin states, as
PBDDR and PBDR are initialized. PORTB retains its prior state in software standby mode.
Page 262 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port B MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PBPCR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7PCR PB6PCR PB5PCR PB4PCR PB3PCR PB2PCR PB1PCR PB0PCR
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PBPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function
incorporated into port B on an individual bit basis.
In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the TPU’s
TIOR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for
that pin.
In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the TPU’s TIOR and in
DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin.
PBPCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Port B Open Drain Control Register (PBODR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7ODR PB6ODR PB5ODR PB4ODR PB3ODR PB2ODR PB1ODR PB0ODR
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PBODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the PMOS on/off state for each port B
pin (PB7 to PB0).
When pins are not address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR,
setting a PBODR bit makes the corresponding port B pin an NMOS open-drain output, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin a CMOS output.
PBODR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 263 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7.3
Pin Functions
Port B pins also function as TPU output pins (TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCC3, TIOCD3, TIOCA4,
TIOCB4, TIOCC4, and TIOCD4) and address bus output pins (A15 to A8).
Table 9-12 Port B Pin Functions
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
The function of this pin changes according to the operating mode and the
setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR; the TPU5 settings of bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR5, bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR5, and the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR5;
and the setting of the PB7DDR bit.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
5 Setting
PB7DDR
Pin function
B'0000 to B'0111
Table Below (1)
TPU Channel
5 Setting
PB7DDR
Pin function
Page 264 of 1458
Table Below (2)
—
0
TIOCB5 output
PB7 input
Operating
Mode
B'1000 to
B'1111
—
1
PB7 output
TIOCB5 input *
—
A15 output
Mode 7
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
—
0
1
TIOCB5 output
PB7 input
PB7 output
TIOCB5 input *
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Pin
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
Section 9 I/O Ports
Selection Method and Pin Functions
TPU Channel
5 Setting
(2)
MD3 to MD0
B'0000, B'01xx
IOB3 to IOB0
B'0000
B'0100
B'1xxx
(1)
B'0001 to
B'0011
(2)
(2)
B'0010
(1)
(2)
B'0011
—
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'0101 to
B'0111
CCLR1,
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than
B'10
B'10
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
—
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don't care
Note: TIOCB5 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx and IOB3 = 1.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 265 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
The function of this pin changes according to the operating mode and the
setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR; the TPU5 settings of bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR5, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR5, and the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR5;
and the setting of the PB6DDR bit.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
5 Setting
B'0000 to B'0110
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
—
—
0
—
TIOCA5 output
PB6 input
PB6DDR
Pin function
Operating
Mode
TPU Channel
5 Setting
PB6 output
1
TIOCA5 input *
Table Below (1)
A14 output
Table Below (2)
—
0
TIOCA5 output
PB6 input
TPU Channel
5 Setting
(2)
MD3 to MD0
B'0000, B'01xx
IOA3 to IOA0
1
Mode 7
PB6DDR
Pin function
B'0111 to
B'1111
B'0000
B'0100
B'1xxx
(1)
B'0001 to
B'0011
1
PB6 output
1
TIOCA5 input *
(2)
(1)
B'001x
B'0010
B'0011
B'xx00
Other
than
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'0101 to
B'0111
(1)
(2)
CCLR1,
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than
B'01
B'01
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
PWM
mode 1
2
output*
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don't care
Notes: 1. TIOCA5 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx and IOA3 = 1.
2. TIOCB5 output is disabled.
Page 266 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
The function of this pin changes according to the operating mode and the
setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR; the TPU4 settings of bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR4, bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR4, and the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR4;
and the setting of the PB5DDR bit.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
4 Setting
B'0000 to B'0101
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
—
—
0
—
TIOCB4 output
PB5 input
PB5DDR
Pin function
Operating
Mode
TPU Channel
4 Setting
PB5 output
TIOCB4 input *
Table Below (1)
A13 output
Table Below (2)
—
0
TIOCB4 output
PB5 input
TPU Channel
4 Setting
(2)
MD3 to MD0
B'0000, B'01xx
IOB3 to IOB0
1
Mode 7
PB5DDR
Pin function
B'0110 to
B'1111
B'0000
B'0100
B'1xxx
(1)
B'0001 to
B'0011
1
PB5 output
TIOCB4 input *
(2)
(2)
B'0010
(1)
(2)
B'0011
—
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'0101 to
B'0111
CCLR1,
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than
B'10
B'10
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
—
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don't care
Note: TIOCB4 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx and IOB3 to IOB0
= B'10xx.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 267 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
The function of this pin changes according to the operating mode and the
setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR; the TPU4 settings of bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR4, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR4, and the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR4;
and the setting of the PB4DDR bit.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
4 Setting
B'0000 to B'0100
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
—
—
0
1
—
TIOCA4 output
PB4 input
PB4 output
A12 output
PB4DDR
Pin function
B'0101 to
B'1111
1
TIOCA4 input *
Operating
Mode
TPU Channel
4 Setting
Mode 7
Table Below (1)
PB4DDR
Pin function
TPU Channel
4 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOA3 to IOA0
Table Below (2)
—
0
TIOCA4 output
PB4 input
(2)
(1)
B'0000, B'01xx
B'0000
B'0100
B'1xxx
B'0001 to
B'0011
1
PB4 output
1
TIOCA4 input *
(2)
(1)
B'001x
B'0010
B'0011
B'xx00
Other
than
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'0101 to
B'0111
(1)
(2)
CCLR1,
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than
B'01
B'01
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
PWM
mode 1
2
output*
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don't care
Notes: 1. TIOCA4 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx and IOA3 to
IOA0 = B'10xx.
2. TIOCB4 output is disabled.
Page 268 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Pin
Section 9 I/O Ports
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB3/A11/TIOCD3 The function of this pin changes according to the operating mode and the
setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR; the TPU3 settings of bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR3, bits IOD3 to IOD0 in TIORL3, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR3;
and the setting of the PB3DDR bit.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
3 Setting
B'0000 to B'0011
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
—
—
0
—
TIOCD3 output
PB3 input
PB3DDR
Pin function
Operating
Mode
TPU Channel
3 Setting
TPU Channel
3 Setting
PB3 output
TIOCD3 input *
Table Below (1)
A11 output
Table Below (2)
—
0
TIOCD3 output
PB3 input
(2)
MD3 to MD0
IOD3 to IOD0
1
Mode 7
PB3DDR
Pin function
B'0100 to
B'1111
(1)
B'0000
B'0000
B'0100
B'1xxx
1
PB3 output
TIOCD3 input *
(2)
(2)
B'0010
B'0001 to
B'0011
(1)
(2)
B'0011
—
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'0101 to
B'0111
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than
B'110
B'110
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
—
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don't care
Note: TIOCD3 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx and IOD3 to IOD0
= B'10xx.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 269 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB2/A10/TIOCC3 The function of this pin changes according to the operating mode and the
setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR; the TPU3 settings of bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR3, bits IOC3 to IOC0 in TIORL3, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR3;
and the setting of the PB2DDR bit.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
3 Setting
B'0000 to B'0010
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
—
—
0
1
—
TIOCC3 output
PB2 input
PB2 output
A10 output
PB2DDR
Pin function
B'0011 to
B'1111
1
TIOCC3 input *
Operating
Mode
TPU Channel
3 Setting
Mode 7
Table Below (1)
PB2DDR
Pin function
TPU Channel
3 Setting
—
0
TIOCC3 output
PB2 input
(2)
MD3 to MD0
IOC3 to IOC0
Table Below (2)
(1)
B'0000
B'0000
B'0100
B'1xxx
B'0001 to
B'0011
1
PB2 output
1
TIOCC3 input *
(2)
(1)
B'001x
B'0010
B'0011
B'xx00
Other
than
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'0101 to
B'0111
(1)
(2)
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than
B'101
B'101
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
PWM
mode 1
2
output*
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don't care
Notes: 1. TIOCC3 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 and IOC3 to IOC0 =
B'10xx.
2. TIOCD3 output is disabled.
Page 270 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
The function of this pin changes according to the operating mode and the
setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR; the TPU3 settings of bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR3, bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIORH3, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR3;
and the setting of the PB1DDR bit.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
3 Setting
B'0000 to B'0001
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
—
—
0
—
TIOCB3 output
PB1 input
PB1DDR
Pin function
Operating
Mode
TPU Channel
3 Setting
PB1 output
TIOCB3 input *
Table Below (1)
A9 output
Table Below (2)
—
0
TIOCB3 output
PB1 input
TPU Channel
3 Setting
(2)
MD3 to MD0
B'0000, B'01xx
IOB3 to IOB0
1
Mode 7
PB1DDR
Pin function
B'0010 to
B'1111
B'0000
B'0100
B'1xxx
(1)
B'0001 to
B'0011
1
PB1 output
TIOCB3 input *
(2)
(2)
B'0010
(1)
(2)
B'0011
—
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'0101 to
B'0111
CCLR1,
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than
B'010
B'010
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
—
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don't care
Note: TIOCB3 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx and IOB3 to IOB0
= B'10xx.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 271 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
The function of this pin changes according to the operating mode and the
setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR; the TPU3 settings of bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR3, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIORH3, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR3;
and the setting of the PB0DDR bit.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
3 Setting
B'0000
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
—
—
0
1
—
TIOCA3 output
PB0 input
PB0 output
A8 output
PB0DDR
Pin function
B'0001 to
B'1111
1
TIOCA3 input *
Operating
Mode
TPU Channel
3 Setting
Mode 7
Table Below (1)
PB0DDR
Pin function
TPU Channel
3 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOA3 to IOA0
Table Below (2)
—
0
TIOCA3 output
PB0 input
(2)
(1)
B'0000, B'01xx
B'0000
B'0100
B'1xxx
B'0001 to
B'0011
1
PB0 output
1
TIOCA3 input *
(2)
(1)
B'001x
B'0010
B'0011
B'xx00
Other
than
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'0101 to
B'0111
(1)
(2)
CCLR1,
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Other
than
B'001
B'001
Output
function
—
Output
compare
output
—
PWM
mode 1
2
output*
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don't care
Notes: 1. TIOCA3 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 and IOA3 to IOA0 =
B'10xx.
2. TIOCB3 output is disabled.
Page 272 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.7.4
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin Functions for Each Mode
Modes 4 to 6: In modes 4 to 6, the corresponding port B pins become address outputs in
accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR. When pins are not used as address
outputs, they function as TPU I/O pins and I/O ports.
Port B pin functions in modes 4 to 6 are shown in figure 9-9.
PB7 (I/O) / A15 (output) / TIOCB5 (I/O)
PB6 (I/O) / A14 (output) / TIOCA5 (I/O)
PB5 (I/O) / A13 (output) / TIOCB4 (I/O)
PB4 (I/O) / A12 (output) / TIOCA4 (I/O)
Port B
PB3 (I/O) / A11 (output) / TIOCD3 (I/O)
PB2 (I/O) / A10 (output) / TIOCC3 (I/O)
PB1 (I/O) / A9 (output) / TIOCB3 (I/O)
PB0 (I/O) / A8 (output) / TIOCA3 (I/O)
Figure 9-9 Port B Pin Functions (Modes 4 to 6)
Mode 7: In mode 7, port B pins function as I/O ports and TPU I/O pins (TIOCA3, TIOCB3,
TIOCC3, TIOCD3, TIOCA4, TIOCB4, TIOCA5, and TIOCB5). Input or output can be specified
for each pin on an individual bit basis. Setting a PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B
pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
Port B pin functions in mode 7 are shown in figure 9-10.
PB7 (I/O) / TIOCB5 (I/O)
PB6 (I/O) / TIOCA5 (I/O)
PB5 (I/O) / TIOCB4 (I/O)
Port B
PB4 (I/O) / TIOCA4 (I/O)
PB3 (I/O) / TIOCD3 (I/O)
PB2 (I/O) / TIOCC3 (I/O)
PB1 (I/O) / TIOCB3 (I/O)
PB0 (I/O) / TIOCA3 (I/O)
Figure 9-10 Port B Pin Functions (Mode 7)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 273 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7.5
MOS Input Pull-Up Function
Port B has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. MOS input
pull-up can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis.
In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the TPU’s
TIOR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for
that pin.
In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the TPU’s TIOR and in
DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin.
The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
The prior state is retained by a manual reset or in software standby mode.
Table 9-13 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states.
Table 9-13 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port B)
Pin States
Reset
Hardware
Standby Mode
Software
Standby Mode
In Other
Operations
Address output or
TPU output
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Other than above
Legend:
OFF:
MOS input pull-up is always off.
ON/OFF: On when PBDDR = 0 and PBPCR = 1; otherwise off.
Page 274 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.8
Port C
9.8.1
Overview
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port C is an 8-bit I/O port. Port C has an address bus output function. The pin functions change
according to the operating mode.
Port C has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software.
Figure 9-11 shows the port C pin configuration.
Port C
Port C pins
Pin functions in modes 4 and 5
PC7/A7
A7 (output)
PC6/A6
A6 (output)
PC5/A5
A5 (output)
PC4/A4
A4 (output)
PC3/A3
A3 (output)
PC2/A2
A2 (output)
PC1/A1
A1 (output)
PC0/A0
A0 (output)
Pin functions in mode 6
Pin functions in mode 7
PCDDR = 1
PCDDR = 0
A7 (output)
PC7 (input)
PC7 (I/O)
A6 (output)
PC6 (input)
PC6 (I/O)
A5 (output)
PC5 (input)
PC5 (I/O)
A4 (output)
PC4 (input)
PC4 (I/O)
A3 (output)
PC3 (input)
PC3 (I/O)
A2 (output)
PC2 (input)
PC2 (I/O)
A1 (output)
PC1 (input)
PC1 (I/O)
A0 (output)
PC0 (input)
PC0 (I/O)
Figure 9-11 Port C Pin Functions
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 275 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.8.2
Register Configuration
Table 9-14 shows the port C register configuration.
Table 9-14 Port C Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port C data direction register
PCDDR
W
H'00
H'FE3B
Port C data register
PCDR
R/W
H'00
H'FF0B
Port C register
PORTC
R
Undefined
H'FFBB
Port C MOS pull-up control register
PCPCR
R/W
H'00
H'FF42
Port C open-drain control register
PCODR
R/W
H'00
H'FE49
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port C Data Direction Register (PCDDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC7DDR PC6DDR PC5DDR PC4DDR PC3DDR PC2DDR PC1DDR PC0DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
PCDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port C. PCDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
PCDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the address output pins
retain their output state or become high-impedance when the mode is changed to software standby
mode.
• Modes 4 and 5
The corresponding port C pins are address outputs irrespective of the value of the PCDDR bits.
• Mode 6
Setting a PCDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port C pin an address output, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
• Mode 7
Setting a PCDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port C pin an output port, while clearing
the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
Page 276 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port C Data Register (PCDR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC7DR
PC6DR
PC5DR
PC4DR
PC3DR
PC2DR
PC1DR
PC0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PCDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port C pins (PC7 to
PC0).
PCDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Port C Register (PORTC)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC7
—*
PC6
—*
PC5
—*
PC4
—*
PC3
—*
PC2
—*
PC1
—*
PC0
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Determined by state of pins PC7 to PC0.
PORTC is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port C pins (PC7 to PC0) must always be performed on PCDR.
If a port C read is performed while PCDDR bits are set to 1, the PCDR values are read. If a port C
read is performed while PCDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTC contents are determined by the pin states, as
PCDDR and PCDR are initialized. PORTC retains its prior state in software standby mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 277 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port C MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PCPCR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC7PCR PC6PCR PC5PCR PC4PCR PC3PCR PC2PCR PC1PCR PC0PCR
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PCPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function
incorporated into port C on an individual bit basis.
In modes 6 and 7, if PCPCR is set to 1 when the port is in the input state in accordance with the
settings of PCDDR, the MOS input pull-up is set to ON.
PCPCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by
a manual reset or in software standby mode.
Port C Open Drain Control Register (PCODR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC7ODR PC6ODR PC5ODR PC4ODR PC3ODR PC2ODR PC1ODR PC0ODR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PCDDR is an 8-bit Read/Write register and controls PMOS On/Off of each pin (PC7 to PC0) of
port C.
If PCODR is set to 1 by setting AE3 to AE0 in PFCR in mode other than address output mode,
port C pins function as NMOS open drain outputs and when the setting is cleared to 0, the pins
function as CMOS outputs.
PCODR is initialized to H'00 in reset mode or hardware standby mode. PCODR retains the last
state in software standby mode.
Page 278 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.8.3
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin Functions for Each Mode
Modes 4 and 5: In modes 4 and 5, port C pins function as address outputs automatically.
Figure 9-12 shows the port C pin functions.
A7 (output)
A6 (output)
A5 (output)
Port C
A4 (output)
A3 (output)
A2 (output)
A1 (output)
A0 (output)
Figure 9-12 Port C Pin Functions (Modes 4 and 5)
Mode 6: In mode 6, port C pints function as address outputs or input ports and I/O can be
specified in bit units. When each bit in PCDDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an
address output and when the bit cleared to 0, the pin functions as an input port.
Figure 9-13 shows the port C pin functions.
Port C
PCDDR = 1
PCDDR = 0
A7 (output)
PC7 (input)
A6 (output)
PC6 (input)
A5 (output)
PC5 (input)
A4 (output)
PC4 (input)
A3 (output)
PC3 (input)
A2 (output)
PC2 (input)
A1 (output)
PC1 (input)
A0 (output)
PC0 (input)
Figure 9-13 Port C Pin Functions (Mode 6)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 279 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Mode 7: In mode 7, port C pins function as I/O ports and I/O can be specified for each pin in bit
units. When each bit in PCDDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an output port and
when the bit is cleared to 0, the pin functions as an input port.
Figure 9-14 shows the port C pin functions.
PC7 (I/O)
PC6 (I/O)
PC5 (I/O)
Port C
PC4 (I/O)
PC3 (I/O)
PC2 (I/O)
PC1 (I/O)
PC0 (I/O)
Figure 9-14 Port C Pin Functions (Mode 7)
Page 280 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.8.4
Section 9 I/O Ports
MOS Input Pull-Up Function
Port C has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS
input pull-up function can be used in modes 6 and 7, and can be specified as on or off on an
individual bit basis.
In modes 6 and 7, when PCPCR is set to 1 in the input state by setting of PCDDR, the MOS input
pull-up is set to ON.
The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
The prior state is retained by a manual reset or in software standby mode.
Table 9-15 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states.
Table 9-15 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port C)
Pin States
Reset
Hardware
Standby Mode
Address output
OFF
OFF
Other than above
Software
Standby Mode
In Other
Operations
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Legend:
OFF:
MOS input pull-up is always off.
ON/OFF: On when PCDDR = 0 and PCPCR = 1; otherwise off.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 281 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.9
Port D
9.9.1
Overview
Port D is an 8-bit I/O port. Port D has a data bus I/O function, and the pin functions change
according to the operating mode.
Port D has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software.
Figure 9-15 shows the port D pin configuration.
Port D
Port D pins
Pin functions in modes 4 to 6
PD7/D15
D15 (I/O)
PD6/D14
D14 (I/O)
PD5/D13
D13 (I/O)
PD4/D12
D12 (I/O)
PD3/D11
D11 (I/O)
PD2/D10
D10 (I/O)
PD1/D9
D9
(I/O)
PD0 / D8
D8
(I/O)
Pin functions in mode 7
PD7 (I/O)
PD6 (I/O)
PD5 (I/O)
PD4 (I/O)
PD3 (I/O)
PD2 (I/O)
PD1 (I/O)
PD0 (I/O)
Figure 9-15 Port D Pin Functions
Page 282 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.9.2
Section 9 I/O Ports
Register Configuration
Table 9-16 shows the port D register configuration.
Table 9-16 Port D Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port D data direction register
PDDDR
W
H'00
H'FE3C
Port D data register
PDDR
R/W
H'00
H'FF0C
Port D register
PORTD
R
Undefined
H'FFBC
Port D MOS pull-up control register
PDPCR
R/W
H'00
H'FE43
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port D Data Direction Register (PDDDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD7DDR PD6DDR PD5DDR PD4DDR PD3DDR PD2DDR PD1DDR PD0DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
PDDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port D. PDDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
PDDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
• Modes 4 to 6
The input/output direction specification by PDDDR is ignored, and port D is automatically
designated for data I/O.
• Mode 7
Setting a PDDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port D pin an output port, while clearing
the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 283 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port D Data Register (PDDR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD7DR
PD6DR
PD5DR
PD4DR
PD3DR
PD2DR
PD1DR
PD0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port D pins (PD7 to
PD0).
PDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Port D Register (PORTD)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD7
—*
PD6
—*
PD5
—*
PD4
—*
PD3
—*
PD2
—*
PD1
—*
PD0
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Determined by state of pins PD7 to PD0.
PORTD is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port D pins (PD7 to PD0) must always be performed on PDDR.
If a port D read is performed while PDDDR bits are set to 1, the PDDR values are read. If a port D
read is performed while PDDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTD contents are determined by the pin states, as
PDDDR and PDDR are initialized. PORTD retains its prior state in software standby mode.
Page 284 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port D MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PDPCR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD7PCR PD6PCR PD5PCR PD4PCR PD3PCR PD2PCR PD1PCR PD0PCR
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function
incorporated into port D on an individual bit basis.
When a PDDDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting) in mode 7, setting the corresponding
PDPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for the corresponding pin.
PDPCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
9.9.3
Pin Functions
Modes 4 to 6: In modes 4 to 6, port D pins are automatically designated as data I/O pins.
Port D pin functions in modes 4 to 6 are shown in figure 9-16.
D15 (I/O)
D14 (I/O)
D13 (I/O)
Port D
D12 (I/O)
D11 (I/O)
D10 (I/O)
D9
(I/O)
D8
(I/O)
Figure 9-16 Port D Pin Functions (Modes 4 to 6)
Mode 7: In mode 7, port D pins function as I/O ports. Input or output can be specified for each pin
on an individual bit basis. Setting a PDDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port D pin an output
port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 285 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port D pin functions in mode 7 are shown in figure 9-17.
PD7 (I/O)
PD6 (I/O)
PD5 (I/O)
Port D
PD4 (I/O)
PD3 (I/O)
PD2 (I/O)
PD1 (I/O)
PD0 (I/O)
Figure 9-17 Port D Pin Functions (Mode 7)
9.9.4
MOS Input Pull-Up Function
Port D has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS
input pull-up function can be used in mode 7, and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit
basis.
When a PDDDR bit is cleared to 0 in mode 7, setting the corresponding PDPCR bit to 1 turns on
the MOS input pull-up for that pin.
The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
The prior state is retained in software standby mode.
Table 9-17 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states.
Table 9-17 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port D)
Modes
Reset
Hardware
Standby Mode
Software
Standby Mode
In Other
Operations
4 to 6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
7
Legend:
OFF:
MOS input pull-up is always off.
ON/OFF: On when PDDDR = 0 and PDPCR = 1; otherwise off.
Page 286 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.10
Port E
9.10.1
Overview
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port E is an 8-bit I/O port. Port E has a data bus I/O function, and the pin functions change
according to the operating mode and whether 8-bit or 16-bit bus mode is selected.
Port E has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software.
Figure 9-18 shows the port E pin configuration.
Port E
Port E pins
Pin functions in modes 4 to 6
PE7/D7
PE7 (I/O) / D7 (I/O)
PE6/D6
PE6 (I/O) / D6 (I/O)
PE5/D5
PE5 (I/O) / D5 (I/O)
PE4/D4
PE4 (I/O) / D4 (I/O)
PE3/D3
PE3 (I/O) / D3 (I/O)
PE2/D2
PE2 (I/O) / D2 (I/O)
PE1/D1
PE1 (I/O) / D1 (I/O)
PE0/D0
PE0 (I/O) / D0 (I/O)
Pin functions in mode 7
PE7 (I/O)
PE6 (I/O)
PE5 (I/O)
PE4 (I/O)
PE3 (I/O)
PE2 (I/O)
PE1 (I/O)
PE0 (I/O)
Figure 9-18 Port E Pin Functions
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 287 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.10.2
Register Configuration
Table 9-18 shows the port E register configuration.
Table 9-18 Port E Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port E data direction register
PEDDR
W
H'00
H'FE3D
Port E data register
PEDR
R/W
H'00
H'FF0D
Port E register
PORTE
R
Undefined
H'FFBD
Port E MOS pull-up control register
PEPCR
R/W
H'00
H'FE44
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port E Data Direction Register (PEDDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PE7DDR PE6DDR PE5DDR PE4DDR PE3DDR PE2DDR PE1DDR PE0DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
PEDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port E. PEDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
PEDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by
a manual reset or in software standby mode.
• Modes 4 to 6
When 8-bit bus mode has been selected, port E pins function as I/O ports. Setting a PEDDR bit
to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the
pin an input port.
When 16-bit bus mode has been selected, the input/output direction specification by PEDDR is
ignored, and port E is designated for data I/O.
For details of 8-bit and 16-bit bus modes, see section 7, Bus Controller.
• Mode 7
Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the
bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
Page 288 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port E Data Register (PEDR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PE7DR
PE6DR
PE5DR
PE4DR
PE3DR
PE2DR
PE1DR
PE0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PEDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port E pins (PE7 to PE0).
PEDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Port E Register (PORTE)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PE7
—*
PE6
—*
PE5
—*
PE4
—*
PE3
—*
PE2
—*
PE1
—*
PE0
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Determined by state of pins PE7 to PE0.
PORTE is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port E pins (PE7 to PE0) must always be performed on PEDR.
If a port E read is performed while PEDDR bits are set to 1, the PEDR values are read. If a port E
read is performed while PEDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTE contents are determined by the pin states, as
PEDDR and PEDR are initialized. PORTE retains its prior state in software standby mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 289 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port E MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PEPCR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PE7PCR PE6PCR PE5PCR PE4PCR PE3PCR PE2PCR PE1PCR PE0PCR
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PEPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function
incorporated into port E on an individual bit basis.
When a PEDDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting) with 8-bit bus mode selected in mode 4, 5,
or 6, or in mode 7, setting the corresponding PEPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for
the corresponding pin.
PEPCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
9.10.3
Pin Functions
Modes 4 to 6: In modes 4 to 6, when 8-bit access is designated and 8-bit bus mode is selected,
port E pins are automatically designated as I/O ports. Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the
corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
When 16-bit bus mode is selected, the input/output direction specification by PEDDR is ignored,
and port E is designated for data I/O.
Port E pin functions in modes 4 to 6 are shown in figure 9-19.
Page 290 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port E
8-bit bus mode
16-bit bus mode
PE7 (I/O)
D7 (I/O)
PE6 (I/O)
D6 (I/O)
PE5 (I/O)
D5 (I/O)
PE4 (I/O)
D4 (I/O)
PE3 (I/O)
D3 (I/O)
PE2 (I/O)
D2 (I/O)
PE1 (I/O)
D1 (I/O)
PE0 (I/O)
D0 (I/O)
Figure 9-19 Port E Pin Functions (Modes 4 to 6)
Mode 7: In mode 7, port E pins function as I/O ports. Input or output can be specified for each pin
on a bit-by-bit basis. Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port,
while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
Port E pin functions in mode 7 are shown in figure 9-20.
PE7 (I/O)
PE6 (I/O)
PE5 (I/O)
Port E
PE4 (I/O)
PE3 (I/O)
PE2 (I/O)
PE1 (I/O)
PE0 (I/O)
Figure 9-20 Port E Pin Functions (Mode 7)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 291 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.10.4
MOS Input Pull-Up Function
Port E has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS
input pull-up function can be used in modes 4 to 6 when 8-bit bus mode is selected, or in mode 7,
and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis.
When a PEDDR bit is cleared to 0 in modes 4 to 6 when 8-bit bus mode is selected, or in mode 7,
setting the corresponding PEPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin.
The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
The prior state is retained in software standby mode.
Table 9-19 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states.
Table 9-19 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port E)
Modes
7
4 to 6
Reset
Hardware
Standby Mode
Software
Standby Mode
In Other
Operations
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
OFF
8-bit bus
16-bit bus
Legend:
OFF:
MOS input pull-up is always off.
ON/OFF: On when PEDDR = 0 and PEPCR = 1; otherwise off.
Page 292 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.11
Port F
9.11.1
Overview
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port F is a 6-bit I/O port. Port F pins also function as external interrupt input pins (IRQ2 and
IRQ3), A/D trigger input pin (ADTRG), bus control signal input/output pins (AS, RD, HWR, and
LWR), and the system clock (φ) output pin.
Figure 9-21 shows the port F pin configuration.
Port F
Port F pins
Pin functions in modes 4 to 6
PF7/ φ
PF7 (input) / φ (output)
PF6/ AS/ LCAS
AS (output)
PF5/ RD
RD (output)
PF4/ HWR
HWR (output)
PF3/ LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF3 (I/O) / LWR (output) / ADTRG (input) / IRQ3 (input)
PF0/ IRQ2
PF0 (I/O) / IRQ2 (input)
Pin functions in mode 7
PF7 (input) / φ (output)
PF6 (I/O)
PF5 (I/O)
PF4 (I/O)
PF3 (I/O) / ADTRG (input) / IRQ3 (input)
PF0 (I/O) / IRQ2 (input)
Figure 9-21 Port F Pin Functions
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 293 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.11.2
Register Configuration
Table 9-20 shows the port F register configuration.
Table 9-20 Port F Registers
1
Address*
Name
Abbreviation R/W
Initial Value
Port F data direction register
PFDDR
W
B'10000**0* /
2
B'00000**0*
H'FE3E
Port F data register
PFDR
R/W
B'00000**0
H'FF0E
Port F register
PORTF
R
Undefined
H'FFBE
2
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Initial value depends on the mode.
Port F Data Direction Register (PFDDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
PF7DDR PF6DDR PF5DDR PF4DDR PF3DDR
2
1
0
—
—
PF0DDR
Modes 4 to 6
Initial value :
1
0
0
0
0
R/W
:
W
W
W
W
W
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
undefined undefined
—
—
0
W
Mode 7
:
undefined undefined
—
—
0
W
PFDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port F. PFDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
PFDDR is initialized by a reset, and in hardware standby mode, to B'10000**0 in modes 4 to 6,
and to B'00000**0 in mode 7. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. The OPE bit in
SBYCR is used to select whether the bus control output pins retain their output state or become
high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby mode.
• Modes 4 to 6
Pin PF7 functions as the φ output pin when the corresponding PFDDR bit is set to 1, and as an
input port when the bit is cleared to 0.
The input/output direction specified by PFDDR is ignored for pins PF6 to PF3, which are
automatically designated as bus control outputs (AS, RD, HWR, and LWR) (in the 8-bit mode,
pin PF3 is designated by PFDDR).
Page 294 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin PF0 is setting a PFDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port F pin an output port, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
• Mode 7
Setting a PFDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port F pin PF6 to PF3, PF0 an output port,
or in the case of pin PF7, the φ output pin. Clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
Port F Data Register (PFDR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
PF7DR
PF6DR
PF5DR
PF4DR
PF3DR
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
2
1
0
—
—
PF0DR
undefined undefined
—
—
0
R/W
PFDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port F pins (PF7 to PF3,
PF0).
PFDR is initialized to B'00000**0 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior
state in software standby mode.
Port F Register (PORTF)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PF7
—*
PF6
—*
PF5
—*
PF4
—*
PF3
—*
—
—
PF0
—*
R
R
R
R
R
undefined undefined
—
—
R
Note: * Determined by state of pins PF7 to PF3, PF0.
PORTF is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port F pins (PF7 to PF3, PF0) must always be performed on PFDR.
If a port F read is performed while PFDDR bits are set to 1, the PFDR values are read. If a port F
read is performed while PFDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTF contents are determined by the pin states, as
PFDDR and PFDR are initialized. PORTF retains its prior state in software standby mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 295 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.11.3
Pin Functions
Port F pins also function as external interrupt input pins (IRQ2 and IRQ3), A/D trigger input pin
(ADTRG), bus control signal input/output pins (AS, RD, HWR, LWR), and the system clock (φ)
output pin. The pin functions differ between modes 4 to 6, and mode 7. Port F pin functions are
shown in table 9-21.
Table 9-21 Port F Pin Functions
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PF7/φ
The pin function is switched as shown below according to bit PF7DDR.
PF7DDR
Pin function
PF6/AS
φ output
Modes 4 to 6
PF6DDR
—
0
1
AS output
PF6 input
PF6 output
Mode 7
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode
and bit PF5DDR.
PF5DDR
Pin function
Modes 4 to 6
Mode 7
—
0
1
RD output
PF5 input
PF5 output
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode
and bit PF4DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
PF4DDR
—
0
1
HWR output
PF4 input
PF4 output
Pin function
Page 296 of 1458
PF7 input
Operating
Mode
Operating
Mode
PF4/HWR
1
The pin function is switched as shown below according to bit PF6DDR.
Pin function
PF5/RD
0
Mode 7
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PF3/LWR/
ADTRG/IRQ3
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
the bus mode, A/D converter bits TRGS1 and TRGS0, and bit PF3DDR.
Operating
mode
Modes 4 to 6
Bus mode
16-bit bus
mode
PF3DDR
—
Pin function
Mode 7
8-bit bus mode
0
1
—
0
1
LWR output PF3 input PF3 output PF3 input PF3 output
pin
pin
pin
pin
pin
1
ADTRG input pin*
IRQ3 input pin*
2
Notes: 1. ADTRG input when TRGS0 = TRGS1 = 1.
2. When used as an external interrupt input pin, do not use as an I/O
pin for another function.
PF0/IRQ2
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the bit PF0DDR.
PF0DDR
Pin function
0
1
PF0 input
PF0 output
IRQ2 input
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 297 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.12
Port H
9.12.1
Overview
Port H is an 8-bit I/O port. Port H pins also function as motor control PWM timer output pins
(PWM1A to PWM1H).
Figure 9-22 shows the port H pin configuration.
Port H pin
PH7 / PWM1H
PH6 / PWM1G
PH5 / PWM1F
Port H
PH4 / PWM1E
PH3 / PWM1D
PH2 / PWM1C
PH1 / PWM1B
PH0 / PWM1A
Figure 9-22 Port H Pin Functions
Page 298 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.12.2
Section 9 I/O Ports
Register Configuration
Table 9-22 shows the port H register configuration.
Table 9-22 Port H Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port H data direction register
PHDDR
W
H'00
H'FC20
Port H data register
PHDR
RW
H'00
H'FC24
Port H register
PORTH
R
Undefined
H'FC28
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port H Data Direction Register (PHDDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PH7DDR PH6DDR PH5DDR PH4DDR PH3DDR PH2DDR PH1DDR PH0DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
PHDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port H. PHDDR cannot be read. If it is, an undefined value will be read.
PHDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Port H Data Register (PHDR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PH7DR
PH6DR
PH5DR
PH4DR
PH3DR
PH2DR
PH1DR
PH0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PHDR is an 8-bit readable/writeable register that stores output data for the port H pins (PH7 to
PH0).
PHDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 299 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port H Register (PORTH)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PH7
—*
PH6
—*
PH5
—*
PH4
—*
PH3
—*
PH2
—*
PH1
—*
PH0
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Determined by the state of PH7 to PH0
PORTH is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port H pins (PH7 to PH0) must always be performed on PHDR.
If a port H read is performed while PHDDR bits are set to 1, the PHDR values are read. If a port H
read is performed while PHDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTH contents are determined by the pin states, as
PHDDR and PHDR are initialized. PORTH retains its prior state in software standby mode.
9.12.3
Pin Functions
As shown in table 9-23, the port H pin functions can be switched, bit by bit, by changing the
values of OE1A to OE1H of motor control PWM timer PWOCR1 and PHDDR.
Table 9-23 Port H Pin Functions
0E1A to 0E1H
1
0
PHDDR
—
0
1
Pin function
PWM output
PH7 to PH0 input
PH7 to PH0 output
Page 300 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
9.13
Port J
9.13.1
Overview
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port J is an 8-bit I/O port. Port J pins also function as motor control PWM timer output pins
(PWM2A to PWM2H).
Figure 9-23 shows the port J pin configuration.
Port J pin
PJ7 / PWM2H
PJ6 / PWM2G
PJ5 / PWM2F
Port J
PJ4 / PWM2E
PJ3 / PWM2D
PJ2 / PWM2C
PJ1 / PWM2B
PJ0 / PWM2A
Figure 9-23 Port J Pin Functions
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 301 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.13.2
Register Configuration
Table 9-24 shows the port J register configuration.
Table 9-24 Port J Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port J data direction register
PJDDR
W
H'00
H'FC21
Port J data register
PJDR
RW
H'00
H'FC25
Port J register
PORTJ
R
Undefined
H'FC29
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address
Port J Data Direction Register (PJDDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PJ7DDR PJ6DDR PJ5DDR PJ4DDR PJ3DDR PJ2DDR PJ1DDR PJ0DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
PJDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port J. PJDDR cannot be read. If it is, an undefined value will be read.
PJDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Port J Data Register (PJDR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PJ7DR
PJ6DR
PJ5DR
PJ4DR
PJ3DR
PJ2DR
PJ1DR
PJ0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PJDR is an 8-bit readable/writeable register that stores output data for the port J pins (PJ7 to PJ0).
PJDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Page 302 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port J Register (PORTJ)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PJ7
—*
PJ6
—*
PJ5
—*
PJ4
—*
PJ3
—*
PJ2
—*
PJ1
—*
PJ0
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
PORTJ is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port J pins (PJ7 to PJ0) must always be performed on PJDR.
If a port J read is performed while PJDDR bits are set to 1, the PJDR values are read. If a port J
read is performed while PJDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTJ contents are determined by the pin states, as
PJDDR and PJDR are initialized. PORTJ retains its prior state in software standby mode.
9.13.3
Pin Functions
As shown in table 9-25, the port J pin functions can be switched, bit by bit, by changing the values
of OE2A to OE2H of motor control PWM timer PWOCR2 and PJDDR.
Table 9-25 Port J Pin Functions
OE2A to OE2H
1
0
PJDDR
—
0
1
Pin function
PWM output
PJ7 to PJ0 input
PJ7 to PJ0 output
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 303 of 1458
Section 9 I/O Ports
Page 304 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Note: The H8S/2635 Group is not equipped with a DTC or a PPG.
10.1
Overview
The chip has an on-chip 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) that comprises six 16-bit timer channels.
10.1.1
Features
• Maximum 16-pulse input/output
⎯ A total of 16 timer general registers (TGRs) are provided (four each for channels 0 and 3,
and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5), each of which can be set independently as an
output compare/input capture register
⎯ TGRC and TGRD for channels 0 and 3 can also be used as buffer registers
• Selection of 8 counter input clocks for each channel
• The following operations can be set for each channel:
⎯ Waveform output at compare match: Selection of 0, 1, or toggle output
⎯ Input capture function: Selection of rising edge, falling edge, or both edge detection
⎯ Counter clear operation: Counter clearing possible by compare match or input capture
⎯ Synchronous operation: Multiple timer counters (TCNT) can be written to simultaneously
⎯ Simultaneous clearing by compare match and input capture possible
⎯ Register simultaneous input/output possible by counter synchronous operation
⎯ PWM mode: Any PWM output duty can be set
⎯ Maximum of 15-phase PWM output possible by combination with synchronous operation
• Buffer operation settable for channels 0 and 3
⎯ Input capture register double-buffering possible
⎯ Automatic rewriting of output compare register possible
• Phase counting mode settable independently for each of channels 1, 2, 4, and 5
⎯ Two-phase encoder pulse up/down-count possible
• Cascaded operation
⎯ Channel 2 (channel 5) input clock operates as 32-bit counter by setting channel 1 (channel
4) overflow/underflow
• Fast access via internal 16-bit bus
⎯ Fast access is possible via a 16-bit bus interface
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 305 of 1458
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
• 26 interrupt sources
⎯ For channels 0 and 3, four compare match/input capture dual-function interrupts and one
overflow interrupt can be requested independently
⎯ For channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, two compare match/input capture dual-function interrupts, one
overflow interrupt, and one underflow interrupt can be requested independently
• Automatic transfer of register data
⎯ Block transfer, 1-word data transfer, and 1-byte data transfer possible by data transfer
controller (DTC)
• Programmable pulse generator (PPG) output trigger can be generated
⎯ Channel 0 to 3 compare match/input capture signals can be used as PPG output trigger
• A/D converter conversion start trigger can be generated
⎯ Channel 0 to 5 compare match A/input capture A signals can be used as A/D converter
conversion start trigger
• Module stop mode can be set
⎯ As the initial setting, TPU operation is halted. Register access is enabled by exiting module
stop mode.
Table 10-1 lists the functions of the TPU.
Page 306 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10-1 TPU Functions
Item
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5
Count clock
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
TCLKD
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
TCLKA
TCLKB
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/1024
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
φ/1024
φ/4096
TCLKA
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/1024
TCLKA
TCLKC
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
TCLKA
TCLKC
TCLKD
General registers
TGR0A
TGR0B
TGR1A
TGR1B
TGR2A
TGR2B
TGR3A
TGR3B
TGR4A
TGR4B
TGR5A
TGR5B
General registers/
buffer registers
TGR0C
TGR0D
—
—
TGR3C
TGR3D
—
—
I/O pins
TIOCA0
TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TIOCD0
TIOCA1
TIOCB1
TIOCA2
TIOCB2
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
TIOCA4
TIOCB4
TIOCA5
TIOCB5
Counter clear
function
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
—
—
Compare 0 output
match
1 output
output
Toggle
output
Input capture
function
Synchronous
operation
PWM mode
Phase counting
mode
Buffer operation
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
—
—
—
—
Page 307 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Item
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
DTC
TGR
activation compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
A/D
TGR0A
converter compare
trigger
match or
input capture
TGR1A
compare
match or
input capture
TGR2A
compare
match or
input capture
TGR3A
compare
match or
input capture
TGR4A
compare
match or
input capture
TGR5A
compare
match or
input capture
PPG
trigger
TGR0A/
TGR0B
compare
match or
input capture
TGR1A/
TGR1B
compare
match or
input capture
TGR2A/
TGR2B
compare
match or
input capture
TGR3A/
—
TGR3B
compare
match or
input capture
—
Interrupt
sources
5 sources
4 sources
4 sources
5 sources
4 sources
• Compare
•
match or
input capture
0A
Compare
•
match or
input capture
1A
4 sources
Compare
• Compare
• Compare
• Compare
match or
match or
match or
match or
input
input
input
input
capture 2A
capture 3A
capture 4A
capture 5A
• Compare
• Compare
• Compare
• Compare
• Compare
• Compare
match or
match or
match or
match or
match or
match or
input
input
input
input
input
input
capture 0B
capture 1B
capture 2B
capture 3B
capture 4B
capture 5B
• Compare
• Overflow
match or
• Underflow
input
capture 0C
• Overflow
• Underflow
• Compare
• Overflow
match or
• Underflow
input
capture 3C
• Compare
match or
input
capture 0D
• Compare
match or
input capture
3D
• Overflow
• Overflow
• Overflow
• Underflow
Legend:
: Possible
—: Not possible
Page 308 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
10.1.2
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Block Diagram
TGRD
TGRB
TGRC
TGRB
Interrupt request signals
Channel 3: TGI3A
TGI3B
TGI3C
TGI3D
TCI3V
Channel 4: TGI4A
TGI4B
TCI4V
TCI4U
Channel 5: TGI5A
TGI5B
TCI5V
TCI5U
Internal data bus
A/D converter conversion
start signal
TGRD
PPG output trigger signal
TGRC
TGRB
TGRB
TGRB
TCNT
TCNT
TGRA
TCNT
TGRA
TGRA
Bus interface
TGRB
TCNT
TCNT
TGRA
TCNT
TGRA
TSR
TSR
TGRA
TSR
TIER
TIER
TIER
TSR
TSR
Module data bus
TSTR TSYR
TIER
TIER
TIER
Control logic
TIORH TIORL
TIOR
TIOR
TSR
TMDR
TIORH TIORL
TIOR
TIOR
TCR
TMDR
Channel 4
TCR
TMDR
Channel 5
Common
TCR
TMDR
TCR
TMDR
TCR
Channel 1
Channel 2
TIOR (H, L):
TIER:
TSR:
TGR (A, B, C, D):
TMDR
Channel 0
Legend:
TSTR: Timer start register
TSYR: Timer synchro register
TCR:
Timer control register
TMDR: Timer mode register
Control logic for channels 0 to 2
Input/output pins
TIOCA0
Channel 0:
TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TIOCD0
TIOCA1
Channel 1:
TIOCB1
TIOCA2
Channel 2:
TIOCB2
TCR
Clock input
Internal clock: φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
φ/1024
φ/4096
External clock: TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
TCLKD
Control logic for channels 3 to 5
Input/output pins
Channel 3:
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
TIOCA4
Channel 4:
TIOCB4
TIOCA5
Channel 5:
TIOCB5
Channel 3
Figure 10-1 shows a block diagram of the TPU.
Interrupt request signals
Channel 0: TGI0A
TGI0B
TGI0C
TGI0D
TCI0V
Channel 1: TGI1A
TGI1B
TCI1V
TCI1U
Channel 2: TGI2A
TGI2B
TCI2V
TCI2U
Timer I/O control registers (H, L)
Timer interrupt enable register
Timer status register
Timer general registers (A, B, C, D)
Figure 10-1 Block Diagram of TPU
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 309 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 10-2 summarizes the TPU pins.
Table 10-2 TPU Pins
Channel
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
All
Clock input A
TCLKA
Input
External clock A input pin
(Channel 1 and 5 phase counting mode A
phase input)
Clock input B
TCLKB
Input
External clock B input pin
(Channel 1 and 5 phase counting mode B
phase input)
Clock input C
TCLKC
Input
External clock C input pin
(Channel 2 and 4 phase counting mode A
phase input)
Clock input D
TCLKD
Input
External clock D input pin
(Channel 2 and 4 phase counting mode B
phase input)
Input capture/out TIOCA0
compare match A0
I/O
TGR0A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCB0
compare match B0
I/O
TGR0B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCC0
compare match C0
I/O
TGR0C input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCD0
compare match D0
I/O
TGR0D input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCA1
compare match A1
I/O
TGR1A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCB1
compare match B1
I/O
TGR1B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCA2
compare match A2
I/O
TGR2A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCB2
compare match B2
I/O
TGR2B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
0
1
2
Page 310 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
3
Input capture/out TIOCA3
compare match A3
I/O
TGR3A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCB3
compare match B3
I/O
TGR3B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCC3
compare match C3
I/O
TGR3C input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCD3
compare match D3
I/O
TGR3D input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCA4
compare match A4
I/O
TGR4A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCB4
compare match B4
I/O
TGR4B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCA5
compare match A5
I/O
TGR5A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCB5
compare match B5
I/O
TGR5B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
4
5
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 311 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 10-3 summarizes the TPU registers.
Table 10-3 TPU Registers
1
Channel Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address *
0
Timer control register 0
TCR0
R/W
H'00
H'FF10
Timer mode register 0
TMDR0
R/W
H'C0
H'FF11
Timer I/O control register 0H
TIOR0H
R/W
H'00
H'FF12
Timer I/O control register 0L
TIOR0L
R/W
H'00
H'FF13
1
2
Timer interrupt enable register 0 TIER0
R/W
H'40
H'FF14
Timer status register 0
TSR0
R/(W)*
H'C0
H'FF15
Timer counter 0
TCNT0
R/W
H'0000
H'FF16
Timer general register 0A
TGR0A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF18
Timer general register 0B
TGR0B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF1A
2
Timer general register 0C
TGR0C
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF1C
Timer general register 0D
TGR0D
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF1E
Timer control register 1
TCR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF20
Timer mode register 1
TMDR1
R/W
H'C0
H'FF21
Timer I/O control register 1
TIOR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF22
Timer interrupt enable register 1 TIER1
R/W
H'FF24
Timer status register 1
TSR1
H'40
2
*
R/(W)
H'C0
Timer counter 1
TCNT1
R/W
H'0000
H'FF26
Timer general register 1A
TGR1A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF28
Timer general register 1B
TGR1B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF2A
Timer control register 2
TCR2
R/W
H'00
H'FF30
Timer mode register 2
TMDR2
R/W
H'C0
H'FF31
Timer I/O control register 2
TIOR2
R/W
H'00
H'FF32
Timer interrupt enable register 2 TIER2
R/W
H'40
H'FF34
H'C0
H'FF35
H'0000
H'FF36
Timer status register 2
TSR2
R/(W)
Timer counter 2
TCNT2
R/W
*2
H'FF25
Timer general register 2A
TGR2A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF38
Timer general register 2B
TGR2B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF3A
Page 312 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
1
Channel Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
3
Timer control register 3
TCR3
R/W
H'00
H'FE80
Timer mode register 3
TMDR3
R/W
H'C0
H'FE81
Timer I/O control register 3H
TIOR3H
R/W
H'00
H'FE82
Timer I/O control register 3L
TIOR3L
R/W
H'00
H'FE83
4
5
All
Timer interrupt enable register 3 TIER3
R/W
H'40
H'FE84
Timer status register 3
TSR3
R/(W)*
H'C0
H'FE85
Timer counter 3
TCNT3
R/W
H'0000
H'FE86
Timer general register 3A
TGR3A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FE88
Timer general register 3B
TGR3B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FE8A
Timer general register 3C
TGR3C
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FE8C
Timer general register 3D
TGR3D
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FE8E
Timer control register 4
TCR4
R/W
H'00
H'FE90
Timer mode register 4
TMDR4
R/W
H'C0
H'FE91
Timer I/O control register 4
TIOR4
R/W
H'00
H'FE92
Timer interrupt enable register 4 TIER4
R/W
H'FE94
2
Timer status register 4
TSR4
H'40
2
*
R/(W)
H'C0
Timer counter 4
TCNT4
R/W
H'0000
H'FE96
Timer general register 4A
TGR4A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FE98
Timer general register 4B
TGR4B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FE9A
Timer control register 5
TCR5
R/W
H'00
H'FEA0
Timer mode register 5
TMDR5
R/W
H'C0
H'FEA1
Timer I/O control register 5
TIOR5
R/W
H'00
H'FEA2
Timer interrupt enable register 5 TIER5
R/W
H'40
H'FEA4
H'C0
H'FEA5
*2
H'FE95
Timer status register 5
TSR5
R/(W)
Timer counter 5
TCNT5
R/W
H'0000
H'FEA6
Timer general register 5A
TGR5A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FEA8
Timer general register 5B
TGR5B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FEAA
Timer start register
TSTR
R/W
H'00
H'FEB0
Timer synchro register
TSYR
R/W
H'00
H'FEB1
Module stop control register A
MSTPCRA
R/W
H'3F
H'FDE8
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Can only be written with 0 for flag clearing.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 313 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2
Register Descriptions
10.2.1
Timer Control Register (TCR)
Channel 0: TCR0
Channel 3: TCR3
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CCLR2
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
R/W
:
Channel 1: TCR1
Channel 2: TCR2
Channel 4: TCR4
Channel 5: TCR5
Bit
:
—
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
The TCR registers are 8-bit registers that control the TCNT channels. The TPU has six TCR
registers, one for each of channels 0 to 5. The TCR registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset, and
in hardware standby mode.
TCR register settings should be made only when TCNT operation is stopped.
Page 314 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bits 7 to 5—Counter Clear 2, 1, and 0 (CCLR2, CCLR1, CCLR0): These bits select the TCNT
counter clearing source.
Channel
Bit 7
CCLR2
Bit 6
CCLR1
Bit 5
CCLR0
Description
0, 3
0
0
0
TCNT clearing disabled
1
TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input
capture
0
TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input
capture
1
TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another
channel performing synchronous clearing/
1
synchronous operation *
0
TCNT clearing disabled
1
TCNT cleared by TGRC compare match/input
2
capture *
0
TCNT cleared by TGRD compare match/input
2
capture *
1
TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another
channel performing synchronous clearing/
1
synchronous operation *
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
Channel
Bit 7
Bit 6
3
Reserved* CCLR1
Bit 5
CCLR0
Description
1, 2, 4, 5
0
0
TCNT clearing disabled
1
TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input
capture
0
TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input
capture
1
TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another
channel performing synchronous clearing/
1
synchronous operation *
0
1
(Initial value)
Notes: 1. Synchronous operation setting is performed by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1.
2. When TGRC or TGRD is used as a buffer register, TCNT is not cleared because the
buffer register setting has priority, and compare match/input capture does not occur.
3. Bit 7 is reserved in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. It is always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 315 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bits 4 and 3—Clock Edge 1 and 0 (CKEG1, CKEG0): These bits select the input clock edge.
When the input clock is counted using both edges, the input clock period is halved (e.g. φ/4 both
edges = φ/2 rising edge). If phase counting mode is used on channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, this setting is
ignored and the phase counting mode setting has priority.
Bit 4
CKEG1
Bit 3
CKEG0
Description
0
0
Count at rising edge
1
Count at falling edge
—
Count at both edges
1
(Initial value)
Note: Internal clock edge selection is valid when the input clock is φ/4 or slower. This setting is
ignored if the input clock is φ/1, or when overflow/underflow of another channel is selected.
Bits 2 to 0—Time Prescaler 2, 1, and 0 (TPSC2 to TPSC0): These bits select the TCNT counter
clock. The clock source can be selected independently for each channel. Table 10-4 shows the
clock sources that can be set for each channel.
Table 10-4 TPU Clock Sources
Internal Clock
Channel
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
External Clock
Overflow/
Underflow
φ/256 φ/1024 φ/4096 TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD on Another
Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
Legend:
:
Setting
Blank: No setting
Page 316 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
0
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
1
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
0
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input
1
1
(Initial value)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
1
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/256
1
Counts on TCNT2 overflow/underflow
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 1 is in phase counting mode.
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
2
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
1
0
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/1024
1
1
(Initial value)
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 2 is in phase counting mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 317 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
3
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
1
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/1024
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/256
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4096
1
1
(Initial value)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
4
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1024
1
Counts on TCNT5 overflow/underflow
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 4 is in phase counting mode.
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
5
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
1
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/256
1
External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input
1
1
(Initial value)
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 5 is in phase counting mode.
Page 318 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
10.2.2
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Timer Mode Register (TMDR)
Channel 0: TMDR0
Channel 3: TMDR3
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
BFB
BFA
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
Initial value :
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
Initial value :
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
Channel 1: TMDR1
Channel 2: TMDR2
Channel 4: TMDR4
Channel 5: TMDR5
Bit
:
:
The TMDR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that are used to set the operating mode
for each channel. The TPU has six TMDR registers, one for each channel. The TMDR registers
are initialized to H'C0 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
TMDR register settings should be made only when TCNT operation is stopped.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 5—Buffer Operation B (BFB): Specifies whether TGRB is to operate in the normal way, or
TGRB and TGRD are to be used together for buffer operation. When TGRD is used as a buffer
register, TGRD input capture/output compare is not generated.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRD, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and
cannot be modified.
Bit 5
BFB
Description
0
TGRB operates normally
1
TGRB and TGRD used together for buffer operation
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
(Initial value)
Page 319 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit 4—Buffer Operation A (BFA): Specifies whether TGRA is to operate in the normal way, or
TGRA and TGRC are to be used together for buffer operation. When TGRC is used as a buffer
register, TGRC input capture/output compare is not generated.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRC, bit 4 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot
be modified.
Bit 4
BFA
Description
0
TGRA operates normally
1
TGRA and TGRC used together for buffer operation
(Initial value)
Bits 3 to 0—Modes 3 to 0 (MD3 to MD0): These bits are used to set the timer operating mode.
Bit 3
1
MD3*
Bit 2
2
MD2*
Bit 1
MD1
Bit 0
MD0
Description
0
0
0
0
Normal operation
1
Reserved
0
PWM mode 1
1
PWM mode 2
0
Phase counting mode 1
1
Phase counting mode 2
0
Phase counting mode 3
1
Phase counting mode 4
*
—
1
1
0
1
1
*
*
(Initial value)
*: Don’t care
Notes: 1. MD3 is a reserved bit. In a write, it should always be written with 0.
2. Phase counting mode cannot be set for channels 0 and 3. In this case, 0 should always
be written to MD2.
Page 320 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
10.2.3
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)
Channel 0: TIOR0H
Channel 1: TIOR1
Channel 2: TIOR2
Channel 3: TIOR3H
Channel 4: TIOR4
Channel 5: TIOR5
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IOD3
IOD2
IOD1
IOD0
IOC3
IOC2
IOC1
IOC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Channel 0: TIOR0L
Channel 3: TIOR3L
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
Note: When TGRC or TGRD is designated for buffer operation, this setting is invalid and the
register operates as a buffer register.
The TIOR registers are 8-bit registers that control the TGR registers. The TPU has eight TIOR
registers, two each for channels 0 and 3, and one each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. The TIOR
registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
Care is required since TIOR is affected by the TMDR setting. The initial output specified by TIOR
is valid when the counter is stopped (the CST bit in TSTR is cleared to 0). Note also that, in PWM
mode 2, the output at the point at which the counter is cleared to 0 is specified.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 321 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bits 7 to 4— I/O Control B3 to B0 (IOB3 to IOB0)
I/O Control D3 to D0 (IOD3 to IOD0):
Bits IOB3 to IOB0 specify the function of TGRB.
Bits IOD3 to IOD0 specify the function of TGRD.
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR0B
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is
0 output
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
Note:
1
*
*
*
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR0B
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCB0 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at TCNT1
1
source is channel count-up/count-down*
1/count clock
*: Don’t care
1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR1 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT1
count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
Page 322 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 Description
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR0D
Output disabled
is output Initial output is 0
compare output
2
register*
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
1 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
0 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
Capture input
TGR0D
source is
is input
TIOCD0 pin
capture
2
register*
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at TCNT1
1
source is channel count-up/count-down*
1/count clock
*: Don’t care
Notes: 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR1 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT1
count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
2. When the BFB bit in TMDR0 is set to 1 and TGR0D is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 323 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR1B
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
1 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
0 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
TGR1B
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCB1 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at generation
source is TGR0C of TGR0C compare match/
compare match/ input capture
input capture
*: Don’t care
Page 324 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR2B
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
*
0
0
1
1
*
1 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
0 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
TGR2B
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCB2 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
*: Don’t care
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 325 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR3B
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
0
0
1
1
Note:
1
*
*
*
1 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
0 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
TGR3B
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCB3 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at TCNT4
1
source is channel count-up/count-down*
4/count clock
*: Don’t care
1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR4 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT4
count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
Page 326 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 Description
3
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Output disabled
TGR3D
is output Initial output is 0
compare output
2
register*
0
0
Output disabled
1
1
0
Initial output is 1
output
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
Capture input
TGR3D
is input
source is
capture
TIOCD3 pin
2
register*
Capture input
source is channel
4/count clock
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Input capture at TCNT4
1
count-up/count-down*
*: Don’t care
Notes: 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR4 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT4
count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
2. When the BFB bit in TMDR3 is set to 1 and TGR3D is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 327 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description
4
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR4B
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
0
0
Output disabled
1
1
0
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR4B
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCB4 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at generation
source is TGR3C of TGR3C compare match/
compare match/ input capture
input capture
*: Don’t care
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description
5
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR5B
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
1
*
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR5B
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCB5 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
*: Don’t care
Page 328 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bits 3 to 0— I/O Control A3 to A0 (IOA3 to IOA0)
I/O Control C3 to C0 (IOC3 to IOC0):
IOA3 to IOA0 specify the function of TGRA.
IOC3 to IOC0 specify the function of TGRC.
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR0A
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
0
0
Output disabled
1
1
0
Initial output is 1
output
1
1
0
0
0
1
*
*
*
1
1
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR0A
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCA0 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Input capture at TCNT1
Capture input
source is channel count-up/count-down
1/ count clock
*: Don’t care
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 329 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 Description
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR0C
Output disabled
is output Initial output is 0
compare output
1
register*
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
0
0
1
1
Note:
1
*
*
*
1 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
0 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
Capture input
TGR0C
source is
is input
TIOCC0 pin
capture
1
register*
Capture input
source is channel
1/count clock
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Input capture at TCNT1
count-up/count-down
*: Don’t care
1. When the BFA bit in TMDR0 is set to 1 and TGR0C is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Page 330 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR1A
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
1 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
0 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
TGR1A is Capture input
source is
input
TIOCA1 pin
capture
register
Capture input
source is TGR0A
compare match/
input capture
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Input capture at generation
of channel 0/TGR0A
compare match/input capture
*: Don’t care
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 331 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR2A
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
*
0
0
1
1
*
1 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
0 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
TGR2A
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCA2 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
*: Don’t care
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR3A
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
0
0
Output disabled
1
1
0
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
*
*
*
1
1
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR3A
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCA3 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Input capture at TCNT4
Capture input
source is channel count-up/count-down
4/count clock
*: Don’t care
Page 332 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 Description
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR3C
Output disabled
is output Initial output is 0
compare output
1
register*
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
0
0
1
1
Note:
1
*
*
*
1 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
0 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
Capture input
TGR3C
source is
is input
TIOCC3 pin
capture
1
register*
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Input capture at TCNT4
Capture input
source is channel count-up/count-down
4/count clock
*: Don’t care
1. When the BFA bit in TMDR3 is set to 1 and TGR3C is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 333 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description
4
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
TGR4A
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
0
0
Output disabled
1
1
0
Initial output is 1
output
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR4A
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCA4 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at generation
source is TGR3A of TGR3A compare match/
compare match/ input capture
input capture
*: Don’t care
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description
5
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR5A
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
1
1
*
0
0
1
1
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR5A
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCA5 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
*: Don’t care
Page 334 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
10.2.4
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)
Channel 0: TIER0
Channel 3: TIER3
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TTGE
—
—
TCIEV
TGIED
TGIEC
TGIEB
TGIEA
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TTGE
—
TCIEU
TCIEV
—
—
TGIEB
TGIEA
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
Channel 1: TIER1
Channel 2: TIER2
Channel 4: TIER4
Channel 5: TIER5
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
The TIER registers are 8-bit registers that control enabling or disabling of interrupt requests for
each channel. The TPU has six TIER registers, one for each channel. The TIER registers are
initialized to H'40 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 335 of 1458
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 7—A/D Conversion Start Request Enable (TTGE): Enables or disables generation of A/D
conversion start requests by TGRA input capture/compare match.
Bit 7
TTGE
Description
0
A/D conversion start request generation disabled
1
A/D conversion start request generation enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Reserved: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 5—Underflow Interrupt Enable (TCIEU): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIU) by
the TCFU flag when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 5
TCIEU
Description
0
Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU disabled
1
Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Overflow Interrupt Enable (TCIEV): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIV) by
the TCFV flag when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1.
Bit 4
TCIEV
Description
0
Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV disabled
1
Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 3—TGR Interrupt Enable D (TGIED): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGID) by the
TGFD bit when the TGFD bit in TSR is set to 1 in channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 3
TGIED
Description
0
Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit disabled
1
Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit enabled
Page 336 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit 2—TGR Interrupt Enable C (TGIEC): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIC) by the
TGFC bit when the TGFC bit in TSR is set to 1 in channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 2
TGIEC
Description
0
Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit disabled
1
Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 1—TGR Interrupt Enable B (TGIEB): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIB) by the
TGFB bit when the TGFB bit in TSR is set to 1.
Bit 1
TGIEB
Description
0
Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit disabled
1
Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 0—TGR Interrupt Enable A (TGIEA): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIA) by the
TGFA bit when the TGFA bit in TSR is set to 1.
Bit 0
TGIEA
Description
0
Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit disabled
1
Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit enabled
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
(Initial value)
Page 337 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2.5
Timer Status Register (TSR)
Channel 0: TSR0
Channel 3: TSR3
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
TCFV
TGFD
TGFC
TGFB
TGFA
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Initial value :
R/W
:
—
—
Note: * Can only be written with 0 for flag clearing.
Channel 1: TSR1
Channel 2: TSR2
Channel 4: TSR4
Channel 5: TSR5
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCFD
—
TCFU
TCFV
—
—
TGFB
TGFA
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
—
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
—
Note: * Can only be written with 0 for flag clearing.
The TSR registers are 8-bit registers that indicate the status of each channel. The TPU has six TSR
registers, one for each channel. The TSR registers are initialized to H'C0 by a reset, and in
hardware standby mode.
Page 338 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit 7—Count Direction Flag (TCFD): Status flag that shows the direction in which TCNT
counts in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
In channels 0 and 3, bit 7 is reserved. It is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 7
TCFD
Description
0
TCNT counts down
1
TCNT counts up
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Reserved: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 5—Underflow Flag (TCFU): Status flag that indicates that TCNT underflow has occurred
when channels 1, 2, 4, and 5 are set to phase counting mode.
In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 5
TCFU
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
1
[Setting condition]
•
•
(Initial value)
When 0 is written to TCFU after reading TCFU = 1
When the TCNT value underflows (changes from H'0000 to H'FFFF)
Bit 4—Overflow Flag (TCFV): Status flag that indicates that TCNT overflow has occurred.
Bit 4
TCFV
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
When 0 is written to TCFV after reading TCFV = 1
[Setting condition]
•
When the TCNT value overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000 )
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
(Initial value)
Page 339 of 1458
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 3—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag D (TGFD): Status flag that indicates the
occurrence of TGRD input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 3
TGFD
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
(Initial value)
•
When DTC is activated by TGID interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFD after reading TGFD = 1
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRD while TGRD is functioning as output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRD by input capture signal while TGRD is
functioning as input capture register
Bit 2—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag C (TGFC): Status flag that indicates the
occurrence of TGRC input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 2
TGFC
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
(Initial value)
•
When DTC is activated by TGIC interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFC after reading TGFC = 1
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRC while TGRC is functioning as output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRC by input capture signal while TGRC is
functioning as input capture register
Page 340 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit 1—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag B (TGFB): Status flag that indicates the
occurrence of TGRB input capture or compare match.
Bit 1
TGFB
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
(Initial value)
•
When DTC is activated by TGIB interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFB after reading TGFB = 1
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRB while TGRB is functioning as output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRB by input capture signal while TGRB is
functioning as input capture register
Bit 0—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag A (TGFA): Status flag that indicates the
occurrence of TGRA input capture or compare match.
Bit 0
TGFA
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When DTC is activated by TGIA interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFA after reading TGFA = 1
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRA while TGRA is functioning as output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRA by input capture signal while TGRA is
functioning as input capture register
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
(Initial value)
Page 341 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2.6
Timer Counter (TCNT)
Channel 0: TCNT0 (up-counter)
Channel 1: TCNT1 (up/down-counter*)
Channel 2: TCNT2 (up/down-counter*)
Channel 3: TCNT3 (up-counter)
Channel 4: TCNT4 (up/down-counter*)
Channel 5: TCNT5 (up/down-counter*)
Bit
:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
: R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Note: * These counters can be used as up/down-counters only in phase counting mode or when
counting overflow/underflow on another channel. In other cases they function as upcounters.
The TCNT registers are 16-bit counters. The TPU has six TCNT counters, one for each channel.
The TCNT counters are initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
The TCNT counters cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit
unit.
Page 342 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
10.2.7
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Timer General Register (TGR)
Bit
:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
: R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
The TGR registers are 16-bit registers with a dual function as output compare and input capture
registers. The TPU has 16 TGR registers, four each for channels 0 and 3 and two each for channels
1, 2, 4, and 5. TGRC and TGRD for channels 0 and 3 can also be designated for operation as
buffer registers*. The TGR registers are initialized to H'FFFF by a reset, and in hardware standby
mode.
The TGR registers cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit.
Note: * TGR buffer register combinations are TGRA—TGRC and TGRB—TGRD.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 343 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2.8
Timer Start Register (TSTR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
CST5
CST4
CST3
CST2
CST1
CST0
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
TSTR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects operation/stoppage for channels 0 to 5.
TSTR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. When setting the operating
mode in TMDR or setting the count clock in TCR, first stop the TCNT counter.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Should always be written with 0.
Bits 5 to 0—Counter Start 5 to 0 (CST5 to CST0): These bits select operation or stoppage for
TCNT.
Bit n
CSTn
Description
0
TCNTn count operation is stopped
1
TCNTn performs count operation
(Initial value)
n = 5 to 0
Note: If 0 is written to the CST bit during operation with the TIOC pin designated for output, the
counter stops but the TIOC pin output compare output level is retained. If TIOR is written to
when the CST bit is cleared to 0, the pin output level will be changed to the set initial output
value.
Page 344 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
10.2.9
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Timer Synchro Register (TSYR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
SYNC5
SYNC4
SYNC3
SYNC2
SYNC1
SYNC0
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
TSYR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects independent operation or synchronous
operation for the channel 0 to 4 TCNT counters. A channel performs synchronous operation when
the corresponding bit in TSYR is set to 1.
TSYR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Should always be written with 0.
Bits 5 to 0—Timer Synchro 5 to 0 (SYNC5 to SYNC0): These bits select whether operation is
independent of or synchronized with other channels.
When synchronous operation is selected, synchronous presetting of multiple channels*1, and
synchronous clearing through counter clearing on another channel*2 are possible.
Notes: 1. To set synchronous operation, the SYNC bits for at least two channels must be set to 1.
2. To set synchronous clearing, in addition to the SYNC bit , the TCNT clearing source
must also be set by means of bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR.
Bit n
SYNCn
Description
0
TCNTn operates independently (TCNT presetting/clearing is unrelated to
other channels)
(Initial value)
1
TCNTn performs synchronous operation
TCNT synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible
n = 5 to 0
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 345 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2.10 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTPA5 bit in MSTPCRA is set to 1, TPU operation stops at the end of the bus cycle
and a transition is made to module stop mode. Registers cannot be read or written to in module
stop mode. For details, see section 23A.5, 23B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRA is initialized to H'3F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 5—Module Stop (MSTPA5): Specifies the TPU module stop mode.
Bit 5
MSTPA5
Description
0
TPU module stop mode cleared
1
TPU module stop mode set
Page 346 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3
Interface to Bus Master
10.3.1
16-Bit Registers
TCNT and TGR are 16-bit registers. As the data bus to the bus master is 16 bits wide, these
registers can be read and written to in 16-bit units.
These registers cannot be read or written to in 8-bit units; 16-bit access must always be used.
An example of 16-bit register access operation is shown in figure 10-2.
Internal data bus
H
Bus
master
L
Module
data bus
Bus interface
TCNTH
TCNTL
Figure 10-2 16-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCNT (16 Bits)]
10.3.2
8-Bit Registers
Registers other than TCNT and TGR are 8-bit. As the data bus to the CPU is 16 bits wide, these
registers can be read and written to in 16-bit units. They can also be read and written to in 8-bit
units.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 347 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Examples of 8-bit register access operation are shown in figures 10-3, 10-4, and 10-5.
Internal data bus
H
Bus
master
L
Module
data bus
Bus interface
TCR
Figure 10-3 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCR (Upper 8 Bits)]
Internal data bus
H
Bus
master
L
Module
data bus
Bus interface
TMDR
Figure 10-4 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TMDR (Lower 8 Bits)]
Internal data bus
H
Bus
master
L
Module
data bus
Bus interface
TCR
TMDR
Figure 10-5 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCR and TMDR (16 Bits)]
Page 348 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
10.4
Operation
10.4.1
Overview
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Operation in each mode is outlined below.
Normal Operation: Each channel has a TCNT and TGR register. TCNT performs up-counting,
and is also capable of free-running operation, synchronous counting, and external event counting.
Each TGR can be used as an input capture register or output compare register.
Synchronous Operation: When synchronous operation is designated for a channel, TCNT for
that channel performs synchronous presetting. That is, when TCNT for a channel designated for
synchronous operation is rewritten, the TCNT counters for the other channels are also rewritten at
the same time. Synchronous clearing of the TCNT counters is also possible by setting the timer
synchronization bits in TSYR for channels designated for synchronous operation.
Buffer Operation
• When TGR is an output compare register
When a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the relevant channel is
transferred to TGR.
• When TGR is an input capture register
When input capture occurs, the value in TCNT is transfer to TGR and the value previously
held in TGR is transferred to the buffer register.
Cascaded Operation: The channel 1 counter (TCNT1), channel 2 counter (TCNT2), channel 4
counter (TCNT4), and channel 5 counter (TCNT5) can be connected together to operate as a 32bit counter.
PWM Mode: In this mode, a PWM waveform is output. The output level can be set by means of
TIOR. A PWM waveform with a duty of between 0% and 100% can be output, according to the
setting of each TGR register.
Phase Counting Mode: In this mode, TCNT is incremented or decremented by detecting the
phases of two clocks input from the external clock input pins in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. When
phase counting mode is set, the corresponding TCLK pin functions as the clock pin, and TCNT
performs up- or down-counting.
This can be used for two-phase encoder pulse input.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 349 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.2
Basic Functions
Counter Operation: When one of bits CST0 to CST5 is set to 1 in TSTR, the TCNT counter for
the corresponding channel starts counting. TCNT can operate as a free-running counter, periodic
counter, and so on.
• Example of count operation setting procedure
Figure 10-6 shows an example of the count operation setting procedure.
[1] Select the counter
clock with bits
TPSC2 to TPSC0 in
TCR. At the same
time, select the
input clock edge
with bits CKEG1
and CKEG0 in TCR.
Operation selection
Select counter clock
[1]
Periodic counter
Select counter clearing source
[2]
Select output compare register
[3]
Set period
[4]
Start count operation
[5]
<Periodic counter>
[2] For periodic counter
operation, select the
TGR to be used as
the TCNT clearing
source with bits
CCLR2 to CCLR0 in
TCR.
Free-running counter
[3] Designate the TGR
selected in [2] as an
output compare
register by means of
TIOR.
[4] Set the periodic
counter cycle in the
TGR selected in [2].
Start count operation
<Free-running counter>
[5]
[5] Set the CST bit in
TSTR to 1 to start
the counter
operation.
Figure 10-6 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure
Page 350 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• Free-running count operation and periodic count operation
Immediately after a reset, the TPU’s TCNT counters are all designated as free-running
counters. When the relevant bit in TSTR is set to 1 the corresponding TCNT counter starts upcount operation as a free-running counter. When TCNT overflows (from H'FFFF to H'0000),
the TCFV bit in TSR is set to 1. If the value of the corresponding TCIEV bit in TIER is 1 at
this point, the TPU requests an interrupt. After overflow, TCNT starts counting up again from
H'0000.
Figure 10-7 illustrates free-running counter operation.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
H'0000
Time
CST bit
TCFV
Figure 10-7 Free-Running Counter Operation
When compare match is selected as the TCNT clearing source, the TCNT counter for the
relevant channel performs periodic count operation. The TGR register for setting the period is
designated as an output compare register, and counter clearing by compare match is selected
by means of bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. After the settings have been made, TCNT starts
up-count operation as periodic counter when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When
the count value matches the value in TGR, the TGF bit in TSR is set to 1 and TCNT is cleared
to H'0000.
If the value of the corresponding TGIE bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests an
interrupt. After a compare match, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 351 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 10-8 illustrates periodic counter operation.
Counter cleared by TGR
compare match
TCNT value
TGR
H'0000
Time
CST bit
Flag cleared by software or
DTC activation
TGF
Figure 10-8 Periodic Counter Operation
Waveform Output by Compare Match: The TPU can perform 0, 1, or toggle output from the
corresponding output pin using compare match.
• Example of setting procedure for waveform output by compare match
Figure 10-9 shows an example of the setting procedure for waveform output by compare match
Output selection
Select waveform output mode
[1]
[1] Select initial value 0 output or 1 output, and
compare match output value 0 output, 1 output,
or toggle output, by means of TIOR. The set
initial value is output at the TIOC pin until the
first compare match occurs.
[2] Set the timing for compare match generation in
TGR.
Set output timing
[2]
Start count operation
[3]
[3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
<Waveform output>
Figure 10-9 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match
Page 352 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• Examples of waveform output operation
Figure 10-10 shows an example of 0 output/1 output.
In this example TCNT has been designated as a free-running counter, and settings have been
made so that 1 is output by compare match A, and 0 is output by compare match B. When the
set level and the pin level coincide, the pin level does not change.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
TGRA
TGRB
Time
H'0000
No change
No change
1 output
TIOCA
No change
TIOCB
No change
0 output
Figure 10-10 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation
Figure 10-11 shows an example of toggle output.
In this example TCNT has been designated as a periodic counter (with counter clearing
performed by compare match B), and settings have been made so that output is toggled by both
compare match A and compare match B.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by TGRB compare match
H'FFFF
TGRB
TGRA
Time
H'0000
Toggle output
TIOCB
Toggle output
TIOCA
Figure 10-11 Example of Toggle Output Operation
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 353 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Input Capture Function: The TCNT value can be transferred to TGR on detection of the TIOC
pin input edge.
Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected as the detected edge. For channels 0, 1, 3,
and 4, it is also possible to specify another channel’s counter input clock or compare match signal
as the input capture source.
Note: When another channel’s counter input clock is used as the input capture input for channels
0 and 3, φ/1 should not be selected as the counter input clock used for input capture input.
Input capture will not be generated if φ/1 is selected.
• Example of input capture operation setting procedure
Figure 10-12 shows an example of the input capture operation setting procedure.
[1] Designate TGR as an input capture register by
means of TIOR, and select rising edge, falling
edge, or both edges as the input capture source
and input signal edge.
Input selection
Select input capture input
[1]
Start count
[2]
[2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
<Input capture operation>
Figure 10-12 Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure
Page 354 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• Example of input capture operation
Figure 10-13 shows an example of input capture operation.
In this example both rising and falling edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input
capture input edge, falling edge has been selected as the TIOCB pin input capture input edge,
and counter clearing by TGRB input capture has been designated for TCNT.
Counter cleared by TIOCB
input (falling edge)
TCNT value
H'0180
H'0160
H'0010
H'0005
Time
H'0000
TIOCA
TGRA
H'0005
H'0160
H'0010
TIOCB
TGRB
H'0180
Figure 10-13 Example of Input Capture Operation
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 355 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.3
Synchronous Operation
In synchronous operation, the values in a number of TCNT counters can be rewritten
simultaneously (synchronous presetting). Also, a number of TCNT counters can be cleared
simultaneously by making the appropriate setting in TCR (synchronous clearing).
Synchronous operation enables TGR to be incremented with respect to a single time base.
Channels 0 to 5 can all be designated for synchronous operation.
Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10-14 shows an example of the
synchronous operation setting procedure.
Synchronous operation
selection
Set synchronous
operation
[1]
Synchronous presetting
Set TCNT
Synchronous clearing
[2]
Clearing
sourcegeneration
channel?
No
Yes
<Synchronous presetting>
Select counter
clearing source
[3]
Set synchronous
counter clearing
[4]
Start count
[5]
Start count
[5]
<Counter clearing>
<Synchronous clearing>
[1]
Set to 1 the SYNC bits in TSYR corresponding to the channels to be designated for synchronous
operation.
[2]
When the TCNT counter of any of the channels designated for synchronous operation is
written to, the same value is simultaneously written to the other TCNT counters.
[3]
Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to specify TCNT clearing by input capture/output compare,
etc.
[4]
Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to designate synchronous clearing for the counter clearing
source.
[5]
Set to 1 the CST bits in TSTR for the relevant channels, to start the count operation.
Figure 10-14 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure
Page 356 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Example of Synchronous Operation: Figure 10-15 shows an example of synchronous operation.
In this example, synchronous operation and PWM mode 1 have been designated for channels 0 to
2, TGR0B compare match has been set as the channel 0 counter clearing source, and synchronous
clearing has been set for the channel 1 and 2 counter clearing source.
Three-phase PWM waveforms are output from pins TIOC0A, TIOC1A, and TIOC2A. At this
time, synchronous presetting, and synchronous clearing by TGR0B compare match, is performed
for channel 0 to 2 TCNT counters, and the data set in TGR0B is used as the PWM cycle.
For details of PWM modes, see section 10.4.6, PWM Modes.
Synchronous clearing by TGR0B compare match
TCNT0 to TCNT2 values
TGR0B
TGR1B
TGR0A
TGR2B
TGR1A
TGR2A
Time
H'0000
TIOC0A
TIOC1A
TIOC2A
Figure 10-15 Example of Synchronous Operation
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 357 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.4
Buffer Operation
Buffer operation, provided for channels 0 and 3, enables TGRC and TGRD to be used as buffer
registers.
Buffer operation differs depending on whether TGR has been designated as an input capture
register or as a compare match register.
Table 10-5 shows the register combinations used in buffer operation.
Table 10-5 Register Combinations in Buffer Operation
Channel
Timer General Register
Buffer Register
0
TGR0A
TGR0C
TGR0B
TGR0D
TGR3A
TGR3C
TGR3B
TGR3D
3
• When TGR is an output compare register
When a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the corresponding channel is
transferred to the timer general register.
This operation is illustrated in figure 10-16.
Compare match signal
Buffer register
Timer general
register
Comparator
TCNT
Figure 10-16 Compare Match Buffer Operation
Page 358 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• When TGR is an input capture register
When input capture occurs, the value in TCNT is transferred to TGR and the value previously
held in the timer general register is transferred to the buffer register.
This operation is illustrated in figure 10-17.
Input capture
signal
Timer general
register
Buffer register
TCNT
Figure 10-17 Input Capture Buffer Operation
Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10-18 shows an example of the buffer
operation setting procedure.
[1] Designate TGR as an input capture register or
output compare register by means of TIOR.
Buffer operation
[1]
[2] Designate TGR for buffer operation with bits
BFA and BFB in TMDR.
Set buffer operation
[2]
[3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
Start count
[3]
Select TGR function
<Buffer operation>
Figure 10-18 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 359 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Examples of Buffer Operation
• When TGR is an output compare register
Figure 10-19 shows an operation example in which PWM mode 1 has been designated for
channel 0, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. The settings used
in this example are TCNT clearing by compare match B, 1 output at compare match A, and 0
output at compare match B.
As buffer operation has been set, when compare match A occurs the output changes and the
value in buffer register TGRC is simultaneously transferred to timer general register TGRA.
This operation is repeated each time compare match A occurs.
For details of PWM modes, see section 10.4.6, PWM Modes.
TCNT value
TGR0B
H'0520
H'0450
H'0200
TGR0A
Time
H'0000
TGR0C H'0200
H'0450
H'0520
Transfer
TGR0A
H'0200
H'0450
TIOCA
Figure 10-19 Example of Buffer Operation (1)
Page 360 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• When TGR is an input capture register
Figure 10-20 shows an operation example in which TGRA has been designated as an input
capture register, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC.
Counter clearing by TGRA input capture has been set for TCNT, and both rising and falling
edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge.
As buffer operation has been set, when the TCNT value is stored in TGRA upon occurrence of
input capture A, the value previously stored in TGRA is simultaneously transferred to TGRC.
TCNT value
H'0F07
H'09FB
H'0532
H'0000
Time
TIOCA
TGRA
TGRC
H'0532
H'0F07
H'09FB
H'0532
H'0F07
Figure 10-20 Example of Buffer Operation (2)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 361 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.5
Cascaded Operation
In cascaded operation, two 16-bit counters for different channels are used together as a 32-bit
counter.
This function works by counting the channel 1 (channel 4) counter clock upon overflow/underflow
of TCNT2 (TCNT5) as set in bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR.
Underflow occurs only when the lower 16-bit TCNT is in phase-counting mode.
Table 10-6 shows the register combinations used in cascaded operation.
Note: When phase counting mode is set for channel 1 or 4, the counter clock setting is invalid
and the counter operates independently in phase counting mode.
Table 10-6 Cascaded Combinations
Combination
Upper 16 Bits
Lower 16 Bits
Channels 1 and 2
TCNT1
TCNT2
Channels 4 and 5
TCNT4
TCNT5
Example of Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10-21 shows an example of the
setting procedure for cascaded operation.
[1] Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in the channel 1
(channel 4) TCR to B'111 to select TCNT2
(TCNT5) overflow/underflow counting.
Cascaded operation
Set cascading
[1]
Start count
[2]
[2] Set the CST bit in TSTR for the upper and lower
channel to 1 to start the count operation.
<Cascaded operation>
Figure 10-21 Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure
Page 362 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Examples of Cascaded Operation: Figure 10-22 illustrates the operation when counting upon
TCNT2 overflow/underflow has been set for TCNT1, TGR1A, and TGR2A have been designated
as input capture registers, and TIOC pin rising edge has been selected.
When a rising edge is input to the TIOCA1 and TIOCA2 pins simultaneously, the upper 16 bits of
the 32-bit data are transferred to TGR1A, and the lower 16 bits to TGR2A.
TCNT1
clock
TCNT1
H'03A1
H'03A2
TCNT2
clock
TCNT2
H'FFFF
H'0000
H'0001
TIOCA1,
TIOCA2
TGR1A
H'03A2
TGR2A
H'0000
Figure 10-22 Example of Cascaded Operation (1)
Figure 10-23 illustrates the operation when counting upon TCNT2 overflow/underflow has been
set for TCNT1, and phase counting mode has been designated for channel 2.
TCNT1 is incremented by TCNT2 overflow and decremented by TCNT2 underflow.
TCLKC
TCLKD
TCNT2
FFFD
TCNT1
FFFE
0000
FFFF
0000
0001
0002
0001
0001
0000
FFFF
0000
Figure 10-23 Example of Cascaded Operation (2)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 363 of 1458
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.6
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
PWM Modes
In PWM mode, PWM waveforms are output from the output pins. 0, 1, or toggle output can be
selected as the output level in response to compare match of each TGR.
Designating TGR compare match as the counter clearing source enables the period to be set in that
register. All channels can be designated for PWM mode independently. Synchronous operation is
also possible.
There are two PWM modes, as described below.
• PWM mode 1
PWM output is generated from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins by pairing TGRA with TGRB and
TGRC with TGRD. The output specified by bits IOA3 to IOA0 and IOC3 to IOC0 in TIOR is
output from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins at compare matches A and C, and the output
specified by bits IOB3 to IOB0 and IOD3 to IOD0 in TIOR is output at compare matches B
and D. The initial output value is the value set in TGRA or TGRC. If the set values of paired
TGRs are identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs.
In PWM mode 1, a maximum 8-phase PWM output is possible.
• PWM mode 2
PWM output is generated using one TGR as the cycle register and the others as duty registers.
The output specified in TIOR is performed by means of compare matches. Upon counter
clearing by a synchronization register compare match, the output value of each pin is the initial
value set in TIOR. If the set values of the cycle and duty registers are identical, the output
value does not change when a compare match occurs.
In PWM mode 2, a maximum 15-phase PWM output is possible by combined use with
synchronous operation.
The correspondence between PWM output pins and registers is shown in table 10-7.
Page 364 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10-7 PWM Output Registers and Output Pins
Output Pins
Channel
0
Registers
PWM Mode 1
TGR0A
TIOCA0
TGR0B
TGR0C
TGR1A
TIOCC0
TGR2A
TIOCA1
TGR3A
TIOCA3
TGR4A
TIOCC3
TGR5A
TGR5B
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
TIOCA4
TGR4B
5
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TGR3D
4
TIOCA2
TIOCB2
TGR3B
TGR3C
TIOCA1
TIOCB1
TIOCA2
TGR2B
3
TIOCC0
TIOCD0
TGR1B
2
TIOCA0
TIOCB0
TGR0D
1
PWM Mode 2
TIOCA4
TIOCB4
TIOCA5
TIOCA5
TIOCB5
Note: In PWM mode 2, PWM output is not possible for the TGR register in which the period is set.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 365 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 10-24 shows an example of the PWM mode
setting procedure.
PWM mode
Select counter clock
[1]
[1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to
TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the
input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in
TCR.
[2] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to select the
TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source.
Select counter clearing source
Select waveform output level
Set TGR
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3] Use TIOR to designate the TGR as an output
compare register, and select the initial value and
output value.
[4] Set the cycle in the TGR selected in [2], and set
the duty in the other the TGR.
[5] Select the PWM mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR.
Set PWM mode
[5]
Start count
[6]
[6] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
<PWM mode>
Figure 10-24 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure
Page 366 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Examples of PWM Mode Operation: Figure 10-25 shows an example of PWM mode 1
operation.
In this example, TGRA compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source, 0 is set for the TGRA
initial output value and output value, and 1 is set as the TGRB output value.
In this case, the value set in TGRA is used as the period, and the values set in TGRB registers as
the duty.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by
TGRA compare match
TGRA
TGRB
H'0000
Time
TIOCA
Figure 10-25 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 367 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 10-26 shows an example of PWM mode 2 operation.
In this example, synchronous operation is designated for channels 0 and 1, TGR1B compare match
is set as the TCNT clearing source, and 0 is set for the initial output value and 1 for the output
value of the other TGR registers (TGR0A to TGR0D, TGR1A), to output a 5-phase PWM
waveform.
In this case, the value set in TGR1B is used as the cycle, and the values set in the other TGRs as
the duty.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by TGR1B
compare match
TGR1B
TGR1A
TGR0D
TGR0C
TGR0B
TGR0A
H'0000
Time
TIOCA0
TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TIOCD0
TIOCA1
Figure 10-26 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2)
Page 368 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 10-27 shows examples of PWM waveform output with 0% duty and 100% duty in PWM
mode.
TCNT value
TGRB rewritten
TGRA
TGRB
TGRB
rewritten
TGRB rewritten
H'0000
Time
0% duty
TIOCA
Output does not change when cycle register and duty register
compare matches occur simultaneously
TCNT value
TGRB rewritten
TGRA
TGRB rewritten
TGRB rewritten
TGRB
H'0000
Time
100% duty
TIOCA
Output does not change when cycle register and duty
register compare matches occur simultaneously
TCNT value
TGRB rewritten
TGRA
TGRB rewritten
TGRB
TGRB rewritten
Time
H'0000
100% duty
TIOCA
0% duty
Figure 10-27 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 369 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.7
Phase Counting Mode
In phase counting mode, the phase difference between two external clock inputs is detected and
TCNT is incremented/decremented accordingly. This mode can be set for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
When phase counting mode is set, an external clock is selected as the counter input clock and
TCNT operates as an up/down-counter regardless of the setting of bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 and bits
CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. However, the functions of bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR, and of
TIOR, TIER, and TGR are valid, and input capture/compare match and interrupt functions can be
used.
When overflow occurs while TCNT is counting up, the TCFV flag in TSR is set; when underflow
occurs while TCNT is counting down, the TCFU flag is set.
The TCFD bit in TSR is the count direction flag. Reading the TCFD flag provides an indication of
whether TCNT is counting up or down.
Table 10-8 shows the correspondence between external clock pins and channels.
Table 10-8 Phase Counting Mode Clock Input Pins
External Clock Pins
Channels
A-Phase
B-Phase
When channel 1 or 5 is set to phase counting mode
TCLKA
TCLKB
When channel 2 or 4 is set to phase counting mode
TCLKC
TCLKD
Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 10-28 shows an example of the
phase counting mode setting procedure.
[1] Select phase counting mode with bits MD3 to
MD0 in TMDR.
Phase counting mode
Select phase counting mode
[1]
Start count
[2]
[2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
<Phase counting mode>
Figure 10-28 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure
Page 370 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Examples of Phase Counting Mode Operation: In phase counting mode, TCNT counts up or
down according to the phase difference between two external clocks. There are four modes,
according to the count conditions.
• Phase counting mode 1
Figure 10-29 shows an example of phase counting mode 1 operation, and table 10-9
summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Up-count
Down-count
Time
Figure 10-29 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation
Table 10-9 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
High level
Operation
Up-count
Low level
Low level
High level
High level
Down-count
Low level
High level
Low level
Legend:
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 371 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• Phase counting mode 2
Figure 10-30 shows an example of phase counting mode 2 operation, and table 10-10
summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Up-count
Down-count
Time
Figure 10-30 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation
Table 10-10 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
High level
Operation
Don’t care
Low level
Low level
High level
High level
Up-count
Don’t care
Low level
High level
Low level
Down-count
Legend:
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
Page 372 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• Phase counting mode 3
Figure 10-31 shows an example of phase counting mode 3 operation, and table 10-11
summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Up-count
Down-count
Time
Figure 10-31 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation
Table 10-11 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
High level
Operation
Don’t care
Low level
Low level
High level
Up-count
High level
Down-count
Low level
Don’t care
High level
Low level
Legend:
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 373 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• Phase counting mode 4
Figure 10-32 shows an example of phase counting mode 4 operation, and table 10-12
summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Up-count
Down-count
Time
Figure 10-32 Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation
Table 10-12 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
High level
Operation
Up-count
Low level
Low level
Don’t care
High level
High level
Down-count
Low level
High level
Don’t care
Low level
Legend:
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
Page 374 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Phase Counting Mode Application Example: Figure 10-33 shows an example in which phase
counting mode is designated for channel 1, and channel 1 is coupled with channel 0 to input servo
motor 2-phase encoder pulses in order to detect the position or speed.
Channel 1 is set to phase counting mode 1, and the encoder pulse A-phase and B-phase are input
to TCLKA and TCLKB.
Channel 0 operates with TCNT counter clearing by TGR0C compare match; TGR0A and TGR0C
are used for the compare match function, and are set with the speed control period and position
control period. TGR0B is used for input capture, with TGR0B and TGR0D operating in buffer
mode. The channel 1 counter input clock is designated as the TGR0B input capture source, and
detection of the pulse width of 2-phase encoder 4-multiplication pulses is performed.
TGR1A and TGR1B for channel 1 are designated for input capture, channel 0 TGR0A and
TGR0C compare matches are selected as the input capture source, and store the up/down-counter
values for the control periods.
This procedure enables accurate position/speed detection to be achieved.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 375 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel 1
TCLKA
TCLKB
Edge
detection
circuit
TCNT1
TGR1A
(speed period capture)
TGR1B
(position period capture)
TCNT0
+
TGR0A (speed control period)
–
+
TGR0C
(position control period)
–
TGR0B (pulse width capture)
TGR0D (buffer operation)
Channel 0
Figure 10-33 Phase Counting Mode Application Example
Page 376 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
10.5
Interrupts
10.5.1
Interrupt Sources and Priorities
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
There are three kinds of TPU interrupt source: TGR input capture/compare match, TCNT
overflow, and TCNT underflow. Each interrupt source has its own status flag and enable/disabled
bit, allowing generation of interrupt request signals to be enabled or disabled individually.
When an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding status flag in TSR is set to 1. If the
corresponding enable/disable bit in TIER is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt is requested. The
interrupt request is cleared by clearing the status flag to 0.
Relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller, but the priority order within
a channel is fixed. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Table 10-13 lists the TPU interrupt sources.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 377 of 1458
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Table 10-13 TPU Interrupts
Channel
Interrupt
Source
Description
DTC
Activation
Priority
0
TGI0A
TGR0A input capture/compare match
Possible
High
TGI0B
TGR0B input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI0C
TGR0C input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI0D
TGR0D input capture/compare match
Possible
1
2
3
4
5
TCI0V
TCNT0 overflow
Not possible
TGI1A
TGR1A input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI1B
TGR1B input capture/compare match
Possible
TCI1V
TCNT1 overflow
Not possible
TCI1U
TCNT1 underflow
Not possible
TGI2A
TGR2A input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI2B
TGR2B input capture/compare match
Possible
TCI2V
TCNT2 overflow
Not possible
TCI2U
TCNT2 underflow
Not possible
TGI3A
TGR3A input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI3B
TGR3B input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI3C
TGR3C input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI3D
TGR3D input capture/compare match
Possible
TCI3V
TCNT3 overflow
Not possible
TGI4A
TGR4A input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI4B
TGR4B input capture/compare match
Possible
TCI4V
TCNT4 overflow
Not possible
TCI4U
TCNT4 underflow
Not possible
TGI5A
TGR5A input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI5B
TGR5B input capture/compare match
Possible
TCI5V
TCNT5 overflow
Not possible
TCI5U
TCNT5 underflow
Not possible
Low
Note: This table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. The relative channel priorities
can be changed by the interrupt controller.
Page 378 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TGIE bit in TIER is
set to 1 when the TGF flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a TGR input capture/compare
match on a particular channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TGF flag to 0. The
TPU has 16 input capture/compare match interrupts, four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each
for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
Overflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEV bit in TIER is set to 1 when the
TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT overflow on a channel. The interrupt
request is cleared by clearing the TCFV flag to 0. The TPU has six overflow interrupts, one for
each channel.
Underflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEU bit in TIER is set to 1 when the
TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT underflow on a channel. The interrupt
request is cleared by clearing the TCFU flag to 0. The TPU has four underflow interrupts, one
each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
10.5.2
DTC Activation
Note: The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 and H8S/2634.
DTC Activation: The DTC can be activated by the TGR input capture/compare match interrupt
for a channel. For details, see section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC).
A total of 16 TPU input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as DTC activation sources,
four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
10.5.3
A/D Converter Activation
The A/D converter can be activated by the TGRA input capture/compare match for a channel.
If the TTGE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGFA flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a
TGRA input capture/compare match on a particular channel, a request to start A/D conversion is
sent to the A/D converter. If the TPU conversion start trigger has been selected on the A/D
converter side at this time, A/D conversion is started.
In the TPU, a total of six TGRA input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as A/D
converter conversion start sources, one for each channel.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 379 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.6
Operation Timing
10.6.1
Input/Output Timing
TCNT Count Timing: Figure 10-34 shows TCNT count timing in internal clock operation, and
figure 10-35 shows TCNT count timing in external clock operation.
φ
Internal clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
N−1
N
N+1
N+2
Figure 10-34 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation
φ
External clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
Falling edge
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
N−1
N
N+1
N+2
Figure 10-35 Count Timing in External Clock Operation
Page 380 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Output Compare Output Timing: A compare match signal is generated in the final state in
which TCNT and TGR match (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated).
When a compare match signal is generated, the output value set in TIOR is output at the output
compare output pin. After a match between TCNT and TGR, the compare match signal is not
generated until the TCNT input clock is generated.
Figure 10-36 shows output compare output timing.
φ
TCNT
input clock
N
TCNT
N+1
N
TGR
Compare
match signal
TIOC pin
Figure 10-36 Output Compare Output Timing
Input Capture Signal Timing: Figure 10-37 shows input capture signal timing.
φ
Input capture
input
Input capture
signal
N
TCNT
N+1
N+2
N
TGR
N+2
Figure 10-37 Input Capture Input Signal Timing
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 381 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Timing for Counter Clearing by Compare Match/Input Capture: Figure 10-38 shows the
timing when counter clearing by compare match occurrence is specified, and figure 10-39 shows
the timing when counter clearing by input capture occurrence is specified.
φ
Compare
match signal
Counter
clear signal
TCNT
N
TGR
N
H'0000
Figure 10-38 Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match)
φ
Input capture
signal
Counter clear
signal
TCNT
TGR
N
H'0000
N
Figure 10-39 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture)
Page 382 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Buffer Operation Timing: Figures 10-40 and 10-41 show the timing in buffer operation.
φ
TCNT
n
n+1
Compare
match signal
TGRA,
TGRB
n
TGRC,
TGRD
N
N
Figure 10-40 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match)
φ
Input capture
signal
TCNT
N
TGRA,
TGRB
n
TGRC,
TGRD
N+1
N
N+1
n
N
Figure 10-41 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 383 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.6.2
Interrupt Signal Timing
TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Compare Match: Figure 10-42 shows the timing for
setting of the TGF flag in TSR by compare match occurrence, and TGI interrupt request signal
timing.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
TGR
N
N+1
Compare
match signal
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 10-42 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match)
Page 384 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Input Capture: Figure 10-43 shows the timing for setting
of the TGF flag in TSR by input capture occurrence, and TGI interrupt request signal timing.
φ
Input capture
signal
N
TCNT
TGR
N
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 10-43 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 385 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TCFV Flag/TCFU Flag Setting Timing: Figure 10-44 shows the timing for setting of the TCFV
flag in TSR by overflow occurrence, and TCIV interrupt request signal timing.
Figure 10-45 shows the timing for setting of the TCFU flag in TSR by underflow occurrence, and
TCIU interrupt request signal timing.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
(overflow)
H'FFFF
H'0000
Overflow
signal
TCFV flag
TCIV interrupt
Figure 10-44 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing
φ
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
(underflow)
H'0000
H'FFFF
Underflow signal
TCFU flag
TCIU interrupt
Figure 10-45 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing
Page 386 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Status Flag Clearing Timing: After a status flag is read as 1 by the CPU, it is cleared by writing
0 to it. When the DTC* is activated, the flag is cleared automatically. Figure 10-46 shows the
timing for status flag clearing by the CPU, and figure 10-47 shows the timing for status flag
clearing by the DTC.
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
TSR write cycle
T2
T1
φ
TSR address
Address
Write signal
Status flag
Interrupt
request
signal
Figure 10-46 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU
DTC
read cycle
T1
T2
DTC
write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Source address
Address
Destination
address
Status flag
Interrupt
request
signal
Figure 10-47 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC Activation
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 387 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.7
Usage Notes
Note that the kinds of operation and contention described below occur during TPU operation.
Input Clock Restrictions: The input clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states in the case of
single-edge detection, and at least 2.5 states in the case of both-edge detection. The TPU will not
operate properly with a narrower pulse width.
In phase counting mode, the phase difference and overlap between the two input clocks must be at
least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. Figure 10-48 shows the input clock
conditions in phase counting mode.
Overlap
Phase
Phase
differdifference Overlap ence
Pulse width
Pulse width
TCLKA
(TCLKC)
TCLKB
(TCLKD)
Pulse width
Pulse width
Notes: Phase difference and overlap: 1.5 states or more
2.5 states or more
Pulse width:
Figure 10-48 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode
Caution on Period Setting: When counter clearing by compare match is set, TCNT is cleared in
the final state in which it matches the TGR value (the point at which the count value matched by
TCNT is updated). Consequently, the actual counter frequency is given by the following formula:
f=
Where
φ
(N + 1)
f : Counter frequency
φ : Operating frequency
N : TGR set value
Page 388 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations: If the counter clear signal is
generated in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, TCNT clearing takes precedence and the TCNT
write is not performed.
Figure 10-49 shows the timing in this case.
TCNT write cycle
T2
T1
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
Counter clear
signal
N
TCNT
H'0000
Figure 10-49 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 389 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations: If incrementing occurs in the T2
state of a TCNT write cycle, the TCNT write takes precedence and TCNT is not incremented.
Figure 10-50 shows the timing in this case.
TCNT write cycle
T2
T1
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
M
TCNT write data
Figure 10-50 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations
Page 390 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs in the T2
state of a TGR write cycle, the TGR write takes precedence and the compare match signal is
inhibited. A compare match does not occur even if the same value as before is written.
Figure 10-51 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T2
T1
φ
TGR address
Address
Write signal
Compare
match signal
Prohibited
TCNT
N
N+1
TGR
N
M
TGR write data
Figure 10-51 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 391 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs in
the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the data transferred to TGR by the buffer operation will be the
data prior to the write.
Figure 10-52 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T2
T1
φ
Buffer register
address
Address
Write signal
Compare
match signal
Buffer register write data
Buffer
register
TGR
N
M
N
Figure 10-52 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match
Page 392 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture: If the input capture signal is generated in
the T1 state of a TGR read cycle, the data that is read will be the data after input capture transfer.
Figure 10-53 shows the timing in this case.
TGR read cycle
T2
T1
φ
TGR address
Address
Read signal
Input capture
signal
TGR
X
M
M
Internal
data bus
Figure 10-53 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 393 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture: If the input capture signal is generated in
the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the input capture operation takes precedence and the write to
TGR is not performed.
Figure 10-54 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T2
T1
φ
TGR address
Address
Write signal
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
M
M
Figure 10-54 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture
Page 394 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture: If the input capture signal is
generated in the T2 state of a buffer write cycle, the buffer operation takes precedence and the
write to the buffer register is not performed.
Figure 10-55 shows the timing in this case.
Buffer register write cycle
T2
T1
φ
Buffer register
address
Address
Write signal
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
Buffer
register
N
M
N
M
Figure 10-55 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 395 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing: If overflow/underflow and
counter clearing occur simultaneously, the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set and TCNT clearing
takes precedence.
Figure 10-56 shows the operation timing when a TGR compare match is specified as the clearing
source, and H'FFFF is set in TGR.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
H'FFFF
H'0000
Counter
clear signal
TGF
Prohibited
TCFV
Figure 10-56 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing
Page 396 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow: If there is an up-count or downcount in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, and overflow/underflow occurs, the TCNT write takes
precedence and the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set.
Figure 10-57 shows the operation timing when there is contention between TCNT write and
overflow.
TCNT write cycle
T2
T1
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
TCNT
TCNT write data
H'FFFF
M
Prohibited
TCFV flag
Figure 10-57 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow
Multiplexing of I/O Pins: In the chip, the TCLKA input pin is multiplexed with the TIOCC0 I/O
pin, the TCLKB input pin with the TIOCD0 I/O pin, the TCLKC input pin with the TIOCB1 I/O
pin, and the TCLKD input pin with the TIOCB2 I/O pin. When an external clock is input, compare
match output should not be performed from a multiplexed pin.
Interrupts and Module Stop Mode: If module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been
requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or the DTC* activation source.
Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode.
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 397 of 1458
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Page 398 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Note: The H8S/2635 Group is not equipped with a PPG.
11.1
Overview
The chip has an on-chip programmable pulse generator (PPG) that provides pulse outputs by using
the 16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU) as a time base. The PPG pulse outputs are divided into 4-bit
groups (group 3 and group 2) that can operate both simultaneously and independently.
11.1.1
Features
PPG features are listed below.
• 8-bit output data
⎯ Maximum 8-bit data can be output, and output can be enabled on a bit-by-bit basis
• Two output groups
⎯ Output trigger signals can be selected in 4-bit groups to provide up to two different 4-bit
outputs
• Selectable output trigger signals
⎯ Output trigger signals can be selected for each group from the compare match signals of
four TPU channels
• Non-overlap mode
⎯ A non-overlap margin can be provided between pulse outputs
• Can operate together with the data transfer controller (DTC)
⎯ The compare match signals selected as output trigger signals can activate the DTC for
sequential output of data without CPU intervention
• Settable inverted output
⎯ Inverted data can be output for each group
• Module stop mode can be set
⎯ As the initial setting, PPG operation is halted. Register access is enabled by exiting module
stop mode
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 399 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 11-1 shows a block diagram of the PPG.
Compare match signals
Control logic
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
PO10
PO9
PO8
NDERH
NDERL
PMR
PCR
Pulse output
pins, group 3
PODRH
NDRH
PODRL
NDRL
Pulse output
pins, group 2
Internal
data bus
Pulse output
pins, group 1
Pulse output
pins, group 0
Legend:
PMR:
PCR:
NDERH:
NDERL:
NDRH:
NDRL:
PODRH:
PODRL:
PPG output mode register
PPG output control register
Next data enable register H
Next data enable register L
Next data register H
Next data register L
Output data register H
Output data register L
Figure 11-1 Block Diagram of PPG
Page 400 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
11.1.3
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Pin Configuration
Table 11-1 summarizes the PPG pins.
Table 11-1 PPG Pins
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Pulse output 8
PO8
Output
Group 2 pulse output
Pulse output 9
PO9
Output
Pulse output 10
PO10
Output
Pulse output 11
PO11
Output
Pulse output 12
PO12
Output
Pulse output 13
PO13
Output
Pulse output 14
PO14
Output
Pulse output 15
PO15
Output
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Group 3 pulse output
Page 401 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.1.4
Registers
Table 11-2 summarizes the PPG registers.
Table 11-2 PPG Registers
1
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
PPG output control register
PCR
R/W
H'FF
H'FE26
PPG output mode register
PMR
R/W
H'F0
H'FE27
Next data enable register H
4
Next data enable register L*
NDERH
R/W
H'00
H'FE28
NDERL
R/W
H'00
H'FE29
Output data register H
4
Output data register L*
PODRH
2
R/(W)*
H'00
H'FE2A
PODRL
R/(W)*
2
H'00
H'FE2B
Next data register H
NDRH
R/W
H'00
Next data register L*
NDRL
R/W
H'00
H'FE2C*
H'FE2E
3
H'FE2D*
H'FE2F
Port 1 data direction register
P1DDR
W
H'00
H'FE30
Module stop control register A
MSTPCRA
R/W
H'3F
H'FDE8
4
3
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Bits used for pulse output cannot be written to.
3. When the same output trigger is selected for pulse output groups 2 and 3 by the PCR
setting, the NDRH address is H'FE2C. When the output triggers are different, the NDRH
address is H'FE2E for group 2 and H'FE2C for group 3.
Similarly, when the same output trigger is selected for pulse output groups 0 and 1 by
the PCR setting, the NDRL address is H'FE2D. When the output triggers are different,
the NDRL address is H'FE2F for group 0 and H'FE2D for group 1.
4. The chip has no pins corresponding to pulse output groups 0 and 1.
Page 402 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.2
Register Descriptions
11.2.1
Next Data Enable Registers H and L (NDERH, NDERL)
NDERH
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9
Initial value :
R/W
NDER8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDER7
NDER6
NDER5
NDER4
NDER3
NDER2
NDER1
NDER0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
NDERL
Bit
Initial value :
R/W
:
NDERH and NDERL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that enable or disable pulse output on a
bit-by-bit basis.
If a bit is enabled for pulse output by NDERH or NDERL, the NDR value is automatically
transferred to the corresponding PODR bit when the TPU compare match event specified by PCR
occurs, updating the output value. If pulse output is disabled, the bit value is not transferred from
NDR to PODR and the output value does not change.
NDERH and NDERL are each initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They
are not initialized in software standby mode.
NDERH Bits 7 to 0—Next Data Enable 15 to 8 (NDER15 to NDER8): These bits enable or
disable pulse output on a bit-by-bit basis.
Bits 7 to 0
NDER15 to NDER8
Description
0
Pulse outputs PO15 to PO8 are disabled (NDR15 to NDR8 are not
transferred to POD15 to POD8)
(Initial value)
1
Pulse outputs PO15 to PO8 are enabled (NDR15 to NDR8 are transferred
to POD15 to POD8)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 403 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
NDERL Bits 7 to 0—Next Data Enable 7 to 0 (NDER7 to NDER0): These bits enable or
disable pulse output on a bit-by-bit basis.
Bits 7 to 0
NDER7 to NDER0
Description
0
Pulse outputs PO7 to PO0 are disabled (NDR7 to NDR0 are not
transferred to POD7 to POD0)
(Initial value)
1
Pulse outputs PO7 to PO0 are enabled (NDR7 to NDR0 are transferred to
POD7 to POD0)
11.2.2
Output Data Registers H and L (PODRH, PODRL)
PODRH
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
POD15
POD14
POD13
POD12
POD11
POD10
POD9
POD8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
POD7
POD6
POD5
POD4
POD3
POD2
POD1
POD0
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
Initial value :
R/W
PODRL
Bit
Initial value :
R/W
:
Note: * A bit that has been set for pulse output by NDER is read-only.
PODRH and PODRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store output data for use in pulse
output. However, the chip has no pins corresponding to PODRL.
Page 404 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
11.2.3
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Next Data Registers H and L (NDRH, NDRL)
NDRH and NDRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store the next data for pulse output.
During pulse output, the contents of NDRH and NDRL are transferred to the corresponding bits in
PODRH and PODRL when the TPU compare match event specified by PCR occurs. The NDRH
and NDRL addresses differ depending on whether pulse output groups have the same output
trigger or different output triggers. For details see section 11.2.4, Notes on NDR Access.
NDRH and NDRL are each initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are
not initialized in software standby mode.
11.2.4
Notes on NDR Access
The NDRH and NDRL addresses differ depending on whether pulse output groups have the same
output trigger or different output triggers.
Same Trigger for Pulse Output Groups: If pulse output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by the
same compare match event, the NDRH address is H'FE2C. The upper 4 bits belong to group 3 and
the lower 4 bits to group 2. Address H'FE2E consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be
modified and are always read as 1.
Address H'FE2C
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDR15
NDR14
NDR13
NDR12
NDR11
NDR10
NDR9
NDR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value :
R/W
:
Address H'FE2E
Bit
:
:
If pulse output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by the same compare match event, the NDRL address
is H'FE2D. The upper 4 bits belong to group 1 and the lower 4 bits to group 0. Address H'FE2F
consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1. However, the
chip has no output pins corresponding to pulse output groups 0 and 1.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 405 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Address H'FE2D
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDR7
NDR6
NDR5
NDR4
NDR3
NDR2
NDR1
NDR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Address H'FE2F
Bit
:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
:
Different Triggers for Pulse Output Groups: If pulse output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by
different compare match events, the address of the upper 4 bits in NDRH (group 3) is H'FE2C and
the address of the lower 4 bits (group 2) is H'FE2E. Bits 3 to 0 of address H'FE2C and bits 7 to 4
of address H'FE2E are reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Address H'FE2C
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDR15
NDR14
NDR13
NDR12
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
NDR11
NDR10
NDR9
NDR8
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value :
R/W
:
Address H'FE2E
Bit
:
:
If pulse output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by different compare match event, the address of the
upper 4 bits in NDRL (group 1) is H'FE2D and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 0) is
H'FE2F. Bits 3 to 0 of address H'FE2D and bits 7 to 4 of address H'FE2F are reserved bits that
cannot be modified and are always read as 1. However, the chip has no output pins corresponding
to pulse output groups 0 and 1.
Page 406 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Address H'FE2D
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDR7
NDR6
NDR5
NDR4
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Address H'FE2F
Bit
:
—
—
—
—
NDR3
NDR2
NDR1
NDR0
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
4
3
2
1
0
11.2.5
:
PPG Output Control Register (PCR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
G3CMS1 G3CMS0 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0
Initial value :
R/W
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects output trigger signals for PPG outputs on a
group-by-group basis.
PCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software
standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Group 3 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G3CMS1, G3CMS0): These bits
select the compare match that triggers pulse output group 3 (pins PO15 to PO12).
Description
Bit 7
G3CMS1
Bit 6
G3CMS0
Output Trigger for Pulse Output Group 3
0
0
Compare match in TPU channel 0
1
Compare match in TPU channel 1
0
Compare match in TPU channel 2
1
Compare match in TPU channel 3
1
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
(Initial value)
Page 407 of 1458
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bits 5 and 4—Group 2 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G2CMS1, G2CMS0): These bits
select the compare match that triggers pulse output group 2 (pins PO11 to PO8).
Description
Bit 5
G2CMS1
Bit 4
G2CMS0
Output Trigger for Pulse Output Group 2
0
0
Compare match in TPU channel 0
1
Compare match in TPU channel 1
0
Compare match in TPU channel 2
1
Compare match in TPU channel 3
1
(Initial value)
Bits 3 and 2—Group 1 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G1CMS1, G1CMS0): These bits
select the compare match that triggers pulse output group 1 (pins PO7 to PO4). However, the chip
has no output pins corresponding to pulse output group 1.
Description
Bit 3
G1CMS1
Bit 2
G1CMS0
Output Trigger for Pulse Output Group 1
0
0
Compare match in TPU channel 0
1
Compare match in TPU channel 1
0
Compare match in TPU channel 2
1
Compare match in TPU channel 3
1
(Initial value)
Bits 1 and 0—Group 0 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G0CMS1, G0CMS0): These bits
select the compare match that triggers pulse output group 0 (pins PO3 to PO0). However, the chip
has no output pins corresponding to pulse output group 0.
Description
Bit 1
G0CMS1
Bit 0
G0CMS0
Output Trigger for Pulse Output Group 0
0
0
Compare match in TPU channel 0
1
Compare match in TPU channel 1
0
Compare match in TPU channel 2
1
Compare match in TPU channel 3
1
Page 408 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
11.2.6
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
PPG Output Mode Register (PMR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
G3INV
G2INV
G1INV
G0INV
G3NOV
G2NOV
G1NOV
G0NOV
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects pulse output inversion and non-overlapping
operation for each group.
The output trigger period of a non-overlapping operation PPG output waveform is set in TGRB
and the non-overlap margin is set in TGRA. The output values change at compare match A and B.
For details, see section 11.3.4, Non-Overlapping Pulse Output.
PMR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 7—Group 3 Inversion (G3INV): Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output
group 3 (pins PO15 to PO12).
Bit 7
G3INV
Description
0
Inverted output for pulse output group 3 (low-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRH)
1
Direct output for pulse output group 3 (high-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRH)
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Group 2 Inversion (G2INV): Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output
group 2 (pins PO11 to PO8).
Bit 6
G2INV
Description
0
Inverted output for pulse output group 2 (low-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRH)
1
Direct output for pulse output group 2 (high-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRH)
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 409 of 1458
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 5—Group 1 Inversion (G1INV): Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output
group 1 (pins PO7 to PO4). However, the chip has no pins corresponding to pulse output group 1.
Bit 5
G1INV
Description
0
Inverted output for pulse output group 1 (low-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRL)
1
Direct output for pulse output group 1 (high-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRL)
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Group 0 Inversion (G0INV): Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output
group 0 (pins PO3 to PO0). However, the chip has no pins corresponding to pulse output group 0.
Bit 4
G0INV
Description
0
Inverted output for pulse output group 0 (low-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRL)
1
Direct output for pulse output group 0 (high-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRL)
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Group 3 Non-Overlap (G3NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse
output group 3 (pins PO15 to PO12).
Bit 3
G3NOV
Description
0
Normal operation in pulse output group 3 (output values updated at compare match A
in the selected TPU channel)
(Initial value)
1
Non-overlapping operation in pulse output group 3 (independent 1 and 0 output at
compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel)
Bit 2—Group 2 Non-Overlap (G2NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse
output group 2 (pins PO11 to PO8).
Bit 2
G2NOV
Description
0
Normal operation in pulse output group 2 (output values updated at compare match A
in the selected TPU channel)
(Initial value)
1
Non-overlapping operation in pulse output group 2 (independent 1 and 0 output at
compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel)
Page 410 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Bit 1—Group 1 Non-Overlap (G1NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse
output group 1 (pins PO7 to PO4). However, the chip has no pins corresponding to pulse output
group 1.
Bit 1
G1NOV
Description
0
Normal operation in pulse output group 1 (output values updated at compare match A
in the selected TPU channel)
(Initial value)
1
Non-overlapping operation in pulse output group 1 (independent 1 and 0 output at
compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel)
Bit 0—Group 0 Non-Overlap (G0NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse
output group 0 (pins PO3 to PO0). However, the chip has no pins corresponding to pulse output
group 0.
Bit 0
G0NOV
Description
0
Normal operation in pulse output group 0 (output values updated at compare match A
in the selected TPU channel)
(Initial value)
1
Non-overlapping operation in pulse output group 0 (independent 1 and 0 output at
compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 411 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.2.7
Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port 1.
Port 1 is multiplexed with pins PO15 to PO8. Bits corresponding to pins used for PPG output must
be set to 1. For further information about P1DDR, see section 9.2, Port 1.
11.2.8
Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCRA is a 16-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTPA3 bit in MSTPCRA is set to 1, PPG operation stops at the end of the bus cycle
and a transition is made to module stop mode. Registers cannot be read or written to in module
stop mode. For details, see section 23A.5, 23B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRA is initialized to H'3F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized by a
manual reset and in software standby mode.
Bit 3—Module Stop (MSTPA3): Specifies the PPG module stop mode.
Bit 3
MSTPA3
Description
0
PPG module stop mode cleared
1
PPG module stop mode set
Page 412 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
11.3
Operation
11.3.1
Overview
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
PPG pulse output is enabled when the corresponding bits in P1DDR and NDER are set to 1. In this
state the corresponding PODR contents are output.
When the compare match event specified by PCR occurs, the corresponding NDR bit contents are
transferred to PODR to update the output values.
Figure 11-2 illustrates the PPG output operation and table 11-3 summarizes the PPG operating
conditions.
DDR
NDER
Q
Output trigger signal
C
Q PODR D
Q NDR D
Internal data bus
Pulse output pin
Normal output/inverted output
Figure 11-2 PPG Output Operation
Table 11-3 PPG Operating Conditions
NDER
DDR
Pin Function
0
0
Generic input port
1
Generic output port
0
Generic input port (but the PODR bit is a read-only bit, and when
compare match occurs, the NDR bit value is transferred to the PODR bit)
1
PPG pulse output
1
Sequential output of data of up to 16 bits is possible by writing new output data to NDR before the
next compare match. For details of non-overlapping operation, see section 11.3.4, NonOverlapping Pulse Output.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 413 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.2
Output Timing
If pulse output is enabled, NDR contents are transferred to PODR and output when the specified
compare match event occurs. Figure 11-3 shows the timing of these operations for the case of
normal output in groups 2 and 3, triggered by compare match A.
φ
N
TCNT
TGRA
N+1
N
Compare match
A signal
n
NDRH
PODRH
PO8 to PO15
m
n
m
n
Figure 11-3 Timing of Transfer and Output of NDR Contents (Example)
Page 414 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
11.3.3
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Normal Pulse Output
Sample Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output: Figure 11-4 shows a sample procedure for
setting up normal pulse output.
Normal PPG output
Select TGR functions
[1]
Set TGRA value
[2]
Set counting operation
[3]
Select interrupt request
[4]
Set initial output data
[5]
Enable pulse output
[6]
Select output trigger
[7]
[1] Set TIOR to make TGRA an output
compare register (with output
disabled)
[2] Set the PPG output trigger period
TPU setup
Port and
PPG setup
TPU setup
Set next pulse
output data
[8]
Start counter
[9]
Compare match?
No
[3] Select the counter clock source
with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR.
Select the counter clear source
with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0.
[4] Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER.
The DTC can also be set up to
transfer data to NDR.
[5] Set the initial output values in
PODR.
[6] Set the DDR and NDER bits for the
pins to be used for pulse output to 1.
[7] Select the TPU compare match
event to be used as the output
trigger in PCR.
[8] Set the next pulse output values in
NDR.
Yes
Set next pulse
output data
[10]
[9] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to
start the TCNT counter.
[10] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next
output values in NDR.
Figure 11-4 Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output (Example)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 415 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Example of Normal Pulse Output (Example of Five-Phase Pulse Output): Figure 11-5 shows
an example in which pulse output is used for cyclic five-phase pulse output.
TCNT value
Compare match
TCNT
TGRA
H'0000
Time
80
NDRH
PODRH
00
C0
80
40
C0
60
40
20
60
30
20
10
30
18
10
08
18
88
08
80
88
C0
80
40
C0
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
Figure 11-5 Normal Pulse Output Example (Five-Phase Pulse Output)
[1] Set up the TPU channel to be used as the output trigger channel so that TGRA is an output
compare register and the counter will be cleared by compare match A. Set the trigger period in
TGRA and set the TGIEA bit in TIER to 1 to enable the compare match A (TGIA) interrupt.
[2] Write H'F8 in P1DDR and NDERH, and set the G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0
bits in PCR to select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the
output trigger. Write output data H'80 in NDRH.
[3] The timer counter in the TPU channel starts. When compare match A occurs, the NDRH
contents are transferred to PODRH and output. The TGIA interrupt handling routine writes the
next output data (H'C0) in NDRH.
[4] Five-phase overlapping pulse output (one or two phases active at a time) can be obtained
subsequently by writing H'40, H'60, H'20, H'30. H'10, H'18, H'08, H'88... at successive TGIA
Page 416 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
interrupts. If the DTC is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained
without imposing a load on the CPU.
11.3.4
Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output: Figure 11-6 shows a sample
procedure for setting up non-overlapping pulse output.
[1] Set TIOR to make TGRA and
TGRB an output compare registers
(with output disabled)
Non-overlapping
PPG output
Select TGR functions
[1]
Set TGR values
[2]
Set counting operation
[3]
Select interrupt request
[4]
Set initial output data
[5]
TPU setup
PPG setup
Enable pulse output
[6]
Select output trigger
[7]
Set non-overlapping groups
[8]
Set next pulse
output data
[9]
Start counter
[10]
TPU setup
Compare match?
No
[3] Select the counter clock source
with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR.
Select the counter clear source
with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0.
[4] Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER.
The DTC can also be set up to
transfer data to NDR.
[5] Set the initial output values in
PODR.
[6] Set the DDR and NDER bits for the
pins to be used for pulse output to
1.
[7] Select the TPU compare match
event to be used as the pulse
output trigger in PCR.
[8] In PMR, select the groups that will
operate in non-overlap mode.
Yes
Set next pulse
output data
[2] Set the pulse output trigger period
in TGRB and the non-overlap
margin in TGRA.
[11]
[9] Set the next pulse output values in
NDR.
[10] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to
start the TCNT counter.
[11] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next
output values in NDR.
Figure 11-6 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 417 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Example of Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example of Four-Phase Complementary NonOverlapping Output): Figure 11-7 shows an example in which pulse output is used for fourphase complementary non-overlapping pulse output.
TCNT value
TGRB
TCNT
TGRA
H'0000
NDRH
PODRH
Time
95
00
65
95
59
05
65
56
41
59
95
50
56
65
14
95
05
65
Non-overlap margin
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
PO10
PO9
PO8
Figure 11-7 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Example (Four-Phase Complementary)
Page 418 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
[1] Set up the TPU channel to be used as the output trigger channel so that TGRA and TGRB are
output compare registers. Set the trigger period in TGRB and the non-overlap margin in
TGRA, and set the counter to be cleared by compare match B. Set the TGIEA bit in TIER to 1
to enable the TGIA interrupt.
[2] Write H'FF in P1DDR and NDERH, and set the G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0
bits in PCR to select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the
output trigger. Set the G3NOV and G2NOV bits in PMR to 1 to select non-overlapping output.
Write output data H'95 in NDRH.
[3] The timer counter in the TPU channel starts. When a compare match with TGRB occurs,
outputs change from 1 to 0. When a compare match with TGRA occurs, outputs change from 0
to 1 (the change from 0 to 1 is delayed by the value set in TGRA). The TGIA interrupt
handling routine writes the next output data (H'65) in NDRH.
[4] Four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output can be obtained subsequently by
writing H'59, H'56, H'95... at successive TGIA interrupts. If the DTC is set for activation by
this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without imposing a load on the CPU.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 419 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.5
Inverted Pulse Output
If the G3INV, G2INV, G1INV, and G0INV bits in PMR are cleared to 0, values that are the
inverse of the PODR contents can be output.
Figure 11-8 shows the outputs when G3INV and G2INV are cleared to 0, in addition to the
settings of figure 11-7.
TCNT value
TGRB
TCNT
TGRA
H'0000
NDRH
PODRL
Time
95
00
65
95
59
05
65
56
41
59
95
50
56
65
14
95
05
65
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
PO10
PO9
PO8
Figure 11-8 Inverted Pulse Output (Example)
Page 420 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
11.3.6
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture
Pulse output can be triggered by TPU input capture as well as by compare match. If TGRA
functions as an input capture register in the TPU channel selected by PCR, pulse output will be
triggered by the input capture signal.
Figure 11-9 shows the timing of this output.
φ
TIOC pin
Input capture
signal
NDR
N
PODR
M
PO
M
N
N
Figure 11-9 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture (Example)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 421 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4
Usage Notes
Operation of Pulse Output Pins: Pins PO8 to PO15 are also used for other peripheral functions
such as the TPU. When output by another peripheral function is enabled, the corresponding pins
cannot be used for pulse output. Note, however, that data transfer from NDR bits to PODR bits
takes place, regardless of the usage of the pins.
Pin functions should be changed only under conditions in which the output trigger event will not
occur.
Note on Non-Overlapping Output: During non-overlapping operation, the transfer of NDR bit
values to PODR bits takes place as follows.
• NDR bits are always transferred to PODR bits at compare match A.
• At compare match B, NDR bits are transferred only if their value is 0. Bits are not transferred
if their value is 1.
Figure 11-10 illustrates the non-overlapping pulse output operation.
DDR
NDER
Q
Compare match A
Compare match B
Pulse
output
pin
C
Q PODR D
Q NDR D
Internal data bus
Normal output/inverted output
Figure 11-10 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
Page 422 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Therefore, 0 data can be transferred ahead of 1 data by making compare match B occur before
compare match A. The NDR contents should not be altered during the interval from compare
match B to compare match A (the non-overlap margin).
This can be accomplished by having the TGIA interrupt handling routine write the next data in
NDR, or by having the TGIA interrupt activate the DTC. Note, however, that the next data must
be written before the next compare match B occurs.
Figure 11-11 shows the timing of this operation.
Compare match A
Compare match B
Write to NDR
Write to NDR
NDR
PODR
0 output
0/1 output
Write to NDR
Do not write here
to NDR here
0 output 0/1 output
Write to NDR
Do not write here
to NDR here
Figure 11-11 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 423 of 1458
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Page 424 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.1
Overview
The chip has two channel inbuilt watchdog timers (WDT0/WDT1). The WDT can also generate
an internal reset signal for the chip if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer
counter, allowing it to overflow.
When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval
timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows.
12.1.1
Features
WDT features are listed below.
• Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode
• An internal reset can be issued if the timer counter overflows
⎯ In the watchdog timer mode, the WDT can generate an internal reset
• Interrupt generation when in interval timer mode
⎯ If the counter overflows, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt
• WDT0 and WDT1 respectively allow eight and sixteen types*1 of counter input clock to be
selected
⎯ The maximum interval of the WDT is given as a system clock cycle × 131072 × 256
⎯ A subclock*2 may be selected for the input counter of WDT1
⎯ Where a subclock is selected, the maximum interval is given as a subclock cycle × 256 ×
256
Notes: 1. Other than the U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group have eight types of
counter input clock as well as WDT0.
2. Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in
the U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group only.
See section 22A.7, Subclock Oscillator, for the method of fixing pins when OSC1 and
OSC2 are not used. The H8S/2639 and H8S/2635 Groups have no OSC1 and OSC2
pins.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 425 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.1.2
Block Diagram
Figures 12-1 (a) and 12-1 (b) show block diagrams of the WDT.
Overflow
Internal reset signal*1
Clock
Clock
select
Reset
control
RSTCSR
φ/2*2
φ/64*2
φ/128*2
φ/512*2
φ/2048*2
φ/8192*2
φ/32768*2
φ/131072*2
Internal clock
sources
TCNT
TSCR
Module bus
Bus
interface
Internal bus
WOVI 0
(interrupt request
signal)
Interrupt
control
WDT
Legend:
TCSR:
Timer control/status register
TCNT:
Timer counter
RSTCSR: Reset control/status register
Notes: 1. The type of internal reset signal depends on a register setting.
2. In the U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group, φ in subactive and subsleep modes
operates as φSUB.
Figure 12-1 (a) Block Diagram of WDT0
Page 426 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Internal NMI
Interrupt request signal
Internal reset signal*1
Interrupt
control
Overflow
Clock
Clock
select
Reset
control
TCNT
φ/2
φ/64
φ/128
φ/512
φ/2048
φ/8192
φ/32768
φ/131072
Internal clock
TCSR
Module bus
Bus
interface
φSUB/2*2
φSUB/4*2
φSUB/8*2
φSUB/16*2
φSUB/32*2
φSUB/64*2
φSUB/128*2
φSUB/256*2
Internal bus
WOVI1
(Interrupt request signal)
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
WDT
Legend:
TCSR : Timer control/status register
TCNT : Timer counter
Notes: 1. An internal reset signal can be generated by setting the register
The reset thus generated is a reset
2. Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available
only in the U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group only.
Figure 12-1 (b) Block Diagram of WDT1
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 427 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.1.3
Pin Configuration
There are no pins related to the WDT.
12.1.4
Register Configuration
The WDT has five registers, as summarized in table 12-1. These registers control clock selection,
WDT mode switching, and the reset signal.
Table 12-1 WDT Registers
1
Address*
Channel Name
0
1
2
Initial Value Write*
Abbreviation R/W
Timer control/status register 0 TCSR0
Read
3
R/(W)* H'18
H'FF74 H'FF74
Timer counter 0
TCNT0
R/W
H'00
H'FF74 H'FF75
Reset control/status register
RSTCSR0
H'FF76 H'FF77
Timer control/status register 1 TCSR1
R/(W)* H'1F
3
R/(W)* H'00
Timer counter 1
R/W
H'FFA2 H'FFA3
TCNT1
3
H'00
H'FFA2 H'FFA2
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. For details of write operations, see section 12.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
3. Only a write of 0 is permitted to bit 7, to clear the flag.
Page 428 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.2
Register Descriptions
12.2.1
Timer Counter (TCNT)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable* up-counter.
When the TME bit is set to 1 in TCSR, TCNT starts counting pulses generated from the internal
clock source selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR. When the count overflows (changes from
H'FF to H'00), an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated, depending on the mode selected by
the WT/IT bit in TCSR.
TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode, or when the TME bit is cleared
to 0. It is not initialized in software standby mode.
Note: * TCNT is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details see
section 12.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 429 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.2.2
Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
TCSR0
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVF
WT/IT
TME
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * Only a 0 may be written to this bit to clear the flag.
TCSR1
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVF
WT/IT
TME
2
PSS*
RST/NMI
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
*1
R/(W)
Notes: 1. Only a 0 may be written to this bit to clear the flag.
2. Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in
the U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group only.
TCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable* register. Its functions include selecting the clock source to be
input to TCNT, and the timer mode.
TCSR0 (TCSR1) is initialized to H'18 (H'00) by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not
initialized in software standby mode.
Note: * TCSR is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details see
section 12.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
Page 430 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Bit 7—Overflow Flag (OVF): Indicates that TCNT has overflowed from H'FF to H'00.
Bit 7
OVF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
•
•
1
(Initial value)
Cleared when 0 is written to the TME bit (Only applies to WDT1)
Cleared by reading TCSR* when OVF = 1, then writing 0 to OVF
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00)
When internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is
cleared automatically by the internal reset.
Note: * When interval timer interrupts are disabled and OVF is polled, read the OVF = 1 state at
least twice.
In the interval timer mode, the OVF flag can be cleared in the interval timer interrupt routine by
writing 0 to OVF after reading TCSR when OVF is set to 1, in accordance with the conditions for
clearing the OVF flag.
However, when attempting to poll the OVF flag when interval timer interrupts are prohibited the
OVF value will not be recognized as 1 (even though it is set to 1) if there is a conflict between the
timing used to set the OVF flag and the timing used to read the OVF flag.
In such cases it is possible to completely satisfy the conditions for clearing the OVF flag by
reading OVF two or more times while its value is 1. In a situation such as the above, the OVF flag
should be read two or more times while its value is 1 and then cleared.
Bit 6—Timer Mode Select (WT/IT): Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or
interval timer. This selection determines whether WDT0 issues an internal reset when TCNT
overflows while bit RSTE of the reset control/status register (RSTCSR) is set to 1. In the interval
timer mode, WDT0 sends a WOVI interrupt request to the CPU. WDT1, on the other hand,
requests a reset or an NMI interrupt from the CPU if the watchdog timer mode is chosen, whereas
it requests a WOVI interrupt from the CPU if the interval timer mode is chosen.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 431 of 1458
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
WDT0 Mode Select
TCSR0
WT/IT
Description
0
Interval timer mode: WDT0 requests an interval timer interrupt (WOVI)
from the CPU when the TCNT overflows
1
Watchdog timer mode: A reset is issued when the TCNT overflows if the RSTE bit of
RSTCSR is set to 1*
(Initial value)
Note: * For details see section 12.2.3, Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR).
WDT1 Mode Select
TCSR1
WT/IT
0
1
Description
Interval timer mode: WDT1 requests an interval timer interrupt (WOVI)
from the CPU when the TCNT overflows
(Initial value)
Watchdog timer mode: WDT1 requests a reset or an NMI interrupt from
the CPU when the TCNT overflows
Bit 5—Timer Enable (TME): Selects whether TCNT runs or is halted.
Bit 5
TME
Description
0
TCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted
1
TCNT counts
(Initial value)
WDT0 TCSR Bit 4—Reserved Bit: A read operation on this bit always causes a 1 to be read out.
Every write operation on this bit is invalidated.
WDT1 TCSR Bit 4—Prescaler Select (PSS): This bit is used to select an input clock source for
the TCNT of WDT1.
See the descriptions of Clock Select 2 to 0 for details.
Page 432 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
WDT1 TCSR
Bit 4
PSS
Description
0
The TCNT counts frequency-division clock pulses of the φ based
prescaler (PSM)
(Initial value)
*
The TCNT counts frequency-division clock pulses of the φ SUB -based prescaler
(PSS)
1
Note: * Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available only in
the U-mask and W-mask versions, but are not available in the other versions.
WDT0 TCSR Bit 3—Reserved: A read operation on this bit always causes a 1 to be read out.
Every write operation on this bit is invalidated.
WDT1 TCSR Bit 3—Reset or NMI (RST/NMI): This bit is used to choose between an internal
reset request and an NMI request when the TCNT overflows during the watchdog timer mode.
Bit 3
RST/NMI
Description
0
NMI request
1
Internal reset request
(Initial value)
Bits 2 to 0—Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits select one of eight internal clock
sources, obtained by dividing the system clock (φ) or subclock* (φSUB), for input to TCNT.
Note: * Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in the
U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group only.
These functions cannot be used with the other versions, and in them the PSS bit is
reserved. Only 0 should be written to this bit.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 433 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
WDT0 Input Clock Select
Description
Bit 2
CKS2
Bit 1
CKS1
Bit 0
CKS0
0
0
0
1
0
φ/2* (initial value) 25.6 µs
2
φ/64*
819.2 µs
2
φ/128*
1.6 ms
1
φ/512*
0
φ/2048
1
2
φ/8192*
104.9 ms
0
2
φ/32768*
419.4 ms
1
2
φ/131072*
1.68 s
1
1
0
1
Overflow Period* (where φ = 20 MHz)
1
Clock
2
2
*2
6.6 ms
26.2 ms
Notes: 1. An overflow period is the time interval between the start of counting up from H'00 on the
TCNT and the occurrence of a TCNT overflow.
2. In the U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group, φ in subactive and
subsleep modes operates as φSUB.
Page 434 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
WDT1 Input Clock Select
Description
Bit 4
2
PSS*
Bit 2
CKS2
Bit 1
CKS1
Bit 0
CKS0
Clock
Overflow Period* (where φ = 20 MHz)
2
(where φSUB* = 32.768 kHz)
0
0
0
0
φ/2 (initial value)
25.6 µs
1
φ/64
819.2 µs
1
0
φ/128
1.6 ms
1
φ/512
6.6 ms
0
φ/2048
26.2 ms
1
φ/8192
104.9 ms
1
0
φ/32768
419.4 ms
φ/131072
2
φSUB/2*
15.6 ms
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1.68 s
31.3 ms
0
φSUB/4*
2
φSUB/8*
1
2
φSUB/16*
125 ms
0
2
φSUB/32*
250 ms
1
φSUB/64*
500 ms
0
1
1
1
1
2
62.5 ms
2
φSUB/128
*2
1s
φSUB/256
*2
2s
Notes: 1. An overflow period is the time interval between the start of counting up from H'00 on the
TCNT and the occurrence of a TCNT overflow.
2. Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in
the U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group only.
These functions cannot be used with the other versions, therefore PSS bit is reserved.
0 should be written when writing.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 435 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.2.3
Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WOVF
RSTE
RSTS
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
Note: * Can only be written with 0 for flag clearing.
RSTCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable* register that controls the generation of the internal reset
signal when TCNT overflows, and selects the type of internal reset signal.
RSTCSR is initialized to H'1F by a reset signal from the RES pin, but not by the WDT internal
reset signal caused by overflows.
Note: * RSTCSR is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details
see section 12.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
Bit 7—Watchdog Overflow Flag (WOVF): Indicates that TCNT has overflowed (changed from
H'FF to H'00) during watchdog timer operation. This bit is not set in interval timer mode.
Bit 7
WOVF
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
1
[Setting condition]
•
•
(Initial value)
Cleared by reading RSTCSR when WOVF = 1, then writing 0 to WOVF
Set when TCNT overflows (changed from H'FF to H'00) during watchdog timer
operation
Bit 6—Reset Enable (RSTE): Specifies whether or not a reset signal is generated in the
H8S/2636 if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation.
Bit 6
RSTE
Description
0
Reset signal is not generated if TCNT overflows *
1
Reset signal is generated if TCNT overflows
(Initial value)
Note: * The modules within the chip are not reset, but TCNT and TCSR within the WDT are reset.
Page 436 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Bit 5—Reset Select (RSTS): Selects the type of internal reset generated if TCNT overflows
during watchdog timer operation.
For details of the types of reset, see section 4, Exception Handling.
Bit 5
RSTS
Description
0
Reset
1
Do not set
(Initial value)
Bits 4 to 0—Reserved: Always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
12.2.4
Notes on Register Access
The watchdog timer’s TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in being
more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given
below.
Writing to TCNT and TCSR: These registers must be written to by a word transfer instruction.
They cannot be written to with byte instructions.
Figure 12-2 shows the format of data written to TCNT and TCSR. TCNT and TCSR both have the
same write address. For a write to TCNT, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'5A
and the lower byte must contain the write data. For a write to TCSR, the upper byte of the written
word must contain H'A5 and the lower byte must contain the write data. This transfers the write
data from the lower byte to TCNT or TCSR.
TCNT write
15
8 7
H'5A
Address: H'FF74
0
Write data
TCSR write
15
Address: H'FF74
8 7
H'A5
0
Write data
Figure 12-2 Format of Data Written to TCNT and TCSR (WDT0)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 437 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Writing to RSTCSR: RSTCSR must be written to by word transfer instruction to address
H'FF76. It cannot be written to with byte instructions.
Figure 12-3 shows the format of data written to RSTCSR. The method of writing 0 to the WOVF
bit differs from that for writing to the RSTE bit.
To write 0 to the WOVF bit, the write data must have H'A5 in the upper byte and H'00 in the
lower byte. This clears the WOVF bit to 0, but has no effect on the RSTE bit. To write to the
RSTE bit, the upper byte must contain H'5A and the lower byte must contain the write data. This
writes the values in bits 6 and 5 of the lower byte into the RSTE bit, but has no effect on the
WOVF bit.
Writing 0 to WOVF bit
15
8 7
H'A5
Address: H'FF76
0
H'00
Writing to RSTE bit
15
Address: H'FF76
8 7
H'5A
0
Write data
Figure 12-3 Format of Data Written to RSTCSR (WDT0)
Reading TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR (WDT0): These registers are read in the same way as
other registers. The read addresses are H'FF74 for TCSR, H'FF75 for TCNT, and H'FF77 for
RSTCSR.
Page 438 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
12.3
Operation
12.3.1
Watchdog Timer Operation
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT bit in TCSR and the TME bit to 1. Software
must prevent TCNT overflows by rewriting the TCNT value (normally by writing H'00) before
overflow occurs. This ensures that TCNT does not overflow while the system is operating
normally. If TCNT overflows without being rewritten because of a system malfunction or other
error, an internal reset is issued, in the case of WDT0, if the RSTE bit in RSTCSR is set to 1.
If a reset caused by a signal input to the RES pin occurs at the same time as a reset caused by a
WDT overflow, the RES pin reset has priority and the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is cleared to 0.
In the case of WDT1, the chip is reset, or an NMI interrupt request is generated, for 516 system
clock periods (516φ) (515 or 516 clock periods when the clock source is φ/SUB* (PSS = 1)). This
is illustrated in figure 12-4 (b).
An NMI request from the watchdog timer and an interrupt request from the NMI pin are both
treated as having the same vector. So, avoid handling an NMI request from the watchdog timer
and an interrupt request from the NMI pin at the same time.
Note: * Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in the
U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group only. These functions cannot be used
with the other versions.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 439 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
TCNT value
Overflow
H'FF
Time
H'00
WT/IT = 1
TME = 1
Write H'00
to TCNT
WOVF = 1
WT/IT = 1 Write H'00
TME = 1
to TCNT
Internal reset is
generated
Internal reset signal*
518 states
Legend:
WT/IT: Timer mode select bit
TME: Timer enable bit
Note: * The internal reset signal is generated only if the RSTE bit is set to 1.
Figure 12-4 (a) WDT0 Watchdog Timer Operation
TCNT value
Overflow
H'FF
Time
H'00
WT/IT = 1
TME = 1
Write H'00
to TCNT
WOVF = 1*
WT/IT = 1 Write H'00
TME = 1 to TCNT
Internal reset
is generated
Internal
reset signal
515/516 states
Legend:
WT/IT: Timer mode select bit
TME: Timer enable bit
Note: * The WOVF bit is set to 1 and then cleared to 0 by an internal reset.
Figure 12-4 (b) WDT1 Watchdog Timer Operation
Page 440 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
12.3.2
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Interval Timer Operation
To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear the WT/IT bit in TCSR to 0 and set the TME bit to 1.
An interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each time TCNT overflows, provided that the
WDT is operating as an interval timer, as shown in figure 12-5. This function can be used to
generate interrupt requests at regular intervals.
TCNT value
Overflow
H'FF
Overflow
Overflow
Overflow
Time
H'00
WT/IT = 0
TME = 1
WOVI
WOVI
WOVI
WOVI
Legend:
WOVI: Interval timer interrupt request generation
Figure 12-5 Interval Timer Operation
12.3.3
Timing of Setting Overflow Flag (OVF)
The OVF flag is set to 1 if TCNT overflows during interval timer operation. At the same time, an
interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested. This timing is shown in figure 12-6.
With WDT1, the OVF bit of the TCSR is set to 1 and a simultaneous NMI interrupt is requested
when the TCNT overflows if the NMI request has been chosen in the watchdog timer mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 441 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
φ
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Overflow signal
(internal signal)
OVF
Figure 12-6 Timing of Setting of OVF
12.3.4
Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag (WOVF)
In the WDT0, the WOVF flag is set to 1 if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation. If
TCNT overflows while the RSTE bit in RSTCSR is set to 1, an internal reset signal is generated
for the entire chip. Figure 12-7 shows the timing in this case.
φ
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Overflow signal
(internal signal)
WOVF
Internal reset
signal
518 states (WDT0)
515/516 states (WDT1)
Figure 12-7 Timing of Setting of WOVF
Page 442 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
12.4
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Interrupts
During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI).
The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR. OVF must be
cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine.
If an NMI request has been chosen in the watchdog timer mode, an NMI request is generated
when a TCNT overflow occurs.
12.5
Usage Notes
12.5.1
Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment
If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write
takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 12-8 shows this operation.
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
Internal write signal
TCNT input clock
TCNT
N
M
Counter write data
Figure 12-8 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 443 of 1458
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.5.2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Changing Value of PSS* and CKS2 to CKS0
If bits PSS and CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could
occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0)
before changing the value of bits PSS* and CKS2 to CKS0.
Note: * Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in the
U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group only.
These functions cannot be used with the other versions.
12.5.3
Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode
If the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer, or vice versa, while the WDT is
operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by
clearing the TME bit to 0) before switching the mode.
12.5.4
Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode
The chip is not reset internally if TCNT overflows while the RSTE bit is cleared to 0 during
watchdog timer operation, but TCNT and TSCR of the WDT are reset.
12.5.5
OVF Flag Clearing in Interval Timer Mode
If conflict occurs between OVF flag clearing and OVF flag reading in interval timer mode, the
flag may not be cleared by writing 0 to OVF even though the OVF = 1 state has been read. When
interval timer interrupts are disabled and the OVF flag is polled, for instance, and there is a
possibility of conflict between OVF flag setting and reading, the OVF = 1 state should be read at
least twice before writing 0 to OVF in order to clear the flag.
Page 444 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Note: The H8S/2635 Group is not equipped with a DTC.
13.1
Overview
The chip is equipped with 3 independent serial communication interface (SCI) channels. The SCI
can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. A function is also
provided for serial communication between processors (multiprocessor communication function).
13.1.1
Features
SCI features are listed below.
• Choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode
Asynchronous mode
⎯ Serial data communication executed using asynchronous system in which synchronization
is achieved character by character
Serial data communication can be carried out with standard asynchronous communication
chips such as a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or Asynchronous
Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA)
⎯ A multiprocessor communication function is provided that enables serial data
communication with a number of processors
⎯ Choice of 12 serial data transfer formats
Data length
: 7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length
: 1 or 2 bits
Parity
: Even, odd, or none
Multiprocessor bit
: 1 or 0
⎯ Receive error detection : Parity, overrun, and framing errors
⎯ Break detection
: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in
case of a framing error
Clocked Synchronous mode
⎯ Serial data communication synchronized with a clock
Serial data communication can be carried out with other chips that have a synchronous
communication function
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 445 of 1458
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
⎯ One serial data transfer format
Data length
: 8 bits
⎯ Receive error detection : Overrun errors detected
• Full-duplex communication capability
⎯ The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception
to be executed simultaneously
⎯ Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous
transmission and continuous reception of serial data
• Choice of LSB-first or MSB-first transfer
⎯ Can be selected regardless of the communication mode* (except in the case of
asynchronous mode 7-bit data)
Note: * Descriptions in this section refer to LSB-first transfer.
• On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected
• Choice of serial clock source: internal clock from baud rate generator or external clock from
SCK pin
• Four interrupt sources
⎯ Four interrupt sources — transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive
error — that can issue requests independently
⎯ The transmit-data-empty interrupt and receive data full interrupts can activate the data
transfer controller (DTC) to execute data transfer
• Module stop mode can be set
⎯ As the initial setting, SCI operation is halted. Register access is enabled by exiting module
stop mode
Page 446 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
13.1.2
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Block Diagram
Bus interface
Figure 13-1 shows a block diagram of the SCI.
Module data bus
RDR
RxD
RSR
TxD
TDR
SCMR
SSR
SCR
SMR
TSR
BRR
φ
Baud rate
generator
Transmission/
reception control
Parity generation
Parity check
SCK
Internal
data bus
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
Clock
External clock
Legend:
RSR: Receive shift register
RDR: Receive data register
TSR: Transmit shift register
TDR: Transmit data register
SMR: Serial mode register
SCR: Serial control register
SSR: Serial status register
SCMR: Smart card mode register
BRR: Bit rate register
TEI
TXI
RXI
ERI
Figure 13-1 Block Diagram of SCI
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 447 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 13-1 shows the serial pins for each SCI channel.
Table 13-1 SCI Pins
Symbol*
Channel
Pin Name
0
Serial clock pin 0
SCK0
I/O
SCI0 clock input/output
Receive data pin 0
RxD0
Input
SCI0 receive data input
Transmit data pin 0
TxD0
Output
SCI0 transmit data output
Serial clock pin 1
SCK1
I/O
SCI1 clock input/output
Receive data pin 1
RxD1
Input
SCI1 receive data input
1
2
I/O
Function
Transmit data pin 1
TxD1
Output
SCI1 transmit data output
Serial clock pin 2
SCK2
I/O
SCI2 clock input/output
Receive data pin 2
RxD2
Input
SCI2 receive data input
Transmit data pin 2
TxD2
Output
SCI2 transmit data output
Note: * Pin names SCK, RxD, and TxD are used in the text for all channels, omitting the channel
designation.
Page 448 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
13.1.4
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Register Configuration
The SCI has the internal registers shown in table 13-2. These registers are used to specify
asynchronous mode or clocked synchronous mode, the data format, and the bit rate, and to control
transmitter/receiver.
Table 13-2 SCI Registers
1
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
0
Serial mode register 0
SMR0
R/W
H'00
H'FF78
Bit rate register 0
BRR0
R/W
H'FF
H'FF79
Serial control register 0
SCR0
R/W
H'00
H'FF7A
Transmit data register 0
TDR0
R/W
H'FF
H'FF7B
Serial status register 0
SSR0
R/(W)*
H'84
H'FF7C
Receive data register 0
RDR0
R
H'00
H'FF7D
Smart card mode register 0
SCMR0
R/W
H'F2
H'FF7E
Serial mode register 1
SMR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF80
1
2
All
2
Bit rate register 1
BRR1
R/W
H'FF
H'FF81
Serial control register 1
SCR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF82
Transmit data register 1
TDR1
R/W
H'FF
H'FF83
H'84
H'FF84
*2
Serial status register 1
SSR1
R/(W)
Receive data register 1
RDR1
R
H'00
H'FF85
Smart card mode register 1
SCMR1
R/W
H'F2
H'FF86
Serial mode register 2
SMR2
R/W
H'00
H'FF88
Bit rate register 2
BRR2
R/W
H'FF
H'FF89
Serial control register 2
SCR2
R/W
H'00
H'FF8A
Transmit data register 2
TDR2
R/W
H'FF8B
Serial status register 2
SSR2
H'FF
2
*
R/(W)
H'84
H'FF8C
Receive data register 2
RDR2
R
H'00
H'FF8D
Smart card mode register 2
SCMR2
R/W
H'F2
H'FF8E
Module stop control register B
MSTPCRB
R/W
H'FF
H'FDE9
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Can only be written with 0 for flag clearing.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 449 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.2
Register Descriptions
13.2.1
Receive Shift Register (RSR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R/W
:
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
RSR is a register used to receive serial data.
The SCI sets serial data input from the RxD pin in RSR in the order received, starting with the
LSB (bit 0), and converts it to parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is
transferred to RDR automatically.
RSR cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU.
13.2.2
Bit
Receive Data Register (RDR)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
:
RDR is a register that stores received serial data.
When the SCI has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to
RDR where it is stored, and completes the receive operation. After this, RSR is receive-enabled.
Since RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, enables continuous receive
operations to be performed.
RDR is a read-only register, and cannot be written to by the CPU.
RDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in standby mode, watch mode*, subactive mode*, and
subsleep mode* or module stop mode.
Note: * Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in the
U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group only. These functions cannot be used
with the other versions.
Page 450 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
13.2.3
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R/W
:
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
TSR is a register used to transmit serial data.
To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR, then
sends the data to the TxD pin starting with the LSB (bit 0).
When transmission of one byte is completed, the next transmit data is transferred from TDR to
TSR, and transmission started, automatically. However, data transfer from TDR to TSR is not
performed if the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1.
TSR cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU.
13.2.4
Transmit Data Register (TDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission.
When the SCI detects that TSR is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and
starts serial transmission. Continuous serial transmission can be carried out by writing the next
transmit data to TDR during serial transmission of the data in TSR.
TDR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
TDR is initialized to H'FF by a reset, in standby mode, watch mode*, subactive mode*, and
subsleep mode* or module stop mode.
Note: * Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in the
U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group only.
These functions cannot be used with the other versions.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 451 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.2.5
Bit
Serial Mode Register (SMR)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SMR is an 8-bit register used to set the SCI’s serial transfer format and select the baud rate
generator clock source.
SMR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
SMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—Communication Mode (C/A): Selects asynchronous mode or clocked synchronous mode
as the SCI operating mode.
Bit 7
C/A
Description
0
Asynchronous mode
1
Clocked synchronous mode
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Character Length (CHR): Selects 7 or 8 bits as the data length in asynchronous mode. In
clocked synchronous mode, a fixed data length of 8 bits is used regardless of the CHR setting.
Bit 6
CHR
Description
0
8-bit data
1
7-bit data*
(Initial value)
Note: * When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) of TDR is not transmitted, and it is not possible
to choose between LSB-first or MSB-first transfer.
Page 452 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 5—Parity Enable (PE): In asynchronous mode, selects whether or not parity bit addition is
performed in transmission, and parity bit checking in reception. In clocked synchronous mode
with a multiprocessor format, parity bit addition and checking is not performed, regardless of the
PE bit setting.
Bit 5
PE
Description
0
Parity bit addition and checking disabled
Parity bit addition and checking enabled*
1
(Initial value)
Note:* When the PE bit is set to 1, the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit is added to
transmit data before transmission. In reception, the parity bit is checked for the parity (even
or odd) specified by the O/E bit.
Bit 4—Parity Mode (O/E): Selects either even or odd parity for use in parity addition and
checking.
The O/E bit setting is only valid when the PE bit is set to 1, enabling parity bit addition and
checking, in asynchronous mode. The O/E bit setting is invalid in clocked synchronous mode,
when parity addition and checking is disabled in asynchronous mode, and when a multiprocessor
format is used.
Bit 4
O/E
Description
0
Even parity*
2
Odd parity*
1
1
(Initial value)
Notes: 1. When even parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total
number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is even.
In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive
character plus the parity bit is even.
2 When odd parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total
number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is odd.
In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive
character plus the parity bit is odd.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 453 of 1458
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 3—Stop Bit Length (STOP): Selects 1 or 2 bits as the stop bit length in asynchronous mode.
The STOP bits setting is only valid in asynchronous mode. If clocked synchronous mode is set the
STOP bit setting is invalid since stop bits are not added.
Bit 3
STOP
Description
0
1 stop bit: In transmission, a single 1 bit (stop bit) is added to the end
of a transmit character before it is sent
1
(Initial value)
2 stop bits: In transmission, two 1 bits (stop bits) are added to the end of a transmit
character before it is sent
In reception, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the STOP bit setting. If the second
stop bit is 1, it is treated as a stop bit; if it is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit
character.
Bit 2—Multiprocessor Mode (MP): Selects multiprocessor format. When multiprocessor format
is selected, the PE bit and O/E bit parity settings are invalid. The MP bit setting is only valid in
asynchronous mode; it is invalid in clocked synchronous mode.
For details of the multiprocessor communication function, see section 13.3.3, Multiprocessor
Communication Function.
Bit 2
MP
Description
0
Multiprocessor function disabled
1
Multiprocessor format selected
Page 454 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1, CKS0): These bits select the clock source for the
baud rate generator. The clock source can be selected from φ, φ/4, φ/16, and φ/64, according to the
setting of bits CKS1 and CKS0.
For the relation between the clock source, the bit rate register setting, and the baud rate, see
section 13.2.8, Bit Rate Register (BRR).
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKS1
CKS0
Description
0
0
φ clock
1
φ/4 clock
0
φ/16 clock
1
φ/64 clock
1
13.2.6
(Initial value)
Serial Control Register (SCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SCR is a register that performs enabling or disabling of SCI transfer operations, serial clock output
in asynchronous mode, and interrupt requests, and selection of the serial clock source.
SCR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
SCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit 7—Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): Enables or disables transmit data empty interrupt
(TXI) request generation when serial transmit data is transferred from TDR to TSR and the TDRE
flag in SSR is set to 1.
Bit 7
TIE
Description
0
Transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) requests disabled*
1
Transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) requests enabled
(Initial value)
Note:* TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag, then
clearing it to 0, or clearing the TIE bit to 0.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 455 of 1458
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 6—Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): Enables or disables receive data full interrupt (RXI)
request and receive error interrupt (ERI) request generation when serial receive data is transferred
from RSR to RDR and the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1.
Bit 6
RIE
Description
0
Receive data full interrupt (RXI) request and receive error interrupt (ERI) request
disabled*
(Initial value)
1
Receive data full interrupt (RXI) request and receive error interrupt (ERI) request
enabled
Note:* RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the RDRF
flag, or the FER, PER, or ORER flag, then clearing the flag to 0, or clearing the RIE bit to 0.
Bit 5—Transmit Enable (TE): Enables or disables the start of serial transmission by the SCI.
Bit 5
TE
Description
0
Transmission disabled*
2
Transmission enabled*
1
1
(Initial value)
Notes: 1. The TDRE flag in SSR is fixed at 1.
2. In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to TDR and the
TDRE flag in SSR is cleared to 0.
SMR setting must be performed to decide the transfer format before setting the TE bit
to 1.
Bit 4—Receive Enable (RE): Enables or disables the start of serial reception by the SCI.
Bit 4
RE
Description
0
Reception disabled*
2
Reception enabled*
1
1
(Initial value)
Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags, which
retain their states.
2. Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous
mode or serial clock input is detected in clocked synchronous mode.
SMR setting must be performed to decide the transfer format before setting the RE bit
to 1.
Page 456 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 3—Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE): Enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts.
The MPIE bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode when the MP bit in SMR is set to 1.
The MPIE bit setting is invalid in clocked synchronous mode or when the MP bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 3
MPIE
Description
0
Multiprocessor interrupts disabled (normal reception performed)
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
•
When the MPIE bit is cleared to 0
•
1
When MPB= 1 data is received
Multiprocessor interrupts enabled*
Receive interrupt (RXI) requests, receive error interrupt (ERI) requests, and setting
of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR are disabled until data with the
multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received.
Note: * When receive data including MPB = 0 is received, receive data transfer from RSR to RDR,
receive error detection, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR , is not
performed. When receive data including MPB = 1 is received, the MPB bit in SSR is set to
1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and generation of RXI and ERI interrupts
(when the TIE and RIE bits in SCR are set to 1) and FER and ORER flag setting is enabled.
Bit 2—Transmit End Interrupt Enable (TEIE): Enables or disables transmit end interrupt
(TEI) request generation when there is no valid transmit data in TDR in MSB data transmission.
Bit 2
TEIE
Description
0
Transmit end interrupt (TEI) request disabled*
Transmit end interrupt (TEI) request enabled*
1
(Initial value)
Note: * TEI cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing it
to 0 and clearing the TEND flag to 0, or clearing the TEIE bit to 0.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 457 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1, CKE0): These bits are used to select the SCI clock
source and enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin. The combination of the CKE1 and
CKE0 bits determines whether the SCK pin functions as an I/O port, the serial clock output pin, or
the serial clock input pin.
The setting of the CKE0 bit, however, is only valid for internal clock operation (CKE1 = 0) in
asynchronous mode. The CKE0 bit setting is invalid in clocked synchronous mode, and in the case
of external clock operation (CKE1 = 1). Note that the SCI’s operating mode must be decided using
SMR before setting the CKE1 and CKE0 bits.
For details of clock source selection, see table 13.9.
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKE1
CKE0
Description
0
0
Asynchronous mode
Internal clock/SCK pin functions as I/O port*
Clocked synchronous
mode
Internal clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock
1
output*
Asynchronous mode
Internal clock/SCK pin functions as clock output*
Clocked synchronous
mode
Internal clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock
output
Asynchronous mode
External clock/SCK pin functions as clock input*
Clocked synchronous
mode
Asynchronous mode
External clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock
input
3
External clock/SCK pin functions as clock input*
Clocked synchronous
mode
External clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock
input
1
1
0
1
1
2
3
Notes: 1. Initial value
2. Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate.
3. Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate.
Page 458 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
13.2.7
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Serial Status Register (SSR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
SSR is an 8-bit register containing status flags that indicate the operating status of the SCI, and
multiprocessor bits.
SSR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. However, 1 cannot be written to flags
TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER. Also note that in order to clear these flags they must be
read as 1 beforehand. The TEND flag and MPB flag are read-only flags and cannot be modified.
SSR is initialized to H'84 by a reset, in standby mode, watch mode*, subactive mode*, and
subsleep mode* or module stop mode.
Note: * Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are available in the
U-mask and W-mask versions, and H8S/2635 Group only.
These functions cannot be used with the other versions.
Bit 7—Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): Indicates that data has been transferred from
TDR to TSR and the next serial data can be written to TDR.
Bit 7
TDRE
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR
[Setting conditions]
When the TE bit in SCR is 0
•
When data is transferred from TDR to TSR and data can be written to TDR
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
(Initial value)
•
Page 459 of 1458
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 6—Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR.
Bit 6
RDRF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
(Initial value)
•
When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and reads data from RDR
[Setting condition]
•
When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to
RDR
Note: RDR and the RDRF flag are not affected and retain their previous values when an error is
detected during reception or when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.
If reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1, an overrun
error will occur and the receive data will be lost.
Bit 5—Overrun Error (ORER): Indicates that an overrun error occurred during reception,
causing abnormal termination.
Bit 5
ORER
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
1
(Initial value)*
When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1
[Setting condition]
•
2
When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1*
Notes: 1. The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is
cleared to 0.
2. The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in RDR, and the data received
subsequently is lost. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the
ORER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be
continued, either.
Page 460 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 4—Framing Error (FER): Indicates that a framing error occurred during reception in
asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination.
Bit 4
FER
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
1
(Initial value)*
When 0 is written to FER after reading FER = 1
[Setting condition]
•
When the SCI checks whether the stop bit at the end of the receive data when
2
reception ends, and the stop bit is 0*
Notes: 1. The FER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is
cleared to 0.
2. In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked for a value of 0; the second stop bit
is not checked. If a framing error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the
RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the
FER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be
continued, either.
Bit 3—Parity Error (PER): Indicates that a parity error occurred during reception using parity
addition in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination.
Bit 3
PER
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
1
[Setting condition]
•
•
1
(Initial value)*
When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1
When, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit does
2
not match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit in SMR*
Notes: 1. The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is
cleared to 0.
2. If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the RDRF flag is not
set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the PER flag is set to
1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either.
Bit 2—Transmit End (TEND): Indicates that there is no valid data in TDR when the last bit of
the transmit character is sent, and transmission has been ended.
The TEND flag is read-only and cannot be modified.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 461 of 1458
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 2
TEND
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
When the DMAC or DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR
[Setting conditions]
(Initial value)
•
When the TE bit in SCR is 0
•
When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character
Bit 1—Multiprocessor Bit (MPB): When reception is performed using multiprocessor format in
asynchronous mode, MPB stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive data.
MPB is a read-only bit, and cannot be modified.
Bit 1
MPB
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
1
[Setting condition]
•
•
(Initial value)*
When data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received
Note: * Retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0 with multiprocessor
format.
Bit 0—Multiprocessor Bit Transfer (MPBT): When transmission is performed using
multiprocessor format in asynchronous mode, MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to
the transmit data.
The MPBT bit setting is invalid when multiprocessor format is not used, when not transmitting,
and in clocked synchronous mode.
Bit 0
MPBT
Description
0
Data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted
1
Data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted
Page 462 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
13.2.8
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit Rate Register (BRR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
BRR is an 8-bit register that sets the serial transfer bit rate in accordance with the baud rate
generator operating clock selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in SMR.
BRR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
BRR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in standby mode.
As baud rate generator control is performed independently for each channel, different values can
be set for each channel.
Table 13-3 shows sample BRR settings in asynchronous mode, and table 13-4 shows sample BRR
settings in clocked synchronous mode.
Table 13-3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode)
φ = 4 MHz
φ = 4.9152 MHz
φ = 5 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
70
0.03
2
86
0.31
2
88
–0.25
150
1
207
0.16
1
255
0.00
2
64
0.16
300
1
103
0.16
1
127
0.00
1
129
0.16
600
0
207
0.16
0
255
0.00
1
64
0.16
1200
0
103
0.16
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
2400
0
51
0.16
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
4800
0
25
0.16
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
9600
0
12
0.16
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
19200
—
—
—
0
7
0.00
0
7
1.73
31250
0
3
0.00
0
4
–1.70 0
4
0.00
38400
—
—
—
0
3
0.00
3
1.73
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
0
Page 463 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
φ = 6 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
106
150
2
300
1
600
φ = 6.144 MHz
φ = 7.3728 MHz
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
–0.44 2
108
0.08
2
130
77
0.16
2
79
0.00
2
155
0.16
1
159
0.00
1
1
77
0.16
1
79
0.00
1200
0
155
0.16
0
159
2400
0
77
0.16
0
4800
0
38
0.16
9600
0
19
19200
0
9
31250
0
38400
0
φ = 8 MHz
N
Error
(%)
–0.07 2
141
0.03
95
0.00
2
103
0.16
191
0.00
1
207
0.16
1
95
0.00
1
103
0.16
0.00
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.16
79
0.00
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.16
0
39
0.00
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
–2.34 0
19
0.00
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
–2.34 0
9
0.00
0
11
0.00
0
12
0.16
5
0.00
0
5
2.40
—
—
—
0
7
0.00
4
–2.34 0
4
0.00
0
5
0.00
—
—
—
n
φ = 9.8304 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
174
150
2
300
600
φ = 10 MHz
N
Error
(%)
–0.26 2
177
127
0.00
2
1
255
0.00
1
127
0.00
1200
0
255
2400
0
4800
n
φ = 12 MHz
φ = 12.288 MHz
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
–0.25 2
212
0.03
2
217
0.08
129
0.16
2
155
0.16
2
159
0.00
2
64
0.16
2
77
0.16
2
79
0.00
1
129
0.16
1
155
0.16
1
159
0.00
0.00
1
64
0.16
1
77
0.16
1
79
0.00
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
0
155
0.16
0
159
0.00
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
0
77
0.16
0
79
0.00
9600
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36 0
38
0.16
0
39
0.00
19200
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
0
19
–2.34 0
19
0.00
31250
0
9
–1.70 0
9
0.00
0
11
0.00
11
2.40
38400
0
7
0.00
7
1.73
0
9
–2.34 0
9
0.00
Page 464 of 1458
n
0
n
0
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
φ = 14 MHz
φ = 14.7456 MHz
φ = 16 MHz
φ = 17.2032 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
248
–0.17 3
150
2
181
0.16
2
191
0.00
2
207
0.16
2
223
0.00
300
2
90
0.16
2
95
0.00
2
103
0.16
2
111
0.00
600
1
181
0.16
1
191
0.00
1
207
0.16
1
223
0.00
1200
1
90
0.16
1
95
0.00
1
103
0.16
1
111
0.00
2400
0
181
0.16
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.16
0
223
0.00
4800
0
90
0.16
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.16
0
111
0.00
9600
0
45
–0.93 0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
0
55
0.00
19200
0
22
–0.93 0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
0
27
0.00
31250
0
13
0.00
0
14
–1.70 0
15
0.00
0
16
1.20
38400
—
—
—
0
11
0.00
12
0.16
0
13
0.00
n
φ = 18 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
3
79
150
2
300
600
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
64
0.70
3
70
0.03
3
75
0.48
0
φ = 19.6608 MHz
φ = 20 MHz
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
–0.12 3
86
0.31
3
88
–0.25
233
0.16
2
255
0.00
3
64
0.16
2
116
0.16
2
127
0.00
2
129
0.16
1
233
0.16
1
255
0.00
2
64
0.16
1200
1
116
0.16
1
127
0.00
1
129
0.16
2400
0
233
0.16
0
255
0.00
1
64
0.16
4800
0
116
0.16
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
9600
0
58
–0.69 0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
19200
0
28
1.02
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
31250
0
17
0.00
0
19
–1.70 0
19
0.00
38400
0
14
–2.34 0
15
0.00
15
1.73
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
n
0
Page 465 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13-4 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
φ = 4 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
110
—
—
250
2
500
2
1k
φ = 8 MHz
φ = 10 MHz
φ = 16 MHz
n
N
n
N
n
N
249
3
124
—
—
3
249
124
2
249
—
—
3
1
249
2
124
—
—
2.5 k
1
99
1
199
1
5k
0
199
1
99
10 k
0
99
0
199
φ = 20 MHz
n
N
124
—
—
2
249
—
—
249
2
99
2
124
1
124
1
199
1
249
0
249
1
99
1
124
25 k
0
39
0
79
0
99
0
159
0
199
50 k
0
19
0
39
0
49
0
79
0
99
100 k
0
9
0
19
0
24
0
39
0
49
250 k
0
3
0
7
0
9
0
15
0
19
500 k
0
1
0
3
0
4
0
7
0
9
0
0*
0
1
0
3
0
4
0
0*
0
1
0
0*
1M
2.5 M
5M
Note: As far as possible, the setting should be made so that the error is no more than 1%.
Legend:
Blank: Cannot be set.
—:
Can be set, but there will be a degree of error.
*:
Continuous transfer is not possible.
Page 466 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
The BRR setting is found from the following formulas.
Asynchronous mode:
φ
N=
64 × 22n–1 × B
× 106 – 1
Clocked synchronous mode:
φ
N=
Where B:
N:
φ:
n:
8×2
2n–1
×B
× 106 – 1
Bit rate (bit/s)
BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
Operating frequency (MHz)
Baud rate generator input clock (n = 0 to 3)
(See the table below for the relation between n and the clock.)
SMR Setting
n
Clock
CKS1
CKS0
0
φ
0
0
1
φ/4
0
1
2
φ/16
1
0
3
φ/64
1
1
The bit rate error in asynchronous mode is found from the following formula:
Error (%) = {
φ × 106
(N + 1) × B × 64 × 22n–1
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
– 1} × 100
Page 467 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13-5 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in asynchronous mode. Tables 13-6
and 13-7 show the maximum bit rates with external clock input.
Table 13-5 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)
φ (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s)
n
N
4
125000
0
0
4.9152
153600
0
0
5
156250
0
0
6
187500
0
0
6.144
192000
0
0
7.3728
230400
0
0
8
250000
0
0
9.8304
307200
0
0
10
312500
0
0
12
375000
0
0
12.288
384000
0
0
14
437500
0
0
14.7456
460800
0
0
16
500000
0
0
17.2032
537600
0
0
18
562500
0
0
19.6608
614400
0
0
20
625000
0
0
Page 468 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13-6 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode)
φ (MHz)
External Input Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s)
4
1.0000
62500
4.9152
1.2288
76800
5
1.2500
78125
6
1.5000
93750
6.144
1.5360
96000
7.3728
1.8432
115200
8
2.0000
125000
9.8304
2.4576
153600
10
2.5000
156250
12
3.0000
187500
12.288
3.0720
192000
14
3.5000
218750
14.7456
3.6864
230400
16
4.0000
250000
17.2032
4.3008
268800
18
4.5000
281250
19.6608
4.9152
307200
20
5.0000
312500
Table 13-7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
φ (MHz)
External Input Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s)
4
0.6667
666666.7
6
1.0000
1000000.0
8
1.3333
1333333.3
10
1.6667
1666666.7
12
2.0000
2000000.0
14
2.3333
2333333.3
16
2.6667
2666666.7
18
3.0000
3000000.0
20
3.3333
3333333.3
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 469 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.2.9
Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
SDIR
SINV
⎯
SMIF
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
R/W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
R/W
R/W
⎯
R/W
Bit
:
:
SCMR selects LSB-first or MSB-first by means of bit SDIR. Except in the case of asynchronous
mode 7-bit data, LSB-first or MSB-first can be selected regardless of the serial communication
mode. The descriptions in this chapter refer to LSB-first transfer.
For details of the other bits in SCMR, see section 14.2.1, Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR).
SCMR is initialized to H'F2 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 3—Smart Card Data Transfer Direction (SDIR): Selects the serial/parallel conversion
format.
This bit is valid when 8-bit data is used as the transmit/receive format.
Bit 3
SDIR
Description
0
TDR contents are transmitted LSB-first
(Initial value)
Receive data is stored in RDR LSB-first
1
TDR contents are transmitted MSB-first
Receive data is stored in RDR MSB-first
Page 470 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 2—Smart Card Data Invert (SINV): Specifies inversion of the data logic level. The SINV
bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit(s): parity bit inversion requires inversion of the
O/E bit in SMR.
Bit 2
SINV
Description
0
TDR contents are transmitted without modification
Receive data is stored in RDR without modification
1
TDR contents are inverted before being transmitted
Receive data is stored in RDR in inverted form
(Initial value)
Bit 1—Reserved: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 0—Smart Card Interface Mode Select (SMIF): When the smart card interface operates as a
normal SCI, 0 should be written in this bit.
Bit 0
SMIF
Description
0
Operates as normal SCI (smart card interface function disabled)
1
Smart card interface function enabled
(Initial value)
13.2.10 Module Stop Control Register B (MSTPCRB)
MSTPCRB
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
1
MSTPB7 MSTPB6 MSTPB5 MSTPB4 MSTPB3 MSTPB2 MSTPB1 MSTPB0
Initial value :
R/W
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCRB is 8-bit readable/writable registers that perform module stop mode control.
Setting any of bits MSTPB7 to MSTBP5 to 1 stops SCI0 to SCI2 operating and enter module stop
mode on completion of the bus cycle. For details, see section 23A.5, 23B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRB is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized
by a manual reset and in software standby mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 471 of 1458
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 7—Module Stop (MSTPB7): Specifies the SCI0 module stop mode.
Bit 7
MSTPB7
Description
0
SCI0 module stop mode is cleared
1
SCI0 module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Module Stop (MSTPB6): Specifies the SCI1 module stop mode.
Bit 6
MSTPB6
Description
0
SCI1 module stop mode is cleared
1
SCI1 module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Bit 5—Module Stop (MSTPB5): Specifies the SCI2 module stop mode.
Bit 5
MSTPB5
Description
0
SCI2 module stop mode is cleared
1
SCI2 module stop mode is set
Page 472 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
13.3
Operation
13.3.1
Overview
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
The SCI can carry out serial communication in two modes: asynchronous mode in which
synchronization is achieved character by character, and clocked synchronous mode in which
synchronization is achieved with clock pulses.
Selection of asynchronous or clocked synchronous mode and the transmission format is made
using SMR as shown in table 13-8. The SCI clock is determined by a combination of the C/A bit
in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR, as shown in table 13-9.
Asynchronous Mode
• Data length: Choice of 7 or 8 bits
• Choice of parity addition, multiprocessor bit addition, and addition of 1 or 2 stop bits (the
combination of these parameters determines the transfer format and character length)
• Detection of framing, parity, and overrun errors, and breaks, during reception
• Choice of internal or external clock as SCI clock source
⎯ When internal clock is selected:
The SCI operates on the baud rate generator clock and a clock with the same frequency as
the bit rate can be output
⎯ When external clock is selected:
A clock with a frequency of 16 times the bit rate must be input (the on-chip baud rate
generator is not used)
Clocked Synchronous Mode
• Transfer format: Fixed 8-bit data
• Detection of overrun errors during reception
• Choice of internal or external clock as SCI clock source
⎯ When internal clock is selected:
The SCI operates on the baud rate generator clock and a serial clock is output off-chip
⎯ When external clock is selected:
The on-chip baud rate generator is not used, and the SCI operates on the input serial clock
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 473 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13-8 SMR Settings and Serial Transfer Format Selection
SMR Settings
SCI Transfer Format
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 2
Bit 5
Bit 3
C/A
CHR
MP
PE
STOP
Mode
0
0
0
0
0
Asynchronous
mode
1
1
Data
Length
Multi
Processor
Bit
Parity
Bit
Stop Bit
Length
8-bit data
No
No
1 bit
2 bits
0
Yes
1
1
0
2 bits
0
7-bit data
No
1
1
0
1
—
0
—
1
1
—
0
—
1
1
—
—
—
—
1 bit
2 bits
Yes
1 bit
No
1 bit
2 bits
1
0
1 bit
Asynchronous
mode (multiprocessor format)
8-bit data
Yes
2 bits
7-bit data
1 bit
2 bits
Clocked
8-bit data
synchronous mode
No
None
Table 13-9 SMR and SCR Settings and SCI Clock Source Selection
SMR
SCR Setting
SCI Transmit/Receive Clock
Bit 7
Bit 1
Bit 0
C/A
CKE1
CKE0
Mode
0
0
0
Asynchronous
mode
1
1
0
0
0
Clock
Source
SCK Pin Function
Internal
SCI does not use SCK pin
Outputs clock with same frequency as bit
rate
External
Inputs clock with frequency of 16 times
the bit rate
Internal
Outputs serial clock
External
Inputs serial clock
1
1
1
1
0
Clocked
synchronous
mode
1
Page 474 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
13.3.2
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Operation in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, characters are sent or received, each preceded by a start bit indicating the
start of communication and stop bits indicating the end of communication. Serial communication
is thus carried out with synchronization established on a character-by-character basis.
Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex
communication. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so
that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data
transfer.
Figure 13-2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication.
In asynchronous serial communication, the transmission line is usually held in the mark state (high
level). The SCI monitors the transmission line, and when it goes to the space state (low level),
recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication.
One serial communication character consists of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSBfirst order), a parity bit (high or low level), and finally stop bits (high level).
In asynchronous mode, the SCI performs synchronization at the falling edge of the start bit in
reception. The SCI samples the data on the 8th pulse of a clock with a frequency of 16 times the
length of one bit, so that the transfer data is latched at the center of each bit.
Idle state
(mark state)
1
Serial
data
MSB
LSB
0
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
Start
bit
Transmit/receive data
1 bit
7 or 8 bits
D6
D7
1
0/1
Parity
bit
1 bit,
or none
1
1
Stop bit
1 or
2 bits
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
Figure 13-2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 475 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Data Transfer Format: Table 13-10 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in
asynchronous mode. Any of 12 transfer formats can be selected according to the SMR setting.
Table 13-10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)
SMR Settings
Serial Transfer Format and Frame Length
CHR
PE
MP
STOP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
0
0
0
0
S
8-bit data
STOP
0
0
0
1
S
8-bit data
STOP STOP
0
1
0
0
S
8-bit data
P STOP
0
1
0
1
S
8-bit data
P STOP STOP
1
0
0
0
S
7-bit data
STOP
1
0
0
1
S
7-bit data
STOP STOP
1
1
0
0
S
7-bit data
P
STOP
1
1
0
1
S
7-bit data
P
STOP STOP
0
—
1
0
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP
0
—
1
1
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
1
—
1
0
S
7-bit data
MPB STOP
1
—
1
1
S
7-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
Legend:
S:
Start bit
STOP: Stop bit
P:
Parity bit
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Page 476 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Clock: Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock
input at the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI’s serial clock, according to the setting of the C/A
bit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. For details of SCI clock source selection, see
table 13-9.
When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate
used.
When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK pin. The
frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the
rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as shown in figure 13-3.
0
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0/1
1
1
1 frame
Figure 13-3 Relation between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase
(Asynchronous Mode)
Data Transfer Operations:
• SCI initialization (asynchronous mode)
Before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0,
then initialize the SCI as described below.
When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared
to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0,
the TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR is initialized. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not
change the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR.
When an external clock is used the clock should not be stopped during operation, including
initialization, since operation is uncertain.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 477 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Figure 13-4 shows a sample SCI initialization flowchart.
[1] Set the clock selection in SCR.
Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE,
TEIE, and MPIE, and bits TE and
RE, to 0.
Start initialization
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR
(TE, RE bits 0)
[1]
Set data transfer format in
SMR and SCMR
[2]
Set value in BRR
[3]
When the clock is selected in
asynchronous mode, it is output
immediately after SCR settings are
made.
[2] Set the data transfer format in SMR
and SCMR.
[3] Write a value corresponding to the
bit rate to BRR. Not necessary if an
external clock is used.
Wait
No
1-bit interval elapsed?
Yes
Set TE and RE bits in
SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE,
and MPIE bits
[4] Wait at least one bit interval, then
set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1.
Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and
MPIE bits.
Setting the TE and RE bits enables
the TxD and RxD pins to be used.
[4]
<Transfer completion>
Figure 13-4 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Page 478 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
• Serial data transmission (asynchronous mode)
Figure 13-5 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission.
The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission.
Initialization
[1]
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
[2] SCI status check and transmit data
write:
Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR and clear the
TDRE flag to 0.
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR
and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
No
All data transmitted?
Yes
[3]
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1
Yes
No
Break output?
Yes
[1] SCI initialization:
The TxD pin is automatically
designated as the transmit data
output pin.
After the TE bit is set to 1, a frame
of 1s is output, and transmission is
enabled.
[4]
[3] Serial transmission continuation
procedure:
To continue serial transmission,
read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible,
then write data to TDR, and then
clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking
and clearing of the TDRE flag is
automatic when the DTC is
activated by a transmit data
empty interrupt (TXI) request, and
date is written to TDR.
[4] Break output at the end of serial
transmission:
To output a break in serial
transmission, set DDR for the port
corresponding to the TxD pin to 1,
clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit
in SCR to 0.
Clear DR to 0 and
set DDR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 13-5 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 479 of 1458
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below.
[1] The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if is 0, recognizes that data has been written to
TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
[2] After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission.
If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated.
The serial transmit data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order.
[a] Start bit:
One 0-bit is output.
[b] Transmit data:
8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order.
[c] Parity bit or multiprocessor bit:
One parity bit (even or odd parity), or one multiprocessor bit is output.
A format in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also be
selected.
[d] Stop bit(s):
One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output.
[e] Mark state:
1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent.
[3] The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.
If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent,
and then serial transmission of the next frame is started.
If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the
“mark state” is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at
this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated.
Page 480 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Figure 13-6 shows an example of the operation for transmission in asynchronous mode.
Start
bit
1
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit
bit
D7
0/1
1
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop
bit
bit
D7
0/1
1
1
Idle state
(mark state)
TDRE
TEND
TXI interrupt
Data written to TDR and
request generated TDRE flag cleared to 0 in
TXI interrupt service routine
TXI interrupt
request generated
TEI interrupt
request generated
1 frame
Figure 13-6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 481 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
• Serial data reception (asynchronous mode)
Figure 13-7 shows a sample flowchart for serial reception.
The following procedure should be used for serial data reception.
Initialization
[1]
Start reception
[1] SCI initialization:
The RxD pin is automatically
designated as the receive data
input pin.
[2] [3] Receive error processing and
break detection:
Read ORER, PER, and
If a receive error occurs, read the
[2]
FER flags in SSR
ORER, PER, and FER flags in
SSR to identify the error. After
performing the appropriate error
Yes
processing, ensure that the
PER ∨ FER ∨ ORER = 1
ORER, PER, and FER flags are
[3]
all cleared to 0. Reception cannot
No
Error processing
be resumed if any of these flags
(Continued on next page) are set to 1. In the case of a
framing error, a break can be
detected by reading the value of
[4]
Read RDRF flag in SSR
the input port corresponding to
the RxD pin.
No
RDRF= 1
[4] SCI status check and receive
data read :
Read SSR and check that RDRF
= 1, then read the receive data in
RDR and clear the RDRF flag to
0. Transition of the RDRF flag
from 0 to 1 can also be identified
by an RXI interrupt.
Yes
Read receive data in RDR, and
clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
[5]
[5] Serial reception continuation
procedure:
To continue serial reception,
before the stop bit for the current
frame is received, read the
RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear
the RDRF flag to 0. The RDRF
flag is cleared automatically
when DTC is activated by an RXI
interrupt and the RDR value is
read.
Figure 13-7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart
Page 482 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[3]
Error processing
No
ORER = 1
Yes
Overrun error processing
No
FER = 1
Yes
Yes
Break?
No
Framing error processing
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
No
PER = 1
Yes
Parity error processing
Clear ORER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 13-7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (cont)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 483 of 1458
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below.
[1] The SCI monitors the transmission line, and if a 0 stop bit is detected, performs internal
synchronization and starts reception.
[2] The received data is stored in RSR in LSB-to-MSB order.
[3] The parity bit and stop bit are received.
After receiving these bits, the SCI carries out the following checks.
[a] Parity check:
The SCI checks whether the number of 1 bits in the receive data agrees with the parity
(even or odd) set in the O/E bit in SMR.
[b] Stop bit check:
The SCI checks whether the stop bit is 1.
If there are two stop bits, only the first is checked.
[c] Status check:
The SCI checks whether the RDRF flag is 0, indicating that the receive data can be
transferred from RSR to RDR.
If all the above checks are passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in
RDR.
If a receive error* is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 13-11.
Note: * Subsequent receive operations cannot be performed when a receive error has occurred.
Also note that the RDRF flag is not set to 1 in reception, and so the error flags must be
cleared to 0.
[4] If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive data full interrupt
(RXI) request is generated.
Also, if the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the ORER, PER, or FER flag changes to 1, a
receive error interrupt (ERI) request is generated.
Page 484 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13-11 Receive Errors and Conditions for Occurrence
Receive Error
Abbreviation
Occurrence Condition
Data Transfer
Overrun error
ORER
When the next data reception is Receive data is not
completed while the RDRF flag transferred from RSR to
in SSR is set to 1
RDR
Framing error
FER
When the stop bit is 0
Parity error
PER
When the received data differs Receive data is transferred
from the parity (even or odd) set from RSR to RDR
in SMR
Receive data is transferred
from RSR to RDR
Figure 13-8 shows an example of the operation for reception in asynchronous mode.
1
Start
bit
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit
bit
D7
0/1
1
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop
bit
bit
D7
0/1
0
1
Idle state
(mark state)
RDRF
FER
RXI interrupt
request
generated
RDR data read and RDRF
flag cleared to 0 in RXI
interrupt service routine
ERI interrupt request
generated by framing
error
1 frame
Figure 13-8 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 485 of 1458
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.3.3
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Multiprocessor Communication Function
The multiprocessor communication function performs serial communication using the
multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data, in asynchronous
mode. Use of this function enables data transfer to be performed among a number of processors
sharing transmission lines.
When multiprocessor communication is carried out, each receiving station is addressed by a
unique ID code.
The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles: an ID transmission cycle
which specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used
to differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle.
The transmitting station first sends the ID of the receiving station with which it wants to perform
serial communication as data with a 1 multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data
with a 0 multiprocessor bit added.
The receiving station skips the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent.
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its
own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose ID does
not match continue to skip the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received. In this
way, data communication is carried out among a number of processors.
Figure 13-9 shows an example of inter-processor communication using the multiprocessor format.
Data Transfer Format: There are four data transfer formats.
When the multiprocessor format is specified, the parity bit specification is invalid.
For details, see table 13-10.
Clock: See the section on asynchronous mode.
Page 486 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Transmitting
station
Serial transmission line
Receiving
station A
Receiving
station B
Receiving
station C
Receiving
station D
(ID = 01)
(ID = 02)
(ID = 03)
(ID = 04)
Serial
data
H'01
H'AA
(MPB = 1)
ID transmission cycle =
receiving station
specification
(MPB = 0)
Data transmission cycle =
Data transmission to
receiving station specified by ID
Legend:
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Figure 13-9 Example of Inter-Processor Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)
Data Transfer Operations:
• Multiprocessor serial data transmission
Figure 13-10 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission.
The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data transmission.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 487 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[1] [1] SCI initialization:
Initialization
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR and
set MPBT bit in SSR
Clear TDRE flag to 0
No
All data transmitted?
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
The TxD pin is automatically
designated as the transmit data
output pin.
After the TE bit is set to 1, a
frame of 1s is output, and
transmission is enabled.
[2] SCI status check and transmit
data write:
Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR. Set the
MPBT bit in SSR to 0 or 1.
Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0.
[3] Serial transmission continuation
procedure:
To continue serial transmission,
be sure to read 1 from the TDRE
flag to confirm that writing is
[3]
possible, then write data to TDR,
and then clear the TDRE flag to
0. Checking and clearing of the
TDRE flag is automatic when the
DTC is activated by a transmit
data empty interrupt (TXI)
request, and data is written to
TDR.
TEND = 1
Yes
No
Break output?
[4] Break output at the end of serial
transmission:
To output a break in serial
transmission, set the port DDR to
[4]
1, clear DR to 0, then clear the
TE bit in SCR to 0.
Yes
Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 13-10 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart
Page 488 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below.
[1] The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if is 0, recognizes that data has been written to
TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
[2] After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission.
If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated.
The serial transmit data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order.
[a] Start bit:
One 0-bit is output.
[b] Transmit data:
8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order.
[c] Multiprocessor bit
One multiprocessor bit (MPBT value) is output.
[d] Stop bit(s):
One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output.
[e] Mark state:
1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent.
[3] The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.
If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and
then serial transmission of the next frame is started.
If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the
mark state is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this
time, a transmission end interrupt (TEI) request is generated.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 489 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Figure 13-11 shows an example of SCI operation for transmission using the multiprocessor
format.
1
Start
bit
0
Multiprocessor Stop
bit
bit
Data
D0
D1
D7
0/1
1
Start
bit
0
Multiproces- Stop
1
sor bit bit
Data
D0
D1
D7
0/1
1
Idle state
(mark state)
TDRE
TEND
TXI interrupt
request generated
Data written to TDR
and TDRE flag cleared to
0 in TXI interrupt service
routine
TXI interrupt
request generated
TEI interrupt
request generated
1 frame
Figure 13-11 Example of SCI Operation in Transmission
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
• Multiprocessor serial data reception
Figure 13-12 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial reception.
The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data reception.
Page 490 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization
[1]
[1] SCI initialization:
The RxD pin is automatically
designated as the receive data
input pin.
[2]
[2] ID reception cycle:
Set the MPIE bit in SCR to 1.
Start reception
Read MPIE bit in SCR
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR
FER ∨ ORER = 1
[3] SCI status check, ID reception
and comparison:
Read SSR and check that the
RDRF flag is set to 1, then read
the receive data in RDR and
compare it with this station's ID.
If the data is not this station's ID,
set the MPIE bit to 1 again, and
clear the RDRF flag to 0.
If the data is this station's ID,
clear the RDRF flag to 0.
Yes
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[3]
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
[4] SCI status check and data
reception:
Read SSR and check that the
RDRF flag is set to 1, then read
the data in RDR.
Read receive data in RDR
No
This station’s ID?
Yes
[5] Receive error processing and
break detection:
If a receive error occurs, read the
ORER and FER flags in SSR to
identify the error. After
performing the appropriate error
processing, ensure that the
ORER and FER flags are all
cleared to 0.
Reception cannot be resumed if
either of these flags is set to 1.
In the case of a framing error, a
break can be detected by reading
the RxD pin value.
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR
FER ∨ ORER = 1
Yes
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[4]
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
No
All data received?
[5]
Error processing
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
(Continued on
next page)
<End>
Figure 13-12 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 491 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[5]
Error processing
No
ORER = 1
Yes
Overrun error processing
No
FER = 1
Yes
Yes
Break?
No
Framing error processing
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
Clear ORER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 13-12 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (cont)
Page 492 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Figure 13-13 shows an example of SCI operation for multiprocessor format reception.
1
Start
bit
0
Data (ID1)
MPB
D0
D1
D7
1
Stop
bit
Start
bit
1
0
Data (Data1)
MPB
D0
D1
D7
0
Stop
bit
1
1 Idle state
(mark state)
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
MPIE = 0
RXI interrupt
request
(multiprocessor
interrupt)
generated
RDR data read
and RDRF flag
cleared to 0 in
RXI interrupt
service routine
If not this station’s ID, RXI interrupt request is
MPIE bit is set to 1
not generated, and RDR
again
retains its state
(a) Data does not match station’s ID
1
Start
bit
0
Data (ID2)
MPB
D0
D1
D7
1
Stop
bit
Start
bit
1
0
Data (Data2)
MPB
D0
D1
D7
0
Stop
bit
1
1 Idle state
(mark state)
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
MPIE = 0
ID2
RXI interrupt
request
(multiprocessor
interrupt)
generated
RDR data read and
RDRF flag cleared
to 0 in RXI interrupt
service routine
Matches this station’s ID,
so reception continues, and
data is received in RXI
interrupt service routine
Data2
MPIE bit set to 1
again
(b) Data matches station’s ID
Figure 13-13 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 493 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.3.4
Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode
In clocked synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received in synchronization with clock
pulses, making it suitable for high-speed serial communication.
Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex
communication by use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a
double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception,
enabling continuous data transfer.
Figure 13-14 shows the general format for clocked synchronous serial communication.
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
*
*
Serial
clock
LSB
Serial
data
Bit 0
MSB
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Don’t care
Don’t care
Note: * High except in continuous transfer
Figure 13-14 Data Format in Synchronous Communication
In clocked synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one
falling edge of the serial clock to the next. Data confirmation is guaranteed at the rising edge of
the serial clock.
In clocked serial communication, one character consists of data output starting with the LSB and
ending with the MSB. After the MSB is output, the transmission line holds the MSB state.
In clocked synchronous mode, the SCI receives data in synchronization with the rising edge of the
serial clock.
Page 494 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Data Transfer Format: A fixed 8-bit data format is used.
No parity or multiprocessor bits are added.
Clock: Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external serial
clock input at the SCK pin can be selected, according to the setting of the C/A bit in SMR and the
CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. For details of SCI clock source selection, see table 13-9.
When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the serial clock is output from the SCK pin.
Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is
performed the clock is fixed high. When only receive operations are performed, however, the
serial clock is output until an overrun error occurs or the RE bit is cleared to 0. If you want to
perform receive operations in units of one character, you should select an external clock as the
clock source.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 495 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Data Transfer Operations:
• SCI initialization (clocked synchronous mode)
Before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0,
then initialize the SCI as described below.
When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared
to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0,
the TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR is initialized. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not
change the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR.
Figure 13-15 shows a sample SCI initialization flowchart.
[1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure
to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE,
TE and RE, to 0.
Start initialization
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
[2] Set the data transfer format in SMR
and SCMR.
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR
(TE, RE bits 0)
[1]
Set data transfer format in
SMR and SCMR
[2]
Set value in BRR
[3]
Wait
No
[3] Write a value corresponding to the bit
rate to BRR. Not necessary if an
external clock is used.
[4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set
the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1.
Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE
bits.
Setting the TE and RE bits enables the
TxD and RxD pins to be used.
1-bit interval elapsed?
Yes
Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and
set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits
[4]
<Transfer start>
Note: In simultaneous transmit and receive operations, the TE and RE bits should both be cleared
to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously.
Figure 13-15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Page 496 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
• Serial data transmission (clocked synchronous mode)
Figure 13-16 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission.
The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission.
Initialization
[1]
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR and
clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
No
All data transmitted?
[3]
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR
[1] SCI initialization:
The TxD pin is automatically
designated as the transmit data output
pin.
[2] SCI status check and transmit data
write:
Read SSR and check that the TDRE
flag is set to 1, then write transmit data
to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
[3] Serial transmission continuation
procedure:
To continue serial transmission, be
sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible, then
write data to TDR, and then clear the
TDRE flag to 0.
Checking and clearing of the TDRE
flag is automatic when the DTC is
activated by a transmit data empty
interrupt (TXI) request and data is
written to TDR.
No
TEND = 1
Yes
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 13-16 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 497 of 1458
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below.
[1] The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if is 0, recognizes that data has been written to
TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
[2] After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI)
is generated.
When clock output mode has been set, the SCI outputs 8 serial clock pulses. When use of an
external clock has been specified, data is output synchronized with the input clock.
The serial transmit data is sent from the TxD pin starting with the LSB (bit 0) and ending with
the MSB (bit 7).
[3] The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7).
If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission
of the next frame is started.
If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the MSB (bit 7) is sent, and the
TxD pin maintains its state.
If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated.
[4] After completion of serial transmission, the SCK pin is fixed high.
Figure 13-17 shows an example of SCI operation in transmission.
Page 498 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Transfer direction
Serial clock
Serial data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
TDRE
TEND
TXI interrupt
request generated
Data written to TDR
TXI interrupt
and TDRE flag
request generated
cleared to 0 in TXI
interrupt service routine
TEI interrupt
request generated
1 frame
Figure 13-17 Example of SCI Operation in Transmission
• Serial data reception (clocked synchronous mode)
Figure 13-18 shows a sample flowchart for serial reception.
The following procedure should be used for serial data reception.
When changing the operating mode from asynchronous to clocked synchronous, be sure to
check that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are all cleared to 0.
The RDRF flag will not be set if the FER or PER flag is set to 1, and neither transmit nor
receive operations will be possible.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 499 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization
[1]
Start reception
[2]
Read ORER flag in SSR
Yes
[3]
ORER = 1
No
Error processing
(Continued below)
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[4]
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR, and
clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
[5]
[1]
SCI initialization:
The RxD pin is automatically
designated as the receive data
input pin.
[2] [3] Receive error processing:
If a receive error occurs, read the
ORER flag in SSR, and after
performing the appropriate error
processing, clear the ORER flag
to 0. Transfer cannot be resumed
if the ORER flag is set to 1.
[4] SCI status check and receive
data read:
Read SSR and check that the
RDRF flag is set to 1, then read
the receive data in RDR and
clear the RDRF flag to 0.
Transition of the RDRF flag from
0 to 1 can also be identified by
an RXI interrupt.
[5] Serial reception continuation
procedure:
To continue serial reception,
before the MSB (bit 7) of the
current frame is received, finish
reading the RDRF flag, reading
RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag
to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared
automatically when the DTC is
activated by a receive data full
interrupt (RXI) request and the
RDR value is read.
<End>
[3]
Error processing
Overrun error processing
Clear ORER flag in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 13-18 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart
Page 500 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below.
[1] The SCI performs internal initialization in synchronization with serial clock input or output.
[2] The received data is stored in RSR in LSB-to-MSB order.
After reception, the SCI checks whether the RDRF flag is 0 and the receive data can be
transferred from RSR to RDR.
If this check is passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in RDR. If a
receive error is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 13-11.
Neither transmit nor receive operations can be performed subsequently when a receive error
has been found in the error check.
[3] If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive data full interrupt
(RXI) request is generated.
Also, if the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the ORER flag changes to 1, a receive error
interrupt (ERI) request is generated.
Figure 13-19 shows an example of SCI operation in reception.
Serial
clock
Serial
data
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
RDRF
ORER
RXI interrupt request
generated
RDR data read and
RDRF flag cleared to 0
in RXI interrupt service
routine
RXI interrupt request
generated
ERI interrupt request
generated by overrun
error
1 frame
Figure 13-19 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
• Simultaneous serial data transmission and reception (clocked synchronous mode)
Figure 13-20 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive
operations.
The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive
operations.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 501 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization
[1] SCI initialization:
[1]
The TxD pin is designated as the
transmit data output pin, and the
RxD pin is designated as the
receive data input pin, enabling
simultaneous transmit and receive
operations.
Start transmission/reception
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
[2] SCI status check and transmit data
write:
Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR and clear the
TDRE flag to 0.
Transition of the TDRE flag from 0
to 1 can also be identified by a TXI
interrupt.
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR and
clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
[3] Receive error processing:
If a receive error occurs, read the
ORER flag in SSR, and after
performing the appropriate error
processing, clear the ORER flag to
0. Transmission/reception cannot be
resumed if the ORER flag is set to
1.
Read ORER flag in SSR
ORER = 1
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
Yes
[3]
Error processing
[4] SCI status check and receive data
read:
Read SSR and check that the
RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the
receive data in RDR and clear the
RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the
RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be
identified by an RXI interrupt.
[4]
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
[5] Serial transmission/reception
Read receive data in RDR, and
clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
[5]
Yes
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
<End>
Note: When switching from transmit or receive operation to simultaneous
transmit and receive operations, first clear the TE bit and RE bit to
0, then set both these bits to 1 simultaneously.
continuation procedure:
To continue serial transmission/
reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of
the current frame is received, finish
reading the RDRF flag, reading
RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to
0. Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of
the current frame is transmitted,
read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible.
Then write data to TDR and clear
the TDRE flag to 0.
Checking and clearing of the TDRE
flag is automatic when the DTC is
activated by a transmit data empty
interrupt (TXI) request and data is
written to TDR. Also, the RDRF flag
is cleared automatically when the
DTC is activated by a receive data
full interrupt (RXI) request and the
RDR value is read.
Figure 13-20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations
Page 502 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
13.4
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
SCI Interrupts
The SCI has four interrupt sources: the transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request, receive-error interrupt
(ERI) request, receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request, and transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI)
request. Table 13-13 shows the interrupt sources and their relative priorities. Individual interrupt
sources can be enabled or disabled with the TIE, RIE, and TEIE bits in the SCR. Each kind of
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller independently.
When the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND flag
in SSR is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated. A TXI interrupt can activate the DTC to
perform data transfer. The TDRE flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is
performed by the DTC. The DTC cannot be activated by a TEI interrupt request.
When the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the ORER,
PER, or FER flag in SSR is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated. An RXI interrupt can
activate the DTC to perform data transfer. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data
transfer is performed by the DTC. The DTC cannot be activated by an ERI interrupt request.
Table 13-12 SCI Interrupt Sources
Interrupt
Channel Source Description
DTC
Activation
Priority*
0
High
1
2
ERI
Interrupt due to receive error (ORER, FER, or PER)
Not possible
RXI
Interrupt due to receive data full state (RDRF)
Possible
TXI
Interrupt due to transmit data empty state (TDRE)
Possible
TEI
Interrupt due to transmission end (TEND)
Not possible
ERI
Interrupt due to receive error (ORER, FER, or PER)
Not possible
RXI
Interrupt due to receive data full state (RDRF)
Possible
TXI
Interrupt due to transmit data empty state (TDRE)
Possible
TEI
Interrupt due to transmission end (TEND)
Not possible
ERI
Interrupt due to receive error (ORER, FER, or PER)
Not possible
RXI
Interrupt due to receive data full state (RDRF)
Possible
TXI
Interrupt due to transmit data empty state (TDRE)
Possible
TEI
Interrupt due to transmission end (TEND)
Not possible
Low
Note: * This table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. Relative priorities among
channels can be changed by means of the interrupt controller.
A TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TEIE bit is set to 1. The
TEND flag is cleared at the same time as the TDRE flag. Consequently, if a TEI interrupt and a
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 503 of 1458
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
TXI interrupt are requested simultaneously, the TXI interrupt may have priority for acceptance,
with the result that the TDRE and TEND flags are cleared. Note that the TEI interrupt will not be
accepted in this case.
13.5
Usage Notes
The following points should be noted when using the SCI.
Relation between Writes to TDR and the TDRE Flag
The TDRE flag in SSR is a status flag that indicates that transmit data has been transferred from
TDR to TSR. When the SCI transfers data from TDR to TSR, the TDRE flag is set to 1.
Data can be written to TDR regardless of the state of the TDRE flag. However, if new data is
written to TDR when the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data stored in TDR will be lost since it has
not yet been transferred to TSR. It is therefore essential to check that the TDRE flag is set to 1
before writing transmit data to TDR.
Operation when Multiple Receive Errors Occur Simultaneously
If a number of receive errors occur at the same time, the state of the status flags in SSR is as
shown in table 13-14. If there is an overrun error, data is not transferred from RSR to RDR, and
the receive data is lost.
Table 13-13 State of SSR Status Flags and Transfer of Receive Data
SSR Status Flags
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
Receive Data Transfer
RSR to RDR
Receive Error Status
1
1
0
0
X
Overrun error
0
0
1
0
Framing error
0
0
0
1
Parity error
1
1
1
0
X
Overrun error + framing error
1
1
0
1
X
Overrun error + parity error
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes:
Framing error + parity error
X
Overrun error + framing error +
parity error
: Receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR.
X: Receive data is not transferred from RSR to RDR.
Page 504 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Break Detection and Processing (Asynchronous Mode Only): When framing error (FER)
detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value directly. In a break,
the input from the RxD pin becomes all 0s, and so the FER flag is set, and the parity error flag
(PER) may also be set.
Note that, since the SCI continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if the FER
flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again.
Sending a Break (Asynchronous Mode Only): The TxD pin has a dual function as an I/O port
whose direction (input or output) is determined by DR and DDR. This can be used to send a break.
Between serial transmission initialization and setting of the TE bit to 1, the mark state is replaced
by the value of DR (the pin does not function as the TxD pin until the TE bit is set to 1).
Consequently, DDR and DR for the port corresponding to the TxD pin are first set to 1.
To send a break during serial transmission, first clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit to 0.
When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the transmitter is initialized regardless of the current transmission
state, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is output from the TxD pin.
Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only):
Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if
the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting
transmission.
Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared to 0.
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode:
In asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer
rate.
In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs
internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 8th pulse of the
basic clock. This is illustrated in figure 13-21.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 505 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
16 clocks
8 clocks
0
7
15 0
7
15 0
Internal basic
clock
Receive data
(RxD)
Start bit
D0
D1
Synchronization
sampling timing
Data sampling
timing
Figure 13-21 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode
Thus the reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by formula (1) below.
1
M = | (0.5 –
2N
) – (L – 0.5) F –
| D – 0.5 |
N
(1 + F) | × 100%
... Formula (1)
Where
M : Reception margin (%)
N : Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16)
D : Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0)
L : Frame length (L = 9 to 12)
F : Absolute value of clock rate deviation
Assuming values of F = 0 and D = 0.5 in formula (1), a reception margin of 46.875% is given by
formula (2) below.
When D = 0.5 and F = 0,
M = (0.5 –
1
2 × 16
= 46.875%
) × 100%
... Formula (2)
However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed in
system design.
Page 506 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Restrictions on Use of DTC*
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
• When an external clock source is used as the serial clock, the transmit clock should not be
input until at least 5 φ clock cycles after TDR is updated by the DTC. Misoperation may occur
if the transmit clock is input within 4 φ clocks after TDR is updated (figure 13-22).
• When RDR is read by the DTC, be sure to set the activation source to the relevant SCI
reception end interrupt (RXI).
SCK
t
TDRE
LSB
Serial data
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Note: When operating on an external clock, set t > 4 clocks.
Figure 13-22 Example of Clocked Synchronous Transmission by DTC
Operation in Case of Mode Transition
• Transmission
Operation should be stopped (by clearing TE, TIE, and TEIE to 0) before making a module
stop mode, software standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode transition.
TSR, TDR, and SSR are reset. The output pin states in module stop mode, software standby
mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode depend on the port settings, and
becomes high-level output after the relevant mode is cleared. If a transition is made during
transmission, the data being transmitted will be undefined. When transmitting without
changing the transmit mode after the relevant mode is cleared, transmission can be started by
setting TE to 1 again, and performing the following sequence: SSR read -> TDR write ->
TDRE clearance. To transmit with a different transmit mode after clearing the relevant mode,
the procedure must be started again from initialization. Figure 13-23 shows a sample flowchart
for mode transition during transmission. Port pin states are shown in figures 13-24 and 13-25.
Operation should also be stopped (by clearing TE, TIE, and TEIE to 0) before making a
transition from transmission by DTC* transfer to module stop mode, software standby mode,
watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode transition. To perform transmission with the
DTC* after the relevant mode is cleared, setting TE and TIE to 1 will set the TXI flag and start
DTC* transmission.
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 507 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
• Reception
Receive operation should be stopped (by clearing RE to 0) before making a module stop mode,
software standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode transition. RSR, RDR,
and SSR are reset. If a transition is made without stopping operation, the data being received
will be invalid.
To continue receiving without changing the reception mode after the relevant mode is cleared,
set RE to 1 before starting reception. To receive with a different receive mode, the procedure
must be started again from initialization.
Figure 13-26 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during reception.
<Transmission>
No
All data
transmitted?
[1]
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1
Yes
TE = 0
[2] If TIE and TEIE are set to 1, clear
them to 0 in the same way.
[2]
Transition to software
standby mode, etc.
[3]
Exit from software
standby mode, etc.
Change
operating mode?
[1] Data being transmitted is
interrupted. After exiting software
standby mode, etc., normal CPU
transmission is possible by setting
TE to 1, reading SSR, writing TDR,
and clearing TDRE to 0, but note
that if the DTC has been activated,
the remaining data in DTCRAM will
be transmitted when TE and TIE
are set to 1.
[3] Includes module stop mode, watch
mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode.
No
Yes
Initialization
TE = 1
<Start of transmission>
Figure 13-23 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission
Page 508 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
End of
transmission
Start of transmission
Exit from
software
standby
Transition
to software
standby
TE bit
Port input/output
SCK output pin
TxD output pin
Port input/output
High output
Port
Start
Stop
Port input/output
High output
SCI TxD
output
Port
SCI TxD output
Figure 13-24 Asynchronous Transmission Using Internal Clock
Start of transmission
End of
transmission
Exit from
software
standby
Transition
to software
standby
TE bit
Port input/output
SCK output pin
TxD output pin Port input/output
Last TxD bit held
Marking output
Port
SCI TxD output
Port input/output
Port
High output*
SCI TxD
output
Note: * Initialized by software standby.
Figure 13-25 Synchronous Transmission Using Internal Clock
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 509 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
<Reception>
Read RDRF flag in SSR
RDRF = 1
No
[1]
[1] Receive data being received
becomes invalid.
[2]
[2] Includes module stop mode, watch
mode, subactive mode, and
subsleep mode.
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
RE = 0
Transition to software
standby mode, etc.
Exit from software
standby mode, etc.
Change
operating mode?
No
Yes
Initialization
RE = 1
<Start of reception>
Figure 13-26 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception
Page 510 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function:
• Problem in Operation: When switching the SCK pin function to the output port function (highlevel output) by making the following settings while DDR = 1, DR = 1, C/A = 1, CKE1 = 0,
CKE0 = 0, and TE = 1 (synchronous mode), low-level output occurs for one half-cycle.
1. End of serial data transmission
2. TE bit = 0
3. C/A bit = 0 ... switchover to port output
4. Occurrence of low-level output (see figure 13-27)
Half-cycle low-level output
SCK/port
1. End of transmission
Data
Bit 6
TE
C/A
4. Low-level output
Bit 7
2. TE = 0
3. C/A = 0
CKE1
CKE0
Figure 13-27 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 511 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
• Sample Procedure for Avoiding Low-Level Output: As this sample procedure temporarily
places the SCK pin in the input state, the SCK/port pin should be pulled up beforehand with an
external circuit.
With DDR = 1, DR = 1, C/A = 1, CKE1 = 0, CKE0 = 0, and TE = 1, make the following
settings in the order shown.
1. End of serial data transmission
2. TE bit = 0
3. CKE1 bit = 1
4. C/A bit = 0 ... switchover to port output
5. CKE1 bit = 0
High-level output TE
SCK/port
1. End of transmission
Data
Bit 6
TE
Bit 7
2. TE = 0
4. C/A = 0
C/A
3. CKE1 = 1
CKE1
5. CKE1 = 0
CKE0
Figure 13-28 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function
(Example of Preventing Low-Level Output)
Page 512 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Note: The H8S/2635 Group is not equipped with a DTC.
14.1
Overview
SCI supports an IC card (Smart Card) interface conforming to ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification
Card) as a serial communication interface extension function.
Switching between the normal serial communication interface and the Smart Card interface is
carried out by means of a register setting.
14.1.1
Features
Features of the Smart Card interface supported by the chip are as follows.
• Asynchronous mode
⎯ Data length: 8 bits
⎯ Parity bit generation and checking
⎯ Transmission of error signal (parity error) in receive mode
⎯ Error signal detection and automatic data retransmission in transmit mode
⎯ Direct convention and inverse convention both supported
• On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected
• Three interrupt sources
⎯ Three interrupt sources (transmit data empty, receive data full, and transmit/receive error)
that can issue requests independently
⎯ The transmit data empty interrupt and receive data full interrupt can activate the data
transfer controller (DTC)* to execute data transfer
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 513 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.1.2
Block Diagram
Bus interface
Figure 14-1 shows a block diagram of the Smart Card interface.
Module data bus
RDR
RxD
TxD
RSR
TDR
SCMR
SSR
SCR
SMR
TSR
BRR
φ
Baud rate
generator
Transmission/
reception control
Parity generation
Internal
data bus
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
Clock
Parity check
SCK
Legend:
SCMR: Smart Card mode register
RSR: Receive shift register
RDR: Receive data register
TSR: Transmit shift register
TDR: Transmit data register
SMR: Serial mode register
SCR: Serial control register
SSR: Serial status register
BRR: Bit rate register
TXI
RXI
ERI
Figure 14-1 Block Diagram of Smart Card Interface
Page 514 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
14.1.3
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Pin Configuration
Table 14-1 shows the Smart Card interface pin configuration.
Table 14-1 Smart Card Interface Pins
Channel
Pin Name
0
Serial clock pin 0
SCK0
I/O
SCI0 clock input/output
Receive data pin 0
RxD0
Input
SCI0 receive data input
Transmit data pin 0
TxD0
Output
SCI0 transmit data output
Serial clock pin 1
SCK1
I/O
SCI1 clock input/output
Receive data pin 1
RxD1
Input
SCI1 receive data input
1
2
I/O
Function
Transmit data pin 1
TxD1
Output
SCI1 transmit data output
Serial clock pin 2
SCK2
I/O
SCI2 clock input/output
Receive data pin 2
RxD2
Input
SCI2 receive data input
Transmit data pin 2
TxD2
Output
SCI2 transmit data output
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Symbol
Page 515 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 14-2 shows the registers used by the Smart Card interface. Details of SMR, BRR, SCR,
TDR, RDR, and MSTPCR are the same as for the normal SCI function: see the register
descriptions in section 13, Serial Communication Interface (SCI).
Table 14-2 Smart Card Interface Registers
1
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
0
Serial mode register 0
SMR0
R/W
H'00
H'FF78
Bit rate register 0
BRR0
R/W
H'FF
H'FF79
Serial control register 0
SCR0
R/W
H'00
H'FF7A
Transmit data register 0
TDR0
R/W
H'FF
H'FF7B
1
2
All
*2
Serial status register 0
SSR0
R/(W)
H'84
H'FF7C
Receive data register 0
RDR0
R
H'00
H'FF7D
Smart card mode
register 0
SCMR0
R/W
H'F2
H'FF7E
Serial mode register 1
SMR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF80
Bit rate register 1
BRR1
R/W
H'FF
H'FF81
Serial control register 1
SCR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF82
Transmit data register 1
TDR1
R/W
H'FF
H'FF83
*2
Serial status register 1
SSR1
R/(W)
H'84
H'FF84
Receive data register 1
RDR1
R
H'00
H'FF85
Smart card mode
register 1
SCMR1
R/W
H'F2
H'FF86
Serial mode register 2
SMR2
R/W
H'00
H'FF88
Bit rate register 2
BRR2
R/W
H'FF
H'FF89
Serial control register 2
SCR2
R/W
H'00
H'FF8A
Transmit data register 2
TDR2
R/W
H'FF8B
Serial status register 2
SSR2
H'FF
2
*
R/(W)
H'84
Receive data register 2
RDR2
R
H'00
H'FF8D
Smart card mode
register 2
SCMR2
R/W
H'F2
H'FF8E
Module stop control
register B
MSTPCRB
R/W
H'FF
H'FDE9
H'FF8C
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Can only be written with 0 for flag clearing.
Page 516 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
14.2
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Register Descriptions
Registers added with the Smart Card interface and bits for which the function changes are
described here.
14.2.1
Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
SDIR
SINV
—
SMIF
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
:
SCMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the Smart Card interface function.
SCMR is initialized to H'F2 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 3—Smart Card Data Transfer Direction (SDIR): Selects the serial/parallel conversion
format.
Bit 3
SDIR
Description
0
TDR contents are transmitted LSB-first
(Initial value)
Receive data is stored in RDR LSB-first
1
TDR contents are transmitted MSB-first
Receive data is stored in RDR MSB-first
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 517 of 1458
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 2—Smart Card Data Invert (SINV): Specifies inversion of the data logic level. This
function is used together with the SDIR bit for communication with an inverse convention card.
The SINV bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit. For parity-related setting procedures,
see section 14.3.4, Register Settings.
Bit 2
SINV
Description
0
TDR contents are transmitted as they are
(Initial value)
Receive data is stored as it is in RDR
1
TDR contents are inverted before being transmitted
Receive data is stored in inverted form in RDR
Bit 1—Reserved: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 0—Smart Card Interface Mode Select (SMIF): Enables or disables the Smart Card interface
function.
Bit 0
SMIF
Description
0
Smart Card interface function is disabled
1
Smart Card interface function is enabled
Page 518 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
14.2.2
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Serial Status Register (SSR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
ERS
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear these flags.
Bit 4 of SSR has a different function in Smart Card interface mode. Coupled with this, the setting
conditions for bit 2, TEND, are also different.
Bits 7 to 5—Operate in the same way as for the normal SCI. For details, see section 13.2.7, Serial
Status Register (SSR).
Bit 4—Error Signal Status (ERS): In Smart Card interface mode, bit 4 indicates the status of the
error signal sent back from the receiving end in transmission. Framing errors are not detected in
Smart Card interface mode.
Bit 4
ERS
Description
0
Normal reception, with no error signal
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
Upon reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode
•
When 0 is written to ERS after reading ERS = 1
(Initial value)
Error signal sent from receiver indicating detection of parity error
[Setting condition]
•
When the Low level of the error signal is sampled
Note: Clearing the TE bit in SCR to 0 does not affect the ERS flag, which retains its previous
state.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 519 of 1458
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bits 3 to 0—Operate in the same way as for the normal SCI. For details, see section 13.2.7, Serial
Status Register (SSR).
However, the setting conditions for the TEND bit, are as shown below.
Bit 2
TEND
0
1
Description
Transmission is in progress
[Clearing conditions]
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and write data to TDR
Transmission has ended
[Setting conditions]
(Initial value)
•
Upon reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode
•
When the TE bit in SCR is 0 and the ERS bit is also 0
•
When TDRE = 1 and ERS = 0 (normal transmission) 2.5 etu after transmission of a
1-byte serial character when GM = 0 and BLK = 0
•
When TDRE = 1 and ERS = 0 (normal transmission) 1.5 etu after transmission of a
1-byte serial character when GM = 0 and BLK = 1
•
When TDRE = 1 and ERS = 0 (normal transmission) 1.0 etu after transmission of a
1-byte serial character when GM = 1 and BLK = 0
•
When TDRE = 1 and ERS = 0 (normal transmission) 1.0 etu after transmission of a
1-byte serial character when GM = 1 and BLK = 1
Note: etu: Elementary time unit (time for transfer of 1 bit)
Page 520 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
14.2.3
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Serial Mode Register (SMR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GM
BLK
PE
O/E
BCP1
BCP0
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: When the smart card interface is used, be sure to make the 1 setting shown for bit 5.
The function of bits 7, 6, 3, and 2 of SMR changes in Smart Card interface mode.
Bit 7—GSM Mode (GM): Sets the smart card interface function to GSM mode.
This bit is cleared to 0 when the normal smart card interface is used. In GSM mode, this bit is set
to 1, the timing of setting of the TEND flag that indicates transmission completion is advanced
and clock output control mode addition is performed. The contents of the clock output control
mode addition are specified by bits 1 and 0 of the serial control register (SCR).
Bit 7
GM
Description
0
Normal smart card interface mode operation
1
(Initial value)
•
TEND flag generation 12.5 etu (11.5 etu in block transfer mode) after beginning of
start bit
•
Clock output ON/OFF control only
GSM mode smart card interface mode operation
•
TEND flag generation 11.0 etu after beginning of start bit
•
High/Low fixing control possible in addition to clock output ON/OFF control (set by
SCR)
Note: etu: Elementary time unit (time for transfer of 1 bit)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 521 of 1458
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 6—Block Transfer Mode (BLK): Selects block transfer mode.
Bit 6
BLK
Description
0
Normal Smart Card interface mode operation
1
•
Error signal transmission/detection and automatic data retransmission performed
•
TXI interrupt generated by TEND flag
•
TEND flag set 12.5 etu after start of transmission (11.0 etu in GSM mode)
Block transfer mode operation
•
Error signal transmission/detection and automatic data retransmission not
performed
•
TXI interrupt generated by TDRE flag
•
TEND flag set 11.5 etu after start of transmission (11.0 etu in GSM mode)
Note: etu: Elementary time unit (time for transfer of 1 bit)
Bits 3 and 2—Basic Clock Pulse 1 and 2 (BCP1, BCP0): These bits specify the number of basic
clock periods in a 1-bit transfer interval on the Smart Card interface.
Bit 3
Bit 2
BCP1
BCP0
Description
0
0
32 clock periods
1
64 clock periods
0
372 clock periods
1
256 clock periods
1
(Initial value)
Bits 5, 4, 1, and 0: Operate in the same way as for the normal SCI. For details, see section 13.2.5,
Serial Mode Register (SMR).
Page 522 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
14.2.4
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Serial Control Register (SCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
In smart card interface mode, the function of bits 1 and 0 of SCR changes when bit 7 of the serial
mode register (SMR) is set to 1.
Bits 7 to 2—Operate in the same way as for the normal SCI.
For details, see section 13.2.6, Serial Control Register (SCR).
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1, CKE0): These bits are used to select the SCI clock
source and enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin.
In smart card interface mode, in addition to the normal switching between clock output enabling
and disabling, the clock output can be specified as to be fixed high or low.
SCMR
SMR
SMIF
C/A, GM
0
See the SCI
1
0
SCR Setting
CKE1
CKE0
SCK Pin Function
0
0
Operates as port I/O pin
1
0
0
1
Outputs clock as SCK output pin
1
1
0
0
Operates as SCK output pin, with output fixed
low
1
1
0
1
Outputs clock as SCK output pin
1
1
1
0
Operates as SCK output pin, with output fixed
high
1
1
1
1
Outputs clock as SCK output pin
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 523 of 1458
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.3
Operation
14.3.1
Overview
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
The main functions of the Smart Card interface are as follows.
• One frame consists of 8-bit data plus a parity bit.
• In transmission, a guard time of at least 2 etu (Elementary time unit: the time for transfer of 1
bit) is left between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame.
• If a parity error is detected during reception, a low error signal level is output for one etu
period, 10.5 etu after the start bit.
• If the error signal is sampled during transmission, the same data is transmitted automatically
after the elapse of 2 etu or longer (except in block transfer mode).
• Only asynchronous communication is supported; there is no clocked synchronous
communication function.
Note: etu: Elementary time unit (time for transfer of 1 bit)
14.3.2
Pin Connections
Figure 14-2 shows a schematic diagram of Smart Card interface related pin connections.
In communication with an IC card, since both transmission and reception are carried out on a
single data transmission line, the TxD pin and RxD pin should be connected with the LSI pin. The
data transmission line should be pulled up to the VCC power supply with a resistor.
When the clock generated on the Smart Card interface is used by an IC card, the SCK pin output is
input to the CLK pin of the IC card. No connection is needed if the IC card uses an internal clock.
LSI port output is used as the reset signal.
Other pins must normally be connected to the power supply or ground.
Page 524 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
VCC
TxD
I/O
RxD
SCK
Rx (port)
Chip
Data line
Clock line
Reset line
CLK
RST
IC card
Connected equipment
Figure 14-2 Schematic Diagram of Smart Card Interface Pin Connections
Note: If an IC card is not connected, and the TE and RE bits are both set to 1, closed
transmission/reception is possible, enabling self-diagnosis to be carried out.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 525 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.3.3
Data Format
Normal Transfer Mode: Figure 14-3 shows the normal Smart Card interface data format. In
reception in this mode, a parity check is carried out on each frame, and if an error is detected an
error signal is sent back to the transmitting end, and retransmission of the data is requested. If an
error signal is sampled during transmission, the same data is retransmitted.
When there is no parity error
Ds
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Dp
D7
Dp
Transmitting station output
When a parity error occurs
Ds
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
DE
Transmitting station output
Legend:
Ds:
D0 to D7:
Dp:
DE:
Receiving station
output
Start bit
Data bits
Parity bit
Error signal
Figure 14-3 Normal Smart Card Interface Data Format
The operation sequence is as follows.
[1] When the data line is not in use it is in the high-impedance state, and is fixed high with a pullup resistor.
[2] The transmitting station starts transfer of one frame of data. The data frame starts with a start
bit (Ds, low-level), followed by 8 data bits (D0 to D7) and a parity bit (Dp).
[3] With the Smart Card interface, the data line then returns to the high-impedance state. The data
line is pulled high with a pull-up resistor.
Page 526 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
[4] The receiving station carries out a parity check.
If there is no parity error and the data is received normally, the receiving station waits for
reception of the next data.
If a parity error occurs, however, the receiving station outputs an error signal (DE, low-level)
to request retransmission of the data. After outputting the error signal for the prescribed length
of time, the receiving station places the signal line in the high-impedance state again. The
signal line is pulled high again by a pull-up resistor.
[5] If the transmitting station does not receive an error signal, it proceeds to transmit the next data
frame.
If it does receive an error signal, however, it returns to step [2] and retransmits the erroneous
data.
Block Transfer Mode: The operation sequence in block transfer mode is as follows.
[1] When the data line in not in use it is in the high-impedance state, and is fixed high with a pullup resistor.
[2] The transmitting station starts transfer of one frame of data. The data frame starts with a start
bit (Ds, low-level), followed by 8 data bits (D0 to D7) and a parity bit (Dp).
[3] With the Smart Card interface, the data line then returns to the high-impedance state. The data
line is pulled high with a pull-up resistor.
[4] After reception, a parity error check is carried out, but an error signal is not output even if an
error has occurred. When an error occurs reception cannot be continued, so the error flag
should be cleared to 0 before the parity bit of the next frame is received.
[5] The transmitting station proceeds to transmit the next data frame.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 527 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.3.4
Register Settings
Table 14-3 shows a bit map of the registers used by the smart card interface.
Bits indicated as 0 or 1 must be set to the value shown. The setting of other bits is described
below.
Table 14-3 Smart Card Interface Register Settings
Bit
Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SMR
GM
BLK
1
O/E
BCP1
BCP0
CKS1
CKS0
BRR
BRR7
BRR6
BRR5
BRR4
BRR3
BRR2
BRR0
TDR0
SCR
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
0
0
BRR1
CKE1*
TDR
TDR7
TDR6
TDR5
TDR4
TDR3
TDR2
TDR1
SSR
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
ERS
PER
TEND
0
0
RDR
RDR7
RDR6
RDR5
RDR4
RDR3
RDR2
RDR1
RDR0
SCMR
—
—
—
—
SDIR
SINV
—
SMIF
CKE0
Notes: —: Unused bit.
*: The CKE1 bit must be cleared to 0 when the GM bit in SMR is cleared to 0.
SMR Setting: The GM bit is cleared to 0 in normal smart card interface mode, and set to 1 in
GSM mode. The O/E bit is cleared to 0 if the IC card is of the direct convention type, and set to 1
if of the inverse convention type.
Bits CKS1 and CKS0 select the clock source of the on-chip baud rate generator. Bits BCP1 and
BCP0 select the number of basic clock periods in a 1-bit transfer interval. For details, see section
14.3.5, Clock.
The BLK bit is cleared to 0 in normal smart card interface mode, and set to 1 in block transfer
mode.
BRR Setting: BRR is used to set the bit rate. See section 14.3.5, Clock, for the method of
calculating the value to be set.
SCR Setting: The function of the TIE, RIE, TE, and RE bits is the same as for the normal SCI.
For details, see section 13, Serial Communication Interface (SCI).
Bits CKE1 and CKE0 specify the clock output. When the GM bit in SMR is cleared to 0, set these
bits to B'00 if a clock is not to be output, or to B'01 if a clock is to be output. When the GM bit in
SMR is set to 1, clock output is performed. The clock output can also be fixed high or low.
Page 528 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR) Setting: The SDIR bit is cleared to 0 if the IC card is of the
direct convention type, and set to 1 if of the inverse convention type.
The SINV bit is cleared to 0 if the IC card is of the direct convention type, and set to 1 if of the
inverse convention type.
The SMIF bit is set to 1 in the case of the Smart Card interface.
Examples of register settings and the waveform of the start character are shown below for the two
types of IC card (direct convention and inverse convention).
• Direct convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 0)
(Z)
A
Z
Z
A
Z
Z
Z
A
A
Z
Ds
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Dp
(Z)
State
With the direct convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state Z and the logic 0 level to
state A, and transfer is performed in LSB-first order. The start character data above is H'3B.
The parity bit is 1 since even parity is stipulated for the Smart Card.
• Inverse convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 1)
(Z)
A
Z
Z
A
A
A
A
A
A
Z
Ds
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Dp
(Z)
State
With the inverse convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state A and the logic 0 level
to state Z, and transfer is performed in MSB-first order. The start character data above is H'3F.
The parity bit is 0, corresponding to state Z, since even parity is stipulated for the Smart Card.
With the H8S/2636, H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630 inversion specified by the SINV bit
applies only to the data bits, D7 to D0. For parity bit inversion, the O/E bit in SMR is set to
odd parity mode (the same applies to both transmission and reception).
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 529 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.3.5
Clock
Only an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator can be used as the
transmit/receive clock for the smart card interface. The bit rate is set with BRR and the CKS1,
CKS0, BCP1 and BCP0 bits in SMR. The formula for calculating the bit rate is as shown below.
Table 14-5 shows some sample bit rates.
If clock output is selected by setting CKE0 to 1, a clock is output from the SCK pin. The clock
frequency is determined by the bit rate and the setting of bits BCP1 and BCP0.
B=
φ
S×2
2n+1
× (N + 1)
× 106
Where: N = Value set in BRR (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
B = Bit rate (bit/s)
φ = Operating frequency (MHz)
n = See table 14-4
S = Number of internal clocks in 1-bit period, set by BCP1 and BCP0
Table 14-4 Correspondence between n and CKS1, CKS0
n
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
1
2
1
1
3
0
1
Table 14-5 Examples of Bit Rate B (bit/s) for Various BRR Settings
(When n = 0 and S = 372)
φ (MHz)
N
10.00
10.714
13.00
14.285
16.00
18.00
20.00
0
13441
14400
17473
19200
21505
24194
26882
1
6720
7200
8737
9600
10753
12097
13441
2
4480
4800
5824
6400
7168
8065
8961
Note: Bit rates are rounded to the nearest whole number.
Page 530 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
The method of calculating the value to be set in the bit rate register (BRR) from the operating
frequency and bit rate, on the other hand, is shown below. N is an integer, 0 ≤ N ≤ 255, and the
smaller error is specified.
N=
φ
S×2
2n+1
× 106 – 1
×B
Table 14-6 Examples of BRR Settings for Bit Rate B (bit/s) (When n = 0 and S = 372)
φ (MHz)
7.1424
10.00
10.7136
13.00
14.2848
16.00
18.00
20.00
bit/s
N
Error
N
Error
N
Error
N
Error
N
Error
N
Error
N
Error
N
Error
9600
0
0.00
1
30
1
25
1
8.99
1
0.00
1
12.01
2
15.99
2
6.60
Note: A blank means no setting is available.
Table 14-7 Maximum Bit Rate at Various Frequencies (Smart Card Interface Mode)
(when S = 372)
φ (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s)
N
n
7.1424
9600
0
0
10.00
13441
0
0
10.7136
14400
0
0
13.00
17473
0
0
14.2848
19200
0
0
16.00
21505
0
0
18.00
24194
0
0
20.00
26882
0
0
The bit rate error is given by the following formula:
Error (%) = (
φ
S×2
2n+1
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
× B × (N + 1)
× 106 – 1) × 100
Page 531 of 1458
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.3.6
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Data Transfer Operations
Initialization: Before transmitting and receiving data, initialize the SCI as described below.
Initialization is also necessary when switching from transmit mode to receive mode, or vice versa.
[1] Clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0.
[2] Clear the error flags ERS, PER, and ORER in SSR to 0.
[3] Set the GM, BLK, O/E, BCP1, BCP0, CKS1, CKS0 bits in SMR. Set the PE bit to 1.
[4] Set the SMIF, SDIR, and SINV bits in SCMR.
When the SMIF bit is set to 1, the TxD and RxD pins are both switched from ports to SCI pins,
and are placed in the high-impedance state.
[5] Set the value corresponding to the bit rate in BRR.
[6] Set the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR. Clear the TIE, RIE, TE, RE, MPIE, and TEIE bits to 0.
If the CKE0 bit is set to 1, the clock is output from the SCK pin.
[7] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TIE, RIE, TE, and RE bits in SCR. Do not set the TE
bit and RE bit at the same time, except for self-diagnosis.
Page 532 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Serial Data Transmission (Except Block Transfer Mode): As data transmission in smart card
mode involves error signal sampling and retransmission processing, the processing procedure is
different from that for the normal SCI. Figure 14-4 shows a flowchart for transmitting, and figure
14-5 shows the relation between a transmit operation and the internal registers.
[1] Perform Smart Card interface mode initialization as described above in initialization.
[2] Check that the ERS error flag in SSR is cleared to 0.
[3] Repeat steps [2] and [3] until it can be confirmed that the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1.
[4] Write the transmit data to TDR, clear the TDRE flag to 0, and perform the transmit operation.
The TEND flag is cleared to 0.
[5] When transmitting data continuously, go back to step [2].
[6] To end transmission, clear the TE bit to 0.
With the above processing, interrupt servicing or data transfer by the DTC is possible.
If transmission ends and the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TIE bit is set to 1 and interrupt
requests are enabled, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request will be generated. If an error
occurs in transmission and the ERS flag is set to 1 while the RIE bit is set to 1 and interrupt
requests are enabled, a transfer error interrupt (ERI) request will be generated.
The timing for setting the TEND flag depends on the value of the GM bit in SMR. The TEND flag
set timing is shown in figure 14-6.
If the DTC* is activated by a TXI request, the number of bytes set in the DTC* can be transmitted
automatically, including automatic retransmission.
For details, see Interrupt Operation and Data Transfer Operation by DTC below.
Notes: For block transfer mode, see section 13.3.2, Operation in Asynchronous Mode.
* The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 533 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Start
Initialization
Start transmission
ERS = 0?
No
Yes
Error processing
No
TEND = 1?
Yes
Write data to TDR,
and clear TDRE flag
in SSR to 0
No
All data transmitted?
Yes
No
ERS = 0?
Yes
Error processing
No
TEND = 1?
Yes
Clear TE bit to 0
End
Figure 14-4 Example of Transmission Processing Flow
Page 534 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
TDR
(1) Data write
Data 1
(2) Transfer from
TDR to TSR
Data 1
(3) Serial data output
Data 1
TSR
(shift register)
Data 1
; Data remains in TDR
Data 1
I/O signal line output
In case of normal transmission: TEND flag is set
In case of transmit error:
ERS flag is set
Steps (2) and (3) above are repeated until the TEND flag is set
Note: When the ERS flag is set, it should be cleared until transfer of the last bit (D7 in LSB-first
transmission, D0 in MSB-first transmission) of the next transfer data to be transmitted has
been completed.
Figure 14-5 Relation Between Transmit Operation and Internal Registers
I/O data
Ds
TXI
(TEND interrupt)
When GM = 0
When GM = 1
Legend:
Ds:
D0 to D7:
Dp:
DE:
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Dp
DE
Guard
time
12.5 etu
11.0 etu
Start bit
Data bits
Parity bit
Error signal
Note: etu: Elementary time unit (time for transfer of 1 bit)
Figure 14-6 TEND Flag Generation Timing in Transmission Operation
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 535 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Serial Data Reception (Except Block Transfer Mode): Data reception in Smart Card mode uses
the same processing procedure as for the normal SCI. Figure 14-7 shows an example of the
transmission processing flow.
[1] Perform Smart Card interface mode initialization as described above in Initialization.
[2] Check that the ORER flag and PER flag in SSR are cleared to 0. If either is set, perform the
appropriate receive error processing, then clear both the ORER and the PER flag to 0.
[3] Repeat steps [2] and [3] until it can be confirmed that the RDRF flag is set to 1.
[4] Read the receive data from RDR.
[5] When receiving data continuously, clear the RDRF flag to 0 and go back to step [2].
[6] To end reception, clear the RE bit to 0.
Start
Initialization
Start reception
ORER = 0 and
PER = 0
No
Yes
Error processing
No
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read RDR and clear
RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
Yes
Clear RE bit to 0
Figure 14-7 Example of Reception Processing Flow
Page 536 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
With the above processing, interrupt servicing or data transfer by the DTC* is possible.
If reception ends and the RDRF flag is set to 1 while the RIE bit is set to 1 and interrupt requests
are enabled, a receive data full interrupt (RXI) request will be generated. If an error occurs in
reception and either the ORER flag or the PER flag is set to 1, a transfer error interrupt (ERI)
request will be generated.
If the DTC* is activated by an RXI request, the receive data in which the error occurred is
skipped, and only the number of bytes of receive data set in the DTC* are transferred.
For details, see Interrupt Operation and Data Transfer Operation by DTC* followings.
If a parity error occurs during reception and the PER is set to 1, the received data is still
transferred to RDR, and therefore this data can be read.
Notes: For block transfer mode, see section 13.3.2, Operation in Asynchronous Mode.
* The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
Mode Switching Operation: When switching from receive mode to transmit mode, first confirm
that the receive operation has been completed, then start from initialization, clearing RE bit to 0
and setting TE bit to 1. The RDRF flag or the PER and ORER flags can be used to check that the
receive operation has been completed.
When switching from transmit mode to receive mode, first confirm that the transmit operation has
been completed, then start from initialization, clearing TE bit to 0 and setting RE bit to 1. The
TEND flag can be used to check that the transmit operation has been completed.
Fixing Clock Output Level: When the GM bit in SMR is set to 1, the clock output level can be
fixed with bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR. At this time, the minimum clock pulse width can be
made the specified width.
Figure 14-8 shows the timing for fixing the clock output level. In this example, GSM is set to 1,
CKE1 is cleared to 0, and the CKE0 bit is controlled.
Specified pulse width
Specified pulse width
SCK
SCR write
(CKE0 = 0)
SCR write
(CKE0 = 1)
Figure 14-8 Timing for Fixing Clock Output Level
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 537 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Interrupt Operation (Except Block Transfer Mode): There are three interrupt sources in smart
card interface mode: transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) requests, transfer error interrupt (ERI)
requests, and receive data full interrupt (RXI) requests. The transmit end interrupt (TEI) request is
not used in this mode.
When the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated.
When the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated.
When any of flags ORER, PER, and ERS in SSR is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated.
The relationship between the operating states and interrupt sources is shown in table 14-8.
Note: For block transfer mode, see section 13.4, SCI Interrupts.
Table 14-8 Smart Card Mode Operating States and Interrupt Sources
Operating State
Flag
Enable Bit
Interrupt
Source
DTC Activation
Transmit Mode Normal
operation
TEND
TIE
TXI
Possible
Error
Receive Mode Normal
operation
Error
ERS
RIE
ERI
Not possible
RDRF
RIE
RXI
Possible
PER, ORER
RIE
ERI
Not possible
Data Transfer Operation by DTC*: In smart card mode, as with the normal SCI, transfer can be
carried out using the DTC. In a transmit operation, the TDRE flag is also set to 1 at the same time
as the TEND flag in SSR, and a TXI interrupt is generated. If the TXI request is designated
beforehand as a DTC activation source, the DTC will be activated by the TXI request, and transfer
of the transmit data will be carried out. The TDRE and TEND flags are automatically cleared to 0
when data transfer is performed by the DTC. In the event of an error, the SCI retransmits the same
data automatically. During this period, TEND remains cleared to 0 and the DTC is not activated.
Therefore, the SCI and DTC will automatically transmit the specified number of bytes, including
retransmission in the event of an error. However, the ERS flag is not cleared automatically when
an error occurs, and so the RIE bit should be set to 1 beforehand so that an ERI request will be
generated in the event of an error, and the ERS flag will be cleared.
When performing transfer using the DTC, it is essential to set and enable the DTC before carrying
out SCI setting. For details of the DTC setting procedures, see section 8, Data Transfer Controller
(DTC).
Page 538 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
In a receive operation, an RXI interrupt request is generated when the RDRF flag in SSR is set to
1. If the RXI request is designated beforehand as a DTC activation source, the DTC will be
activated by the RXI request, and transfer of the receive data will be carried out. The RDRF flag is
cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the DTC. If an error occurs, an error
flag is set but the RDRF flag is not. Consequently, the DTC is not activated, but instead, an ERI
interrupt request is sent to the CPU. Therefore, the error flag should be cleared.
Notes: For block transfer mode, see section 13.4, SCI Interrupts.
* The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
14.3.7
Operation in GSM Mode
Switching the Mode: When switching between smart card interface mode and software standby
mode, the following switching procedure should be followed in order to maintain the clock duty.
• When changing from smart card interface mode to software standby mode
[1] Set the data register (DR) and data direction register (DDR) corresponding to the SCK pin to
the value for the fixed output state in software standby mode.
[2] Write 0 to the TE bit and RE bit in the serial control register (SCR) to halt transmit/receive
operation. At the same time, set the CKE1 bit to the value for the fixed output state in software
standby mode.
[3] Write 0 to the CKE0 bit in SCR to halt the clock.
[4] Wait for one serial clock period.
During this interval, clock output is fixed at the specified level, with the duty preserved.
[5] Make the transition to the software standby state.
• When returning to smart card interface mode from software standby mode
[6] Exit the software standby state.
[7] Write 1 to the CKE0 bit in SCR and output the clock. Signal generation is started with the
normal duty.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 539 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Software
standby
Normal operation
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5]
Normal operation
[6] [7]
Figure 14-9 Clock Halt and Restart Procedure
Powering On: To secure the clock duty from power-on, the following switching procedure should
be followed.
[1] The initial state is port input and high impedance. Use a pull-up resistor or pull-down resistor
to fix the potential.
[2] Fix the SCK pin to the specified output level with the CKE1 bit in SCR.
[3] Set SMR and SCMR, and switch to smart card mode operation.
[4] Set the CKE0 bit in SCR to 1 to start clock output.
14.3.8
Operation in Block Transfer Mode
Operation in block transfer mode is the same as in SCI asynchronous mode, except for the
following points. For details, see section 13.3.2, Operation in Asynchronous Mode.
Data Format: The data format is 8 bits with parity. There is no stop bit, but there is a 2-bit (1-bit
or more in reception) error guard time.
Also, except during transmission (with start bit, data bits, and parity bit), the transmission pins go
to the high-impedance state, so the signal lines must be fixed high with a pull-up resistor.
Transmit/Receive Clock: Only an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator can
be used as the transmit/receive clock. The number of basic clock periods in a 1-bit transfer interval
can be set to 32, 64, 372, or 256 with bits BCP1 and BCP0. For details, see section 14.3.5, Clock.
ERS (FER) Flag: As with the normal Smart Card interface, the ERS flag indicates the error signal
status, but since error signal transmission and reception is not performed, this flag is always
cleared to 0.
Page 540 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
14.4
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Usage Notes
The following points should be noted when using the SCI as a Smart Card interface.
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Smart Card Interface Mode: In
Smart Card interface mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 32, 64, 372, or
256 times the transfer rate (as determined by bits BCP1 and BCP0).
In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs
internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 16th, 32nd,
186th, or 128th pulse of the basic clock. Figure 14-10 shows the receive data sampling timing
when using a clock of 372 times the transfer rate.
372 clocks
186 clocks
0
185
185
371 0
371 0
Internal
basic
clock
Receive
data (RxD)
Start bit
D0
D1
Synchronization
sampling
timing
Data
sampling
timing
Figure 14-10 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Mode
(Using Clock of 372 Times the Transfer Rate)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 541 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Thus the reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by the following formula.
Formula for reception margin in smart card interface mode
M =⎥ (0.5 –
1
) – (L – 0.5) F –
2N
⎥ D – 0.5⎥
(1 + F)⎥ × 100%
N
Where M: Reception margin (%)
N: Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 32, 64, 372, and 256)
D: Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0)
L: Frame length (L = 10)
F: Absolute value of clock frequency deviation
Assuming values of F = 0, D = 0.5 and N = 372 in the above formula, the reception margin
formula is as follows.
When D = 0.5 and F = 0,
M = (0.5 – 1/2 × 372) × 100%
= 49.866%
Page 542 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Retransfer Operations (Except Block Transfer Mode): Retransfer operations are performed by
the SCI in receive mode and transmit mode as described below.
• Retransfer operation when SCI is in receive mode
Figure 14-11 illustrates the retransfer operation when the SCI is in receive mode.
[1] If an error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit in SSR is
automatically set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is enabled at this time, an ERI interrupt request is
generated. The PER bit in SSR should be kept cleared to 0 until the next parity bit is sampled.
[2] The RDRF bit in SSR is not set for a frame in which an error has occurred.
[3] If no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit in SSR is not set to 1.
[4] If no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the receive operation is judged to
have been completed normally, and the RDRF flag in SSR is automatically set to 1. If the RIE
bit in SCR is enabled at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated.
If DTC* data transfer by an RXI source is enabled, the contents of RDR can be read
automatically. When the RDR data is read by the DTC*, the RDRF flag is automatically
cleared to 0.
[5] When a normal frame is received, the pin retains the high-impedance state at the timing for
error signal transmission.
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
nth transfer frame
Transfer
frame n + 1
Retransferred frame
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE
(DE)
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp
RDRF
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
PER
Figure 14-11 Retransfer Operation in SCI Receive Mode
• Retransfer operation when SCI is in transmit mode
Figure 14-12 illustrates the retransfer operation when the SCI is in transmit mode.
[6] If an error signal is sent back from the receiving end after transmission of one frame is
completed, the ERS bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is enabled at this time, an ERI
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 543 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
interrupt request is generated. The ERS bit in SSR should be kept cleared to 0 until the next
parity bit is sampled.
[7] The TEND bit in SSR is not set for a frame for which an error signal indicating an abnormality
is received.
[8] If an error signal is not sent back from the receiving end, the ERS bit in SSR is not set.
[9] If an error signal is not sent back from the receiving end, transmission of one frame, including
a retransfer, is judged to have been completed, and the TEND bit in SSR is set to 1. If the TIE
bit in SCR is enabled at this time, a TXI interrupt request is generated.
If data transfer by the DTC* by means of the TXI source is enabled, the next data can be
written to TDR automatically. When data is written to TDR by the DTC*, the TDRE bit is
automatically cleared to 0.
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
nth transfer frame
Transfer
frame n + 1
Retransferred frame
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp
(DE)
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4
TDRE
Transfer to TSR
from TDR
Transfer to TSR from TDR
Transfer to TSR from TDR
TEND
[7]
[9]
FER/ERS
[6]
[8]
Figure 14-12 Retransfer Operation in SCI Transmit Mode
Page 544 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Section 15 I2C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
A two-channel I2C bus interface is available as an option in the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and
H8S/2630 (the product equipped with the I2C bus interface is the W-mask version). Observe the
following notes when using this option.
A “W” is added to the part number in products in which this optional function is used.
Examples: HD64F2638WF*
Note: * When the optional function is used in a U-mask version, “U” is replaced with “W”.
Example: HD64F2638UF → HD64F2638WF
15.1
Overview
A two-channel I2C bus interface is available for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630 as an
option. The I2C bus interface conforms to and provides a subset of the Philips I2C bus (inter-IC
bus) interface functions. The register configuration that controls the I2C bus differs partly from the
Philips configuration, however.
Each I2C bus interface channel uses only one data line (SDA) and one clock line (SCL) to transfer
data, saving board and connector space.
15.1.1
Features
• Selection of addressing format or non-addressing format
⎯ I2C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit, for master/slave operation
⎯ Serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master operation only
• Conforms to Philips I2C bus interface (I2C bus format)
• Two ways of setting slave address (I2C bus format)
• Start and stop conditions generated automatically in master mode (I2C bus format)
• Selection of acknowledge output levels when receiving (I2C bus format)
• Automatic loading of acknowledge bit when transmitting (I2C bus format)
• Wait function in master mode (I2C bus format)
⎯ A wait can be inserted by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding
acknowledgement. The wait can be cleared by clearing the interrupt flag.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 545 of 1458
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
• Wait function in slave mode (I2C bus format)
⎯ A wait request can be generated by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding
acknowledgement. The wait request is cleared when the next transfer becomes possible.
• Three interrupt sources
⎯ Data transfer end (including transmission mode transition with I2C bus format and address
reception after loss of master arbitration)
⎯ Address match: when any slave address matches or the general call address is received in
slave receive mode (I2C bus format)
⎯ Stop condition detection
• Selection of 16 internal clocks (in master mode)
• Direct bus drive (with SCL and SDA pins)
⎯ Two pins—P35/SCL0 and P34/SDA0—(normally NMOS push-pull outputs) function as
NMOS open-drain outputs when the bus drive function is selected.
⎯ Two pins—P33/SCL1 and P32/SDA1—(normally CMOS pins) function as NMOS-only
outputs when the bus drive function is selected.
15.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 15-1 shows a block diagram of the I2C bus interface.
Figure 15-2 shows an example of I/O pin connections to external circuits. Channel 0 I/O pins are
NMOS open drains, and it is possible to apply voltages in excess of the power supply (VCC)
voltage for this LSI. Set the upper limit of voltage applied to the power supply (VCC) power supply
range + 0.3 V, i.e. 5.8 V. Channel 1 I/O pins are driven solely by NMOS, so in terms of
appearance they carry out the same operations as an NMOS open drain. However, the voltage
which can be applied to the I/O pins depends on the voltage of the power supply (VCC) of this LSI.
Page 546 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
φ
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
PS
ICCR
SCL
Clock
control
Noise
canceler
Bus state
decision
circuit
SDA
ICSR
Arbitration
decision
circuit
ICDRT
Output data
control
circuit
ICDRS
Internal data bus
ICMR
ICDRR
Noise
canceler
Address
comparator
SAR, SARX
Legend:
ICCR: I2C bus control register
ICMR: I2C bus mode register
ICSR: I2C bus status register
ICDR: I2C bus data register
SAR: Slave address register
SARX: Second slave address register X
Prescaler
PS:
Interrupt
generator
Interrupt
request
Figure 15-1 Block Diagram of I2C Bus Interface
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 547 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
VCC
VCC
SCL
SCL
SDA
SDA
SCLin
SDAout
(Master)
SCLin
Chip
SCLout
SCLout
SDAin
SDAin
SDAout
SDAout
SCL
SDA
SDAin
SCL
SDA
SCLout
SCLin
(Slave 1)
(Slave 2)
Figure 15-2 I2C Bus Interface Connections
(Example: The Chip as Master)
15.1.3
Input/Output Pins
Table 15-1 summarizes the input/output pins used by the I2C bus interface.
Table 15-1 I2C Bus Interface Pins
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
0
Serial clock
SCL0
I/O
IIC0 serial clock input/output
Serial data
SDA0
I/O
IIC0 serial data input/output
Serial clock
SCL1
I/O
IIC1 serial clock input/output
Serial data
SDA1
I/O
IIC1 serial data input/output
1
Note: In the text, the channel subscript is omitted, and only SCL and SDA are used.
Page 548 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
15.1.4
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Register Configuration
Table 15-2 summarizes the registers of the I2C bus interface.
Table 15-2 Register Configuration
Address*
4
H'01
R/(W)*
4
H'00
H'FF78*
3
H'FF79*
ICDR0
R/W
—
I C bus mode register
ICMR0
R/W
H'00
Slave address register
SAR0
R/W
H'00
Second slave address
register
SARX0
R/W
H'01
2
ICCR1
R/(W)*
2
ICSR1
2
2
Name
0
I C bus control register
Abbreviation
R/(W)
2
ICCR0
R/(W)*
2
ICSR0
2
2
I C bus status register
I C bus data register
1
3
2 3
H'FF7E* *
2 3
H'FF7F* *
2 3
H'FF7F* *
2 3
H'FF7E* *
4
H'01
R/(W)*
4
H'00
ICDR1
R/W
—
I C bus mode register
ICMR1
R/W
H'00
Slave address register
SAR1
R/W
H'00
Second slave address
register
SARX1
R/W
H'01
2 3
H'FF87* *
2 3
H'FF86* *
Serial control register X
SCRX
R/W
H'08
H'FDB4
DDC switch register
DDCSWR
R/W
H'0F
H'FDB5
Module stop control
register B
MSTPCRB
R/W
H'FF
H'FDE9
I C bus control register
I C bus status register
I C bus data register
Common
1
Initial Value
Channel
3
H'FF80*
3
H'FF81*
2 3
H'FF86* *
2 3
H'FF87* *
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2
2. The register that can be written or read depends on the ICE bit in the I C bus control
2
register. The slave address register can be accessed when ICE = 0, and the I C bus
mode register can be accessed when ICE = 1.
2
3. The I C bus interface registers are assigned to the same addresses as other registers.
Register selection is performed by means of the IICE bit in the serial control register X
(SCRX).
4. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 549 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
15.2
Register Descriptions
15.2.1
I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICDR7
ICDR6
ICDR5
ICDR4
ICDR3
ICDR2
ICDR1
ICDR0
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
:
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
R/W
• ICDRR
Bit
ICDRR7 ICDRR6 ICDRR5 ICDRR4 ICDRR3 ICDRR2 ICDRR1 ICDRR0
Initial value :
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
:
• ICDRS
Bit
:
ICDRS7 ICDRS6 ICDRR5 ICDRS4 ICDRS3 ICDRS2 ICDRS1 ICDRS0
Initial value :
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
R/W
:
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
• ICDRT
Bit
ICDRT7 ICDRT6 ICDRT5 ICDRT4 ICDRT3 ICDRT2 ICDRT1 ICDRT0
Initial value :
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
• TDRE, RDRF (internal flags)
Bit
:
⎯
⎯
TDRE
RDRF
Initial value
:
0
0
R/W
:
⎯
⎯
Page 550 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
ICDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is used as a transmit data register when
transmitting and a receive data register when receiving. ICDR is divided internally into a shift
register (ICDRS), receive buffer (ICDRR), and transmit buffer (ICDRT). ICDRS cannot be read or
written by the CPU, ICDRR is read-only, and ICDRT is write-only. Data transfers among the three
registers are performed automatically in coordination with changes in the bus state, and affect the
status of internal flags such as TDRE and RDRF.
If IIC is in transmit mode and the next data is in ICDRT (the TDRE flag is 0) following
transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, data is transferred automatically from
ICDRT to ICDRS. If IIC is in receive mode and no previous data remains in ICDRR (the RDRF
flag is 0) following transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, data is transferred
automatically from ICDRS to ICDRR.
If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than 8, transmit data and
receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB side
when MLS = 0, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits read from the LSB
side should be treated as valid when MLS = 0, and bits read from the MSB side when MLS = 1.
ICDR is assigned to the same address as SARX, and can be written and read only when the ICE
bit is set to 1 in ICCR.
The value of ICDR is undefined after a reset.
The TDRE and RDRF flags are set and cleared under the conditions shown below. Setting the
TDRE and RDRF flags affects the status of the interrupt flags.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 551 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
TDRE
Description
0
The next transmit data is in ICDR (ICDRT), or transmission cannot
be started
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When transmit data is written in ICDR (ICDRT) in transmit mode (TRS = 1)
•
When a stop condition is detected in the bus line state after a stop condition is
2
issued with the I C bus format or serial format selected
•
When a stop condition is detected with the I C bus format selected
•
In receive mode (TRS = 0)
(A 0 write to TRS during transfer is valid after reception of a frame containing an
acknowledge bit)
2
The next transmit data can be written in ICDR (ICDRT)
[Setting conditions]
RDRF
0
•
In transmit mode (TRS = 1), when a start condition is detected in the bus line state
2
after a start condition is issued in master mode with the I C bus format or serial
format selected
•
When data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS
(Data transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS when TRS = 1 and TDRE = 0, and ICDRS is
empty)
•
In receive mode (TRS = 0), when a switch is made from slave receive mode (TRS
= 0) to transmit mode (TRS = 1) after detection of a start condition (first time only)
Description
The data in ICDR (ICDRR) is invalid
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
•
1
When ICDR (ICDRR) receive data is read in receive mode
The ICDR (ICDRR) receive data can be read
[Setting condition]
•
Page 552 of 1458
When data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR
(Data transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR in case of normal termination with TRS = 0
and RDRF = 0)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
15.2.2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Slave Address Register (SAR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SVA6
SVA5
SVA4
SVA3
SVA2
SVA1
SVA0
FS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SAR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the slave address and selects the
communication format. When the chip is in slave mode (and the addressing format is selected), if
the upper 7 bits of SAR match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition,
the chip operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SAR is assigned to the same
address as ICMR, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR.
SAR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 to 1—Slave Address (SVA6 to SVA0): Set a unique address in bits SVA6 to SVA0,
differing from the addresses of other slave devices connected to the I2C bus.
Bit 0—Format Select (FS): Used together with the FSX bit in SARX to select the communication
format.
• I2C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit
• Synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master mode
only
The FS bit also specifies whether or not SAR slave address recognition is performed in slave
mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 553 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
SAR
Bit 0
SARX
Bit 0
FS
FSX
Operating Mode
0
0
I C bus format
2
•
1
1
I C bus format
(Initial value)
•
SAR slave address recognized
•
SARX slave address ignored
2
0
I C bus format
1
•
SAR slave address ignored
•
SARX slave address recognized
Synchronous serial format
•
15.2.3
SAR and SARX slave addresses recognized
2
SAR and SARX slave addresses ignored
Second Slave Address Register (SARX)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SVAX6
SVAX5
SVAX4
SVAX3
SVAX2
SVAX1
SVAX0
FSX
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SARX is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the second slave address and selects the
communication format. When the chip is in slave mode (and the addressing format is selected), if
the upper 7 bits of SARX match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition,
the chip operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SARX is assigned to the same
address as ICDR, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR.
SARX is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 to 1—Second Slave Address (SVAX6 to SVAX0): Set a unique address in bits SVAX6 to
SVAX0, differing from the addresses of other slave devices connected to the I2C bus.
Page 554 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Bit 0—Format Select X (FSX): Used together with the FS bit in SAR to select the
communication format.
• I2C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit
• Synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master mode
only
The FSX bit also specifies whether or not SARX slave address recognition is performed in slave
mode. For details, see the description of the FS bit in SAR.
15.2.4
I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MLS
WAIT
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
BC2
BC1
BC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
ICMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether the MSB or LSB is transferred
first, performs master mode wait control, and selects the master mode transfer clock frequency and
the transfer bit count. ICMR is assigned to the same address as SAR. ICMR can be written and
read only when the ICE bit is set to 1 in ICCR.
ICMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—MSB-First/LSB-First Select (MLS): Selects whether data is transferred MSB-first or
LSB-first.
If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than 8, transmit data and
receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB side
when MLS = 0, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits read from the LSB
side should be treated as valid when MLS = 0, and bits read from the MSB side when MLS = 1.
Do not set this bit to 1 when the I2C bus format is used.
Bit 7
MLS
Description
0
MSB-first
1
LSB-first
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
(Initial value)
Page 555 of 1458
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 6—Wait Insertion Bit (WAIT): Selects whether to insert a wait between the transfer of data
and the acknowledge bit, in master mode with the I2C bus format. When WAIT is set to 1, after
the fall of the clock for the final data bit, the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR, and a wait state begins
(with SCL at the low level). When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 in ICCR, the wait ends and the
acknowledge bit is transferred. If WAIT is cleared to 0, data and acknowledge bits are transferred
consecutively with no wait inserted.
The IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1 on completion of the acknowledge bit transfer, regardless of the
WAIT setting.
The setting of this bit is invalid in slave mode.
Bit 6
WAIT
Description
0
Data and acknowledge bits transferred consecutively
1
Wait inserted between data and acknowledge bits
Page 556 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Bits 5 to 3—Serial Clock Select (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits, together with the IICX1 (channel
1) or IICX0 (channel 0) bit in the SCRX register, select the serial clock frequency in master mode.
They should be set according to the required transfer rate.
SCRX
Bit
5 or 6 Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
IICX
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
φ=
Clock 5 MHz
φ=
8 MHz
φ=
10 MHz
φ=
16 MHz
0
0
0
0
φ/28
179 kHz
286 kHz
357 kHz
1
φ/40
125 kHz
200 kHz
250 kHz
571 kHz* 714 kHz*
400 kHz 500 kHz*
1
0
φ/48
104 kHz
167 kHz
208 kHz
333 kHz
417 kHz*
1
φ/64
78.1 kHz
125 kHz
156 kHz
250 kHz
313 kHz
0
φ/80
62.5 kHz
100 kHz
125 kHz
200 kHz
250 kHz
1
φ/100
50.0 kHz
80.0 kHz
100 kHz
160 kHz
200 kHz
1
0
φ/112
44.6 kHz
71.4 kHz
89.3 kHz
143 kHz
179 kHz
1
φ/128
39.1 kHz
62.5 kHz
78.1 kHz
125 kHz
156 kHz
0
0
φ/56
89.3 kHz
143 kHz
179 kHz
286 kHz
357 kHz
1
φ/80
62.5 kHz
100 kHz
125 kHz
200 kHz
250 kHz
0
φ/96
52.1 kHz
83.3 kHz
104 kHz
167 kHz
208 kHz
1
φ/128
39.1 kHz
62.5 kHz
78.1 kHz
125 kHz
156 kHz
0
φ/160
31.3 kHz
50.0 kHz
62.5 kHz
100 kHz
125 kHz
1
φ/200
25.0 kHz
40.0 kHz
50.0 kHz
80.0 kHz
100 kHz
0
φ/224
22.3 kHz
35.7 kHz
44.6 kHz
71.4 kHz
89.3 kHz
1
φ/256
19.5 kHz
31.3 kHz
39.1 kHz
62.5 kHz
78.1 kHz
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Transfer Rate
φ=
20 MHz
2
Note: * These rates are outside the ranges stipulated in the I C bus interface specifications (normal
mode: max. 100 kHz, high-speed mode: max. 400 kHz).
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 557 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Bits 2 to 0—Bit Counter (BC2 to BC0): Bits BC2 to BC0 specify the number of bits to be
transferred next. With the I2C bus format (when the FS bit in SAR or the FSX bit in SARX is 0),
the data is transferred with one addition acknowledge bit. Bit BC2 to BC0 settings should be made
during an interval between transfer frames. If bits BC2 to BC0 are set to a value other than 000,
the setting should be made while the SCL line is low.
The bit counter is initialized to 000 by a reset and when a start condition is detected. The value
returns to 000 at the end of a data transfer, including the acknowledge bit.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
BC2
BC1
BC0
Synchronous Serial Format
I C Bus Format
0
0
0
8
9
1
1
2
1
0
2
3
1
3
4
0
0
4
5
1
5
6
0
6
7
1
7
8
1
1
Page 558 of 1458
Bits/Frame
2
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
15.2.5
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICE
IEIC
MST
TRS
ACKE
BBSY
IRIC
SCP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/(W)*
W
Note: * Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
ICCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables the I2C bus interface, enables or
disables interrupts, selects master or slave mode and transmission or reception, enables or disables
acknowledgement, confirms the I2C bus interface bus status, issues start/stop conditions, and
performs interrupt flag confirmation.
ICCR is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—I2C Bus Interface Enable (ICE): Selects whether or not the I2C bus interface is to be
used. When ICE is set to 1, port pins function as SCL and SDA input/output pins and transfer
operations are enabled. When ICE is cleared to 0, the I2C bus interface module is halted and its
internal states are cleared.
The SAR and SARX registers can be accessed when ICE is 0. The ICMR and ICDR registers can
be accessed when ICE is 1.
Bit 7
ICE
Description
0
I C bus interface module disabled, with SCL and SDA signal pins set to port function
(Initial value)
2
2
I C bus interface module internal states initialized
SAR and SARX can be accessed
1
2
I C bus interface module enabled for transfer operations (pins SCL and SCA are
driving the bus)
ICMR and ICDR can be accessed
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 559 of 1458
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 6—I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Enable (IEIC): Enables or disables interrupts from the I2C
bus interface to the CPU.
Bit 6
IEIC
Description
0
Interrupts disabled
1
Interrupts enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 5—Master/Slave Select (MST)
Bit 4—Transmit/Receive Select (TRS)
MST selects whether the I2C bus interface operates in master mode or slave mode.
TRS selects whether the I2C bus interface operates in transmit mode or receive mode.
In master mode with the I2C bus format, when arbitration is lost, MST and TRS are both reset by
hardware, causing a transition to slave receive mode. In slave receive mode with the addressing
format (FS = 0 or FSX = 0), hardware automatically selects transmit or receive mode according to
the R/W bit in the first frame after a start condition.
Modification of the TRS bit during transfer is deferred until transfer of the frame containing the
acknowledge bit is completed, and the changeover is made after completion of the transfer.
MST and TRS select the operating mode as follows.
Bit 5
Bit 4
MST
TRS
Operating Mode
0
0
Slave receive mode
1
Slave transmit mode
0
Master receive mode
1
Master transmit mode
1
Page 560 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Bit 5
MST
Description
0
Slave mode
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written by software
2
(2) When bus arbitration is lost after transmission is started in I C bus format master
mode
1
Master mode
[Setting conditions]
(1) When 1 is written by software (in cases other than clearing condition (2))
(2) When 1 is written in MST after reading MST = 0 (in case of clearing condition (2))
Bit 4
TRS
Description
0
Receive mode
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written by software (in cases other than setting condition (3))
(2) When 0 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 1 (in case of clearing condition (3))
2
(3) When bus arbitration is lost after transmission is started in I C bus format master
mode
1
Transmit mode
[Setting conditions]
(1) When 1 is written by software (in cases other than clearing conditions (3) and 4)
(2) When 1 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 0 (in case of clearing conditions (3)
and 4)
2
(3) When a 1 is received as the R/W bit of the first frame in I C bus format slave mode
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 561 of 1458
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 3—Acknowledge Bit Judgement Selection (ACKE): Specifies whether the value of the
acknowledge bit returned from the receiving device when using the I2C bus format is to be ignored
and continuous transfer is performed, or transfer is to be aborted and error handling, etc.,
performed if the acknowledge bit is 1. When the ACKE bit is 0, the value of the received
acknowledge bit is not indicated by the ACKB bit, which is always 0.
In this LSI, the DTC can be used to perform continuous transfer. The DTC is activated when the
IRTR interrupt flag is set to 1 (IRTR is one of two interrupt flags, the other being IRIC). When the
ACKE bit is 0, the TDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set on completion of data transmission,
regardless of the value of the acknowledge bit. When the ACKE bit is 1, the TDRE, IRIC, and
IRTR flags are set on completion of data transmission when the acknowledge bit is 0, and the
IRIC flag alone is set on completion of data transmission when the acknowledge bit is 1.
When the DTC is activated, the TDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are cleared to 0 after the specified
number of data transfers have been executed. Consequently, interrupts are not generated during
continuous data transfer, but if data transmission is completed with a 1 acknowledge bit when the
ACKE bit is set to 1, the DTC is not activated and an interrupt is generated, if enabled.
Depending on the receiving device, the acknowledge bit may be significant, in indicating
completion of processing of the received data, for instance, or may be fixed at 1 and have no
significance.
Bit 3
ACKE
Description
0
The value of the acknowledge bit is ignored, and continuous transfer is performed
(Initial value)
1
If the acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is interrupted
Page 562 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Bit 2—Bus Busy (BBSY): The BBSY flag can be read to check whether the I2C bus (SCL, SDA)
is busy or free. In master mode, this bit is also used to issue start and stop conditions.
A high-to-low transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a start condition, setting
BBSY to 1. A low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a stop condition,
clearing BBSY to 0.
To issue a start condition, use a MOV instruction to write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit
start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, use a MOV instruction to
write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. It is not possible to write to BBSY in slave mode; the I2C bus
interface must be set to master transmit mode before issuing a start condition. MST and TRS
should both be set to 1 before writing 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP.
Bit 2
BBSY
Description
0
Bus is free
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
•
1
When a stop condition is detected
Bus is busy
[Setting condition]
•
When a start condition is detected
Bit 1—I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Request Flag (IRIC): Indicates that the I2C bus interface
has issued an interrupt request to the CPU. IRIC is set to 1 at the end of a data transfer, when a
slave address or general call address is detected in slave receive mode, when bus arbitration is lost
in master transmit mode, and when a stop condition is detected. IRIC is set at different times
depending on the FS bit in SAR and the WAIT bit in ICMR. See section 15.3.7, IRIC Setting
Timing and SCL Control. The conditions under which IRIC is set also differ depending on the
setting of the ACKE bit in ICCR.
IRIC is cleared by reading IRIC after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in IRIC.
When the DTC is used, IRIC is cleared automatically and transfer can be performed continuously
without CPU intervention.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 563 of 1458
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 1
IRIC
Description
0
Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
• When 0 is written in IRIC after reading IRIC = 1
• When ICDR is written or read by the DTC
(When the TDRE or RDRF flag is cleared to 0)
(This is not always a clearing condition; see the description of DTC operation for
details)
1
Interrupt requested
[Setting conditions]
2
I C bus format master mode
•
When a start condition is detected in the bus line state after a start condition is
issued (when the TDRE flag is set to 1 because of first frame transmission)
•
When a wait is inserted between the data and acknowledge bit when WAIT = 1
•
At the end of data transfer
(at the rise of the 9th transmit/receive clock pulse, or at the fall of the 8th
transmit/receive clock pulse when using wait insertion)
•
When a slave address is received after bus arbitration is lost (when the AL flag is
set to 1)
•
When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1 (when the
ACKB bit is set to 1)
2
I C bus format slave mode
•
When the slave address (SVA, SVAX) matches (when the AAS and AASX flags
are set to 1)
•
and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start condition
or stop condition detection (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
•
When the general call address is detected (when FS = 0 and the ADZ flag is set to
1) and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start
condition or stop condition detection (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
•
When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1 (when the
ACKB bit is set to 1)
• When a stop condition is detected (when the STOP or ESTP flag is set to 1)
Synchronous serial format
•
At the end of data transfer (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
• When a start condition is detected with serial format selected
When any other condition arises in which the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1
Page 564 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
When, with the I2C bus format selected, IRIC is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated, other flags
must be checked in order to identify the source that set IRIC to 1. Although each source has a
corresponding flag, caution is needed at the end of a transfer.
When the TDRE or RDRF internal flag is set, the readable IRTR flag may or may not be set. The
IRTR flag (the DTC start request flag) is not set at the end of a data transfer up to detection of a
retransmission start condition or stop condition after a slave address (SVA) or general call address
match in I2C bus format slave mode.
Even when the IRIC flag and IRTR flag are set, the TDRE or RDRF internal flag may not be set.
The IRIC and IRTR flags are not cleared at the end of the specified number of transfers in
continuous transfer using the DTC. The TDRE or RDRF flag is cleared, however, since the
specified number of ICDR reads or writes have been completed.
Table 15-3 shows the relationship between the flags and the transfer states.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 565 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Table 15-3 Flags and Transfer States
MST TRS BBSY ESTP STOP IRTR
AASX AL
AAS
ADZ
ACKB State
1/0
1/0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Idle state (flag
clearing required)
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Start condition
issuance
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Start condition
established
1
1/0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0/1
Master mode wait
1
1/0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0/1
Master mode
transmit/receive end
0
0
1
0
0
0
1/0
1
1/0
1/0
0
Arbitration lost
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
SAR match by first
frame in slave mode
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
General call
address match
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
SARX match
0
1/0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0/1
Slave mode
transmit/receive end
(except after SARX
match)
0
1/0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
Slave mode
transmit/receive end
(after SARX match)
0
1/0
0
1/0
1/0
0
0
0
0
0
0/1
Stop condition
detected
Bit 0—Start Condition/Stop Condition Prohibit (SCP): Controls the issuing of start and stop
conditions in master mode. To issue a start condition, write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit
start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP.
This bit is always read as 1. If 1 is written, the data is not stored.
Bit 0
SCP
Description
0
Writing 0 issues a start or stop condition, in combination with the BBSY flag
1
Reading always returns a value of 1
(Initial value)
Writing is ignored
Page 566 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
15.2.6
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ESTP
STOP
IRTR
AASX
AL
AAS
ADZ
ACKB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
ICSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs flag confirmation and acknowledge
confirmation and control.
ICSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—Error Stop Condition Detection Flag (ESTP): Indicates that a stop condition has been
detected during frame transfer in I2C bus format slave mode.
Bit 7
ESTP
Description
0
No error stop condition
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
•
•
1
When 0 is written in ESTP after reading ESTP = 1
When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
2
In I C bus format slave mode
Error stop condition detected
[Setting condition]
•
When a stop condition is detected during frame transfer
In other modes
No meaning
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 567 of 1458
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 6—Normal Stop Condition Detection Flag (STOP): Indicates that a stop condition has been
detected after completion of frame transfer in I2C bus format slave mode.
Bit 6
STOP
Description
0
No normal stop condition
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
•
•
1
When 0 is written in STOP after reading STOP = 1
When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
2
In I C bus format slave mode
Normal stop condition detected
[Setting condition]
•
When a stop condition is detected after completion of frame transfer
In other modes
No meaning
Bit 5—I2C Bus Interface Continuous Transmission/Reception Interrupt Request Flag
(IRTR): Indicates that the I2C bus interface has issued an interrupt request to the CPU, and the
source is completion of reception/transmission of one frame in continuous transmission/reception
for which DTC activation is possible. When the IRTR flag is set to 1, the IRIC flag is also set to 1
at the same time.
IRTR flag setting is performed when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1. IRTR is cleared by
reading IRTR after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in IRTR. IRTR is also cleared automatically
when the IRIC flag is cleared to 0.
Page 568 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Bit 5
IRTR
Description
0
Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When 0 is written in IRTR after reading IRTR = 1
•
When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
Continuous transfer state
[Setting conditions]
•
In I C bus interface slave mode
When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1 when AASX = 1
•
In other modes
When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1
2
Bit 4—Second Slave Address Recognition Flag (AASX): In I2C bus format slave receive mode,
this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVAX6 to SVAX0 in
SARX.
AASX is cleared by reading AASX after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AASX. AASX is
also cleared automatically when a start condition is detected.
Bit 4
AASX
Description
0
Second slave address not recognized
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When 0 is written in AASX after reading AASX = 1
•
When a start condition is detected
•
In master mode
Second slave address recognized
[Setting condition]
•
When the second slave address is detected in slave receive mode and FSX = 0
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 569 of 1458
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 3—Arbitration Lost (AL): This flag indicates that arbitration was lost in master mode. The
I2C bus interface monitors the bus. When two or more master devices attempt to seize the bus at
nearly the same time, if the I2C bus interface detects data differing from the data it sent, it sets AL
to 1 to indicate that the bus has been taken by another master.
AL is cleared by reading AL after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AL. In addition, AL is
reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive
mode.
Bit 3
AL
Description
0
Bus arbitration won
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
•
When 0 is written in AL after reading AL = 1
Arbitration lost
[Setting conditions]
•
If the internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit
mode
•
If the internal SCL line is high at the fall of SCL in master transmit mode
Bit 2—Slave Address Recognition Flag (AAS): In I2C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is
set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVA6 to SVA0 in SAR, or if the
general call address (H'00) is detected.
AAS is cleared by reading AAS after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AAS. In addition, AAS
is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive
mode.
Page 570 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Bit 2
AAS
Description
0
Slave address or general call address not recognized
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
•
When 0 is written in AAS after reading AAS = 1
•
In master mode
Slave address or general call address recognized
[Setting condition]
•
When the slave address or general call address is detected in slave receive mode
and FS = 0
Bit 1—General Call Address Recognition Flag (ADZ): In I2C bus format slave receive mode,
this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition is the general call address (H'00).
ADZ is cleared by reading ADZ after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in ADZ. In addition, ADZ
is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive
mode.
Bit 1
ADZ
Description
0
General call address not recognized
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
•
When 0 is written in ADZ after reading ADZ = 1
•
In master mode
General call address recognized
[Setting condition]
•
When the general call address is detected in slave receive mode and (FSX = 0 or
FS = 0)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 571 of 1458
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 0—Acknowledge Bit (ACKB): Stores acknowledge data. In transmit mode, after the
receiving device receives data, it returns acknowledge data, and this data is loaded into ACKB. In
receive mode, after data has been received, the acknowledge data set in this bit is sent to the
transmitting device.
When this bit is read, in transmission (when TRS = 1), the value loaded from the bus line
(returned by the receiving device) is read. In reception (when TRS = 0), the value set by internal
software is read.
In addition, when this bit is written to in reception the transmission acknowledge data setting is
overwritten regardless of the value of TRS. The value loaded from the reception device is
maintained unchanged, so caution is necessary when using bit operation instructions to overwrite
this register.
Bit 0
ACKB
Description
0
Receive mode: 0 is output at acknowledge output timing
(Initial value)
Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has acknowledged the data (signal
is 0)
1
Receive mode: 1 is output at acknowledge output timing
Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has not acknowledged the data
(signal is 1)
Page 572 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
15.2.7
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Serial Control Register X (SCRX)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
IICX1
IICX0
IICE
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
SCRX is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls register access, the I2C interface
operating mode. If a module controlled by SCRX is not used, do not write 1 to the corresponding
bit.
SCRX is initialized to H'08 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—Reserved: Do not set 1.
Bit 6—I2C Transfer Select 1 (IICX1): This bit, together with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR of
IIC1, selects the transfer rate in master mode. For details, see section 15.2.4, I2C Bus Mode
Register (ICMR).
Bit 5—I2C Transfer Select 0 (IICX0): This bit, together with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR of
IIC0, selects the transfer rate in master mode. For details, see section 15.2.4, I2C Bus Mode
Register (ICMR).
Bit 4—I2C Master Enable (IICE): Controls CPU access to the I2C bus interface data and control
registers (ICCR, ICSR, ICDR/SARX, ICMR/SAR).
Bit 4
IICE
Description
0
CPU access to I C bus interface data and control registers is disabled
1
2
(Initial value)
2
CPU access to I C bus interface data and control registers is enabled
Bit 3— Reserved: Always returns a value of 1 if it is read.
Bits 2 to 0—Reserved: Do not set 1.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 573 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
15.2.8
DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
CLR3
CLR2
CLR1
CLR0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
R/(W)*1
R/(W)*1
R/(W)*1
R/(W)*1
W*2
W*2
W*2
W*2
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
Notes: 1. Should always be written with 0.
2. Always read as 1.
DDCSWR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is used to initialize the IIC module.
DDCSWR is initialized to H'0F by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: Should always be written with 0.
Bits 3 to 0—IIC Clear 3 to 0 (CLR3 to CLR0): These bits control initialization of the internal
state of IIC0 and IIC1.
These bits can only be written to; if read they will always return a value of 1.
When a write operation is performed on these bits, a clear signal is generated for the internal latch
circuit of the corresponding module(s), and the internal state of the IIC module(s) is initialized.
The write data for these bits is not retained. To perform IIC clearance, bits CLR3 to CLR0 must be
written to simultaneously using an MOV instruction. Do not use a bit manipulation instruction
such as BCLR.
When clearing is required again, all the bits must be written to in accordance with the setting.
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
CLR3
CLR2
CLR1
CLR0
Description
0
0
—
—
Setting prohibited
1
0
0
Setting prohibited
1
IIC0 internal latch cleared
0
IIC1 internal latch cleared
1
IIC0 and IIC1 internal latches cleared
—
Invalid setting
1
1
—
Page 574 of 1458
—
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
15.2.9
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Module Stop Control Register B (MSTPCRB)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPB7 MSTPB6 MSTPB5 MSTPB4 MSTPB3 MSTPB2 MSTPB1 MSTPB0
Initial value :
R/W
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCRB is an 8-bit readable/writable register that perform module stop mode control.
When the MSTPB4 or MSTPB3 bit is set to 1, operation of the corresponding IIC channel is
halted at the end of the bus cycle, and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see
section 23A.5, 23B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRB is initialized to H'FF by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not
initialized in software standby mode.
Bit 4—Module Stop (MSTPB4): Specifies IIC channel 0 module stop mode.
Bit 4
MSTPB4
Description
0
IIC channel 0 module stop mode is cleared
1
IIC channel 0 module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Module Stop (MSTPB3): Specifies IIC channel 1 module stop mode.
Bit 3
MSTPB3
Description
0
IIC channel 1 module stop mode is cleared
1
IIC channel 1 module stop mode is set
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
(Initial value)
Page 575 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
15.3
Operation
15.3.1
I2C Bus Data Format
The I2C bus interface has serial and I2C bus formats.
The I2C bus formats are addressing formats with an acknowledge bit. These are shown in figures
15-3 (a) and (b). The first frame following a start condition always consists of 8 bits.
The serial format is a non-addressing format with no acknowledge bit. Although start and stop
conditions must be issued, this format can be used as a synchronous serial format. This is shown in
figure 15-4.
Figure 15-5 shows the I2C bus timing.
The symbols used in figures 15-3 to 15-5 are explained in table 15-4.
(a) I2C bus format (FS = 0 or FSX = 0)
S
SLA
R/W
A
DATA
A
A/A
P
1
7
1
1
n
1
1
1
1
n: transfer bit count
(n = 1 to 8)
m: transfer frame count
(m ≥ 1)
m
(b) I2C bus format (start condition retransmission, FS = 0 or FSX = 0)
S
SLA
R/W
A
DATA
A/A
S
SLA
R/W
A
DATA
A/A
P
1
7
1
1
n1
1
1
7
1
1
n2
1
1
1
m1
1
m2
n1 and n2: transfer bit count (n1 and n2 = 1 to 8)
m1 and m2: transfer frame count (m1 and m2 ≥ 1)
Figure 15-3 I2C Bus Data Formats (I2C Bus Formats)
Page 576 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
FS = 1 and FSX = 1
S
DATA
DATA
P
1
8
n
1
1
m
n: transfer bit count
(n = 1 to 8)
m: transfer frame count
(m ≥ 1)
Figure 15-4 I2C Bus Data Format (Serial Format)
SDA
SCL
S
1-7
8
9
SLA
R/W
A
1-7
DATA
8
9
A
1-7
8
DATA
9
A/A
P
Figure 15-5 I2C Bus Timing
Table 15-4 I2C Bus Data Format Symbols
Legend
S
Start condition. The master device drives SDA from high to low while SCL is high
SLA
Slave address, by which the master device selects a slave device
R/W
Indicates the direction of data transfer: from the slave device to the master device
when R/W is 1, or from the master device to the slave device when R/W is 0
A
Acknowledge. The receiving device (the slave in master transmit mode, or the master
in master receive mode) drives SDA low to acknowledge a transfer
DATA
Transferred data. The bit length is set by bits BC2 to BC0 in ICMR. The MSB-first or
LSB-first format is selected by bit MLS in ICMR
P
Stop condition. The master device drives SDA from low to high while SCL is high
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 577 of 1458
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
15.3.2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Initial Setting
At startup the following procedure is used to initialize the IIC.
Start initialization
Set MSTP4 = 0 (IIC0)
MSTP3 = 0 (IIC1)
(MSTPCRB)
Clear module stop
Set IICE = 1 (SCRX)
Enable CPU access by IIC control register and data register
Set ICE = 0 (ICCR)
Enable SAR and SARX access
Set SAR and SARX
Set transfer format for 1st slave address, 2nd slave address,
and IIC (SVA8−SVA0, FS, SVAX6−SVAX0, FSX)
Set ICE = 1 (ICCR)
Enable IMCR and IMDR access. Use SCL and SDA pins is IIC
port
Set ICSR
Set acknowledge bit (ACKB)
Set SCRX
Set transfer rate (IICX)
Set IMCR
Set transfer format, wait insertion, and transfer rate (MLS,
WAIT, CKS2−CKS0)
Set ICCR
Set interrupt enable, transfer mode, and acknowledge
judgment (IEIC, MST, TRS, ACKE)
Transmit/receive start
Figure 15-6 Flowchart for IIC Initialization (Example)
Note: The ICMR register should be written to only after transmit or receive operations have
completed.
Writing to the ICMR register while a transmit or receive operation is in progress could
cause an erroneous value to be written to bit counter bits BC2 to BC0. This could result in
improper operation.
15.3.3
Master Transmit Operation
In I2C bus format master transmit mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit
data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal.
Figure 15-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the master transmit mode.
Page 578 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Start
[1] Initial settings
Initial settings
Read BBSY flag in ICCR
[2] Determine status of SCL and SDA lines
No
BBSY = 0?
Yes
Set MST = 1
and TRS = 1 (ICCR)
[3] Set to master transmit mode
Write BBSY = 1
and SCP = 0 (ICCR)
[4] Generate start condition
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
[5] Wait for start condition to be met
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Write transmit data to ICDR
[6] Set 1st byte (slave address + R/W) transmit data
(Perform ICDR write and IRIC flag clear
operations continuously)
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
[7] Wait for end of 1 byte transmission
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Read ACKB bit in ICSR
ACKB = 0?
No
[8] Judge acknowledge signal from specified
slave device
Yes
Transmit mode?
No
Master receive mode
Yes
Write transmit data to ICDR
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
[9] Set transmit data for 2nd byte onward
(Perform ICDR write and IRIC flag clear
operations continuously)
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
[10] Wait for end of 1 byte transmission
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Read ACKB bit in ICSR
[11] Judge end of transmission
No
Transmit complete?
(ACKB = 1?)
Yes
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
[12] Generate stop condition.
Write BBSY = 0 and
SCP = 0 (ICCR)
End
Figure 15-7 Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode (Example)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 579 of 1458
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
The procedure for transmitting data sequentially, synchronized with ICDR (ICDRT) write
operations, is described below.
[1] Perform initial settings as described in section 15.3.2, Initial Setting.
[2] Read the BBSY flag in ICCR to confirm that the bus is free.
[3] Set bits MST and TSR in ICCR to 1 to switch to the master transmit mode.
[4] Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from high to low when SCL is
high, and generates the start condition.
[5] The IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1 when the start condition is generated. If the IEIC bit in
ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.
[6] After the start condition is detected, write the data (slave address + R/W) to ICDR. With the
I2C bus format (when the FS bit in SAR or the FSX bit in SARX is 0), the first frame data
following the start condition indicates the 7-bit slave address and transmit/receive direction
(R/W). Next, clear the IRIC flag to 0 to indicate the end of the transfer. Continue
successively writing to ICDR and clearing the IRIC flag to ensure that processing of other
interrupts does not intervene. If the time required to transmit one byte of data elapses by the
time the IRIC flag is cleared, it will not be possible to determine the end of the transmission.
The master device sequentially sends the transmit clock and the data written to ICDR. The
selected slave device (i.e., the slave device with the matching slave address) drives SDA low
at the 9th transmit clock pulse and returns an acknowledge signal.
[7] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th
transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted, SCL is automatically fixed low in
synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written.
[8] Read the ACKB bit in ICSR to confirm that its value is 0. If the slave device has not returned
an acknowledge signal and the value of ACKB is 1, perform the transmit end processing
described in step [12] and then recommence the transmit operation from the beginning.
[9] Write the transmit data to ICDR. Next, clear the IRIC flag to 0 to indicate the end of the
transfer. Then continue successively writing to ICDR and clearing the IRIC flag as described
in step [6]. Transmission of the next frame is synchronized with the internal clock.
[10] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th
transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted, SCL is automatically fixed low in
synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written.
[11] Read the ACKB bit in ICSR to confirm that the slave device has returned an acknowledge
signal and the value of ACKB is 0. If the slave device has not returned an acknowledge signal
and the value of ACKB is 1, perform the transmit end processing described in step [12].
[12] Clear the IRIC flag to 0. Write 0 to the ACKE bit in ICCR and clear the received ACKB bit
to 0.
Page 580 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high, and
generates the stop condition.
Generate start
condition
SCL
(Master output)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SDA
(Master output)
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Slave address
SDA
(Slave output)
8
9
Bit 0
1
2
Bit 7
R/W
Bit 6
Data 1
[7]
A
[5]
ICDRE
Interrupt
request
IRIC
Interrupt
request
IRTR
ICDRT
Data 1
Address + R/W
ICDRS
Data 1
Address + R/W
Note: ICDR data
setting timing
Normal operation
Improper operation will
result
User processing
[4] Write BBSY = 1
and SCP = 0
(generate start
condition)
[6] ICDR write
[6] IRIC clearance
[9] ICDR write
[9] IRIC clearance
Figure 15-8 Example of Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (MLS = WAIT = 0)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 581 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Generate start
condition
SCL
(Master output)
8
SDA
(Master output)
9
Bit 0
Data 1
SDA
(Slave output)
1
Bit 7
2
3
Bit 6 Bit 5
[7]
4
Bit 4
5
Bit 3
Data 2
A
6
Bit 2
7
8
9
Bit 1 Bit 0
[10]
A
ICDRE
IRIC
IRTR
Data 1
ICDR
User processing
[9] ICDR write
Data 2
[9] IRIC clearance
[12] Write BBSY = 0
and SCP = 0
(generate stop
condition)
[12] IRIC clearance
[11] ACKB read
Figure 15-9 Example of Master Transmit Mode Stop Condition Generation Timing
(MLS = WAIT = 0)
15.3.4
Master Receive Operation
In I2C bus format master receive mode, the master device outputs the receive clock, receives data,
and returns an acknowledge signal. The slave device transmits data.
The master device transmits the data containing the slave address + R/W (0: read) in the 1st frame
after a start condition is generated in the master transmit mode. After the slave device is selected
the switch to receive operation takes place.
(1) Receive Operation Using Wait States
Figures 15-10 and 15-11 are flowcharts showing examples of the master receive mode (WAIT =
1).
Page 582 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Master receive mode
Set TRS = 0 (ICCR)
[1] Set to receive mode
Set ACKB = 0 (ICSR)
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Set WAIT = 1 (ICMR)
Read ICDR
[2] Receive start, dummy read
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
No
[3] Receive wait state (IRIC set at falling edge of 8th clock cycle)
or
Wait for end of reception of 1 byte (IRIC set at rising edge
of 9th clock cycle)
IRIC = 1?
Yes
No
[4] Data receive completed judgment
IRTR = 1?
Yes
Final receive?
Yes
No
Read ICDR
[5] Read receive data
[6] Clear IRIC flag (cancel wait state)
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
[7] Set acknowledge data for final receive
Set ACKB = 1 (ICSR)
[8] Wait time until TRS setting
1 clock cycle wait state
[9] Set TRS to generate stop condition
Set TRS = 1 (ICCR)
[10] Read receive data
Read ICDR
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
[11] Clear IRIC flag (cancel wait state)
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
[12] Receive wait state (IRIC set at falling edge of 8th clock cycle)
or
Wait for end of reception of 1 byte (IRIC set at rising edge
of 9th clock cycle)
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
IRTR = 1?
No
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Set WAIT = 0 (ICMR)
Yes
[13] Data receive completed judgment
[14] Clear IRIC flag (cancel wait state)
[15] Cancel wait mode
Clear IRIC flag (IRIC flag should be cleared when WAIT = 0)
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Read ICDR
[16] Read final receive data
Write BBSY = 0
and SCP = 0 (ICCR)
[17] Generate stop condition
End
Figure 15-10 Flowchart for Master Receive Mode (Receiving Multiple Bytes) (WAIT = 1)
(Example)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 583 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Master receive mode
Set TRS = 0 (ICCR)
Set ACKB = 0 (ICSR)
[1]
Set to receive mode
[2]
Receive start, dummy read
[3]
Receive wait state (IRIC set at falling edge
of 8th clock cycle) or
Wait for end of reception of 1 byte
(IRIC set at rising edge of 9th clock cycle)
Set ACKB = 1 (ICSR)
[7]
Set acknowledge data for final receive
Set TRS = 1 (ICCR)
[9]
Set TRS to generate stop condition
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Set WAIT = 1 (ICMR)
Read ICDR
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
[11] Clear IRIC flag (cancel wait state)
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
No
[12] Wait for end of reception of 1 byte
(IRIC set at rising edge of 9th clock cycle)
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Set WAIT = 0 (ICMR)
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
[15] Cancel wait mode
Clear IRIC flag (IRIC flag should be
cleared when WAIT = 0)
Read ICDR
[16] Read final receive data
Write BBSY = 0
and SCP = 0 (ICCR)
[17] Generate stop condition
End
Figure 15-11 Flowchart for Master Receive Mode (Receiving 1 Byte) (WAIT = 1)
(Example)
The procedure for receiving data sequentially, using the wait states (WAIT bit) for
synchronization with ICDR (ICDRR) read operations, is described below.
The procedure below describes the operation for receiving multiple bytes. Note that some of the
steps are omitted when receiving only 1 byte. Refer to figure 15-11 for details.
Page 584 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
[1] Clear the TRS bit in ICCR to 0 to switch from transmit mode to receive mode. Clear the
ACKB bit in ICSR to 0 (acknowledge data setting). Clear the IRIC flag to 0, then set the
WAIT bit in ICMR to 1.
[2] When ICDR is read (dummy data read), reception is started, and the receive clock is output,
and data received, in synchronization with the internal clock.
[3] The IRIC flag is set to 1 by the following two conditions. At that point, an interrupt request is
issued to the CPU if the IEIC bit in ICCR is set to 1.
1. The flag is set at the falling edge of the 8th clock cycle of the receive clock for 1 frame.
SCL is automatically held low, in synchronization with the internal clock, until the IRIC
flag is cleared.
2. The flag is set at the rising edge of the 9th clock cycle of the receive clock for 1 frame.
The IRIC flag and ICDRF flag are set to 1, indicating that reception of 1 frame of data has
ended. The master device continues to output the receive clock for the receive data.
[4] Read the IRTR flag in ICSR. If the IRTR flag value is 0, the wait state is cancelled by
clearing the IRIC flag as described in step [6] below. If the IRTR flag value is 1 and the next
receive data is the final receive data, perform the end processing described in step [7] below.
[5] If the IRTR flag value is 1, read the ICDR receive data.
[6] Clear the IRTR flag to 0. If condition [3]-1 is true, the master device drives SDA to low level
and returns an acknowledge signal when the receive clock outputs the 9th clock cycle.
Further data can be received by repeating steps [3] through [6].
[7] Set the ACKB bit in ICSR to 1 to set the acknowledge data for the final receive.
[8] Wait for at least 1 clock cycle after the IRIC flag is set to 1 and then wait for the rising edge
of the 1st clock cycle of the next receive data.
[9] Set the TSR bit in ICCR to 1 to switch from the receive mode to the transmit mode. The TSR
bit setting value at this point becomes valid when the rising edge of the next 9th clock cycle
is input.
[10] Read the ICDR receive data.
[11] Clear the IRTR flag to 0.
[12] The IRIC flag is set to 1 by the following two conditions.
1. The flag is set at the falling edge of the 8th clock cycle of the receive clock for 1 frame.
SCL is automatically held low, in synchronization with the internal clock, until the IRIC
flag is cleared.
2. The flag is set at the rising edge of the 9th clock cycle of the receive clock for 1 frame.
The IRIC flag and ICDRF flag are set to 1, indicating that reception of 1 frame of data has
ended. The master device continues to output the receive clock for the receive data.
[13] Read the IRTR flag in ICSR. If the IRTR flag value is 0, the wait state is cancelled by
clearing the IRIC flag as described in step [14] below. If the IRTR flag value is 1 and the
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 585 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
receive operation has finished, perform the issue stop condition processing described in step
[15] below.
[14] If the IRTR flag value is 0, clear the IRIC flag to 0 to cancel the wait state. Return to reading
the IRIC flag, as described in step [12], to detect the end of the receive operation.
[15] Clear the WAIT bit in ICMR to 0 to cancel the wait mode. Then clear the IRIC flag to 0. The
IRIC flag should be cleared when the value of WAIT is 0 (The stop condition may not be
output properly when the issue stop condition instruction is executed if the WAIT bit was
cleared to 0 after the IRIC flag is cleared to 0).
[16] Read the final receive data in ICDR.
[17] Write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high,
and generates the stop condition.
Master transmit mode
SCL
(master output)
9
SDA
(slave output)
A
Master receive mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2
Data 1
SDA
(master output)
7
8
9
Bit 1 Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3
[3]
Data 2
[3]
A
IRIC
IRTR
[4] IRTR = 0
ICDR
[4] IRTR = 1
Data 1
User processing
[2] ICDR read (dummy read)
[1] TRS cleared to 0
IRIC clearance
[6] IRIC clearance
(cancel wait)
[5] ICDR read
(data 1)
[6] IRIC clearance
Figure 15-12 Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing
(MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1)
Page 586 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
[8] 1 clock cycle wait time
SCL
(master output)
8
9
SDA
Bit 0
(slave output)
Data 2
[3]
SDA
(master output)
1
2
3
Stop condition
generated
4
5
6
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2
Data 3
[3]
7
8
9
Bit 1 Bit 0
[12]
[12]
A
A
IRIC
IRTR
[4] IRTR = 0
ICDR
[4] IRTR = 1
Data 1
User processing
[13] IRTR = 0
Data 2
Data 3
[11] IRIC clearance
[6] IRIC clearance
[10] ICDR read (data 2)
[9] TRS set to 1
[7] ACKB set to 1
[13] IRTR = 1
[14] IRIC clearance
[15] WAIT cleared to 0
IRIC clearance
[17] Stop condition
issued
[16] ICDR read (data 3)
Figure 15-13 Example of Master Receive Mode Stop Condition Generation Timing
(MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1)
15.3.5
Slave Receive Operation
In slave receive mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the
slave device returns an acknowledge signal.
The slave device compares its own address with the slave address in the first frame following the
establishment of the start condition issued by the master device. If the addresses match, the slave
device operates as the slave device designated by the master device.
Figure 15-14 is a flowchart showing an example of slave receive mode operation.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 587 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Start
Initialize
Set MST = 0
and TRS = 0 in ICCR
[1]
Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR
Read IRIC in ICCR
No
[2]
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Read AAS and ADZ in ICSR
AAS = 1
and ADZ = 0?
No
General call address processing
* Description omitted
Yes
Read TRS in ICCR
No
TRS = 0?
Slave transmit mode
Yes
Last receive?
No
Read ICDR
Yes
[3]
[1] Select slave receive mode
Clear IRIC in ICCR
[2] Wait for the first byte to be received (slave
address)
Read IRIC in ICCR
[3] Start receiving. The first read is a dummy read
No
[4]
IRIC = 1?
[4] Wait for the transfer to end
[5] Set acknowledge data for the last receive
Yes
[6] Start the last receive
[7] Wait for the transfer to end
Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR
[5]
Read ICDR
[6]
[8] Read the last receive data
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
No
[7]
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Read ICDR
[8]
Clear IRIC in ICCR
End
Figure 15-14 Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode (Example)
Page 588 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
The reception procedure and operations in slave receive mode are described below.
[1] Set the ICE bit in ICCR to 1. Set the MLS bit in ICMR and the MST and TRS bits in ICCR
according to the operating mode.
[2] When the start condition output by the master device is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is set
to 1.
[3] When the slave address matches in the first frame following the start condition, the device
operates as the slave device specified by the master device. If the 8th data bit (R/W) is 0, the
TRS bit in ICCR remains cleared to 0, and slave receive operation is performed.
[4] At the 9th clock pulse of the receive frame, the slave device drives SDA low and returns an
acknowledge signal. At the same time, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1. If the IEIC bit in
ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. If the RDRF internal flag has
been cleared to 0, it is set to 1, and the receive operation continues. If the RDRF internal flag
has been set to 1, the slave device drives SCL low from the fall of the receive clock until data
is read into ICDR.
[5] Read ICDR and clear the IRIC flag in ICCR to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0.
Receive operations can be performed continuously by repeating steps [4] and [5]. When SDA is
changed from low to high when SCL is high, and the stop condition is detected, the BBSY flag in
ICCR is cleared to 0.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 589 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Start condition issuance
SCL
(master output)
1
2
3
4
5
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
6
7
8
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
9
1
2
Bit 7
Bit 6
SCL
(slave output)
SDA
(master output)
SDA
(slave output)
Slave address
R/W
Data 1
[4]
A
RDRF
Interrupt
request
generation
IRIC
ICDRS
Address + R/W
ICDRR
Address + R/W
User processing
[5] ICDR read
[5] IRIC clearance
Figure 15-15 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1)
(MLS = ACKB = 0)
Page 590 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
SCL
(master output)
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
7
8
Bit 1
Bit 0
9
1
2
Bit 7
Bit 6
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
9
SCL
(slave output)
SDA
(master output)
Data 1
SDA
(slave output)
[4]
[4]
Data 2
A
A
RDRF
IRIC
Interrupt
request
generation
ICDRS
Data 1
ICDRR
Data 1
User processing
Interrupt
request
generation
Data 2
Data 2
[5] ICDR read [5] IRIC clearance
Figure 15-16 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2)
(MLS = ACKB = 0)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 591 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
15.3.6
Slave Transmit Operation
In slave transmit operation, the slave device compares its own address with the slave address
transmitted by the master device in the first frame (address receive frame) following detection of
the start condition. If the addresses match and the 8th bit (R/W) is set to 1 (read), the TRS bit in
ICCR is automatically set to 1 and slave transmit mode is activated.
Figure 15-17 is a flowchart showing an example of slave transmit mode operation.
Slave transmit mode
[1] Set transmit data for the second and
subsequent bytes
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Write transmit data in ICDR
[1]
[2] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted
[3] Test for end of transfer
Clear IRIC in ICCR
[4] Select slave receive mode
[5] Dummy read (to release the SCL line)
Read IRIC in ICCR
No
[2]
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Read ACKB in ICSR
No
[3]
End
of transmission
(ACKB = 1)?
Yes
Set TRS = 0 in ICCR
[4]
Read ICDR
[5]
Clear IRIC in ICCR
End
Figure 15-17 Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode (Example)
Page 592 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
In slave transmit mode, the slave device outputs the transmit data, while the master device outputs
the receive clock and returns an acknowledge signal. The transmission procedure and operations in
slave transmit mode are described below.
[1] Set the ICE bit in ICCR to 1. Set the MLS bit in ICMR and the MST and TRS bits in ICCR
according to the operating mode.
[2] When the slave address matches in the first frame following detection of the start condition,
the slave device drives SDA low at the 9th clock pulse and returns an acknowledge signal. At
the same time, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the CPU. If the 8th data bit (R/W) is 1, the TRS bit in ICCR is set to
1, and the mode changes to slave transmit mode automatically. The TDRF flag is set to 1. The
slave device drives SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until ICDR data is written.
[3] After clearing the IRIC flag to 0, write data to ICDR. The TDRE internal flag is cleared to 0.
The written data is transferred to ICDRS, and the TDRE internal flag and the IRIC and IRTR
flags are set to 1 again. After clearing the IRIC flag to 0, write the next data to ICDR. The
slave device sequentially sends the data written into ICDR in accordance with the clock output
by the master device at the timing shown in figure 15-18.
[4] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1 at the rise of
the 9th transmit clock pulse. If the TDRE internal flag has been set to 1, this slave device
drives SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until data is written to ICDR. The master
device drives SDA low at the 9th clock pulse, and returns an acknowledge signal. As this
acknowledge signal is stored in the ACKB bit in ICSR, this bit can be used to determine
whether the transfer operation was performed normally. When the TDRE internal flag is 0, the
data written into ICDR is transferred to ICDRS, transmission is started, and the TDRE internal
flag and the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1 again.
[5] To continue transmission, clear the IRIC flag to 0, then write the next data to be transmitted
into ICDR. The TDRE flag is cleared to 0.
Transmit operations can be performed continuously by repeating steps [4] and [5]. To end
transmission, write H'FF to ICDR to release SDA on the slave side. When SDA is changed from
low to high when SCL is high, and the stop condition is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is
cleared to 0.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 593 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Slave receive mode
SCL
(master output)
8
Slave transmit mode
9
1
2
A
Bit 7
Bit 6
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
9
1
2
Bit 7
Bit 6
SDA
(slave output)
SDA
(slave output)
SDA
(slave output) R/W
Data 1
[2]
Data 2
A
TDRE
[4]
Interrupt
request
generation
IRIC
ICDRT
Interrupt
request
generation
Data 2
Data 1
ICDRS
User processing
Interrupt
request
generation
Data 1
[3] IRIC
clearance
[3] ICDR
write
Data 2
[3] ICDR
write
[5] IRIC
clearance
[5] ICDR
write
Figure 15-18 Example of Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing
(MLS = 0)
Page 594 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
15.3.7
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control
The interrupt request flag (IRIC) is set at different times depending on the WAIT bit in ICMR, the
FS bit in SAR, and the FSX bit in SARX. If the TDRE or RDRF internal flag is set to 1, SCL is
automatically held low after one frame has been transferred; this timing is synchronized with the
internal clock. Figure 15-19 shows the IRIC set timing and SCL control.
(a) When WAIT = 0, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, no wait)
SCL
7
8
9
1
SDA
7
8
A
1
IRIC
User processing
Clear IRIC
Write to ICDR (transmit)
or read ICDR (receive)
(b) When WAIT = 1, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, wait inserted)
SCL
8
9
1
SDA
8
A
1
IRIC
Clear
IRIC
User processing
Clear Write to ICDR (transmit)
IRIC or read ICDR (receive)
(c) When FS = 1 and FSX = 1 (synchronous serial format)
SCL
7
8
1
SDA
7
8
1
IRIC
User processing
Clear IRIC
Write to ICDR (transmit)
or read ICDR (receive)
Figure 15-19 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 595 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
15.3.8
Operation Using the DTC
The I2C bus format provides for selection of the slave device and transfer direction by means of
the slave address and the R/W bit, confirmation of reception with the acknowledge bit, indication
of the last frame, and so on. Therefore, continuous data transfer using the DTC must be carried out
in conjunction with CPU processing by means of interrupts.
Table 15-5 shows some examples of processing using the DTC. These examples assume that the
number of transfer data bytes is known in slave mode.
Table 15-5 Examples of Operation Using the DTC
Master Receive
Mode
Slave Transmit
Mode
Slave Receive
Mode
Slave address + Transmission by
R/W bit
DTC (ICDR write)
transmission/
reception
Transmission by
CPU (ICDR write)
Reception by
CPU (ICDR read)
Reception by CPU
(ICDR read)
Dummy data
read
—
Processing by
CPU (ICDR read)
—
—
Actual data
transmission/
reception
Transmission by
DTC (ICDR write)
Reception by
DTC (ICDR read)
Transmission by
DTC (ICDR write)
Reception by DTC
(ICDR read)
Dummy data
(H'FF) write
—
—
Processing by
DTC (ICDR write)
—
Last frame
processing
Not necessary
Reception by
CPU (ICDR read)
Not necessary
Reception by CPU
(ICDR read)
Transfer request
processing after
last frame
processing
1st time: Clearing
by CPU
Not necessary
2nd time: End
condition issuance
by CPU
Automatic clearing Not necessary
on detection of end
condition during
transmission of
dummy data (H'FF)
Setting of
number of DTC
transfer data
frames
Transmission:
Reception: Actual
Actual data count data count
+ 1 (+1 equivalent
to slave address +
R/W bits)
Transmission:
Reception: Actual
Actual data count data count
+ 1 (+1 equivalent
to dummy data
(H'FF))
Item
Page 596 of 1458
Master Transmit
Mode
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
15.3.9
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Noise Canceler
The logic levels at the SCL and SDA pins are routed through noise cancelers before being latched
internally. Figure 15-20 shows a block diagram of the noise canceler circuit.
The noise canceler consists of two cascaded latches and a match detector. The SCL (or SDA)
input signal is sampled on the system clock, but is not passed forward to the next circuit unless the
outputs of both latches agree. If they do not agree, the previous value is held.
Sampling clock
C
SCL or
SDA input
signal
D
C
Q
Latch
D
Q
Latch
Match
detector
Internal
SCL or
SDA
signal
System clock
period
Sampling
clock
Figure 15-20 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler
15.3.10 Initialization of Internal State
The IIC has a function for forcible initialization of its internal state if a deadlock occurs during
communication.
Initialization is executed by (1) setting bits CLR3 to CLR0 in the DDCSWR register or (2)
clearing the ICE bit. For details of settings for bits CLR3 to CLR0, see section 15.2.8, DDC
Switch Register (DDCSWR).
Scope of Initialization: The initialization executed by this function covers the following items:
• TDRE and RDRF internal flags
• Transmit/receive sequencer and internal operating clock counter
• Internal latches for retaining the output state of the SCL and SDA pins (wait, clock, data
output, etc.)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 597 of 1458
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
The following items are not initialized:
• Actual register values (ICDR, SAR, SARX, ICMR, ICCR, ICSR, DDCSWR, and STCR)
• Internal latches used to retain register read information for setting/clearing flags in the ICMR,
ICCR, ICSR, and DDCSWR registers
• The value of the ICMR register bit counter (BC2 to BC0)
• Generated interrupt sources (interrupt sources transferred to the interrupt controller)
Notes on Initialization:
• Interrupt flags and interrupt sources are not cleared, and so flag clearing measures must be
taken as necessary.
• Basically, other register flags are not cleared either, and so flag clearing measures must be
taken as necessary.
• When initialization is performed by means of the DDCSWR register, the write data for bits
CLR3 to CLR0 is not retained. To perform IIC clearance, bits CLR3 to CLR0 must be written
to simultaneously using an MOV instruction. Do not use a bit manipulation instruction such as
BCLR. Similarly, when clearing is required again, all the bits must be written to
simultaneously in accordance with the setting.
• If a flag clearing setting is made during transmission/reception, the IIC module will stop
transmitting/receiving at that point and the SCL and SDA pins will be released. When
transmission/reception is started again, register initialization, etc., must be carried out as
necessary to enable correct communication as a system.
The value of the BBSY bit cannot be modified directly by this module clear function, but since the
stop condition pin waveform is generated according to the state and release timing of the SCL and
SDA pins, the BBSY bit may be cleared as a result. Similarly, state switching of other bits and
flags may also have an effect.
To prevent problems caused by these factors, the following procedure should be used when
initializing the IIC state.
1. Execute initialization of the internal state according to the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0, or
according to the ICE bit.
2. Execute a stop condition issuance instruction (write 0 to BBSY and SCP) to clear the BBST bit
to 0, and wait for two transfer rate clock cycles.
3. Re-execute initialization of the internal state according to the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0, or
according to the ICE bit.
4. Initialize (re-set) the IIC registers.
Page 598 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
15.4
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Usage Notes
• In master mode, if an instruction to generate a start condition is immediately followed by an
instruction to generate a stop condition, neither condition will be output correctly. To output
consecutive start and stop conditions, after issuing the instruction that generates the start
condition, read the relevant ports, check that SCL and SDA are both low, then issue the
instruction that generates the stop condition. Note that SCL may not yet have gone low when
BBSY is cleared to 0.
• Either of the following two conditions will start the next transfer. Pay attention to these
conditions when reading or writing to ICDR.
⎯ Write access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 1 (including automatic transfer from
ICDRT to ICDRS)
⎯ Read access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 0 (including automatic transfer from
ICDRS to ICDRR)
• Table 15-6 shows the timing of SCL and SDA output in synchronization with the internal
clock. Timings on the bus are determined by the rise and fall times of signals affected by the
bus load capacitance, series resistance, and parallel resistance.
Table 15-6 I2C Bus Timing (SCL and SDA Output)
Item
Symbol
SCL output cycle time
tSCLO
SCL output high pulse width
tSCLHO
SCL output low pulse width
tSCLLO
0.5 tSCLO
ns
SDA output bus free time
tBUFO
0.5 tSCLO – 1 tcyc
ns
Start condition output hold time
tSTAHO
0.5 tSCLO – 1 tcyc
ns
Retransmission start condition output
setup time
tSTASO
1 tSCLO
ns
Stop condition output setup time
tSTOSO
0.5 tSCLO + 2 tcyc
ns
Data output setup time (master)
tSDASO
1 tSCLLO – 3 tcyc
ns
Data output setup time (slave)
Data output hold time
Output Timing
Unit
Notes
28 tcyc to 256 tcyc
ns
0.5 tSCLO
ns
Figure 24-28
(reference)
1 tSCLL – 3 tcyc
tSDAHO
3 tcyc
ns
• SCL and SDA input is sampled in synchronization with the internal clock. The AC timing
therefore depends on the system clock cycle tcyc, as shown in tables 24-19, 24-31, 24-43 in
section 24, Electrical Characteristics. Note that the I2C bus interface AC timing specifications
will not be met with a system clock frequency of less than 5 MHz.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 599 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
• The I2C bus interface specification for the SCL rise time tsr is under 1000 ns (300 ns for highspeed mode). In master mode, the I2C bus interface monitors the SCL line and synchronizes
one bit at a time during communication. If tsr (the time for SCL to go from low to VIH) exceeds
the time determined by the input clock of the I2C bus interface, the high period of SCL is
extended. The SCL rise time is determined by the pull-up resistance and load capacitance of
the SCL line. To insure proper operation at the set transfer rate, adjust the pull-up resistance
and load capacitance so that the SCL rise time does not exceed the values given in the table
15-7.
Table 15-7 Permissible SCL Rise Time (tSr) Values
Time Indication
2
tcyc
IICX Indication
0
1
7.5 tcyc
17.5 tcyc
Standard
mode
High-speed
mode
Standard
mode
High-speed
mode
I C Bus
Specification φ =
(Max.)
5 MHz
φ=
8 MHz
φ=
10 MHz
φ=
φ=
16 MHz 20 MHz
1000 ns
1000 ns
937 ns
750 ns
468 ns
375 ns
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
1000 ns
1000 ns
1000 ns
1000 ns
1000 ns 875 ns
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
• The I2C bus interface specifications for the SCL and SDA rise and fall times are under 1000 ns
and 300 ns. The I2C bus interface SCL and SDA output timing is prescribed by tScyc and tcyc, as
shown in table 15-6. However, because of the rise and fall times, the I2C bus interface
specifications may not be satisfied at the maximum transfer rate. Table 15-8 shows output
timing calculations for different operating frequencies, including the worst-case influence of
rise and fall times.
tBUFO fails to meet the I2C bus interface specifications at any frequency. The solution is either
(a) to provide coding to secure the necessary interval (approximately 1 µs) between issuance of
a stop condition and issuance of a start condition, or (b) to select devices whose input timing
permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I2C bus.
tSCLLO in high-speed mode and tSTASO in standard mode fail to satisfy the I2C bus interface
specifications for worst-case calculations of tSr/tSf. Possible solutions that should be
investigated include (a) adjusting the rise and fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and
capacitive load, (b) reducing the transfer rate to meet the specifications, or (c) selecting devices
whose input timing permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I2C
bus.
Page 600 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Table 15-8 I2C Bus Timing (with Maximum Influence of tSr/tSf)
Time Indication (at Maximum Transfer Rate) [ns]
Item
tSCLHO
tSCLLO
tBUFO
tSTAHO
tSTASO
tSTOSO
tSDASO
I2C Bus
SpecifitSr/tSf
Influence cation
(Min.)
(Max.)
φ=
5 MHz
φ=
8 MHz
φ=
10 MHz
φ=
16 MHz
φ=
20 MHz
–1000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
High-speed –300
mode
600
950
950
950
950
950
Standard
mode
–250
4700
4750
4750
4750
4750
4750
High-speed –250
mode
1300
1000*1
1000*1
1000*1
1000*1
1000*1
0.5 tSCLO –
1 tcyc
( –tSr )
Standard
mode
4700
3800*1
3875*1
3900*1
3938*1
3950*1
High-speed –300
mode
1300
750*1
825*1
850*1
888*1
900*1
0.5 tSCLO –
1 tcyc
(–tSf )
Standard
mode
4000
4550
4625
4650
4688
4700
High-speed –250
mode
600
800
875
900
938
950
1 tSCLO
(–tSr )
Standard
mode
4700
9000
9000
9000
9000
9000
High-speed –300
mode
600
2200
2200
2200
2200
2200
Standard
mode
4000
4400
4250
4200
4125
4100
600
1350
1200
1150
1075
1050
1 tSCLLO*2 – Standard
–1000
mode
(–tSr )
High-speed –300
mode
250
3100
3325
3400
3513
3550
100
400
625
700
813
850
1 tSCLL*2 –
3 tcyc*2
(–tSr )
250
3100
3325
3400
3513
3550
100
400
625
700
813
850
tcyc
Indication
0.5 tSCLO
(–tSr)
0.5 tSCLO
(–tSf )
0.5 tSCLO +
2 tcyc
(–tSr )
Standard
mode
–1000
–250
–1000
–1000
High-speed –300
mode
(master) 3 tcyc
tSDASO
(slave)
Standard
mode
High-speed –300
mode
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
–1000
Page 601 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Time Indication (at Maximum Transfer Rate) [ns]
Item
tcyc
Indication
tSDAHO
3 tcyc
tSr/tSf
Influence
(Max.)
I2C Bus
Specification
(Min.)
φ=
5 MHz
φ=
8 MHz
φ=
10 MHz
φ=
16 MHz
φ=
20 MHz
0
0
600
375
300
188
150
High-speed 0
mode
0
600
375
300
188
150
Standard
mode
2
Notes: 1. Does not meet the I C bus interface specification. Remedial action such as the following
is necessary: (a) secure a start/stop condition issuance interval; (b) adjust the rise and
fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and capacitive load; (c) reduce the transfer rate;
(d) select slave devices whose input timing permits this output timing.
The values in the above table will vary depending on the settings of the IICX bit and bits
CKS0 to CKS2. Depending on the frequency it may not be possible to achieve the
2
maximum transfer rate; therefore, whether or not the I C bus interface specifications are
met must be determined in accordance with the actual setting conditions.
2
2. Calculated using the I C bus specification values (standard mode: 4700 ns min.; highspeed mode: 1300 ns min.).
• Note on ICDR Read at End of Master Reception
To halt reception at the end of a receive operation in master receive mode, set the TRS bit to 1
and write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is
high, and generates the stop condition. After this, receive data can be read by means of an
ICDR read, but if data remains in the buffer the ICDRS receive data will not be transferred to
ICDR, and so it will not be possible to read the second byte of data.
If it is necessary to read the second byte of data, issue the stop condition in master receive
mode (i.e. with the TRS bit cleared to 0). When reading the receive data, first confirm that the
BBSY bit in the ICCR register is cleared to 0, the stop condition has been generated, and the
bus has been released, then read the ICDR register with TRS cleared to 0.
Note that if the receive data (ICDR data) is read in the interval between execution of the
instruction for issuance of the stop condition (writing of 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR) and the
actual generation of the stop condition, the clock may not be output correctly in subsequent
master transmission.
Clearing of the MST bit after completion of master transmission/reception, or other
modifications of IIC control bits to change the transmit/receive operating mode or settings,
must be carried out during interval (a) in figure 15-18 (after confirming that the BBSY bit has
been cleared to 0 in the ICCR register).
Page 602 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
Stop condition
Start condition
(a)
SDA
Bit 0
A
SCL
8
9
Internal clock
BBSY bit
Master receive mode
ICDR reading
prohibited
Execution of stop
condition issuance
instruction
(0 written to BBSY
and SCP)
Confirmation of stop
condition generation
(0 read from BBSY)
Start condition
issuance
Figure 15-21 Points for Attention Concerning Reading of Master Receive Data
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 603 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
• Notes on Start Condition Issuance for Retransmission
Figure 15-22 shows the timing of start condition issuance for retransmission, and the timing
for subsequently writing data to ICDR, together with the corresponding flowchart.
[1] Wait for end of 1-byte transfer
IRIC = 1 ?
No
[1]
[2] Determine whether SCL is low
Yes
Clear IRIC in ICSR
Start condition
issuance?
[3] Issue restart condition instruction for retransmission
[4] Determine whether SCL is high
No
Other processing
[5] Set transmit data (slave address + R/W)
Yes
SCL = Low ?
Note: Program so that processing from [3] to [5] is
executed continuously.
[2]
Read SCL pin
No
Yes
Write BBSY = 1,
SCP = 0 (ICSR)
[3]
Read SCL pin
SCL = High ?
No
[4]
Yes
Write transmit data to ICDR
[5]
SCL
SDA
ACK
Bit 7
Start condition
(retransmission)
IRIC
[1] IRIC determination
[2] Determination
of SCL = low
[4] Determination
of SCL = high
[5] ICDR write
[3] Start condition
instruction issuance
Figure 15-22 Flowchart and Timing of Start Condition Instruction Issuance for
Retransmission
Page 604 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
• Notes on I2C Bus Interface Stop Condition Instruction Issuance
If the rise time of the 9th SCL acknowledge exceeds the specification because the bus load
capacitance is large, or if there is a slave device of the type that drives SCL low to effect a
wait, issue the stop condition instruction after reading SCL and determining it to be low, as
shown below.
9th clock
VIH
SCL
High period secured
As waveform rise is late,
SCL is detected as low
SDA
Stop condition
IRIC
[1] Determination of SCL = low
[2] Stop condition instruction issuance
Figure 15-23 Timing of Stop Condition Issuance
• Notes on IRIC Flag Clearance when Using Wait Function
If the SCL rise time exceeds the designated duration or if the slave device is of the type that
keeps SCL low and applies a wait state when the wait function is used in the master mode of
the I2C bus interface, read SCL and clear the IRIC flag after determining that SCL has gone
low, as shown below.
Clearing the IRIC flag to 0 when WAIT is set to 1 and SCL is being held at high level can
cause the SDA value to change before SCL goes low, resulting in a start condition or stop
condition being generated erroneously.
VIH
SCL
SCL = high duration
maintained
SCL = low detected
SDA
IRIC
[1] Judgement that SCL = low [2] IRIC clearance
Figure 15-24 IRIC Flag Clearance in WAIT = 1 Status
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 605 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
• Notes on ICDR Reads and ICCR Access in Slave Transmit Mode
In a transmit operation in the slave mode of the I2C bus interface, do not read the ICDR
register or read or write to the ICCR register during the period indicated by the shaded portion
in figure 15-25.
Normally, when interrupt processing is triggered in synchronization with the rising edge of the
9th clock cycle, the period in question has already elapsed when the transition to interrupt
processing takes place, so there is no problem with reading the ICDR register or reading or
writing to the ICCR register.
To ensure that the interrupt processing is performed properly, one of the following two
conditions should be applied.
(1) Make sure that reading received data from the ICDR register, or reading or writing to the
ICCR register, is completed before the next slave address receive operation starts.
(2) Monitor the BC2 to BC0 counter in the ICMR register and, when the value of BC2 to BC0
is 000 (8th or 9th clock cycle), allow a waiting time of at least 2 transfer clock cycles in
order to involve the problem period in question before reading from the ICDR register, or
reading or writing to the ICCR register.
Waveforms if
problem occurs
SDA
R/W
SCL
8
A
9
Address received
TRS
Bit 7
Data transmission
Period when ICDR reads and ICCR
reads and writes are prohibited
(6 system clock cycles)
ICDR write
Detection of 9th clock
cycle rising edge
Figure 15-25 ICDR Read and ICCR Access Timing in Slave Transmit Mode
Page 606 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
• Notes on TRS Bit Setting in Slave Mode
From the detection of the rising edge of the 9th clock cycle or of a stop condition to when the
rising edge of the next SCL pin signal is detected (the period indicated as (a) in figure 15-26)
in the slave mode of the I2C bus interface, the value set in the TRS bit in the ICCR register is
effective immediately.
However, at other times (indicated as (b) in figure 15-26) the value set in the TRS bit is put on
hold until the next rising edge of the 9th clock cycle or stop condition is detected, rather than
taking effect immediately.
This results in the actual internal value of the TRS bit remaining 1 (transmit mode) and no
acknowledge bit being sent at the 9th clock cycle address receive completion in the case of an
address receive operation following a restart condition input with no stop condition
intervening.
When receiving an address in the slave mode, clear the TRS bit to 0 during the period
indicated as (a) in figure 15-26.
To cancel the holding of the SCL bit low by the wait function in the slave mode, clear the TRS
bit to 0 and then perform a dummy read of the ICDR register.
Restart condition
(b)
(a)
A
SDA
SCL
TRS
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Address reception
Data transmission
TRS bit setting hold time
ICDR dummy read
TRS bit set
Detection of 9th clock
cycle rising edge
Detection of 9th clock
cycle rising edge
Figure 15-26 TRS Bit Setting Timing in Slave Mode
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 607 of 1458
2
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
• Notes on ICDR Reads in Transmit Mode and ICDR Writes in Receive Mode
When attempting to read ICDR in the transmit mode (TRS = 1) or write to ICDR in the receive
mode (TRS = 0) under certain conditions, the SCL pin may not be held low after the
completion of the transmit or receive operation and a clock may not be output to the SCL bus
line before the ICDR register access operation can take place properly.
When accessing ICDR, always change the setting to the transmit mode before performing a
read operation, and always change the setting to the receive mode before performing a write
operation.
• Notes on ACKE Bit and TRS Bit in Slave Mode
When using the I2C bus interface, if an address is received in the slave mode immediately after
1 is received as an acknowledge bit (ACKB = 1) in the transmit mode (TRS = 1), an interrupt
may be generated at the rising edge of the 9th clock cycle if the address does not match.
When performing slave mode operations using the IIC bus interface module, make sure to do
the following.
(1) When a 1 is received as an acknowledge bit for the final transmit data after completing a
series of transmit operations, clear the ACKE bit in the ICCR register to 0 to initialize the
ACKB bit to 0.
(2) In the slave mode, change the setting to the receive mode (TRS = 0) before the start
condition is input. To ensure that the switch from the slave transmit mode to the slave
receive mode is accomplished properly, end the transmission as described in figure 15-17.
• Notes on Arbitration Lost in Master Mode
The I2C bus interface recognizes the data in transmit/receive frame as an address when
arbitration is lost in master mode and a transition to slave receive mode is automatically
carried out.
When arbitration is lost not in the first frame but in the second frame or subsequent frame,
transmit/receive data that is not an address is compared with the value set in the SAR or SARX
register as an address. If the receive data matches with the address in the SAR or SARX
register, the I2C bus interface erroneously recognizes that the address call has occurred. (See
figure 15-27.)
In multi-master mode, a bus conflict could happen. When The I2C bus interface is operated in
master mode, check the state of the AL bit in the ICSR register every time after one frame of
data has been transmitted or received.
When arbitration is lost during transmitting the second frame or subsequent frame, take
avoidance measures.
Page 608 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
• Arbitration is lost
• The AL flag in ICSR is set to 1
I2C
bus interface
(Master transmit mode)
S
SLA
R/W A
DATA1
Transmit data match
Transmit timing match
Other device
(Master transmit mode)
S
SLA
R/W A
Transmit data does not match
DATA2
A
DATA3
A
Data contention
I2C bus interface
(Slave receive mode)
S
SLA
R/W A
• Receive address is ignored
SLA
R/W
A
DATA4
A
• Automatically transferred to slave
receive mode
• Receive data is recognized as an
address
• When the receive data matches to
the address set in the SAR or SARX
register, the I2C bus interface operates
as a slave device.
Figure 15-27 Diagram of Erroneous Operation when Arbitration is Lost
Though it is prohibited in the normal I2C protocol, the same problem may occur when the
MST bit is erroneously set to 1 and a transition to master mode is occurred during data
transmission or reception in slave mode. In multi-master mode, pay attention to the setting of
the MST bit when a bus conflict may occur. In this case, the MST bit in the ICCR register
should be set to 1 according to the order below.
(a) Make sure that the BBSY flag in the ICCR register is 0 and the bus is free before setting
the MST bit.
(b) Set the MST bit to 1.
(c) To confirm that the bus was not entered to the busy state while the MST bit is being set,
check that the BBSY flag in the ICCR register is 0 immediately after the MST bit has been
set.
• Notes on Wait Operation in Master Mode
During master mode operation using the wait function, when the interrupt flag IRIC bit is
cleared from 1 to 0 between the falling edge of the 7th clock cycle and the falling edge of the
8th clock cycle, in some cases no wait is inserted after the falling edge of the 8th clock cycle
and the clock pulse of the 9th clock cycle is output continuously.
Observe the following with regard to clearing the IRIC flag while using the wait function.
At the rising edge of the 9th clock cycle, set the IRIC flag to 1 and then clear it to zero before
the rising edge of the 1st clock cycle (while the value of the BC2 to BC0 counter value is 2 or
greater).
If clearing of the IRIC flag is delayed by interrupt processing or the like and the BC counter
value reaches 1 or 0, confirm that the SCL pin state is low-level after the BC2 to BC0 counter
has reached 0 and then clear the IRIC flag. (See figure 15.28.)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 609 of 1458
2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 15 I C Bus Interface [Option]
(Only for the H8S/2638, H8S/2639, and H8S/2630)
SDA
A
SCL
9
BC2 to BC0
0
A
Transit/receive data
1
2
7
3
6
4
5
5
4
6
3
8 Confirm SCL pin
7
2
Transit/receive data
is low-level.
1
9
1
2
7
6
5
Clear IRIC when
BC2 to BC0 ≥ 2.
Clear IRIC.
IRIC
(operation example)
IRIC flag can be cleared.
3
IRIC flag can be cleared.
IRIC flag cannot be cleared.
Figure 15-28 Timing of IRIC Flag Clearing During Wait Operation
Page 610 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Notes: The H8S/2635 Group is not equipped with a DTC.
Only a single HCAN channel, HCAN0, is implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
16.1
Overview
The HCAN is a module for controlling a controller area network (CAN) for realtime
communication in vehicular and industrial equipment systems, etc. The chip has a 2-channel onchip HCAN module.
Reference: Bosch CAN Specification Version 2.0, 1991, Robert Bosch GmbH
16.1.1
Features
• CAN version: Bosch 2.0B active compatible
⎯ Communication systems:
NRZ (Non-Return to Zero) system (with bit-stuffing function)
Broadcast communication system
⎯ Transmission path: Bidirectional 2-wire serial communication
⎯ Communication speed: Max. 1 Mbps
⎯ Data length: 0 to 8 bytes
• Number of channel: 2 (HCAN0, HCAN1)
• Data buffers: 16 per channel (one receive-only buffer and 15 buffers settable for
transmission/reception)
• Data transmission: Choice of two methods:
⎯ Mailbox (buffer) number order (low-to-high)
⎯ Message priority (identifier) high-to-low order
• Data reception: Two methods:
⎯ Message identifier match (transmit/receive-setting buffers)
⎯ Reception with message identifier masked (receive-only)
• CPU interrupts: Two interrupt vectors for 12 interrupt causes per channel:
⎯ Error interrupt
⎯ Reset processing interrupt
⎯ Message reception interrupt (mailbox 1 to 15)
⎯ Message reception interrupt (mailbox 0)
⎯ Message transmission interrupt
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 611 of 1458
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
• HCAN operating modes: Support for various modes:
⎯ Hardware reset
⎯ Software reset
⎯ Normal status (error-active, error-passive)
⎯ Bus off status
⎯ HCAN configuration mode
⎯ HCAN sleep mode
⎯ HCAN halt mode
• Other features: DTC can be activated by message reception mailbox (HCAN mailbox 0 only)
Page 612 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
16.1.2
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Block Diagram
Figure 16-1 shows a block diagram of the HCAN.
HCAN0
MBI
Message buffer
Mailboxes
Message control
Message data
MC0 to MC15, MD0 to MD15
LAFM
(CDLC)
CAN
Data Link Controller
Bosch CAN 2.0B active
Tx buffer
Peripheral data bus
Peripheral address bus
MPI
Microprocessor interface
Rx buffer
HTxD0
HRxD0
CPU interface
Control register
Status register
HCAN1
MBI
Message buffer
Mailboxes
Message control
Message data
MC0 to MC15, MD0 to MD15
LAFM
(CDLC)
CAN
Data Link Controller
Bosch CAN 2.0B active
Tx buffer
MPI
Microprocessor interface
Rx buffer
HTxD1
HRxD1
CPU interface
Control register
Status register
Figure 16-1 HCAN Block Diagram
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 613 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Message Buffer Interface (MBI): The MBI, consisting of mailboxes and a local acceptance filter
mask (LAFM), stores CAN transmit/receive messages (identifiers, data, etc.). Transmit messages
are written by the CPU. For receive messages, the data received by the CDLC is stored
automatically.
Microprocessor Interface (MPI): The MPI, consisting of a bus interface, control register, status
register, etc., controls HCAN internal data, statuses, and so forth.
CAN Data Link Controller (CDLC): The CDLC performs transmission and reception of
messages conforming to the Bosch CAN Ver. 2.0B active standard (data frames, remote frames,
error frames, overload frames, inter-frame spacing), as well as CRC checking, bus arbitration, and
other functions.
16.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 16-1 shows the HCAN’s pins.
When using HCAN pins, settings must be made in the HCAN configuration mode (during
initialization: MCR0 = 1 and GSR3 = 1).
Table 16-1 HCAN Pins
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
Input/Output
Function
0
HCAN transmit data pin 0
HTxD0
Output
Channel 0 CAN bus
transmission pin
HCAN receive data pin 0
HRxD0
Input
Channel 0 CAN bus
reception pin
HCAN transmit data pin 1
HTxD1
Output
Channel 1 CAN bus
transmission pin
HCAN receive data pin 1
HRxD1
Input
Channel 1 CAN bus
reception pin
1*
Note: * The HCAN1 is not supported by the H8S/2635 Group.
A bus driver is necessary between the pins and the CAN bus. A HA13721 compatible model is
recommended.
Page 614 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
16.1.4
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Register Configuration
Table 16-2 lists the HCAN’s registers.
Table 16-2 HCAN Registers
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial
Value
Address*
Access Size
0
Master control register
MCR
R/W
H'01
H'F800
8 bits 16 bits
General status register
GSR
R/W
H'0C
H'F801
8 bits
Bit configuration register
BCR
R/W
H'0000 H'F802
8/16 bits
Mailbox configuration register
MBCR
R/W
H'0100 H'F804
8/16 bits
Transmit wait register
TXPR
R/W
H'0000 H'F806
8/16 bits
Transmit wait cancel register
TXCR
R/W
H'0000 H'F808
8/16 bits
Transmit acknowledge register
TXACK
R/W
H'0000 H'F80A
8/16 bits
Abort acknowledge register
ABACK
R/W
H'0000 H'F80C
8/16 bits
Receive complete register
RXPR
R/W
H'0000 H'F80E
8/16 bits
Remote request register
RFPR
R/W
H'0000 H'F810
8/16 bits
Interrupt register
IRR
R/W
H'0100 H'F812
8/16 bits
Mailbox interrupt mask register
MBIMR
R/W
H'FFFF H'F814
8/16 bits
Interrupt mask register
IMR
R/W
H'FEFF H'F816
8/16 bits
Receive error counter
REC
R
H'00
H'F818
8 bits 16 bits
Transmit error counter
TEC
R
H'00
H'F819
8 bits
Unread message status register
UMSR
R/W
H'0000 H'F81A
8/16 bits
Local acceptance filter mask L
LAFML
R/W
H'0000 H'F81C
8/16 bits
Local acceptance filter mask H
LAFMH
R/W
H'0000 H'F81E
8/16 bits
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
1
Page 615 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Channel Name
Abbreviation R/W
Initial
Value
Access
1
Address* Size
0
Message control 0 [1:8]
MC0 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F820
8/16 bits
Message control 1 [1:8]
MC1 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F828
8/16 bits
Message control 2 [1:8]
MC2 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F830
8/16 bits
Message control 3 [1:8]
MC3 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F838
8/16 bits
Message control 4 [1:8]
MC4 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F840
8/16 bits
Message control 5 [1:8]
MC5 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F848
8/16 bits
Message control 6 [1:8]
MC6 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F850
8/16 bits
Message control 7 [1:8]
MC7 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F858
8/16 bits
Message control 8 [1:8]
MC8 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F860
8/16 bits
Message control 9 [1:8]
MC9 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F868
8/16 bits
Message control 10 [1:8]
MC10 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F870
8/16 bits
Message control 11 [1:8]
MC11 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F878
8/16 bits
Message control 12 [1:8]
MC12 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F880
8/16 bits
Message control 13 [1:8]
MC13 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F888
8/16 bits
Message control 14 [1:8]
MC14 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F890
8/16 bits
Message control 15 [1:8]
MC15 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F898
8/16 bits
Message data 0 [1:8]
MD0 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8B0
8/16 bits
Message data 1 [1:8]
MD1 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8B8
8/16 bits
Message data 2 [1:8]
MD2 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8C0
8/16 bits
Message data 3 [1:8]
MD3 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8C8
8/16 bits
Message data 4 [1:8]
MD4 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8D0
8/16 bits
Message data 5 [1:8]
MD5 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8D8
8/16 bits
Message data 6 [1:8]
MD6 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8E0
8/16 bits
Message data 7 [1:8]
MD7 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8E8
8/16 bits
Message data 8 [1:8]
MD8 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8F0
8/16 bits
Message data 9 [1:8]
MD9 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8F8
8/16 bits
Message data 10 [1:8]
MD10 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F900
8/16 bits
Message data 11 [1:8]
MD11 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F908
8/16 bits
Message data 12 [1:8]
MD12 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F910
8/16 bits
Message data 13 [1:8]
MD13 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F918
8/16 bits
Message data 14 [1:8]
MD14 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F920
8/16 bits
Message data 15 [1:8]
MD15 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F928
8/16 bits
Page 616 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Channel
2
1*
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial
Value
1
Address*
Access Size
Master control register
MCR
R/W
H'01
H'FA00
8 bits 16 bits
General status register
GSR
R/W
H'0C
H'FA01
8 bits
Bit configuration register
BCR
R/W
H'0000 H'FA02
8/16 bits
Mailbox configuration register
MBCR
R/W
H'0100 H'FA04
8/16 bits
Transmit wait register
TXPR
R/W
H'0000 H'FA06
8/16 bits
Transmit wait cancel register
TXCR
R/W
H'0000 H'FA08
8/16 bits
Transmit acknowledge register
TXACK
R/W
H'0000 H'FA0A
8/16 bits
Abort acknowledge register
ABACK
R/W
H'0000 H'FA0C
8/16 bits
Receive complete register
RXPR
R/W
H'0000 H'FA0E
8/16 bits
Remote request register
RFPR
R/W
H'0000 H'FA10
8/16 bits
Interrupt register
IRR
R/W
H'0100 H'FA12
8/16 bits
Mailbox interrupt mask register
MBIMR
R/W
H'FFFF H'FA14
8/16 bits
Interrupt mask register
IMR
R/W
H'FEFF H'FA16
8/16 bits
Receive error counter
REC
R
H'00
H'FA18
8 bits 16 bits
Transmit error counter
TEC
R
H'00
H'FA19
8 bits
Unread message status register
UMSR
R/W
H'0000 H'FA1A
8/16 bits
Local acceptance filter mask L
LAFML
R/W
H'0000 H'FA1C
8/16 bits
Local acceptance filter mask H
LAFMH
R/W
H'0000 H'FA1E
8/16 bits
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Page 617 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Access
1
Address* Size
MC0 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA20
8/16 bits
Message control 1 [1:8]
MC1 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA28
8/16 bits
Message control 2 [1:8]
MC2 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA30
8/16 bits
Message control 3 [1:8]
MC3 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA38
8/16 bits
Message control 4 [1:8]
MC4 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA40
8/16 bits
Message control 5 [1:8]
MC5 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA48
8/16 bits
Message control 6 [1:8]
MC6 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA50
8/16 bits
Message control 7 [1:8]
MC7 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA58
8/16 bits
Message control 8 [1:8]
MC8 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA60
8/16 bits
All
Abbreviation R/W
Initial
Value
Channel Name
2
1*
Message control 0 [1:8]
Message control 9 [1:8]
MC9 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA68
8/16 bits
Message control 10 [1:8]
MC10 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA70
8/16 bits
Message control 11 [1:8]
MC11 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA78
8/16 bits
Message control 12 [1:8]
MC12 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA80
8/16 bits
Message control 13 [1:8]
MC13 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA88
8/16 bits
Message control 14 [1:8]
MC14 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA90
8/16 bits
Message control 15 [1:8]
MC15 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FA98
8/16 bits
Message data 0 [1:8]
MD0 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FAB0
8/16 bits
Message data 1 [1:8]
MD1 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FAB8
8/16 bits
Message data 2 [1:8]
MD2 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FAC0
8/16 bits
Message data 3 [1:8]
MD3 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FAC8
8/16 bits
Message data 4 [1:8]
MD4 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FAD0
8/16 bits
Message data 5 [1:8]
MD5 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FAD8
8/16 bits
Message data 6 [1:8]
MD6 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FAE0
8/16 bits
Message data 7 [1:8]
MD7 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FAE8
8/16 bits
Message data 8 [1:8]
MD8 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FAF0
8/16 bits
Message data 9 [1:8]
MD9 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FAF8
8/16 bits
Message data 10 [1:8]
MD10 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FB00
8/16 bits
Message data 11 [1:8]
MD11 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FB08
8/16 bits
Message data 12 [1:8]
MD12 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FB10
8/16 bits
Message data 13 [1:8]
MD13 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FB18
8/16 bits
Message data 14 [1:8]
MD14 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FB20
8/16 bits
Message data 15 [1:8]
MD15 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'FB28
8/16 bits
Module stop control register C
MSTPCRC
R/W
H'FF
H'FDEA
8/16 bits
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. The HCAN1 is not supported by the H8S/2635 Group.
Page 618 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2
Register Descriptions
16.2.1
Master Control Register (MCR)
The master control register (MCR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the CAN
interface.
MCR
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MCR7
—
MCR5
—
—
MCR2
MCR1
MCR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit 7—HCAN Sleep Mode Release (MCR7): Enables or disables HCAN sleep mode release by
bus operation.
Bit 7: MCR7
Description
0
HCAN sleep mode release by CAN bus operation disabled
1
HCAN sleep mode release by CAN bus operation enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Reserved: This bit always reads 0. The write value should always be 0.
Bit 5—HCAN Sleep Mode (MCR5): Enables or disables HCAN sleep mode transition.
Bit 5: MCR5
Description
0
HCAN sleep mode released
1
Transition to HCAN sleep mode enabled
(Initial value)
Bits 4 and 3—Reserved: These bits always read 0. The write value should always be 0.
Bit 2—Message Transmission Method (MCR2): Selects the transmission method for transmit
messages.
Bit 2: MCR2
Description
0
Transmission order determined by message identifier priority (Initial value)
1
Transmission order determined by mailbox (buffer) number priority
(TXPR1 > TXPR15)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 619 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 1—Halt Request (MCR1): Controls halting of the HCAN module.
Bit 1: MCR1
Description
0
HCAN normal operating mode
1
HCAN halt mode transition request
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Reset Request (MCR0): Controls resetting of the HCAN module.
Bit 0: MCR0
Description
0
Normal operating mode (MCR0 = 0 and GSR3 = 0)
[Setting condition]
•
1
When 0 is written after an HCAN reset
HCAN reset mode transition request
(Initial value)
In order for GSR3 to change from 1 to 0 after 0 is written to MCR0, time is required before the
HCAN is internally reset. There is consequently a delay before GSR3 is cleared to 0 after MCR0
is cleared to 0.
16.2.2
General Status Register (GSR)
The general status register (GSR) is an 8-bit readable register that indicates the status of the CAN
bus.
GSR
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
GSR3
GSR2
GSR1
GSR0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: These bits always read 0.
Page 620 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 3—Reset Status Bit (GSR3): Indicates whether the HCAN module is in the normal operating
state or the reset state. Writes are invalid.
Bit 3: MCR3
Description
0
Normal operating state
[Setting condition]
•
1
After an HCAN internal reset
Configuration mode
[Reset condition]
•
MCR0 reset mode and sleep mode
(Initial value)
Bit 2—Message Transmission Status Flag (GSR2): Flag that indicates whether the module is
currently in the message transmission period. The “message transmission period” is the period
from the start of message transmission (SOF) until the end of a 3-bit intermission interval after
EOF (End of Frame). Writes are invalid.
Bit 2: GSR2
Description
0
Message transmission period
1
[Reset condition]
•
(Initial value)
Idle period
Bit 1—Transmit/Receive Warning Flag (GSR1): Flag that indicates an error warning. Writes
are invalid.
Bit 1: GSR1
Description
0
[Reset condition]
•
1
When TEC < 96 and REC < 96 or TEC ≥ 256
(Initial value)
When TEC ≥ 96 or REC ≥ 96
Bit 0—Bus Off Flag (GSR0): Flag that indicates the bus off state. Writes are invalid.
Bit 0: GSR0
Description
0
[Reset condition]
•
1
(Initial value)
When TEC ≥ 256 (bus off state)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Recovery from bus off state
Page 621 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.3
Bit Configuration Register (BCR)
The bit configuration register (BCR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used to set CAN
bit timing parameters and the baud rate prescaler.
BCR
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BCR7
BCR6
BCR5
BCR4
BCR3
BCR2
BCR1
BCR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BCR15
BCR14
BCR13
BCR12
BCR11
BCR10
BCR9
BCR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 15 and 14—Resynchronization Jump Width (SJW): These bits set the bit synchronization
range.
Bit 15:
BCR7
Bit 14:
BCR6
Description
0
0
Bit synchronization width = 1 time quantum
1
Bit synchronization width = 2 time quanta
1
0
Bit synchronization width = 3 time quanta
1
Bit synchronization width = 4 time quanta
(Initial value)
Bits 13 to 8—Baud Rate Prescaler (BRP): These bits are used to set the CAN bus baud rate.
Bit 13:
BCR5
Bit 12:
BCR4
Bit 11:
BCR3
Bit 10:
BCR2
Bit 9:
BCR1
Bit 8:
BCR0
Description
0
0
0
0
0
0
2 × system clock
0
0
0
0
0
1
4 × system clock
0
0
0
0
1
0
6 × system clock
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
1
1
1
1
1
1
Page 622 of 1458
(Initial value)
⋅
⋅
⋅
128 × system clock
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 7—Bit Sample Point (BSP): Sets the point at which data is sampled.
Bit 7: BCR15
Description
0
Bit sampling at one point (end of time segment 1 (TSEG1))
1
Bit sampling at three points (end of time segment 1 (TSEG1) and preceding
and following time quanta)
(Initial value)
Bits 6 to 4—Time Segment 2 (TSEG2): These bits are used to set the segment for correcting 1bit time error. A value from 2 to 8 can be set.
Bit 6:
BCR14
Bit 5:
BCR13
Bit 4:
BCR12
Description
0
0
0
Setting prohibited
1
TSEG2 = 2 time quanta
1
0
TSEG2 = 3 time quanta
1
TSEG2 = 4 time quanta
0
0
TSEG2 = 5 time quanta
1
TSEG2 = 6 time quanta
0
TSEG2 = 7 time quanta
1
TSEG2 = 8 time quanta
1
1
(Initial value)
Bits 3 to 0—Time Segment 1 (TSEG1): These bits are used to set the segment for absorbing
output buffer, CAN bus, and input buffer delay. A value from 1 to 16 can be set.
Bit 3:
BCR11
Bit 2:
BCR10
Bit 1:
BCR9
Bit 0:
BCR8
Description
0
0
0
0
Setting prohibited
0
0
0
1
Setting prohibited
0
0
1
0
Setting prohibited
0
0
1
1
TSEG1 = 4 time quanta
0
1
0
0
TSEG1 = 5 time quanta
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
1
1
1
1
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
(Initial value)
⋅
⋅
⋅
TSEG1 = 16 time quanta
Page 623 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.4
Mailbox Configuration Register (MBCR)
The mailbox configuration register (MBCR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used to set
mailbox (buffer) transmission/reception.
MBCR
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
MBCR7
MBCR6
MBCR5
MBCR4
MBCR3
MBCR2
MBCR1
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MBCR9
MBCR8
MBCR15 MBCR14 MBCR13 MBCR12 MBCR11 MBCR10
Initial value:
R/W:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 15 to 9 and 7 to 0—Mailbox Setting Register (MBCR7 to MBCR1, MBCR15 to
MBCR8): These bits set the polarity of the corresponding mailboxes.
Bit y: MBCRx
Description
0
Corresponding mailbox is set for transmission
1
Corresponding mailbox is set for reception
(Initial value)
(x = 15 to 1, y = 15 to 9 and 7 to 0)
Bit 8—Reserved: This bit always reads 1. The write value should always be 1.
Page 624 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
16.2.5
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Transmit Wait Register (TXPR)
The transmit wait register (TXPR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used to set a
transmit wait after a transmit message is stored in a mailbox (buffer) (CAN bus arbitration wait).
TXPR
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
TXPR7
TXPR6
TXPR5
TXPR4
TXPR3
TXPR2
TXPR1
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
TXPR15 TXPR14 TXPR13 TXPR12 TXPR11 TXPR10 TXPR9
Initial value:
R/W:
TXPR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 15 to 9 and 7 to 0—Transmit Wait Register (TXPR7 to TXPR1, TXPR15 to TXPR8):
These bits set a transmit wait for the corresponding mailboxes.
Bit y: TXPRx
Description
0
Transmit message idle state in corresponding mailbox
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Message transmission completion and cancellation completion
Transmit message transmit wait in corresponding mailbox (CAN bus
arbitration)
(x = 15 to 1, y = 15 to 9 and 7 to 0)
Bit 8—Reserved: This bit always reads 0. The write value should always be 0.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 625 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.6
Transmit Wait Cancel Register (TXCR)
The transmit wait cancel register (TXCR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that controls
cancellation of transmit wait messages in mailboxes (buffers).
TXCR
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
TXCR7
TXCR6
TXCR5
TXCR4
TXCR3
TXCR2
TXCR1
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
TXCR15 TXCR14 TXCR13 TXCR12 TXCR11 TXCR10 TXCR9
Initial value:
R/W:
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TXCR8
0
0
R/W
R/W
(x = 15 to 9, 7 to 0)
Bits 15 to 9 and 7 to 0—Transmit Wait Cancel Register (TXCR7 to TXCR1, TXCR15 to
TXCR8): These bits control cancellation of transmit wait messages in the corresponding HCAN
mailboxes.
Bit y: TXCRx
Description
0
Transmit message cancellation idle state in corresponding mailbox
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Completion of TXPR clearing (when transmit message is canceled
normally)
TXPR cleared for corresponding mailbox (transmit message cancellation)
(x = 15 to 1, y = 15 to 9 and 7 to 0)
Bit 8—Reserved: This bit always reads 0. The write value should always be 0.
Page 626 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
16.2.7
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Transmit Acknowledge Register (TXACK)
The transmit acknowledge register (TXACK) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing
status flags that indicate normal transmission of mailbox (buffer) transmit messages.
TXACK
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
TXACK7
TXACK6
TXACK5
TXACK4
TXACK3
TXACK2
TXACK1
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
TXACK15 TXACK14 TXACK13 TXACK12 TXACK11 TXACK10 TXACK9
Initial value:
R/W:
TXACK8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Note: * Only a write of 1 is permitted, to clear the flag.
Bits 15 to 9 and 7 to 0—Transmit Acknowledge Register (TXACK7 to TXACK1, TXACK15
to TXACK8): These bits indicate that a transmit message in the corresponding HCAN mailbox
has been transmitted normally.
Bit y: TXACKx
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Writing 1
(Initial value)
Completion of message transmission for corresponding mailbox
(x = 15 to 1, y = 15 to 9 and 7 to 0)
Bit 8—Reserved: This bit always reads 0. The write value should always be 0.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 627 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.8
Abort Acknowledge Register (ABACK)
The abort acknowledge register (ABACK) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing status
flags that indicate normal cancellation (aborting) of a mailbox (buffer) transmit messages.
ABACK
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ABACK7 ABACK6 ABACK5 ABACK4 ABACK3 ABACK2 ABACK1
Initial value:
R/W:
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit:
ABACK15 ABACK14 ABACK13 ABACK12 ABACK11 ABACK10 ABACK9 ABACK8
Initial value:
R/W:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Note: * Only a write of 1 is permitted, to clear the flag.
Bits 15 to 9 and 7 to 0—Abort Acknowledge Register (ABACK7 to ABACK1, ABACK15 to
ABACK8): These bits indicate that a transmit message in the corresponding mailbox has been
canceled (aborted) normally.
Bit y: ABACKx
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Writing 1
(Initial value)
Completion of transmit message cancellation for corresponding mailbox
(x = 15 to 1, y = 15 to 9 and 7 to 0)
Bit 8—Reserved: This bit always reads 0. The write value should always be 0.
Page 628 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
16.2.9
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Receive Complete Register (RXPR)
The receive complete register (RXPR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing status flags
that indicate normal reception of messages (data frame or remote frame) in mailboxes (buffers).
In the case of remote frame reception, the corresponding remote request register (RFPR) is also set
simultaneously.
RXPR
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
RXPR7
RXPR6
RXPR5
RXPR4
RXPR3
RXPR2
RXPR1
RXPR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
RXPR15 RXPR14 RXPR13 RXPR12 RXPR11 RXPR10 RXPR9
Initial value:
R/W:
RXPR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Note: * Only a write of 1 is permitted, to clear the flag.
Bits 15 to 0—Receive Complete Register (RXPR7 to RXPR0, RXPR15 to RXPR8): These bits
indicate that a receive message has been received normally in the corresponding mailbox.
Bit x: RXPRx
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
1
Completion of message (data frame or remote frame) reception in
corresponding mailbox
•
Writing 1
(Initial value)
(x = 15 to 0)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 629 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.10 Remote Request Register (RFPR)
The remote request register (RFPR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing status flags
that indicate normal reception of remote frames in mailboxes (buffers). When a bit in this register
is set, the corresponding reception complete bit is set simultaneously.
RFPR
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
RFPR7
RFPR6
RFPR5
RFPR4
RFPR3
RFPR2
RFPR1
RFPR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
RFPR15 RFPR14 RFPR13 RFPR12 RFPR11 RFPR10 RFPR9
Initial value:
R/W:
RFPR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Note: * Only a write of 1 is permitted, to clear the flag.
Bits 15 to 0—Remote Request Register (RFPR7 to RFPR0, RFPR15 to RFPR8): These bits
indicate that a remote frame has been received normally in the corresponding mailbox.
Bit x: RFPRx
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Writing 1
(Initial value)
Completion of remote frame reception in corresponding mailbox
(x = 15 to 0)
Page 630 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.11 Interrupt Register (IRR)
The interrupt register (IRR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing status flags for the
various interrupt sources.
IRR
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
IRR7
IRR6
IRR5
IRR4
IRR3
IRR2
IRR1
IRR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
R/(W)*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
IRR12
—
—
IRR9
IRR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
R/(W)*
—
—
R
R/(W)*
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
—
—
Note: * Only a write of 1 is permitted, to clear the flag.
Bit 15—Overload Frame Interrupt Flag (IRR7): Status flag indicating that the HCAN has
transmitted an overload frame.
Bit 15: IRR7
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
1
Overload frame transmission
•
Writing 1
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
•
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
When overload frame is transmitted
Page 631 of 1458
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 14—Bus Off Interrupt Flag (IRR6): Status flag indicating the bus off state caused by the
transmit error counter.
Bit 14: IRR6
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Writing 1
(Initial value)
Bus off state caused by transmit error
[Setting condition]
•
When TEC ≥ 256
Bit 13—Error Passive Interrupt Flag (IRR5): Status flag indicating the error passive state
caused by the transmit/receive error counter.
Bit 13: IRR5
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
1
Error passive state caused by transmit/receive error
•
Writing 1
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
•
When TEC ≥ 128 or REC ≥ 128
Bit 12—Receive Overload Warning Interrupt Flag (IRR4): Status flag indicating the error
warning state caused by the receive error counter.
Bit 12: IRR4
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Writing 1
(Initial value)
Error warning state caused by receive error
[Setting condition]
•
Page 632 of 1458
When REC ≥ 96
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 11—Transmit Overload Warning Interrupt Flag (IRR3): Status flag indicating the error
warning state caused by the transmit error counter.
Bit 11: IRR3
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Writing 1
(Initial value)
Error warning state caused by transmit error
[Setting condition]
•
When TEC ≥ 96
Bit 10—Remote Frame Request Interrupt Flag (IRR2): Status flag indicating that a remote
frame has been received in a mailbox (buffer).
Bit 10: IRR2
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Clearing of all bits in RFPR (remote request register) of mailbox for
which receive interrupt requests are enabled by MBIMR
(Initial value)
Remote frame received and stored in mailbox
[Setting condition]
•
When remote frame reception is completed, when corresponding
MBIMR = 0
Bit 9—Receive Message Interrupt Flag (IRR1): Status flag indicating that a mailbox (buffer)
receive message has been received normally.
Bit 9: IRR1
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Clearing of all bits in RXPR (receive complete register) of mailbox for
which receive interrupt requests are enabled by MBIMR
(Initial value)
Data frame or remote frame received and stored in mailbox
[Setting condition]
•
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
When data frame or remote frame reception is completed, when
corresponding MBIMR = 0
Page 633 of 1458
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 8—Reset Interrupt Flag (IRR0): Status flag indicating that the HCAN module has been
reset. This bit cannot be masked in the interrupt mask register (IMR). If this bit is not cleared after
reset input or recovery from software standby mode, interrupt handling will be performed as soon
as interrupts are enabled by the interrupt controller.
Bit 8: IRR0
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
1
Hardware reset (HCAN module stop*, software standby)
•
Writing 1
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
•
When reset processing is completed after a hardware reset (HCAN
module stop*, software standby)
Note: * After reset or hardware standby release, the module stop bit is initialized to 1, and so the
HCAN enters the module stop state.
Bits 7 to 5, 3, and 2—Reserved: These bits always read 0. The write value should always be 0.
Bit 4—Bus Operation Interrupt Flag (IRR12): Status flag indicating detection of a dominant bit
due to bus operation when the HCAN module is in HCAN sleep mode.
Bit 4: IRR12
Description
0
CAN bus idle state
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Writing 1
CAN bus operation in HCAN sleep mode
[Setting condition]
•
Page 634 of 1458
Bus operation (dominant bit detection) in HCAN sleep mode
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 1—Unread Interrupt Flag (IRR9): Status flag indicating that a receive message has been
overwritten while still unread.
Bit 1: IRR9
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Clearing of all bits in UMSR (unread message status register)
(Initial value)
Unread message overwrite
[Setting condition]
•
When UMSR (unread message status register) is set
Bit 0—Mailbox Empty Interrupt Flag (IRR8): Status flag indicating that the next transmit
message can be stored in the mailbox.
Bit 0: IRR8
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Writing 1
(Initial value)
Transmit message has been transmitted or aborted, and new message can
be stored
[Setting condition]
•
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
When TXPR (transmit wait register) is cleared by completion of
transmission or completion of transmission abort
Page 635 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.12 Mailbox Interrupt Mask Register (MBIMR)
The mailbox interrupt mask register (MBIMR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing
flags that enable or disable individual mailbox (buffer) interrupt requests.
MBIMR
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
MBIMR7
MBIMR6
MBIMR5
MBIMR4
MBIMR3
MBIMR2
MBIMR1
MBIMR0
Initial value:
R/W:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit:
MBIMR15 MBIMR14 MBIMR13 MBIMR12 MBIMR11 MBIMR10 MBIMR9
Initial value:
R/W:
MBIMR8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 15 to 0—Mailbox Interrupt Mask (MBIMRx): Flags that enable or disable individual
mailbox interrupt requests.
Bit x: MBIMRx
Description
0
[Transmitting]
• Interrupt request to CPU due to TXPR clearing
[Receiving]
•
1
Interrupt request to CPU due to RXPR setting
Interrupt requests to CPU disabled
(Initial value)
(x = 15 to 0)
Page 636 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.13 Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
The interrupt mask register (IMR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing flags that
enable or disable requests by individual interrupt sources.
IMR
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
IMR7
IMR6
IMR5
IMR4
IMR3
IMR2
IMR1
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
IMR12
—
—
IMR9
IMR8
Initial value:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W:
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Bit 15—Overload Frame/Bus Off Recovery Interrupt Mask (IMR7): Enables or disables
overload frame/bus off recovery interrupt requests.
Bit 15: IMR7
Description
0
Overload frame/bus off recovery interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR7
enabled
1
Overload frame/bus off recovery interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR7
disabled
(Initial value)
Bit 14—Bus Off Interrupt Mask (IMR6): Enables or disables bus off interrupt requests caused
by the transmit error counter.
Bit 14: IMR6
Description
0
Bus off interrupt request (ERS0) to CPU by IRR6 enabled
1
Bus off interrupt request (ERS0) to CPU by IRR6 disabled
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
(Initial value)
Page 637 of 1458
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Bit 13—Error Passive Interrupt Mask (IMR5): Enables or disables error passive interrupt
requests caused by the transmit/receive error counter.
Bit 13: IMR5
Description
0
Error passive interrupt request (ERS0) to CPU by IRR5 enabled
1
Error passive interrupt request (ERS0) to CPU by IRR5 disabled
(Initial value)
Bit 12—Receive Overload Warning Interrupt Mask (IMR4): Enables or disables error warning
interrupt requests caused by the receive error counter.
Bit 12: IMR4
Description
0
REC error warning interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR4 enabled
1
REC error warning interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR4 disabled
(Initial value)
Bit 11—Transmit Overload Warning Interrupt Mask (IMR3): Enables or disables error
warning interrupt requests caused by the transmit error counter.
Bit 11: IMR3
Description
0
TEC error warning interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR3 enabled
1
TEC error warning interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR3 disabled
(Initial value)
Bit 10—Remote Frame Request Interrupt Mask (IMR2): Enables or disables remote frame
reception interrupt requests.
Bit 10: IMR2
Description
0
Remote frame reception interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR2 enabled
1
Remote frame reception interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR2 disabled
(Initial value)
Page 638 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 9—Receive Message Interrupt Mask (IMR1): Enables or disables message reception
interrupt requests.
Bit 9: IMR1
Description
0
Message reception interrupt request (RM1) to CPU by IRR1 enabled
1
Message reception interrupt request (RM1) to CPU by IRR1 disabled
(Initial value)
Bit 8—Reserved: The reset flag cannot be masked. This bit always reads 0. The write value
should always be 0.
Bits 7 to 5, 3, and 2—Reserved: These bits always read 1. The write value should always be 1.
Bit 4—Bus Operation Interrupt Mask (IMR12): Enables or disables interrupt requests due to
bus operation in sleep mode.
Bit 4: IMR12
Description
0
Bus operation interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR12 enabled
1
Bus operation interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR12 disabled
(Initial value)
Bit 1—Unread Interrupt Mask (IMR9): Enables or disables unread receive message overwrite
interrupt requests.
Bit 1: IMR9
Description
0
Unread message overwrite interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR9
enabled
1
Unread message overwrite interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR9
disabled
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Mailbox Empty Interrupt Mask (IMR8): Enables or disables mailbox empty interrupt
requests.
Bit 0: IMR8
Description
0
Mailbox empty interrupt request (SLE0) to CPU by IRR8 enabled
1
Mailbox empty interrupt request (SLE0) to CPU by IRR8 disabled
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 639 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.14 Receive Error Counter (REC)
The receive error counter (REC) is an 8-bit read-only register that functions as a counter indicating
the number of receive message errors on the CAN bus. The count value is stipulated in the CAN
protocol.
REC
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
16.2.15 Transmit Error Counter (TEC)
The transmit error counter (TEC) is an 8-bit read-only register that functions as a counter
indicating the number of transmit message errors on the CAN bus. The count value is stipulated in
the CAN protocol.
TEC
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Page 640 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.16 Unread Message Status Register (UMSR)
The unread message status register (UMSR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing status
flags that indicate, for individual mailboxes (buffers), that a received message has been
overwritten by a new receive message before being read. When a message is overwritten by a new
receive message, the old data is lost.
UMSR
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
UMSR7
UMSR6
UMSR5
UMSR4
UMSR3
UMSR2
UMSR1
UMSR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UMSR15 UMSR14 UMSR13 UMSR12 UMSR11 UMSR10
UMSR9
UMSR8
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
Note: * Only 1 can be written, to clear the flag to 0.
Bits 15 to 0—Unread Message Status Flags (UMSRx): Status flags indicating that an unread
receive message has been overwritten.
Bit x: UMSRx
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
•
1
Writing 1
(Initial value)
Unread receive message is overwritten by a new message
[Setting condition]
•
When a new message is received before RXPR is cleared
(x = 15 to 0)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 641 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.17 Local Acceptance Filter Masks (LAFML, LAFMH)
The local acceptance filter masks (LAFML, LAFMH) are 16-bit readable/writable registers that
filter receive messages to be stored in the receive-only mailbox (MC0, MD0) according to the
identifier. In these registers, consist of LAFMH15: MSB to LAFMH5: LSB are 11
standard/extended identifier bits, and LAFMH1: MSB to LAFML0: LSB are 18 extended
identifier bits.
LAFML
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
LAFML7
LAFML6
LAFML5
LAFML4
LAFML3
LAFML2
LAFML1
LAFML0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LAFML15 LAFML14 LAFML13 LAFML12 LAFML11 LAFML10 LAFML9
Initial value:
R/W:
LAFML8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
LAFMH
Bit:
LAFMH7 LAFMH6 LAFMH5
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
LAFMH1 LAFMH0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LAFMH15 LAFMH14 LAFMH13 LAFMH12 LAFMH11 LAFMH10 LAFMH9 LAFMH8
Initial value:
R/W:
Page 642 of 1458
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
LAFMH Bits 7 to 0 and 15 to 13—11-Bit Identifier Filter (LAFMH7 to LAFMH5,
LAFMH15 to LAFMH8): Filter mask bits for the first 11 bits of the receive message identifier
(for both standard and extended identifiers).
Bit x: LAFMHx
Description
0
Stored in MC0 and MD0 (receive-only mailbox) depending on bit match
between MC0 message identifier and receive message identifier
(Initial value)
1
Stored in MC0 and MD0 (receive-only mailbox) regardless of bit match
between MC0 message identifier and receive message identifier
(x = 15 to 5)
LAFMH Bits 12 to 10—Reserved: These bits always read 0. The write value should always be 0.
LAFMH Bits 9 and 8, LAFML Bits 15 to 0—18-Bit Identifier Filter (LAFMH1, LAFMH0,
LAFML7 to LAFML0, LAFML15 to LAFML8): Filter mask bits for the 18 bits of the receive
message identifier (extended).
Bit y: LAFMHx
LAFMLy
Description
0
Stored in MC0 (receive-only mailbox) depending on bit match between MC0
message identifier and receive message identifier
(Initial value)
1
Stored in MC0 (receive-only mailbox) regardless of bit match between MC0
message identifier and receive message identifier
(x = 1 and 0, y = 15 to 0)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 643 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.18 Message Control (MC0 to MC15)
The message control register sets (MC0 to MC15) consist of eight 8-bit readable/writable registers
(MCx[1] to MCx[8]). The HCAN has 16 sets of these registers (MC0 to MC15).
The initial value of these registers is undefined, so they must be initialized (by writing 0 or 1).
MCx [1]
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
DLC3
DLC2
DLC1
DLC0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MCx [2]
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
MCx [3]
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
MCx [4]
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
*:Undefined
Page 644 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
MCx [5]
Bit:
7
6
5
STD_ID2 STD_ID1 STD_ID0
Initial value:
R/W:
4
3
2
RTR
IDE
—
1
0
EXD_ID17 EXD_ID16
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MCx [6]
Bit:
STD_ID10 STD_ID9 STD_ID8 STD_ID7 STD_ID6 STD_ID5 STD_ID4 STD_ID3
Initial value:
R/W:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MCx [7]
Bit:
EXD_ID7 EXD_ID6 EXD_ID5 EXD_ID4 EXD_ID3 EXD_ID2 EXD_ID1 EXD_ID0
Initial value:
R/W:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MCx [8]
Bit:
EXD_ID15 EXD_ID14 EXD_ID13 EXD_ID12 EXD_ID11 EXD_ID10 EXD_ID9 EXD_ID8
Initial value:
R/W:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
*:Undefined
(x = 15 to 0)
MCx[1] Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: The initial value of these bits is undefined; they must be
initialized (by writing 0 or 1).
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 645 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
MCx[1] Bits 3 to 0—Data Length Code (DLC): These bits indicate the required length of data
frames and remote frames.
Bit 3:
DLC3
Bit 2:
DLC2
Bit 1:
DLC1
Bit 0:
DLC0
Description
0
0
0
0
Data length = 0 bytes
1
Data length = 1 byte
1
0
Data length = 2 bytes
1
Data length = 3 bytes
0
0
Data length = 4 bytes
1
Data length = 5 bytes
0
Data length = 6 bytes
1
Data length = 7 bytes
0/1
Data length = 8 bytes
1
1
1
0/1
0/1
MCx[2] Bits 7 to 0—Reserved: The initial value of these bits is undefined; they must be
initialized (by writing 0 or 1).
MCx[3] Bits 7 to 0—Reserved: The initial value of these bits is undefined; they must be
initialized (by writing 0 or 1).
MCx[4] Bits 7 to 0—Reserved: The initial value of these bits is undefined; they must be
initialized (by writing 0 or 1).
MCx[6] Bits 7 to 0—Standard Identifier (STD_ID10 to STD_ID3)
MCx[5] Bits 7 to 5—Standard Identifier (STD_ID2 to STD_ID0)
These bits set the identifier (standard identifier) of data frames and remote frames.
Standard identifier
SOF ID10
ID9
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
ID0
RTR
IDE
SRR
STD_IDxx
Figure 16-2 Standard identifier
Page 646 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
MCx[5] Bit 4—Remote Transmission Request (RTR): Used to distinguish between data frames
and remote frames.
Bit 4: RTR
Description
0
Data frame
1
Remote frame
MCx[5] Bit 3—Identifier Extension (IDE): Used to distinguish between the standard format and
extended format of data frames and remote frames.
Bit 3: IDE
Description
0
Standard format
1
Extended format
MCx[5] Bit 2—Reserved: The initial value of this bit is undefined; it must be initialized (by
writing 0 or 1).
MCx[5] Bits 1 and 0—Extended Identifier (EXD_ID17, EXD_ID16)
MCx[8] Bits 7 to 0—Extended Identifier (EXD_ID15 to EXD_ID8)
MCx[7] Bits 7 to 0—Extended Identifier (EXD_ID7 to EXD_ID0)
These bits set the identifier (extended identifier) of data frames and remote frames.
Extended Identifier
IDE
ID17 ID16 ID15 ID14
ID13 ID12 ID11 ID10
ID9
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
EXD_IDxx
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
ID0
RTR
R1
EXD_IDxx
Figure 16-3 Extended identifier
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 647 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.19 Message Data (MD0 to MD15)
The message data register sets (MD0 to MD15) consist of eight 8-bit readable/writable registers
(MDx[1] to MDx[8]). The HCAN has 16 sets of these registers (MD0 to MD15).
The initial value of these registers is undefined, so they must be initialized (by writing 0 or 1).
MDx [1]
Bit:
Initial value:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R/W:
MDx [2]
R/W:
MDx [3]
R/W:
MDx [4]
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Page 648 of 1458
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
MDx [5]
Bit:
7
Initial value:
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R/W:
MDx [6]
R/W:
MDx [7]
R/W:
MDx [8]
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
*:Undefined
(x = 0 to 15)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 649 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.2.20 Module Stop Control Register C (MSTPCRC)
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPC7 MSTPC6 MSTPC5 MSTPC4 MSTPC3 MSTPC2* MSTPC1 MSTPC0
Initial value:
R/W:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * The MSTPC2 is not available and is reserved in the H8S/2635 Group.
MSTPCRC is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTPC3 and MSTPC2 bits are set to 1, HCAN0 and 1 operation is stopped at the end
of the bus cycle, and module stop mode is entered. Register read/write accesses are not possible in
module stop mode. For details, see section 23A.5, 23B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRC is initialized to H'FF by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 3—Module Stop (MSTPC3): Specifies the HCAN module stop mode.
Bit 3: MSTPC3
Description
0
HCAN0 module stop mode is cleared
1
HCAN0 module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Bit 2—Module Stop (MSTPC2)*: Specifies the HCAN module stop mode.
Note: * The MSTPC2 is not available and is reserved in the H8S/2635 Group.
Bit 2: MSTPC2
Description
0
HCAN1 module stop mode is cleared
1
HCAN1 module stop mode is set
Page 650 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
16.3
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Operation
The device is equipped with a 1-channel HCAN module or with 2-channel HCAN modules, which
are controlled independently. In the latter case, both modules have identical specifications, and
they are controlled in the same manner.
16.3.1
Hardware and Software Resets
The HCAN can be reset by a hardware reset or software reset.
Hardware Reset (HCAN Module Stop, Reset*, Hardware*/Software Standby): Initialization
is performed by automatic setting of the MCR reset request bit (MCR0) in MCR and the reset state
bit (GSR3) in GSR within the HCAN (hardware reset). At the same time, all internal registers are
initialized. However mailbox contents are retained. A flowchart of this reset is shown in figure
16-4.
Note: * In a reset and in hardware standby mode, the module stop bit is initialized to 1 and the
HCAN enters the module stop state.
Software Reset (Write to MCR0): In normal operation initialization is performed by setting the
MCR reset request bit (MCR0) in MCR (Software reset). With this kind of reset, if the CAN
controller is performing a communication operation (transmission or reception), the initialization
state is not entered until the message has been completed. During initialization, the reset state bit
(GSR3) in GSR is set. In this kind of initialization, the error counters (TEC and REC) are
initialized but other registers and RAM (mailboxes) are not. A flowchart of this reset is shown in
figure 16-5.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 651 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Hardware reset
MCR0 = 1 (automatic)
IRR0 = 1 (automatic)*1
GSR3 = 1 (automatic)
Initialization of HCAN module
Bit configuration mode
Period in which BCR, MBCR, etc.,
are initialized
Clear IRR0
BCR setting
MBCR setting
Mailbox (RAM) initialization
Message transmission method initialization
MCR0 = 0
GSR3 = 0?
No
Yes
IMR setting (interrupt mask setting)
MBIMR setting (interrupt mask setting)
MC[x] setting (receive identifier setting)
LAFM setting (receive identifier mask setting)
GSR3 = 0 &
11 recessive bits received?
Yes
CAN bus communication enabled
No
: Settings by user
: Processing by hardware
Notes: 1. When IRR0 is set to 1 (automatically) due to a hardware reset*2, a "hardware reset
initiated reset processing" interrupt is generated.
2. In a reset and in hardware standby mode, the module stop bit is initialized to 1
and the HCAN enters the module stop state.
Figure 16-4 Hardware Reset Flowchart
Page 652 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
MCR0 = 1
Bus idle?
No
Yes
GSR3 = 1 (automatic)
Initialization of REC and TEC only
Correction
BCR setting
MBCR setting
Mailbox (RAM) initialization
Message transmission method initialization
OK?
No
Yes
GSR3 = 1?
No
Yes
MCR0 = 0
GSR3 = 0?
No
Yes
IMR setting
MBIMR setting
MC[x] setting
LAFM setting
OK?
Correction
No
Yes
GSR3 = 0 &
11 recessive bits received?
Yes
CAN bus communication enabled
No
: Settings by user
: Processing by hardware
Figure 16-5 Software Reset Flowchart
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 653 of 1458
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.3.2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Initialization after Hardware Reset
After a hardware reset, the following initialization processing should be carried out:
• Clearing of IRR0 bit in interrupt register (IRR)
• Bit rate setting
• Mailbox transmit/receive settings
• Mailbox (RAM) initialization
• Message transmission method setting
These initial settings must be made while the HCAN is in bit configuration mode. Configuration
mode is a state in which the reset request bit (MCR0) in the master control register (MCR) is 1 and
the reset status bit in the general status register (GSR) is also 1 (GSR3 = 1). Configuration mode is
exited by clearing the reset request bit in MCR to 0; when MCR0 is cleared to 0, the HCAN
automatically clears the reset state bit (GSR3) in the general status register (GSR). The power-up
sequence then begins, and communication with the CAN bus is possible as soon as the sequence
ends. The power-up sequence consists of the detection of 11 consecutive recessive bits.
IRR0 Clearing: The reset interrupt flag (IRR0) is always set after a reset or recovery from
software standby mode. As an HCAN interrupt is initiated immediately when interrupts are
enabled, IRR0 should be cleared.
Bit Rate and Bit Timing Settings: As bit rate settings, a baud rate setting and bit timing setting
must be made each time a CAN node begins communication. The baud rate and bit timing settings
are made in the bit configuration register (BCR).
a. Note
BCR can be written to at all times, but should only be modified in configuration mode.
Settings should be made so that all CAN controllers connected to the CAN bus have the same
baud rate and bit width.
Limits for the settable variables (TSEG1, TSEG2, BRP, sample point, and SJW) are shown in
table 16-3.
Page 654 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Table 16-3 BCR Register Value Setting Ranges
Name
Abbreviation
Min. Value
Max. Value
Time segment 1
TSEG1
B'0011
B'1111
Time segment 2
TSEG2
B'001
B'111
Baud rate prescaler
BRP
B'000000
B'111111
Sample point
SAM
B'0
B'1
Synchronization jump width
SJW
B'00
B'11
b. Value Setting Ranges
• The minimum value of SJW is stipulated in the CAN specifications.
3 ≥ SJW ≥ 0
• The minimum value of TSEG1 is stipulated in the CAN specifications.
TSEG1 > TSEG2
• The minimum value of TSEG2 is stipulated in the CAN specifications.
TSEG2 ≥ SJW
The following formula is used to calculate the baud rate.
fCLK
Bit rate =
2 × (BRP + 1) × (3 + TSEG1 + TSEG2)
[b/s]
Note: fCLK = φ (system clock)
The BCR value are used for BRP, TSEG1, and TSEG2.
Example: With a 1 Mb/s baud rate and a 20 MHz input clock:
1 Mb/s =
20 MHz
2 × (0 + 1) × (3 + 4 + 3)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 655 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Item
Set Values
Actual Values
fCLK
20 MHz
—
BRP
0 (B'000000)
System clock × 2
TSEG1
4 (B'0100)
5TQ
TSEG2
3 (B'011)
4TQ
1-bit time
1-bit time (8 to 25 time quanta)
SYNC_SEG
PRSEG
PHSEG1
Time segment 1
(TSEG1)*
4 to16
1
PHSEG2
Time segment 2
(TSEG2)*
2 to 8
Quantum
Legend:
SYNC_SEG: Segment for establishing synchronization of nodes on the CAN bus (Normal bit
edge transitions occur in this segment).
PRSEG:
Segment for compensating for physical delay between networks.
PHSEG1:
Buffer segment for correcting phase drift (positive). (This segment is extended
when synchronization (resynchronization) is established).
PHSEG2:
Buffer segment for correcting phase drift (negative). (This segment is
shortened when synchronization (resynchronization) is established).
Note: * The time quanta values of TSEG1 and TSEG2 become the value of TSEG + 1.
Figure 16-6 Detailed Description of One Bit
HCAN bit rate calculation:
Bit rate =
fCLK
2 × (BRP + 1) × (3 + TSEG1 + TSEG2)
fCLK: peripheral clock (φ)
Note: The BCR values are used for BRP, TSEG1, and TSEG2.
BCR Setting Constraints
TSEG1 > TSEG2 ≥ SJW
(SJW = 0 to 3)
These constraints allow the setting range shown in table 16-4 for TSEG1 and TSEG2 in BCR.
Page 656 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Table 16-4 Setting Range for TSEG1 and TSEG2 in BCR
TSEG2 (BCR [14:12])
TSEG1
(BCR [11:8])
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
0100
No
Yes*
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
0101
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
0110
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
0111
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1000
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1001
Yes*
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1010
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1011
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1100
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1101
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1110
Yes*
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1111
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0011
Notes: The time quanta value for TSEG1 and TSEG2 is the TSEG value + 1.
* Only a value other than BRP[13:8] = B'000000 can be set.
Mailbox Transmit/Receive Settings: HCAN0, 1 each have 16 mailboxes. Mailbox 0 is receiveonly, while mailboxes 1 to 15 can be set for transmission or reception. Mailboxes that can be set
for transmission or reception must be designated either for transmission use or for reception use
before communication begins. The Initial status of mailboxes 1 to 15 is for transmission (while
mailbox 0 is for reception only). Mailbox transmit/receive settings are not initialized by a software
reset.
• Setting for transmission
Transmit mailbox setting (mailboxes 1 to 15)
Clearing a corresponding mailbox in the mailbox configuration register (MBCR) to 0
designates the specified mailbox for transmission use. After a reset, mailboxes are initialized
for transmission use, so this setting is not necessary.
• Setting for reception
Transmit/receive mailbox setting (mailboxes 1 to 15)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 657 of 1458
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Setting a bit to 1 in the mailbox configuration register (MBCR) designates the corresponding
mailbox for reception use. When setting mailboxes for reception, to improve message
transmission efficiency, high-priority messages should be set in low-to-high mailbox order
(priority order: mailbox 1 > mailbox 15).
• Receive-only mailbox (mailbox 0)
No setting is necessary, as this mailbox is always used for reception.
Mailbox (Message Control/Data (MCx[x], MDx[x]) Initial Settings: After power is supplied,
all registers and RAM (message control/data, control registers, status registers, etc.) are initialized.
Message control/data (MCx[x], MDx[x]) only are in RAM, and so their values are undefined.
Initial values must therefore be set in all the mailboxes (by writing 0s or 1s).
Setting the Message Transmission Method: Either of the following message transmission
methods can be selected with the message transmission method bit (MCR2) in the master control
register (MCR):
a. Transmission order determined by message identifier priority
b. Transmission order determined by mailbox number priority
When a is selected, if a number of messages are designated as waiting for transmission (TXPR =
1), the message with the highest priority set in the message identifier (MCx[5] to MCx[8]) is
stored in the transmit buffer. CAN bus arbitration is then carried out for the message in the
transmit buffer, and message transmission is performed when the transmission right is acquired.
When the TXPR bit is set, internal arbitration is performed again, and the highest-priority message
is found and stored in the transmit buffer.
When b is selected, if a number of messages are designated as waiting for transmission (TXPR =
1), messages are stored in the transmit buffer in low-to-high mailbox order (priority order:
mailbox 1 > mailbox 15). CAN bus arbitration is then carried out for the messages in the transmit
buffer, and message transmission is performed when the bus is acquired.
Page 658 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
16.3.3
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Transmit Mode
Message transmission is performed using mailboxes 1 to 15. The transmission procedure is
described below, and a transmission flowchart is shown in figure 16-6.
Initialization (after hardware reset only)
a. Clearing of IRR0 bit in interrupt register (IRR)
b. Bit rate settings
c. Mailbox transmit/receive settings
d. Mailbox (RAM) initialization
e. Message transmission method setting
Interrupt and transmit data settings
a. CPU interrupt source setting
b. Arbitration field setting
c. Control field setting
d. Data field setting
Message transmission and interrupts
a. Message transmission wait
b. Message transmission completion and interrupt
c. Message transmission cancellation
d. Message retransmission
Initialization (After Hardware Reset Only): These settings should be made while the HCAN is
in bit configuration mode.
• IRR0 clearing
The reset interrupt flag (IRR0) is always set after a reset or recovery from software standby
mode. As an HCAN interrupt is initiated immediately when interrupts are enabled, IRR0
should be cleared.
• Bit rate settings
Set values relating to the CAN bus communication speed and resynchronization. Refer to Bit
Rate and Bit Timing Settings in 16.3.2, Initialization after Hardware Reset, for details.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 659 of 1458
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
• Mailbox transmit/receive settings
Mailbox transmit/receive settings should be made in advance. A total of 30 mailbox can be set
for transmission or reception (mailboxes 1 to 15 in HCAN0 and HCAN1). To set a mailbox for
transmission, clear the corresponding bit to 0 in the mailbox configuration register (MBCR).
Refer to Mailbox Transmit/Receive Settings in 16.3.2, Initialization after Hardware Reset, for
details.
• Mailbox (RAM) initialization
As message control/data registers (MCx[x], MDx[x]) are configured in RAM, their initial
values after powering on are undefined, and so bit initialization is necessary. Write 0s or 1s to
the mailboxes. See Mailbox (Message Control/Data (MCx[x], MDx[x]) Initial Setting in
16.3.2, Initialization after a Hardware Reset, for details.
• Message transmission method setting
Set the transmission method for mailboxes designated for transmission. The following two
transmission methods can be used. Refer to Message Transmission Method Setting in 16.3.2,
Initialization after Hardware Reset, for details.
a. Transmission order determined by message identifier priority
b. Transmission order determined by mailbox number priority
Page 660 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Initialization (after hardware reset only)
IRR0 clearing
BCR setting
MBCR setting
Mailbox (RAM) initialization
Message transmission method setting
Interrupt settings
Transmit data setting
Arbitration field setting
Control field setting
Data field setting
Message transmission wait
TXPR setting
Bus idle?
No
Yes
Message transmission
GSR2 = 0 (during transmission only)
Transmission completed?
No
Yes
TXACK = 1
IRR8 = 1
IMR8 = 1?
Yes
No
Interrupt to CPU
Clear TXACK
Clear IRR8
: Settings by user
End of transmission
: Processing by hardware
Figure 16-7 Transmission Flowchart
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 661 of 1458
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Interrupt and Transmit Data Settings: When mailbox initialization is finished, CPU interrupt
source settings and data settings must be made. Interrupt source settings are made in the mailbox
interrupt register (MBIMR) and interrupt mask register (IMR), while transmit data settings are
made by writing the necessary data from the arbitration field, control field, and data field,
described below, in the corresponding message control (MCx[1] to MCx[8]) and message data
(MDx[1] to MDx[8]).
• CPU interrupt source setting
Transmission acknowledge and transmission abort acknowledge interrupts can be masked for
individual mailboxes in the mailbox interrupt mask register (MBIMR). Interrupt register (IRR)
interrupts can be masked in the interrupt mask register (IMR).
• Arbitration field setting
In the arbitration field, the 11-bit identifier (STD_ID0 to STD_ID10) and RTR bit (standard
format) or 29-bit identifier (STD_ID0 to STD_ID10, EXT_ID0 to EXT_ID17) and IDE, RTR
bit (extended format) are set. The registers to be set are MCx[5] to MCx[8].
• Control field setting
In the control field, the byte length of the data to be transmitted is set in DLC0 to DLC3. The
register to be set is MCx[1].
• Data field setting
In the data field, the data to be transmitted is set in byte units in the range of 0 to 8 bytes. The
registers to be set are MDx[1] to MDx[8].
The number of bytes in the data actually transmitted depends on the data length code (DLC) in the
control field. If a value exceeding the value set in DLC is set in the data field, only the number of
bytes set in DLC will actually be transmitted.
Message Transmission and Interrupts:
• Message transmission wait
If message transmission is to be performed after completion of the message control (MCx[1] to
MCx[8]) and message data (MDx[1] to MDx[8]).settings, transmission is started by setting the
corresponding mailbox transmit wait bit (TXPR1 to TXPR15) to 1 in the transmit wait register
(TXPR). The following two transmission methods can be used:
a. Transmission order determined by message identifier priority
b. Transmission order determined by mailbox number priority
Page 662 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
When a is selected, if a number of messages are designated as waiting for transmission (TXPR
= 1), messages are stored in the transmit buffer in low-to-high mailbox order (priority order:
mailbox 1 > mailbox 15). CAN bus arbitration is then carried out for the messages in the
transmit buffer, and message transmission is performed when the bus is acquired.
When b is selected, if a number of messages are designated as waiting for transmission (TXPR
= 1), the message with the highest priority set in the message identifier (MCx[5] to MCx[8]) is
stored in the transmit buffer. CAN bus arbitration is then carried out for the message in the
transmit buffer, and message transmission is performed when the transmission right is
acquired. When the TXPR bit is set, internal arbitration is performed again, the highest-priority
message is found and stored in the transmit buffer, CAN bus arbitration is carried out in the
same way, and message transmission is performed when the transmission right is acquired.
• Message transmission completion and interrupt
When a message is transmitted error-free using the above procedure, the corresponding
acknowledge bit (TXACK1 to TXACK15) in the transmit acknowledge register (TXACK) and
transmit wait bit (TXPR1 to TXPR15) in the transmit wait register (TXPR) are automatically
initialized. Also, if the corresponding bit (MBIMR1 to MBIMR15) in the mailbox interrupt
mask register (MBIMR) and the mailbox empty interrupt bit (IRR8) in the interrupt mask
register (IMR) are set to the interrupt enable state at the same time, an interrupt can be sent to
the CPU.
• Message transmission cancellation
Transmission cancellation can be specified for a message stored in a mailbox as a transmit wait
message. A transmit wait message is canceled by setting the bit for the corresponding mailbox
(TXCR1 to TXCR15) to 1 in the transmit cancel register (TXCR). When cancellation is
executed, the transmit wait register (TXPR) is automatically reset, and the corresponding bit is
set to 1 in the abort acknowledge register (ABACK). An interrupt can be requested. Also, if
the mailbox empty interrupt (IRR8) is enabled for the bits (MBIMR1 to MBIMR15)
corresponding to the mailbox interrupt mask register (MBIMR) and interrupt mask register
(IMR), interrupts may be sent to the CPU.
However, a transmit wait message cannot be canceled at the following times:
a. During internal arbitration or CAN bus arbitration
b. During data frame or remote frame transmission
Also, transmission cannot be canceled by clearing the transmit wait register (TXPR). Figure
16-5 shows a flowchart of transmit message cancellation.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 663 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
• Message retransmission
If transmission of a transmit message is aborted in the following cases, the message is
retransmitted automatically:
a. CAN bus arbitration failure (failure to acquire the bus)
b. Error during transmission (bit error, stuff error, CRC error, frame error, ACK error)
Message transmit wait TXPR setting
Set TXCR bit corresponding to message
to be canceled
Cancellation possible?
No
Yes
Message not sent
Clear TXCR, TXPR
ABACK = 1
IRR8 = 1
IMR8 = 1?
Completion of message transmission
TXACK = 1
Clear TXCR, TXPR
IRR8 = 1
Yes
No
Interrupt to CPU
Clear TXACK
Clear ABACK
Clear IRR8
: Settings by user
End of transmission/transmission
cancellation
: Processing by hardware
Figure 16-8 Transmit Message Cancellation Flowchart
Page 664 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
16.3.4
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Receive Mode
Message reception is performed using mailboxes 0 and 1 to 15. The reception procedure is
described below, and a reception flowchart is shown in figure 16-9.
Initialization (after hardware reset only)
a. Clearing of IRR0 bit in interrupt register (IRR)
b. Bit rate settings
c. Mailbox transmit/receive settings
d. Mailbox (RAM) initialization
Interrupt and receive message settings
a. CPU interrupt source setting
b. Arbitration field setting
c. Local acceptance filter mask (LAFM) settings
Message reception and interrupts
a. Message reception CRC check
b. Data frame reception
c. Remote frame reception
d. Unread message reception
Initialization (After Hardware Reset Only): These settings should be made while the HCAN is
in bit configuration mode.
• IRR0 clearing
The reset interrupt flag (IRR0) is always set after a reset or recovery from software standby
mode. As an HCAN interrupt is initiated immediately when interrupts are enabled, IRR0
should be cleared.
• Bit rate settings
Set values relating to the CAN bus communication speed and resynchronization. Refer to Bit
Rate and Bit Timing Settings in 16.3.2, Initialization after Hardware Reset, for details.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 665 of 1458
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
• Mailbox transmit/receive settings
Each channel has one receive-only mailbox (mailbox 0) plus 15 mailboxes that can be set for
reception. Thus a total of 32 mailboxes can be used for reception. To set a mailbox for
reception, set the corresponding bit to 1 in the mailbox configuration register (MBCR). The
initial setting for mailboxes is 0, designating transmission use. Refer to Mailbox
Transmit/Receive Settings in 16.3.2, Initialization after Hardware Reset, for details.
• Mailbox (RAM) initialization
As message control/data registers (MCx[x], MDx[x]) are configured in RAM, their initial
values after powering on are undefined, and so bit initialization is necessary. Write 0s or 1s to
the mailboxes. See Mailbox (Message Control/Data (MCx[x], MDx[x]) Initial Setting in
16.3.2, Initialization after a Hardware Reset, for details.
Page 666 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Initialization
: Settings by user
IRR0 clearing
BCR setting
MBCR setting
Mailbox (RAM) initialization
: Processing by hardware
Interrupt settings
Receive data setting
Arbitration field setting
Local acceptance filter settings
Message reception
(Match of identifier
in mailbox?)
No
Yes
Same RXPR = 1?
Yes
No
Data frame?
Unread message
No
Yes
RXPR
IRR1 = 1
IMR1 = 1?
No
RXPR, RFPR = 1
IRR2 = 1, IRR1 = 1
Yes
IMR2 = 1?
Yes
No
Interrupt to CPU
Interrupt to CPU
Message control read
Message data read
Message control read
Message data read
Clear all RXPRn bits of mailbox for which
receive interrupt requests are enabled
by MBIMR
Clear all RXPRn bits of mailbox for which
receive interrupt requests are enabled
by MBIMR
IRR1 = 0
IRR2 = 0, IRR1 = 0
Transmission of data frame corresponding
to remote frame
End of reception
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 667 of 1458
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Figure 16-9 Reception Flowchart
Interrupt and Receive Message Settings: When mailbox initialization is finished, CPU interrupt
source settings and receive message specifications must be made. Interrupt source settings are
made in the mailbox interrupt register (MBIMR) and interrupt mask register (IMR). To receive a
message, the identifier must be set in advance in the message control (MCx[1] to MCx[8]) for the
receiving mailbox. When a message is received, all the bits in the receive message identifier are
compared, and if a 100% match is found, the message is stored in the matching mailbox. Mailbox
0 (MB0) has a local acceptance filter mask (LAFM) that allows Don’t care settings to be made.
• CPU interrupt source settings
When transmitting, transmission acknowledge and transmission abort acknowledge interrupts
can be masked for individual mailboxes in the mailbox interrupt mask register (MBIMR).
When receiving, data frame and remote frame receive wait interrupts can be masked. Interrupt
register (IRR) interrupts can be masked in the interrupt mask register (IMR).
• Arbitration field setting
In the arbitration field, the identifier (STD_ID0 to STD_ID10, EXT_ID0 to EXT_ID17) of the
message to be received is set. If all the bits in the set identifier do not match, the message is not
stored in a mailbox.
Example: Mailbox 1
010_1010_1010 (standard identifier)
Only one kind of message identifier can be received by MB1
Identifier 1:
010_1010_1010
• Local acceptance filter mask (LAFM) setting
The local acceptance filter mask is provided for mailbox 0 (MB0) only, enabling a Don’t care
specification to be made for all bits in the received identifier. This allows various kinds of
messages to be received.
Example: Mailbox 0
LAFM
010_1010_1010 (standard identifier)
000_0000_0011 (0: Care, 1: Don’t care)
A total of four kinds of message identifiers can be received by MB0
Page 668 of 1458
Identifier 1:
010_1010_1000
Identifier 2:
010_1010_1001
Identifier 3:
010_1010_1010
Identifier 4:
010_1010_1011
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Message Reception and Interrupts:
• Message reception CRC check
When a message is received, a CRC check is performed automatically (by hardware). If the
result of the CRC check is normal, ACK is transmitted in the ACK field irrespective of
whether or not the message can be received.
• Data frame reception
If the received message is confirmed to be error-free by the CRC check, etc., the identifier in
the mailbox (and also LAFM in the case of mailbox 0 only) and the identifier of the receive
message are compared, and if a complete match is found, the message is stored in the mailbox.
The message identifier comparison is carried out on each mailbox in turn, starting with
mailbox 0 and ending with mailbox 15. If a complete match is found, the comparison ends at
that point, the message is stored in the matching mailbox, and the corresponding receive
complete bit (RXPR0 to RXPR15) is set in the receive complete register (RXPR). However,
when a mailbox 0 LAFM comparison is carried out, even if the identifier matches, the mailbox
comparison sequence does not end at that point, but continues with mailbox 1 and then the
remaining mailboxes. It is therefore possible for a message matching mailbox 0 to be received
by another mailbox (however, the same message cannot be stored in more than one of
mailboxes 1 to 15). If the corresponding bit (MBIMR0 to MBIMR15) in the mailbox interrupt
mask register (MBIMR) and the receive message interrupt mask (IMR1) in the interrupt mask
register (IMR) are set to the interrupt enable value at this time, an interrupt can be sent to the
CPU.
• Remote frame reception
Two kinds of messages—data frames and remote frames—can be stored in mailboxes. A
remote frame differs from a data frame in that the remote reception request bit (RTR) in the
message control register (MC[x]5) and the data field are 0 bytes. The data length to be returned
in a data frame must be stored in the data length code (DLC) in the control field.
When a remote frame (RTR = recessive) is received, the corresponding bit is set in the remote
request wait register (RFPR). If the corresponding bit (MBIMR0 to MBIMR15) in the mailbox
interrupt mask register (MBIMR) and the remote frame request interrupt mask (IRR2) in the
interrupt mask register (IMR) are set to the interrupt enable value at this time, an interrupt can
be sent to the CPU.
• Unread message reception
When a received message matches the identifier in a mailbox, the message is stored in the
mailbox. If a message overwrite occurs before the CPU reads the message, the corresponding
bit (UMSR0 to UMSR15) is set in the unread message register (UMSR). In overwriting of an
unread message, when a new message is received before the corresponding bit in the receive
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 669 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
complete register (RXPR) has been cleared, the unread message register (UMSR) is set. If the
unread interrupt flag (IRR9) in the interrupt mask register (IMR) is set to the interrupt enable
value at this time, an interrupt can be sent to the CPU. Figure 16-10 shows a flowchart of
unread message overwriting.
Unread message overwrite
UMSR = 1
IRR9 = 1
IMR9 = 1?
Yes
No
Interrupt to CPU
Clear IRR9
Message control/message data read
: Settings by user
End
: Processing by hardware
Figure 16-10 Unread Message Overwrite Flowchart
Page 670 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
16.3.5
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
HCAN Sleep Mode
The HCAN is provided with an HCAN sleep mode that places the HCAN module in the sleep
state to reduce current dissipation. Figure 16-11 shows a flowchart of the HCAN sleep mode.
MCR5 = 1
: Settings by user
: Processing by hardware
No
Bus idle?
Initialize TEC and REC
No
Bus operation?
Yes
IRR12 = 1
Do not access MB
during these steps
No
IMR12 = 1?
CPU interrupt
Yes
Sleep mode clearing method
MCR7 = 0?
No (automatic)
Yes (manual)
Clear sleep mode?
No
GSR3 = 1?
No
Yes
MCR5 = 0
GSR3 = 1?
No
Yes
Yes
MCR5 = 0
11 recessive bits
received?
No
Yes
CAN bus communication possible
Figure 16-11 HCAN Sleep Mode Flowchart
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 671 of 1458
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
HCAN sleep mode is entered by setting the HCAN sleep mode bit (MCR5) to 1 in the master
control register (MCR). If the CAN bus is operating, the transition to HCAN sleep mode is
delayed until the bus becomes idle.
Either of the following methods of clearing HCAN sleep mode can be selected by making a setting
in the MCR7 bit.
1. Clearing by software
2. Clearing by CAN bus operation
Eleven recessive bits must be received after HCAN sleep mode is cleared before CAN bus
communication is enabled again.
Clearing by software: HCAN sleep mode is cleared by writing a 0 to MCR5 from the CPU.
Clearing by CAN bus operation: Clearing by CAN bus operation occurs automatically when the
CAN bus performs an operation and this change is detected. In this case, the first message is not
received in the mailbox, and normal reception starts from the next message. When a change is
detected on the CAN bus in HCAN sleep mode, the bus operation interrupt flag (IRR12) is set in
the interrupt register (IRR). If the bus interrupt mask (IMR12) in the interrupt mask register (IMR)
is set to the interrupt enable value at this time, an interrupt can be sent to the CPU.
Page 672 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
16.3.6
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
HCAN Halt Mode
The HCAN halt mode is provided to enable mailbox settings to be changed without performing an
HCAN hardware or software reset. Figure 16-12 shows a flowchart of the HCAN halt mode.
MCR1 = 1
Bus idle?
No
Yes
MBCR setting
MCR1 = 0
: Settings by user
CAN bus communication possible
: Processing by hardware
Figure 16-12 HCAN Halt Mode Flowchart
HCAN halt mode is entered by setting the halt request bit (MCR1) to 1 in the master control
register (MCR). However, if the CAN bus is operating at the time of a transition, the transition to
HCAN ALT mode is delayed until the bus becomes idle.
HCAN halt mode is cleared by clearing MCR1 to 0.
16.3.7
Interrupt Interface
There are 12 HCAN interrupt sources, to which five independent interrupt vectors are assigned.
Table 16-5 lists the HCAN interrupt sources.
With the exception of the reset processing vector (IRR0), these sources can be masked. Masking is
implemented using the mailbox interrupt mask register (MBIMR) and interrupt mask register
(IMR).
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 673 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Table 16-5 HCAN Interrupt Sources
Channel
IPR Bits
Vector
Vector
Number IRR Bit
HCAN0
IPRM
(2 to 0)
ERS0
108
OVR0
HCAN1
IPRM
(6 to 4)
IRR5
Error passive interrupt (TEC ≥ 128 or REC ≥
128)
IRR6
Bus off interrupt (TEC ≥ 256)
IRR0
Hardware reset processing interrupt
IRR2
Remote frame reception interrupt
IRR3
Error warning interrupt (TEC ≥ 96)
IRR4
Error warning interrupt (REC ≥ 96)
IRR7
Overload frame transmission interrupt
IRR9
Unread message overwrite interrupt
IRR12
HCAN sleep mode CAN bus operation
interrupt
RM0
109
IRR1
Mailbox 0 message reception interrupt
RM1
108
IRR1
Mailbox 1 to 15 message reception interrupt
SLE0
108
IRR8
Message transmission/cancellation interrupt
ERS0
106
IRR5
Error passive interrupt (TEC ≥ 128 or REC ≥
128)
IRR6
Bus off interrupt (TEC ≥ 256)
IRR0
Hardware reset processing interrupt
IRR2
Remote frame reception interrupt
OVR0
Page 674 of 1458
108
Description
106
IRR3
Error warning interrupt (TEC ≥ 96)
IRR4
Error warning interrupt (REC ≥ 96)
IRR7
Overload frame transmission interrupt
IRR9
Unread message overwrite interrupt
IRR12
HCAN sleep mode CAN bus operation
interrupt
RM0
107
IRR1
Mailbox 0 message reception interrupt
RM1
106
IRR1
Mailbox 1 to 15 message reception interrupt
SLE0
106
IRR8
Message transmission/cancellation interrupt
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
16.3.8
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
DTC Interface*
Note: * The DTC is not implemented in the H8S/2635 Group.
The DTC can be activated by reception of a message in the HCAN’s mailbox 0. When DTC
transfer ends after DTC activation has been set, the RXPR0 and RFPR0 flags are acknowledge
signal automatically. An interrupt request due to a receive interrupt from the HCAN cannot be sent
to the CPU in this case. Figure 16-13 shows a DTC transfer flowchart.
DTC initialization
DTC enable register setting
DTC register information setting
Message reception in HCAN’s
mailbox 0
DTC activation
End of DTC transfer?
No
Yes
RXPR and RFPR clearing
Transfer counter = 0
or DISEL = 1?
No
Yes
Interrupt to CPU
: Settings by user
End
: Processing by hardware
Figure 16-13 DTC Transfer Flowchart
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 675 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
16.4
CAN Bus Interface
A bus transceiver IC is necessary to connect the chip to a CAN bus. A HA13721 transceiver IC, or
compatible device, is recommended. Figure 16-14 shows a sample connection diagram.
120 Ω
Chip
Vcc
HA13721
Port
MODE Vcc
HRxD
RxD CANH
HTxD
TxD CANL
NC
NC
CAN bus
GND
120 Ω
Note: NC: No Connection
Figure 16-14 High-Speed Interface Using HA13721
Page 676 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
16.5
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Usage Notes
(1) Reset
The HCAN is reset by a reset, and in hardware standby mode and software standby mode. All the
registers are initialized in a reset, but mailboxes (message control (MCx[x])/message data
(MDx[x]) are not. However, after powering on, mailboxes (message control (MCx[x])/message
data (MDx[x]) are initialized, and their values are undefined. Therefore, mailbox initialization
must always be carried out after a reset or a transition to hardware standby mode or software
standby mode. Also, the reset interrupt flag (IRR0) is always set after reset input or recovery from
software standby mode. As this bit cannot be masked in the interrupt mask register (IMR), if
HCAN interrupts are set as enabled by the interrupt controller without this flag having been
cleared, an HCAN interrupt will be initiated immediately. IRR0 must therefore be cleared during
initialization.
(2) HCAN sleep mode
The bus operation interrupt flag (IRR12) in the interrupt register (IRR) is set by bus operation in
HCAN sleep mode. Therefore, this flag is not used by the HCAN to indicate sleep mode release.
Also note that the reset status bit (GSR3) in the general status register (GSR) is set in sleep mode.
(3) Interrupts
When the mailbox interrupt mask register (MBIMR) is set, the interrupt register (IRR8,2,1) is not
set by reception completion, transmission completion, or transmission cancellation for the set
mailboxes.
(4) Error counters
In the case of error active and error passive, REC and TEC normally count up and down. In the
bus off state, 11-bit recessive sequences are counted (REC + 1) using REC. If REC reaches 96
during the count, IRR4 and GSR1 are set.
(5) Register access
Byte or word access can be used on all HCAN registers. Longword access cannot be used.
(6) HCAN medium-speed mode
HCAN registers cannot be read or written to in medium-speed mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 677 of 1458
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
(7) Register retention during standby
All HCAN registers are initialized in hardware standby mode and software standby mode.
(8) Usage of bit manipulation instructions
The HCAN status flags are cleared by writing 1, so do not use a bit manipulation instruction to
clear a flag.
When clearing a flag, use the MOV instruction to write 1 to only the bit that is to be cleared.
(9) HCAN TXCR Operation
1. When the transmit wait cancel register (TXCR) is used to cancel transmission of the
message in a mailbox waiting for transmission, the corresponding bit in TXCR and the
transmit wait register (TXPR) may not be cleared even after the transmission is canceled.
This occurs when the following conditions are all satisfied.
[Conditions]
⎯ The HRxD pin is tied to "1" because of a CAN bus error, etc.
⎯ There is one or more mailboxes waiting for transmission or transmitting.
⎯ Ongoing message transmission from a mailbox is canceled by TXCR.
If this occurs, the transmission is canceled but TXPR and TXCR continue to indicate a
wrong status telling that a message is being cancelled. As a result, transmission cannot be
restarted even after the HRxD pin is released from the tied state and the CAN bus has
recovered. If there are two or more messages for transmission, a message which is not
being transmitted is canceled and a message being transmitted retains its state.
To avoid this, take either of the following countermeasures.
[Countermeasures]
⎯ Do not cancel transmission by TXCR. Transmission will be completed after the CAN
bus has recovered, then TXPR is cleared and the HCAN operates normally.
⎯ To cancel transmission, write 1 to the corresponding bit in TXCR repeatedly until the
bit becomes 0. TXPR and TXCR are cleared, and the HCAN operates normally.
2. When the bus-off state is entered while any mailbox is waiting for transmission with TXPR
set, transmission cannot be canceled even if TXCR is set because the internal state machine
does not operate during the bus-off state. Because of this, on recovery from the bus-off
state, one message will be transmitted or the message will be canceled with a transmission
error. For message clearing on recovery from the bus-off state, take the following
countermeasure.
Page 678 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
[Countermeasure]
⎯ Reset the HCAN during the bus-off period to clear the messages in the mailboxes
waiting for transmission. To reset the HCAN, set the module stop bit (MSTPC3 in
MSTPCRC) to 1 and then clear it. In this case, the HCAN is entirely reset. Therefore
the initial settings must be made again.
(10) HCAN Transmit Procedure
When transmission is set while the bus is in the idle state, if the next transmission is set or the set
transmission is canceled under the following conditions within 50 μs, the transmit message ID of
being set may be damaged.
• When the second transmission has the message whose priority is higher than the first one
• When the massage of the highest priority is canceled in the first transmission
Make whichever setting shown below to avoid the message IDs from being damaged.
• Set transmission in one TXPR. After transmission of all transmit messages is completed, set
transmission again (mass transmission setting). The interval between transmission settings
should be 50 μs or longer.
• Make the transmission setting according to the priority of transmit messages.
• Set the interval to be 50 μs or longer between TXPR and another TXPR or between TXPR and
TXCR.
Table 16-6 Interval Limitation between TXPR and TXPR or between TXPR and TXCR
Baud Rate (bps)
Set Interval (μs)
1M
50
500 k
50
250 k
50
(11) Note on Releasing the HCAN Reset or HCAN Sleep
Before releasing the HCAN reset or HCAN sleep (MCR0 = 0 or MCR5 = 0), confirm that the
GSR3 bit (the reset status bit) is set to 1.
(12) Note on Accessing Mailbox during the HCAN Sleep
Do not access the mailbox during the HCAN sleep. If accessed, the CPU might halt. Accessing
registers during the HCAN sleep does not cause the CPU halt, nor does accessing the mailbox in
other than the HCAN sleep mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 679 of 1458
Section 16 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Page 680 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 17 A/D Converter
Section 17 A/D Converter
Note: The H8S/2635 Group is not equipped with a DTC.
17.1
Overview
The chip incorporates a successive approximation type 10-bit A/D converter that allows up to
twelve analog input channels to be selected.
17.1.1
Features
A/D converter features are listed below.
• 10-bit resolution
• Twelve input channels
• Settable analog conversion voltage range
⎯ Conversion of analog voltages with the reference voltage pin (Vref) as the analog reference
voltage
• High-speed conversion
⎯ Minimum conversion time: 13.3 µs per channel (at 20-MHz operation)
• Choice of single mode or scan mode
⎯ Single mode: Single-channel A/D conversion
⎯ Scan mode:
Continuous A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels
• Four data registers
⎯ Conversion results are held in a 16-bit data register for each channel
• Sample and hold function
• Three kinds of conversion start
⎯ Choice of software or timer conversion start trigger (TPU), or ADTRG pin
• A/D conversion end interrupt generation
⎯ A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request can be generated at the end of A/D conversion
• Module stop mode can be set
⎯ As the initial setting, A/D converter operation is halted. Register access is enabled by
exiting module stop mode.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 681 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 17 A/D Converter
17.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 17-1 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter.
Module data bus
AVSS
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
AN5
AN6
AN7
AN8
AN9
AN10
AN11
Bus interface
ADCR
ADCSR
ADDRD
ADDRC
ADDRB
ADDRA
10-bit D/A
Vref
Successive approximations
register
AVCC
Internal data bus
φ/2
+
Multiplexer
−
Comparator
φ/4
Control circuit
φ/8
Sample-andhold circuit
φ/16
ADI
interrupt
ADTRG
Legend:
ADCR:
ADCSR:
ADDRA:
ADDRB:
ADDRC:
ADDRD:
Conversion start
trigger from TPU
A/D control register
A/D control/status register
A/D data register A
A/D data register B
A/D data register C
A/D data register D
Figure 17-1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter
Page 682 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
17.1.3
Section 17 A/D Converter
Pin Configuration
Table 17-1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter.
The AVCC and AVSS pins are the power supply pins for the analog block in the A/D converter.
The Vref pin is the A/D conversion reference voltage pin.
The 12 analog input pins are divided into two channel sets and two groups, with analog input pins
0 to 7 (AN0 to AN7) comprising channel set 0, analog input pins 8 to 11 (AN8 to AN11)
comprising channel set 1, analog input pins 0 to 3 and 8 to 11 (AN0 to AN3, AN8 to AN11)
comprising group 0, and analog input pins 4 to 7 (AN4 to AN7) comprising group 1.
Table 17-1 A/D Converter Pins
Pin Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Analog power supply pin
AVCC
Input
Analog block power supply
Analog ground pin
AVSS
Input
Analog block ground and reference voltage
Reference voltage pin
Vref
Input
A/D conversion reference voltage
Channel set 0 (CH3 = 0) group 0 analog inputs
Analog input pin 0
AN0
Input
Analog input pin 1
AN1
Input
Analog input pin 2
AN2
Input
Analog input pin 3
AN3
Input
Analog input pin 4
AN4
Input
Analog input pin 5
AN5
Input
Analog input pin 6
AN6
Input
Analog input pin 7
AN7
Input
Analog input pin 8
AN8
Input
Analog input pin 9
AN9
Input
Analog input pin 10
AN10
Input
Analog input pin 11
AN11
Input
A/D external trigger input
pin
ADTRG
Input
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Channel set 0 (CH3 = 0) group 1 analog inputs
Channel set 1 (CH3 = 1) group 0 analog inputs
External trigger input for starting A/D
conversion
Page 683 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 17 A/D Converter
17.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 17-2 summarizes the registers of the A/D converter.
Table 17-2 A/D Converter Registers
1
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
A/D data register AH
ADDRAH
R
H'00
H'FF90
A/D data register AL
ADDRAL
R
H'00
H'FF91
A/D data register BH
ADDRBH
R
H'00
H'FF92
A/D data register BL
ADDRBL
R
H'00
H'FF93
A/D data register CH
ADDRCH
R
H'00
H'FF94
A/D data register CL
ADDRCL
R
H'00
H'FF95
A/D data register DH
ADDRDH
R
H'00
H'FF96
A/D data register DL
ADDRDL
R
H'00
H'FF97
H'00
H'FF98
*2
A/D control/status register
ADCSR
R/(W)
A/D control register
ADCR
R/W
H'33
H'FF99
Module stop control register A
MSTPCRA
R/W
H'3F
H'FDE8
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Bit 7 can only be written with 0 for flag clearing.
Page 684 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 17 A/D Converter
17.2
Register Descriptions
17.2.1
A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)
Bit
:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 ⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
:
There are four 16-bit read-only ADDR registers, ADDRA to ADDRD, used to store the results of
A/D conversion.
The 10-bit data resulting from A/D conversion is transferred to the ADDR register for the selected
channel and stored there. The upper 8 bits of the converted data are transferred to the upper byte
(bits 15 to 8) of ADDR, and the lower 2 bits are transferred to the lower byte (bits 7 and 6) and
stored. Bits 5 to 0 are always read as 0.
The correspondence between the analog input channels and ADDR registers is shown in
table 17-3.
ADDR can always be read by the CPU. The upper byte can be read directly, but for the lower
byte, data transfer is performed via a temporary register (TEMP). For details, see section 17.3,
Interface to Bus Master.
The ADDR registers are initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop
mode.
Table 17-3 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers
Analog Input Channel
Channel Set 0 (CH3 = 0)
Channel Set 1 (CH3 = 1)
Group 0
Group 1
Group 0
Group 1
A/D Data Register
AN0
AN4
AN8
Setting prohibited
ADDRA
AN1
AN5
AN9
Setting prohibited
ADDRB
AN2
AN6
AN10
Setting prohibited
ADDRC
AN3
AN7
AN11
Setting prohibited
ADDRD
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 685 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 17 A/D Converter
17.2.2
A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADF
ADIE
ADST
SCAN
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written to bit 7, to clear this flag.
ADCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls A/D conversion operations.
ADCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode or module stop mode.
Bit 7—A/D End Flag (ADF): Status flag that indicates the end of A/D conversion.
Bit 7
ADF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
(Initial value)
•
When 0 is written to the ADF flag after reading ADF = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by an ADI interrupt and ADDR is read
[Setting conditions]
•
Single mode: When A/D conversion ends
•
Scan mode:
When A/D conversion ends on all specified channels
Bit 6—A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): Selects enabling or disabling of interrupt (ADI) requests
at the end of A/D conversion.
Bit 6
ADIE
Description
0
A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request disabled
1
A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request enabled
Page 686 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 17 A/D Converter
Bit 5—A/D Start (ADST): Selects starting or stopping on A/D conversion. Holds a value of 1
during A/D conversion.
The ADST bit can be set to 1 by software, a timer conversion start trigger, or the A/D external
trigger input pin (ADTRG).
Bit 5
ADST
Description
0
A/D conversion stopped
1
Single mode: A/D conversion is started. Cleared to 0 automatically when conversion
on the specified channel ends
Scan mode:
(Initial value)
A/D conversion is started. Conversion continues sequentially on the
selected channels until ADST is cleared to 0 by software, a reset, or a
transition to standby mode or module stop mode.
Bit 4—Scan Mode (SCAN): Selects single mode or scan mode as the A/D conversion operating
mode. See section 17.4, Operation, for single mode and scan mode operation. Only set the SCAN
bit while conversion is stopped (ADST = 0).
Bit 4
SCAN
Description
0
Single mode
1
Scan mode
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Channel Select 3 (CH3): Switches the analog input pins assigned to group 0 or group 1.
Setting CH3 to 1 enables AN8 to AN11 to be used instead of AN0 to AN7.
Bit 3
CH3
Description
1
AN8 to AN11 are group 0 analog input pins
0
AN0 to AN3 are group 0 analog input pins, AN4 to AN7 are group 1 analog input pins
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 687 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 17 A/D Converter
Bits 2 to 0—Channel Select 2 to 0 (CH2 to CH0): Together with the SCAN bit, these bits select
the analog input channels.
Only set the input channel while conversion is stopped (ADST = 0).
Channel Selection
Description
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
Single Mode
(SCAN = 0)
Scan Mode
(SCAN = 1)
0
0
0
0
AN0
AN0
1
AN1
AN0, AN1
1
0
AN2
AN0 to AN2
1
AN3
AN0 to AN3
0
AN4
AN4
1
AN5
AN4, AN5
1
0
AN6
AN4 to AN6
1
AN7
AN4 to AN7
0
0
AN8
AN8
1
AN9
AN8, AN9
0
AN10
AN8 to AN10
1
AN11
AN8 to AN11
0
Setting prohibited
Setting prohibited
1
Setting prohibited
Setting prohibited
0
Setting prohibited
Setting prohibited
1
Setting prohibited
Setting prohibited
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Page 688 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
17.2.3
Section 17 A/D Converter
A/D Control Register (ADCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TRGS1
TRGS0
⎯
⎯
CKS1
CKS0
⎯
⎯
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
R/W
R/W
⎯
⎯
R/W
R/W
⎯
⎯
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
ADCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables external triggering of A/D
conversion operations and sets the A/D conversion time.
ADCR is initialized to H'33 by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Timer Trigger Select 1 and 0 (TRGS1, TRGS0): Select enabling or disabling of
the start of A/D conversion by a trigger signal. Only set bits TRGS1 and TRGS0 while conversion
is stopped (ADST = 0).
Bit 7
Bit 6
TRGS1
TRGS0
Description
0
0
A/D conversion start by software is enabled
1
A/D conversion start by TPU conversion start trigger is enabled
0
Setting prohibited
1
A/D conversion start by external trigger pin (ADTRG) is enabled
1
(Initial value)
Bits 5, 4, 1, and 0—Reserved: These bits are reserved; they are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
Bits 3 and 2—Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1, CKS0): These bits select the A/D conversion time.
The conversion time should be changed only when ADST = 0.
Set bits CKS1 and CKS0 to give a conversion time of at least 10 µs.
Bit 3
Bit 2
CKS1
CKS0
Description
0
0
Conversion time = 530 states (max.)
1
Conversion time = 266 states (max.)
0
Conversion time = 134 states (max.)
1
Conversion time = 68 states (max.)
1
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
(Initial value)
Page 689 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 17 A/D Converter
17.2.4
Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
1
MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTPA1 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, A/D converter operation stops at the end of the bus
cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. Registers cannot be read or written to in
module stop mode. For details, see section 23A.5, 23B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRA is initialized to H'3F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized by a
reset and in software standby mode.
Bit 1—Module Stop (MSTPA1): Specifies the A/D converter module stop mode.
Bit 1
MSTPA1
Description
0
A/D converter module stop mode cleared
1
A/D converter module stop mode set
Page 690 of 1458
(Initial value)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
17.3
Section 17 A/D Converter
Interface to Bus Master
ADDRA to ADDRD are 16-bit registers, and the data bus to the bus master is 8 bits wide.
Therefore, in accesses by the bus master, the upper byte is accessed directly, but the lower byte is
accessed via a temporary register (TEMP).
A data read from ADDR is performed as follows. When the upper byte is read, the upper byte
value is transferred to the CPU and the lower byte value is transferred to TEMP. Next, when the
lower byte is read, the TEMP contents are transferred to the CPU.
When reading ADDR, always read the upper byte before the lower byte. It is possible to read only
the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained.
Figure 17-2 shows the data flow for ADDR access.
Upper byte read
Bus master
(H'AA)
Module data bus
Bus interface
TEMP
(H'40)
ADDRnH
(H'AA)
ADDRnL
(H'40)
(n = A to D)
Lower byte read
Bus master
(H'40)
Module data bus
Bus interface
TEMP
(H'40)
ADDRnH
(H'AA)
ADDRnL
(H'40)
(n = A to D)
Figure 17-2 ADDR Access Operation (Reading H'AA40)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 691 of 1458
Section 17 A/D Converter
17.4
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Operation
The A/D converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. It has two
operating modes: single mode and scan mode.
17.4.1
Single Mode (SCAN = 0)
Single mode is selected when A/D conversion is to be performed on a single channel only. A/D
conversion is started when the ADST bit is set to 1, according to the software or external trigger
input. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion, and is automatically cleared to 0
when conversion ends.
On completion of conversion, the ADF flag is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an
ADI interrupt request is generated. The ADF flag is cleared by writing 0 after reading ADCSR.
When the operating mode or analog input channel must be changed during analog conversion, to
prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After
making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1 to start A/D conversion again. The ADST bit
can be set at the same time as the operating mode or input channel is changed.
Typical operations when channel 1 (AN1) is selected in single mode are described next. Figure
17-3 shows a timing diagram for this example.
[1] Single mode is selected (SCAN = 0), input channel AN1 is selected (CH3 = 0, CH2 = 0,
CH1 = 0, CH0 = 1), the A/D interrupt is enabled (ADIE = 1), and A/D conversion is started
(ADST = 1).
[2] When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to ADDRB. At the same time the
ADF flag is set to 1, the ADST bit is cleared to 0, and the A/D converter becomes idle.
[3] Since ADF = 1 and ADIE = 1, an ADI interrupt is requested.
[4] The A/D interrupt handling routine starts.
[5] The routine reads ADCSR, then writes 0 to the ADF flag.
[6] The routine reads and processes the connection result (ADDRB).
[7] Execution of the A/D interrupt handling routine ends. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1,
A/D conversion starts again and steps [2] to [7] are repeated.
Page 692 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 17 A/D Converter
Set*
ADIE
ADST
A/D
conversion
starts
Set*
Set*
Clear*
Clear*
ADF
State of channel 0 (AN0)
Idle
State of channel 1 (AN1)
Idle
State of channel 2 (AN2)
Idle
State of channel 3 (AN3)
Idle
A/D conversion 1
Idle
A/D conversion 2
Idle
ADDRA
ADDRB
Read conversion result
A/D conversion result 1
Read conversion result
A/D conversion result 2
ADDRC
ADDRD
Note: * Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software.
Figure 17-3 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Single Mode, Channel 1 Selected)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 693 of 1458
Section 17 A/D Converter
17.4.2
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Scan Mode (SCAN = 1)
Scan mode is useful for monitoring analog inputs in a group of one or more channels. When the
ADST bit is set to 1 by a software, timer or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the
first channel in the group (AN0). When two or more channels are selected, after conversion of the
first channel ends, conversion of the second channel (AN1) starts immediately. A/D conversion
continues cyclically on the selected channels until the ADST bit is cleared to 0. The conversion
results are transferred for storage into the ADDR registers corresponding to the channels.
When the operating mode or analog input channel must be changed during analog conversion, to
prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After
making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1 to start A/D conversion again from the first
channel (AN0). The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or input channel
is changed.
Typical operations when three channels (AN0 to AN2) are selected in scan mode are described
next. Figure 17-4 shows a timing diagram for this example.
[1] Scan mode is selected (SCAN = 1), channel set 0 is selected (CH3 = 0), scan group 0 is
selected (CH2 = 0), analog input channels AN0 to AN2 are selected (CH1 = 1, CH0 = 0), and
A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1)
[2] When A/D conversion of the first channel (AN0) is completed, the result is transferred to
ADDRA. Next, conversion of the second channel (AN1) starts automatically.
[3] Conversion proceeds in the same way through the third channel (AN2).
[4] When conversion of all the selected channels (AN0 to AN2) is completed, the ADF flag is set
to 1 and conversion of the first channel (AN0) starts again. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this
time, an ADI interrupt is requested after A/D conversion ends.
[5] Steps [2] to [4] are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is
cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion
starts again from the first channel (AN0).
Page 694 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 17 A/D Converter
Continuous A/D conversion execution
Clear*1
Set*1
ADST
Clear*1
ADF
A/D conversion time
State of channel 0 (AN0)
Idle
State of channel 1 (AN1)
Idle
State of channel 2 (AN2)
Idle
A/D conversion 1
Idle
A/D conversion 2
Idle
Idle
A/D conversion 4
A/D conversion 5 *2
Idle
A/D conversion 3
State of channel 3 (AN3)
Idle
Idle
Transfer
ADDRA
A/D conversion result 1
ADDRB
A/D conversion result 4
A/D conversion result 2
ADDRC
A/D conversion result 3
ADDRD
Notes: 1. Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software.
2. Data currently being converted is ignored.
Figure 17-4 Example of A/D Converter Operation
(Scan Mode, 3 Channels AN0 to AN2 Selected)
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 695 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 17 A/D Converter
17.4.3
Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time
The A/D converter has an on-chip sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog
input at a time tD after the ADST bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. Figure 17-5 shows the A/D
conversion timing. Table 17-4 indicates the A/D conversion time.
As indicated in figure 17-5, the A/D conversion time includes tD and the input sampling time. The
length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion
time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 17-4.
In scan mode, the values given in table 17-4 apply to the first conversion time. The values given in
table 17-5 apply to the second and subsequent conversions. In both cases, set bits CKS1 and CKS0
in ADCR to give a conversion time of at least 10 µs.
(1)
φ
Address
(2)
Write signal
Input sampling
timing
ADF
tD
t SPL
t CONV
Legend:
(1):
ADCSR write cycle
(2):
ADCSR address
A/D conversion start delay
tD:
tSPL: Input sampling time
tCONV: A/D conversion time
Figure 17-5 A/D Conversion Timing
Page 696 of 1458
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 17 A/D Converter
Table 17-4 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)
CKS1 = 0
CKS0 = 0
Item
CKS1 = 0
CKS0 = 1
CKS0 = 0
CKS0 = 1
Symbol Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
A/D conversion start delay tD
18
—
33
10
—
17
6
—
9
4
—
5
Input sampling time
tSPL
—
127 —
—
63
—
—
31
—
—
15
—
A/D conversion time
tCONV
515 —
134 67
—
68
530 259 —
266 131 —
Note: Values in the table are the number of states.
Table 17-5 A/D Conversion Time (Scan Mode)
CKS1
CKS0
Conversion Time (State)
0
0
512 (Fixed)
1
256 (Fixed)
0
128 (Fixed)
1
64 (Fixed)
1
17.4.4
External Trigger Input Timing
A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When the TRGS1 and TRGS0 bits are set to 11 in
ADCR, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A falling edge at the ADTRG pin sets
the ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan
modes, are the same as if the ADST bit has been set to 1 by software. Figure 17-6 shows the
timing.
REJ09B0103-0800 Rev. 8.00
May 28, 2010
Page 697 of 1458
H8S/2639, H8S/2638, H8S/2636,
H8S/2630, H8S/2635 Group
Section 17 A/D Converter
φ
ADTRG
Internal trigger signal
ADST
A/D conversion
Figure 17-6 External Trigger Input Timing
17.5
Interrupts
The A/D converter generates an A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) at the end of A/D conversion.
ADI interrupt requests can be enabled or disabled by means of the ADIE bit in ADCSR.
The DTC can be activated by an ADI interrupt. Having the converted data read by the DTC in
response to an ADI interrupt enables continuous conversion to be achieved without imposing a
load on software.
The A/D converter interrupt source is shown in table 17-6.
Table 17-6 A/D Converter Interrupt Source
Interrupt Source
Descriptio